This is a modern-English version of How to build a house : an architectural novelette, originally written by Viollet-le-Duc, Eugène-Emmanuel. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


HOW TO BUILD A HOUSE.


THE OLD CHÂTEAU.

THE OLD CASTLE.


HOW TO BUILD A HOUSE:

AN ARCHITECTURAL NOVELETTE.

BY
E. VIOLLET-LE-DUC.

TRANSLATED BY BENJAMIN BUCKNALL,
ARCHITECT

HOW TO BUILD A HOUSE:

AN ARCHITECTURAL NOVELETTE.

BY
E. VIOLLET-LE-DUC.

TRANSLATED BY BENJAMIN BUCKNALL,
ARCHITECT


Two men talking



LONDON:
SAMPSON LOW, MARSTON, LOW, AND SEARLE,
CROWN BUILDINGS, 188, FLEET STREET.
1874.

[All Rights Reserved.]



LONDON:
SAMPSON LOW, MARSTON, LOW, AND SEARLE,
Crown Buildings, 188 Fleet Street.
1874.

All rights reserved.


LONDON
R. CLAY, SONS, AND TAYLOR, PRINTERS,
BREAD STREET HILL.

LONDON
R. CLAY, SONS, AND TAYLOR, PRINTERS,
BREAD STREET HILL.


[Pg vii]

[Pg vii]

TRANSLATOR’S NOTE.

Among the voluminous and invaluable published works of M. Viollet-le-Duc, none perhaps will have greater interest for the amateur or for the practical architect than the “Histoire d’une Maison.” Of all the architectural problems of the day there is not one of greater importance or difficulty than that of building a house which shall fulfil the various needs and conditions of a modern dwelling; and the author has brought the results of a long course of study, observation, and experience, to bear upon this problem in a most practically instructive and fascinating shape. A lively narrative introduces the reader to the minute and thorough discussion of every stage of the processes involved, so that his attention is agreeably relieved; and each step is illustrated by plates and diagrams, which render the details intelligible even to the least informed student.

Among the extensive and invaluable published works of M. Viollet-le-Duc, none are likely to be of greater interest to amateurs or practical architects than “Histoire d’une Maison.” Of all the architectural challenges today, none is more significant or difficult than constructing a house that meets the various needs and conditions of modern living. The author has applied the insights from a lengthy period of study, observation, and experience to tackle this issue in a highly practical and engaging way. An engaging narrative guides the reader through a detailed and thorough examination of each stage of the processes involved, providing a welcome break to maintain interest; and each step is accompanied by illustrations and diagrams that make the details clear, even for the least experienced student.

As the scene of this architectural novelette is laid in France, there is much both in the general remarks and in the arrangements of the building described which only applies to the social conditions and requirements of the French. But the value of the principles laid down and[Pg viii] the practical instruction conveyed is not thereby materially lessened, since every page of the book exhibits important truths or excellent methods, which are of general application. By following out those principles it would be easy to obtain the same admirable adaptation of arrangement, soundness of construction, and charm of design for an English house, which the author has so ably laid down and fully illustrated in reference to its French counterpart.

Since this architectural novelette takes place in France, much of the commentary and the building's layout pertains specifically to the social conditions and needs of the French. However, the significance of the principles presented and the practical advice given isn't diminished, as each page of the book contains important insights or effective methods that are widely applicable. By applying these principles, one could easily achieve the same remarkable arrangement, strong construction, and appealing design in an English home, just as the author has skillfully outlined and illustrated in relation to its French equivalent.

It may be interesting to the reader to know that the “Histoire d’une Maison” was written and illustrated by M. Viollet-le-Duc during the evenings of two months—July and August—of last year (1873), which were spent by him in the Alps for the purpose of surveying and mapping for the French Government the whole of the French Alps—a task accomplished by him, alone and unassisted, with minute accuracy and beauty of delineation, and in a marvellously brief time.

It might interest the reader to know that the "Histoire d’une Maison" was written and illustrated by M. Viollet-le-Duc during the evenings of July and August of last year (1873). He spent that time in the Alps to survey and map the entire French Alps for the French Government—a task he accomplished alone and unassisted, with remarkable accuracy and beauty, and in an impressively short time.

Benjamin Bucknall,
Architect.

Benjamin Bucknall,
Architect.

Oystermouth, Swansea,
April 1st, 1874.

Oystermouth, Swansea,
*April 1, 1874*.


[Pg ix]

[Pg ix]

CONTENTS.

CHAPTER I.
PAGE
PAUL GETS AN IDEA 1

CHAPTER II.
WITH A LITTLE HELP, PAUL’S IDEA IS DEVELOPED 13

CHAPTER III.
THE TREE OF KNOWLEDGE 26

CHAPTER IV.
PAUL’S IDEAS RESPECTING ART, AND HOW THEY WERE MODIFIED 31

CHAPTER V.
PAUL PURSUES A COURSE OF STUDY IN PRACTICAL ARCHITECTURE 40

CHAPTER VI.
HOW PAUL IS LED TO RECOGNIZE CERTAIN DISTINCTIONS BETWEEN ETHICS AND ARCHITECTURE 60

CHAPTER VII.
SETTING OUT THE FOUNDATIONS OF THE HOUSE, AND OPERATIONS ON THE GROUND 71[Pg x]

CHAPTER VIII.
PAUL REFLECTS 81

CHAPTER IX.
PAUL, CLERK OF THE WORKS 88

CHAPTER X.
PAUL BEGINS TO UNDERSTAND 96

CHAPTER XI.
THE BUILDING IN ELEVATION 106

CHAPTER XII.
OBSERVATIONS ADDRESSED TO EUGÈNE BY PAUL, AND THE REPLIES MADE TO THEM 115

CHAPTER XIII.
THE VISIT TO THE BUILDING 121

CHAPTER XIV.
PAUL FEELS THE NECESSITY OF IMPROVING HIMSELF IN THE ART OF DRAWING 126

CHAPTER XV.
CONSIDERATION OF THE STAIRCASES 133

CHAPTER XVI.
THE CRITIC 137[Pg xi]

CHAPTER XVII.
PAUL INQUIRES WHAT ARCHITECTURE IS 146

CHAPTER XVIII.
THEORETICAL STUDIES 156

CHAPTER XIX.
THEORETICAL STUDIES (continued) 172

CHAPTER XX.
STUDIES INTERRUPTED 183

CHAPTER XXI.
BUILDING RECOMMENCED—THE TIMBER WORK 189

CHAPTER XXII.
THE CHIMNEYS 204

CHAPTER XXIII.
THE CANTINE 211

CHAPTER XXIV.
THE JOINER’S WORK 214

CHAPTER XXV.
WHAT PAUL LEARNT AT CHATEAUROUX 222[Pg xii]

CHAPTER XXVI.
THE SLATING AND PLUMBING 230

CHAPTER XXVII.
ORDER IN FINISHING THE WORK 241

CHAPTER XXVIII.
THE HOUSE-WARMING 247

[Pg xiii]

[Pg xiii]

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.

FIG PAGE
THE OLD CHÂTEAU Frontispiece.
THE OLD CELLAR Vignette.
1. PLAN OF THE GROUND FLOOR 22
2. PLAN OF THE FIRST FLOOR 24
3. ROOF PLAN 33
4. PLAN OF THE SECOND FLOOR 36
5. THE ENTRANCE FRONT 37
6. EXAMPLE OF A BUILDING SITE 46
7. DITTO 47
8. DITTO 49
9. SECTION OF CELLAR VAULT 53
10. THE OLD CELLAR 54
11. THE OLD CELLAR STAIRS 56
12. THE BULGED WALLS 58
13. CONSTRUCTION OF A ROOF PRINCIPAL 62
14. CAMBERED TIMBER 67
15. THE OLD ROOF 68
16. COUPLED TIMBERS 69
17. DITTO 69
18. TIMBER CLIPS 70
19. SETTING OUT THE BUILDING 73[Pg xiv]
20. USE OF THE THEODOLITE 79
21. THE CELLAR PLAN 89
22. DEPOSIT OF EXCAVATED SOIL 92
23. FOUNDATION STONES 94
24. SECTION OF SEWER 95
25. CENTERING OF CELLAR VAULT 97
26. SECTION OF CELLAR AIR-HOLES 99
27. RESPECTIVE VIEW OF DITTO 100
28. SPRING OF THE CELLAR VAULTING 101
29. THE GARDEN FRONT 103
30. THE QUOIN STONES 107
31. THE WINDOW CASING 108
32. THE CEILINGS 110
33. METHOD OF TRIMMING THE FLOORS 112
34. PERSPECTIVE OF DITTO 112
35. VIEW OF THE BUILDING OPERATIONS 120
36. HOLLOW BEDDED STONES 123
37. DRAWING MODELS 128
38. DITTO 129
39. PLANS AND SECTION OF THE PRINCIPAL STAIRS 132
40. THE STAIRCASE STRING 135
41. STEP OF WINDING STAIRS 136
42. SECTION OF THE SIDE WALLS, WITH DETAILS 163
43. AN ORIEL WINDOW 166
44. BAY WINDOW OF BILLIARD-ROOM 170
45. DETAIL OF CORNICE, STRING COURSE, ETC. 176
46. TRANSVERSE SECTION OF THE HOUSE 191
47. PLAN OF THE ROOF SUPPORTS 192[Pg xv]
48. SECTION OF THE ROOF 194
49. THE STAIRCASE ROOF 196
50. FLAWS IN TIMBER 198
51. COUPLED BEAMS 199
52. SECTION OF THE FLOOR JOISTS 201
53. DITTO 201
54. SECTION OF THE FLOOR BEAMS 201
55. THE DORMER WINDOWS 203
56. THE DOORS 216
57. DETAILS OF DITTO 217
58. THE CASEMENTS 218
59. DETAILS OF DITTO 219
60. THE METHOD OF SLATING 233
61. DETAILS OF THE PLUMBER’S WORK 235
62. THE NEW HOUSE 258

[Pg 1]

[Pg 1]

HOW TO BUILD A HOUSE.

HOW TO BUILD A HOUSE.

CHAPTER I.
PAUL GETS AN IDEA.

Who is happier than the young student from the Lyceum when he comes home for the summer vacation, bringing with him proofs of a well-spent year? Everything smiles upon him. The sky is serene, the country wears its loveliest dress, and the fruit is ripe.

Who is happier than the young student from the Lyceum when he comes home for summer vacation, bringing with him evidence of a year well spent? Everything is cheerful for him. The sky is clear, the countryside looks its best, and the fruit is ripe.

Everyone congratulates him on his success, and predicts for him, after his six weeks’ repose, an energetic recommencement of congenial labour, crowned by a brilliant career in the future.

Everyone congratulates him on his success and predicts that after his six weeks of rest, he will energetically return to work that suits him, leading to a bright future.

Yes, our student is a happy fellow; the air seems preternaturally light, the sun shines more brightly, and the meadows wear a richer green. Even the unwelcome rain is laden with perfume.

Yes, our student is a cheerful guy; the air feels unusually light, the sun shines more brightly, and the meadows are a richer green. Even the uninvited rain is filled with fragrance.

As soon as the morning breaks he hastens to revisit his favourite haunts in the park—the stream, the lake, and the farm—to see the horses, the boat, and the plantations.

As soon as morning arrives, he rushes to revisit his favorite spots in the park—the stream, the lake, and the farm—to check out the horses, the boat, and the plants.

He chats with the farmer’s wife, who smilingly presents him with a nice galette, hot from the oven. He walks with the gamekeeper, who tells him all the news of the neighbourhood[Pg 2] while going his rounds. The sound of the sheep bells is musical—nay, even the monotonous song of the shepherd-boy, now grown a tall fellow, and aspiring to the full dignity of shepherd.

He chats with the farmer’s wife, who happily hands him a nice galette, fresh out of the oven. He walks with the gamekeeper, who shares all the neighborhood news while making his rounds. The sound of the sheep bells is melodic—even the repetitive song of the shepherd boy, now a tall young man, aiming for the full respect of being a shepherd.[Pg 2]

It is indeed a happy time. But in a few days the shade of the noble trees, the lovely scenery, the long walks, the gamekeeper’s stories, and even the boating, become wearisome, unless some congenial occupation presents itself to occupy the mind. It is the privilege of old age alone to delight in memories, and always to find fresh pleasure in the contemplation of woods and fields.

It’s definitely a happy time. But after a few days, the shade of the beautiful trees, the lovely views, the long walks, the gamekeeper’s stories, and even the boating can become tiresome unless there’s something interesting to keep the mind engaged. Only old age has the privilege of enjoying memories and always finding new joy in thinking about woods and fields.

The stores of memory are soon exhausted by youth; and quiet meditation is not to its taste.

The stores of memory are quickly used up by youth; and quiet thinking isn’t appealing to it.

Monsieur Paul—a lively youth of sixteen—did not, perhaps, indulge in these reflections in the abstract; but as a matter of fact, after a week passed at the residence of his father, who cultivated his considerable estate in the province of Berry, he had almost exhausted the stock of impressions which the return to the paternal domain had excited. During the long scholastic year how many projects had he not formed for the next vacation! Six weeks seemed too short a time for their accomplishment. How many things had he to see again; how much to say and do. Yet in eight days all had been seen, said, and done.

Monsieur Paul—a lively sixteen-year-old—didn’t really reflect on these thoughts in the abstract; but in reality, after spending a week at his father’s home, where he managed a large estate in the Berry region, he had nearly run out of new experiences that his return to the family estate had sparked. During the long school year, he had come up with so many plans for the next vacation! Six weeks felt way too short to make them happen. There were so many things he wanted to see again, so much to say and do. Yet in just eight days, everything had already been seen, said, and done.

Besides, his eldest sister, who had been lately married, had set out on a long journey with her husband; and as to Lucy, the youngest, she seemed too much occupied with her doll and its wardrobe to take an interest in the thinkings and doings of her respected brother.

Besides, his oldest sister, who had just recently gotten married, had gone on a long trip with her husband; and as for Lucy, the youngest, she seemed too busy with her doll and its outfits to care about the thoughts and actions of her esteemed brother.

It had rained all day; and the farm, visited by M. Paul for the fifth time, had presented a sombre and mournful aspect. The fowls crouching under the walls had a pensive look; and even the ducks were dabbling in the mud in melancholy silence. The gamekeeper had indeed taken[Pg 3] M. Paul with him on a hare-hunting expedition, but they had returned without success, and pretty well soaked. To his disappointment, M. Paul had found the keeper’s stories rather long and diffuse—not the less so as they were being repeated for the third time with few variations. Moreover, the veterinary surgeon had announced that morning, to M. Paul’s vexation, that his pony had caught a cold and must not quit the stable for a week. The paper had been read after dinner, but M. Paul was little attracted by its politics, and the miscellaneous intelligence was deplorably uninteresting.

It had rained all day, and the farm, visited by M. Paul for the fifth time, looked gloomy and sad. The chickens huddled under the walls with a thoughtful expression, and even the ducks were splashing in the mud in quiet despair. The gamekeeper had taken M. Paul on a hare-hunting trip, but they returned empty-handed and pretty soaked. Disappointingly, M. Paul found the keeper’s stories a bit long-winded, especially since they were being repeated for the third time with hardly any changes. Additionally, the vet had informed M. Paul that morning, much to his annoyance, that his pony had caught a cold and couldn’t leave the stable for a week. The news had been read after dinner, but M. Paul was not very interested in its politics, and the general updates were terribly dull.

Monsieur de Gandelau (Paul’s father) was too much taken up with agricultural matters, and perhaps also with the treatment of his gout, to seek to relieve the ennui of which his son was the victim; and Madame de Gandelau, still suffering from the depression caused by her eldest daughter’s departure, was working with a kind of desperation at a piece of tapestry, whose destination was a mystery to all about her, and perhaps even to the person who was so laboriously adding stitch to stitch.

Monsieur de Gandelau (Paul’s father) was too focused on farming issues, and maybe also on dealing with his gout, to help his son, who was struggling with boredom. Madame de Gandelau, still feeling down from her oldest daughter’s departure, was working desperately on a piece of tapestry, the purpose of which was a mystery to everyone around her, and maybe even to the person diligently stitching away.

“You have had a letter from Marie?” said M. de Gandelau, putting down the newspaper.

“You got a letter from Marie?” said M. de Gandelau, setting down the newspaper.

“Yes, my dear, this evening. They are enjoying themselves excessively; the weather has been charming, and they have had the most delightful excursions in the Oberland. They are on the point of passing the Simplon for Italy. Marie will write to me from Baveno, Hôtel de——”

“Yes, my dear, this evening. They are having a great time; the weather has been beautiful, and they’ve had the most enjoyable trips in the Oberland. They are about to cross the Simplon into Italy. Marie will write to me from Baveno, Hôtel de——”

“Capital! and how are they?”

"Capital! How are they?"

“Quite well.”

"Pretty good."

“And they still mean to go to Constantinople on that important business?”

“And they still plan to go to Constantinople for that important business?”

“Yes, N—— has had a letter urging him to go; they will take Italy only en route. They hope to embark at Naples in a month, at latest. But Marie tells me they[Pg 4] cannot return within a year. She does not appear to think much of so long an absence, but it gives me a pang which no arguments for its necessity can alleviate.”

“Yes, N—— has received a letter urging him to go; they will only pass through Italy en route. They hope to set sail from Naples in a month at the latest. But Marie tells me they[Pg 4] cannot come back for a year. She doesn’t seem to think much of such a long absence, but it gives me a feeling of sadness that no reasoning about its necessity can ease.”

“Ah! well, but do you expect our children to marry for our advantage? And was it not settled that it should be so? They say affection seldom stands the test of living constantly together on a journey. N—— is a good, noble fellow, hard-working, and a little ambitious, which is no bad thing. Marie loves him; she has intelligence and good health. They will pass the trial successfully, I have not a doubt, and will return to us well-tried companions for life, thoroughly acquainted with each other, and having learned how to further and to suffice for one another’s happiness; and with that spice of independence which is so necessary for preserving a good understanding with one’s neighbours.”

“Ah! Well, do you really expect our kids to marry for our benefit? Wasn’t it agreed that it should be that way? They say love rarely survives the test of being together all the time on a journey. N—— is a good, decent guy, hardworking, and a bit ambitious, which isn’t a bad thing. Marie loves him; she’s intelligent and healthy. They’ll get through this trial just fine, I have no doubt, and will come back to us as well-tested companions for life, fully aware of each other and having learned how to support each other’s happiness; plus, with that bit of independence that’s so important for maintaining a good relationship with one’s neighbors.”

“I daresay you are right, my dear; but this long absence is not the less painful to me, and this year will seem a long one. I shall certainly be glad when I begin to prepare their rooms for them here, and have only a few days to reckon till I may hope to see them again.”

“I think you’re right, my dear; but this long absence is still painful for me, and this year will feel like a long one. I’ll definitely be glad when I start getting their rooms ready for them here, and I only have a few days to count until I can hope to see them again.”

“Certainly, certainly; and I too shall be delighted to see them at home. Paul, too! But as it is certain they will be a year away, it would be a fine opportunity for resuming my plan.”

“Of course, of course; and I’ll be happy to see them at home too. Paul, right? But since they’ll definitely be away for a year, it’s a great chance to pick up my plan again.”

“What, my dear? Do you mean building the house you were thinking of, on that bit of land which is part of Marie’s dowry? I beg of you to do nothing of the kind. We have quite enough room for them here, and for their children, if they have any. And, after this long absence, it will be a new trial to me to have Marie settled at a distance from us—not to have her near me. Besides, her husband cannot stay three-quarters of a year in the country. His engagements do not allow of it. Marie would then be[Pg 5] alone. What can she do in a house all to herself, with her husband absent?”

“What, my dear? Are you talking about building the house you were thinking about on that piece of land that’s part of Marie’s dowry? Please don’t do that. We have plenty of space for them here, and for their kids if they decide to have any. After being gone for so long, it would be really hard for me to have Marie living far away—not having her close by. Plus, her husband can’t stay in the country for more than three-quarters of a year. His obligations won’t allow it. Then Marie would be[Pg 5] alone. What is she supposed to do in a whole house by herself while her husband is away?”

“She will do, my love, as you did yourself, when my business called me—as it did too often—away from home; yet we were young then. She will have her house to see after; she will get into the way of managing her property; she will have occupation and responsibilities; and so she will be satisfied with herself and with the result of her thought and work. Believe me, I have seen the warmest family affections weakened and destroyed by the habit of married children living with their parents. The wife likes to be mistress in her own house; and this is a sound and just feeling; we should not run counter to it. A woman who has been wisely educated, having a house to look after and the responsibility and independence which responsibility in every form brings with it, is more capable of maintaining her own dignity of character than one who has been kept all her life in a state of tutelage. Marie would be very comfortable here, very happy to be with us, and her husband would be not less satisfied in knowing that she was with us; but she would not have a home of her own. An unmarried daughter is only in her place when with her mother; but a wife is only in her place in her own house. A married woman in her mother’s house takes her place only as a guest. And even if we suppose no mutual irritation to arise from this life in common—and this can hardly fail to arise—it is certain that indifference to practical interests, nonchalance, and even ennui, and all the dangers thence ensuing, are sure to be caused by it.

“She will do, my love, just like you did when my work—too often—took me away from home; but we were young then. She’ll have her own house to manage; she’ll learn how to take care of her property; she’ll have things to occupy her time and responsibilities; and that will make her feel good about herself and the results of her efforts. Trust me, I’ve seen the closest family bonds get weakened and destroyed by married children living with their parents. Wives want to be in charge of their own homes, and that’s a natural and right feeling; we shouldn’t go against it. A woman who has been educated well, who has a home to manage and the independence that comes with responsibility, is far better at maintaining her dignity than someone who has been kept under someone else's control her whole life. Marie would be very comfortable here, very happy being with us, and her husband would also feel good knowing she was with us; but she wouldn’t have a home of her own. An unmarried daughter is only truly at home when she’s with her mother; but a wife is only truly at home in her own house. A married woman in her mother’s house is there only as a guest. And even if we assume no conflicts will arise from this shared living situation—and it’s hard to believe they wouldn’t— it’s certain that a lack of interest in practical matters, indifference, and even ennui, along with all the dangers that come with that, will definitely occur.”

“You have brought up your daughter too well for her not to be ardently desirous of fulfilling all her duties; you have always shown her an example of activity too conspicuous for her not to wish to follow it. Let us, then, afford her the means of doing so. Will you not be better pleased to see her managing her own house, and delighted[Pg 6] to entertain us there, than to have her here incessantly at your elbow, with nothing to do; a judge, silent and respectful, if you like, but still a judge, of all your ways and doings? Do you think that her husband, when he can snatch a few moments from business, will enjoy as much pleasure in finding her constantly here, as he will experience at seeing her in her own house, delighted to show him all she has done during his absence; engaged in rendering their common abode more and more agreeable and convenient from day to day? If you reflect, you will observe that those who in our day have given, though in high social position, the most occasion for scandal, have been, for the most part, women whose early married life was passed thus, without a home of their own, leading that nondescript life which is neither that of the daughter nor the mistress of the house—the responsible housekeeper, to call things by their right names.”

“You’ve raised your daughter so well that she’s naturally eager to take on her responsibilities; you’ve always set a clear example of hard work for her to want to follow. So, let’s give her the opportunity to do that. Wouldn’t you prefer to see her managing her own home and happily welcoming us there, instead of having her here constantly at your side with nothing to do? She would be a respectful and silent observer, if you want, but still judging all your choices and actions. Do you really think her husband will take as much pleasure in finding her here all the time as he would in seeing her in their own home, thrilled to show him everything she’s accomplished while he was away, dedicated to making their shared space more enjoyable and comfortable every day? If you think about it, you’ll notice that those in high society who have caused the most scandals these days are often women whose early married life was spent this way, without a home of their own, living an ambiguous life that is neither that of a daughter nor a mistress of the house—the responsible housekeeper, to put it plainly.”

Some tears had moistened Madame de Gandelau’s embroidery.

Some tears had dampened Madame de Gandelau’s embroidery.

“You are right again, my dear,” said she, pressing her husband’s hand; “your plan is just and reasonable.”

“You're right again, my dear,” she said, squeezing her husband's hand. “Your plan is fair and makes sense.”

Paul, though turning over the leaves of an illustrated periodical, had not lost a word of this conversation. The idea of seeing a house built for his eldest sister was very agreeable to him. Already, to his youthful imagination, this house in the future seemed, as compared with the old family mansion, a fairy palace, elegant and splendid, full of light and gaiety.

Paul, while flipping through the pages of a magazine, didn't miss a single word of their conversation. The thought of having a house built for his oldest sister really appealed to him. Already, in his youthful imagination, this future house felt like a fairy tale palace compared to the old family home—elegant and magnificent, full of light and cheer.

It must be confessed that M. de Gandelau’s habitation had nothing to charm the eyes. Enlarged by successive additions, two long wings of gloomy aspect were clumsily patched on to the main body,—formerly a castle, two towers of which, dismantled and crowned by low roofs, flanked the angles. Between the two wings and this[Pg 7] main building, there extended a courtyard, always damp, enclosed by old iron railings, and the remains of a moat now converted into a kitchen garden. A third wing, the prolongation of the old castellated building, erected by M. de Gandelau soon after his marriage, contained the private apartments of the family—the most attractive part of the château. The drawing and dining rooms, the billiard-room, and M. de Gandelau’s study formed part of the old main building. As to the two parallel wings, they contained rooms opening into irregular passages, which, not being all on a level, were somewhat perilous to unwary feet.

It has to be admitted that M. de Gandelau’s home was not visually appealing. It had been expanded with two long, gloomy wings awkwardly added to the original structure—once a castle, which had two towers that were dismantled and topped with low roofs at the corners. Between the wings and the main building, there was a damp courtyard surrounded by old iron railings and the remnants of a moat that had been turned into a kitchen garden. A third wing, an extension of the old castle built by M. de Gandelau soon after his marriage, held the family’s private living spaces—the most charming part of the château. The drawing and dining rooms, the billiard room, and M. de Gandelau’s study were part of the main building. The two parallel wings had rooms that opened into uneven hallways, which, with steps at various levels, could be a bit hazardous for those who weren’t careful.

Next morning, Paul, going to inquire how his pony was, met old Master Branchu coming into the yard with a little cart full of pieces of wood, bags of plaster, and tools.

Next morning, Paul, on his way to check on his pony, ran into old Master Branchu who was coming into the yard with a small cart loaded with pieces of wood, bags of plaster, and tools.

“What are you going to do with that, Master Branchu?”

“What are you going to do with that, Master Branchu?”

“I am going to mend the pigeon-house, Monsieur Paul.”

“I’m going to fix the pigeonhouse, Monsieur Paul.”

“How I should like to help you!”

“How I would love to help you!”

“No, Monsieur Paul, you would dirty your clothes; you might hurt yourself; it is not your business. But you may see us work, if you like.”

“No, Mr. Paul, you'll get your clothes dirty; you might hurt yourself; it's not your concern. But you can watch us work if you'd like.”

“It must be a capital amusement to build!”

“It must be a great pleasure to build!”

“As to amusement, it’s no amusement; yet it isn’t so disagreeable neither, when you have to work for a good gentleman like your father; when you have your pay regular, and a bottle of wine when it’s hot; and when the people you work for do not grudge you what’s reasonable—that’s comfortable. You do your work, and pick up your tools at the end of the day with a merry heart. But when you have to do with close-fisted people, it’s a miserable business, for you must pay for what you have to work with. This plaster in the cart, and the bricks,[Pg 8] and so on, cost money of course. And if you can’t get paid yourself, you must find money somewhere, and get into no end of trouble. But I must be off; there’s my lad waiting for me.”

“As for fun, it’s not really fun; but it’s not too bad either when you’re working for a good guy like your dad; when you get paid regularly, and have a bottle of wine when it’s hot; and when the people you work for don’t mind giving you what’s fair—that’s nice. You get your work done and pack up your tools at the end of the day feeling good. But when you have to deal with stingy people, it’s a terrible situation because you have to pay for your supplies. This plaster in the cart, and the bricks, [Pg 8] and so on, cost money, of course. And if you don’t get paid yourself, you have to find cash somewhere, which just gets you into a ton of trouble. But I need to go; my kid is waiting for me.”

“Could you build a large house, Master Branchu?”

“Can you build a big house, Master Branchu?”

“I should think so, Master Paul. Why, I built the mayor’s, which is big enough in all conscience!”

"I would think so, Master Paul. After all, I built the mayor's house, which is huge, to say the least!"

Meantime, Paul no longer finds the hours hang heavily, as they did the day before; he has got an idea.

Meantime, Paul no longer feels like the hours drag on like they did the day before; he has come up with an idea.

This house in prospect for his sister has seized on his imagination; he figures it to himself sometimes as a palace, sometimes as a turreted manor-house of the old style, sometimes as a Swiss cottage, covered with ivy and clematis, with innumerable carved balconies. He has a grown-up cousin who is an architect; he has often seen him at work at a drawing-board; under his hand buildings rose as by enchantment. It did not appear very difficult work. His cousin Eugène has the necessary instruments in the room he occupies when he comes to the château. Paul will try to put on paper one of those plans of which his imagination has given him a glimpse. But there is a difficulty at the outset. He must know what would suit his sister best; a baronial castle, with towers and battlements, a Swiss cottage, or an Italian villa. If it is to take her by surprise, the surprise must be at any rate an agreeable one. After a good hour’s meditation, M. Paul thinks, and with some reason, that he ought to go and consult his father.

This house he’s imagining for his sister has captured his thoughts; he sometimes pictures it as a palace, other times as an old-style manor with turrets, or even as a charming Swiss cottage covered in ivy and clematis, with lots of intricately carved balconies. He has a cousin who’s an architect and he’s often seen him working at a drawing board; buildings seemed to magically rise under his hands. It didn’t look too difficult. His cousin Eugène has all the tools he needs in the room he stays in when he visits the château. Paul wants to sketch one of those designs that his imagination has shown him. But there’s a problem right from the start. He needs to figure out what would suit his sister best: a grand castle with towers and battlements, a Swiss cottage, or an Italian villa. If he wants it to surprise her, it has to be a pleasant surprise at the very least. After thinking it over for a good hour, M. Paul concludes, and not without reason, that he should go consult his father.

“Oh, oh! you are in a great hurry,” said his father, after Paul’s first words. “But we are not quite so far advanced as that. You want to draw a plan for Marie’s house. Well, try then. But in the first place, we must know what your sister wants—how she would like her house arranged. After all, I am not sorry to hasten forward things a little. We will send her a telegram.”

“Oh, oh! You’re in a hurry,” said his father after Paul spoke. “But we’re not quite that far along yet. You want to draft a plan for Marie’s house. Go ahead and try. But first, we need to know what your sister wants—how she wants her house set up. Honestly, I wouldn’t mind speeding things up a bit. We’ll send her a telegram.”

[Pg 9]

[Pg 9]

Telegram.

Telegram.

Baveno. Italy. From X—— Mad. N——, Hôtel de ——. Paul wants to build a house here for Marie. Send programme.

Baveno, Italy. From X—— Mad. N——, Hôtel de ——. Paul wants to build a house here for Marie. Send program.

Twenty hours afterwards the following telegram reached the château:—

Twenty hours later, the following telegram arrived at the château:—

X——. From Baveno. To M. de Gandelau. Arrived this morning—all well. Paul has an excellent idea. Ground-floor—entrance-hall, drawing-room, dining-room, pantry, kitchen not underground, billiard-room, study. First-floor—two large bedrooms, two dressing-rooms; baths; small bedroom, dressing-room; linen-room, closets, attic-bedrooms; cupboards plenty; staircase not break-neck. Marie N——.”

X——. From Baveno. To M. de Gandelau. Arrived this morning—all good. Paul has a great idea. Ground floor—entrance hall, living room, dining room, pantry, kitchen above ground, billiard room, study. First floor—two large bedrooms, two dressing rooms; bathrooms; small bedroom, dressing room; linen room, closets, attic bedrooms; plenty of cupboards; staircase isn’t too steep. Marie N——.”

Without doubting for a moment that his sister had taken in earnest the despatch addressed to her, and had replied accordingly, Paul set himself resolutely to work, and, installed in Eugène’s room, and making the best of his skill in drawing, endeavoured to realize on paper the programme given above. The difficulties of this undertaking were however serious enough to make it necessary to tell M. Paul twice that breakfast was on the table. The afternoon passed rapidly away, and on assembling for dinner, Paul presented a fine sheet of paper fairly covered with plans and elevations.

Without a doubt that his sister had taken the message directed to her seriously and had responded appropriately, Paul diligently got to work. Settled in Eugène’s room and using his drawing skills, he tried to bring the outlined program to life on paper. However, the challenges of this task were significant enough that he needed to be reminded twice by M. Paul that breakfast was ready. The afternoon flew by, and when everyone gathered for dinner, Paul presented a great sheet of paper filled with plans and elevations.

“A creditable piece of work,” said M. de Gandelau unrolling it; “but your cousin is coming to-morrow, and he will be able to criticize your plan better than I can.”

“A decent piece of work,” said M. de Gandelau, unrolling it; “but your cousin is coming tomorrow, and he will be able to critique your plan better than I can.”

All the night Paul was in a state of excitement. He dreamed of a palace rising under his direction. But there was always some defect in his building. There were no windows; the staircase was only a shaky ladder, and his sister Marie would not venture to mount it. In one place[Pg 10] the ceilings were so low that you could not stand upright; elsewhere they were of terrific height. Old Branchu was laughing and shaking the walls with his hand to show they were not firm. The chimney smoked horribly, and his little sister was impetuously demanding a room for her doll.

All night, Paul was filled with excitement. He dreamed of a palace coming together under his guidance. But there was always something wrong with his creation. There were no windows; the staircase was just a wobbly ladder that his sister Marie wouldn't dare climb. In one spot[Pg 10], the ceilings were so low that you couldn't stand up straight; in other areas, they soared to incredible heights. Old Branchu was laughing and shaking the walls with his hand to show they weren't sturdy. The chimney produced terrible smoke, and his little sister was eagerly asking for a room for her doll.

Paul had looked at his plan again as soon as he got up, and it appeared to him much less satisfactory than it had done the night before; in fact, he blushed at the thought of showing it to his cousin, who was coming to breakfast; he was hesitating, and thinking of destroying the painful labour of a whole day.

Paul looked over his plan again as soon as he woke up, and it seemed a lot less satisfying than it had the night before; in fact, he felt embarrassed at the idea of showing it to his cousin, who was coming for breakfast. He hesitated, considering whether to just get rid of the hard work he had put in all day.

“Father, I think my cousin will laugh at me if I show him my drawing.”

“Dad, I think my cousin will laugh at me if I show him my drawing.”

“My dear boy,” replied M. de Gandelau, “when we have done what we can, i.e., the best we can, we must not shrink from criticism, which is the only means of ascertaining the insufficiency of our knowledge and supplying its defects. You would be very silly if you thought you could become an architect in a single morning; but if, after having made an effort to express an idea which you think good, either in drawing or otherwise, you should hesitate to submit your essay to some one more skilful than yourself, for fear of eliciting more criticism than applause—it would not be modesty, but a very reprehensible vanity, for it would deprive you of advice which cannot fail to be useful to you, at your age especially.”

“My dear boy,” replied M. de Gandelau, “once we’ve done everything we can, the best we can, we shouldn’t shy away from criticism. It’s the only way to recognize what we don’t know and fix our shortcomings. It would be quite foolish to think you could become an architect in just one morning. However, if you’ve put in the effort to express an idea you believe is good, whether through drawing or some other means, and you hesitate to share your work with someone more skilled than you out of fear of getting more criticism than praise—that wouldn’t be modesty, but rather a shameful kind of vanity. It would rob you of valuable advice that could be really beneficial for you, especially at your age.”

When his cousin had come it was nevertheless necessary for M. de Gandelau to tell his son to bring his attempt, to induce our architectural tyro to unroll again the paper he had covered the day before with such painfully elaborate designs.

When his cousin arrived, it was still necessary for M. de Gandelau to tell his son to ask our aspiring architect to unroll the paper he had filled the day before with such painstakingly detailed designs.

“Well, my young cousin,” said the visitor, “so you want to become an architect. Take care! all is not couleur de rose in that profession, as it would appear on your paper.”

“Well, my young cousin,” said the visitor, “so you want to become an architect. Be careful! It’s not all couleur de rose in that profession, despite how it looks on your paper.”

In a few words Eugène was informed of what was intended.

Eugène was quickly told what was planned.

[Pg 11]

[Pg 11]

“Very good! Here is the drawing-room and the entrance-hall. I don’t quite understand the staircase, but that is a matter of detail. And the elevations? But it’s a palace!—columns, balustrades! Well, we can set to work at once.”

“Great! Here’s the living room and the entrance hall. I’m not really sure about the staircase, but that’s just a detail. And the designs? It’s a palace!—columns, railings! Well, we can get started right away.”

“Could we, cousin? Suppose we tell Master Branchu; he is at work close by.”

“Could we, cousin? What if we tell Master Branchu; he’s working nearby.”

“A little patience—this is only a sketch. How about the definitive plans; and the estimates; and the details of execution? We must go methodically to work. You must know, cousin, that the more rapidly we want a building erected, the more desirable it is that everything should be perfectly arranged beforehand. Remember the trouble your neighbour, Count —— has had, who has been beginning his château again and again every spring for six years, without being able to get it finished, because he could not indicate all that he wanted at first, and his architect had not the courage to insist upon adopting a well-planned design once for all; and because he has listened to all the whims, or rather to all the officious advice which friends of the family did not fail to offer, one respecting the size of the rooms, another about the placing of the staircases, a third on the style and decoration. We have only a year before us, we must therefore not begin till we are certain of not taking false steps; besides, your sister must approve the plan. Let us consider a little; and first let us come to an understanding about the means of construction you decide to adopt. As we are in a hurry we have hardly a choice; we cannot think of building the house with worked stone from top to bottom; that would take too long, and cost too much. We must adopt a method of construction that is simple, and can be rapidly executed. Does that meet your ideas? You introduce columns in your front; for what purpose? If they form a portico, they will make the rooms dark and gloomy; if they are attached to the walls, they are of no[Pg 12] use here. And this balustrade on the upper cornices—what does that mean? Do you suppose your lady sister will walk among the gutters? That is for the service of the cats, I suppose. And please to explain this: on the plan I observe that from the entrance-hall you have to go through the dining-room to reach the drawing-room. But if visitors come while you are at table, you will have to ask them to wait at the door, or invite them to see you and your friends eat.

“A little patience—this is just a rough draft. What about the final plans, the estimates, and the execution details? We need to work systematically. You should know, cousin, that the faster we want to build, the more important it is to have everything perfectly organized from the start. Remember the problems your neighbor, Count —, has faced, restarting his château every spring for six years and never finishing it, because he couldn't communicate what he wanted initially, and his architect didn't have the guts to stick to a solid design from the get-go; plus, he let family friends give their opinions on things like room sizes, staircase placements, and styles of decoration. We only have a year, so we can't start until we're sure we won’t make mistakes; also, your sister has to approve the plan. Let's think this over and first agree on the construction method you want to use. Since we're in a hurry, we have little choice; building the house entirely from worked stone is not an option; that would take too long and cost too much. We need a simple construction method that can be done quickly. Does that work for you? You want to put columns in the front; for what purpose? If they create a porch, they'll make the rooms dark and gloomy; if they're attached to the walls, they won't be useful here. And what's with this balustrade on the upper cornices—what's that for? Do you think your sister is going to stroll around the gutters? It must be for the cats, I guess. Also, can you explain this: in the plan, I see that to get from the entrance hall to the drawing room, you have to walk through the dining room. But if guests arrive while you’re eating, you'll either have to ask them to wait at the door or invite them to watch you and your friends eat.”

“And so the kitchen opens on the billiard-room. Come, we must go a little more deeply into the matter; shall we set to work to do so? Between us we shall perhaps get through the business a little faster, and you will give me ideas; for you know your elder sister’s tastes and habits better than I do. You will thus be able to supplement the scantiness of the programme given us. Think about it, and early to-morrow morning we will proceed to work out our plan.”

“And so the kitchen opens into the billiard room. Come on, let’s dive a little deeper into this; shall we get started? Together, we might get through this a bit faster, and you can help me with ideas since you know your older sister’s tastes and habits better than I do. You’ll be able to fill in the gaps in the plan we’ve been given. Think it over, and tomorrow morning we’ll start working on our plan.”


[Pg 13]

[Pg 13]

CHAPTER II.
WITH A LITTLE HELP, PAUL’S IDEA IS DEVELOPED.

In fact, early in the morning Paul might be seen going into his cousin’s room. Everything was ready: drawing-board, T-squares, compasses, and pencils.

In fact, early in the morning, Paul could be seen going into his cousin’s room. Everything was set up: drawing board, T-squares, compasses, and pencils.

“Take your seat here, cousin; you are going to render on paper the result of our meditations, since you know so well how to make use of our instruments. Let us proceed methodically. In the first place, you doubtless know the ground on which your father intends to have your sister’s country house built.”

“Take your seat here, cousin; you’re going to write down the results of our thoughts, since you’re so good at using our tools. Let’s go step by step. First of all, you probably know the land where your dad wants to build your sister’s country house.”

“Yes, it is down there below the wood, about two miles off—that little valley at the bottom of which runs the brook which turns Michaud’s mill.”

"Yes, it's down there under the trees, about two miles away—that small valley at the bottom where the stream flows that powers Michaud’s mill."

“Just show me that on the plan of the estate. Oh, I see it.”

“Just show me that on the estate plan. Oh, I see it.”

“You see, cousin, it is here. On the south side of the plateau are the arable lands, then the ground slopes a little to the north towards the brook. Here there is a fine spring of fresh water issuing from the wood, which is on the west. On the declivity of the plateau, and at the bottom of the valley, are meadows with a few trees.”

“You see, cousin, it’s right here. On the south side of the plateau are the farmland, then the ground slopes gently to the north toward the stream. There’s a great fresh water spring coming out of the woods to the west. At the edge of the plateau and at the bottom of the valley, there are meadows with a few trees.”

“On which side then is the pleasantest view?”

“Which side has the best view?”

“Towards the bottom of the valley, on the south-east.”

“Down at the bottom of the valley, on the southeast side.”

“How do you get to the meadow from your father’s house?”

“How do you get to the meadow from your dad’s house?”

“By crossing the wood; then you go down to the bottom[Pg 14] of the valley by this road; you cross a bridge here, then you ascend along the plateau obliquely by this path.”

“Cross through the woods; then head down to the bottom[Pg 14] of the valley on this road; you’ll cross a bridge here, then climb up the plateau diagonally along this path.”

“Very good; we must therefore build the house almost on the summit of the incline facing the north—sheltering it from the north-west winds under the neighbouring wood. The entrance will have to front the ascending road; but we must arrange for the principal apartments to command the most favourable aspect, which is south-east; moreover, we must take advantage of the open view on the same side, and not disregard the spring of fresh water that flows on the right towards the bottom of the valley; we shall therefore approach it and locate the house in that resting-place which nature has arranged so favourably to our views, some yards below the plateau. We shall thus be tolerably sheltered from the south-west winds, and shall not have the dull-looking plain, which extends as far as the eye can reach, in front of the house. This settled, let us look at the programme. No dimensions of rooms are mentioned; we shall therefore have to determine this. According to what your father has told me, he intends this house to be for constant residence, habitable in summer as well as in winter, and consequently to contain all that is suitable for a large landed proprietor. He means to spend about £8000 upon it; it is therefore a matter which demands serious study, especially as your sister and her husband make a great point of ‘comfort.’ I was at their house in Paris, and found it admirably fitted up, but nothing sacrificed to vanity or mere appearances. We may therefore start from these data. Let us begin by the plan of the ground-floor. The principal apartment is the drawing-room, where the family assemble. We cannot give it less than 16 or 17 feet in width, by 24 to 28 feet in length. First draw a parallelogram to these dimensions. Ah, stay! not mere guess-work. Take your scale.”

“Great! We should build the house almost at the top of the slope facing north, so it’s protected from the north-west winds by the nearby woods. The entrance will have to face the road that goes up, but we need to arrange the main rooms to take advantage of the best view, which is to the southeast. Plus, we shouldn't overlook the fresh water spring that flows to the right towards the bottom of the valley; we’ll move closer to it and place the house in that great spot nature has provided, a little below the plateau. This way, we’ll be pretty sheltered from the south-west winds, and we won’t have the dull plain stretching out in front of the house. With that settled, let’s look at the plan. No room sizes are mentioned, so we’ll need to figure that out. From what your father told me, he wants this house to be a permanent residence, suitable for both summer and winter, and contains everything necessary for a large landowner. He plans to spend around £8000 on it, so this requires careful planning, especially since your sister and her husband really value ‘comfort.’ I visited their place in Paris, and it was beautifully furnished, but nothing was done just for show. So, we can start from that. Let’s begin with the ground-floor layout. The main room is the drawing-room, where the family gathers. We can’t make it less than 16 or 17 feet wide and 24 to 28 feet long. First, draw a rectangle with those dimensions. Wait! No random guessing. Get your scale.”

Paul looked at his teacher in some perplexity.

Paul looked at his teacher, feeling a bit confused.

[Pg 15]

[Pg 15]

“I forgot; perhaps you don’t know what a scale means. Indeed your plan seems to have taken no account of anything of the kind. Listen to me, then: When you wish to build a house, or any edifice, you give the architect a programme, i.e., a complete list of all the rooms and accessories that are wanted. But this is not enough; you say such or such a room must have such or such a width by such or such a length, or have such or such an area so as to accommodate so many persons. If it is a dining-room, for instance, you will mention that it must accommodate 10, 15, 20, or 25 persons at table. If it is a bedroom, you will specify that besides the bed (which is a matter of course) it must accommodate such or such pieces of furniture or occupy an area of 300 feet, 400 feet, &c. Now you know that an area of 400 feet is equivalent to a square whose side is 20 feet, or a parallelogram of about 24 feet by 16 feet 8 inches, or of 30 feet by 13 feet 4 inches. But these last dimensions would not suit a room; they are rather the proportions of a gallery. Independently, therefore, of the area of a room, its breadth and length must bear certain relations according to its purpose. A drawing-room or a bedchamber may be square; but a dining-room, if it is to accommodate more than ten persons at table, must be longer than it is broad, because a table increases in length but not in width, according to the number of the guests. You must therefore add ‘leaves’ to the dining-room as you do to the table. Do you understand? Good. At this point then the architect, in preparing the plan, even if it is only a sketch, adopts a scale, i.e., he divides a line drawn upon his paper into equal parts, each representing a foot. And to save time, or to simplify the work, he takes for each of these divisions the 192th, or the 96th, or the 48th part of a foot. In the first case we call it a scale of 1/16th of an inch to a foot, or a scale of 16 feet to an inch; in the second, a scale of ⅛th of an inch to a foot, or a scale of 8 feet to an inch; in the third, a scale of ¼th of an[Pg 16] inch to a foot, or a scale of 4 feet to an inch. Thus you prepare a plan one hundred and ninety-two, ninety-six, or forty-eight times smaller than its realization will be. I need not say that we may make scales in any proportion ad infinitum—one, two, or three hundredths of an inch to a foot, or to 10, 100, or 1,000 feet, as we do for drawing maps. In the same way we may give details on a scale of 6 inches to a foot, or half the actual size; 2 inches to a foot, or a sixth of the actual size, &c. Having chosen his scale, the architect is enabled to give to each part of the plan exact relative dimensions. If he has adopted the scale of one-eighth of an inch to a foot, and wishes to indicate a door 4 feet in width, he takes 4/8ths. Do you understand? I am not quite sure that you do; but a few hours’ practice will render you au fait at it. To show you distinctly the utility of a scale, I will take your plan. Your drawing-room is an oblong. I will suppose it 20 feet by 27 feet; that is pretty nearly the relative proportion of the sides. A ninth of the longer side measured by the compass is 3 feet. I measure your façade by this and find that your lower story is 30 feet high. Now fancy to yourself how (I will not say your drawing-room, but) your entrance-hall, whose sides are only 13 feet, would look with a height of 30 feet between the floor and the ceiling. It would be a well. Your elevation therefore is not on the same scale as your plan. Take for your sister’s drawing-room 18/16ths on this graduated rule, which will give 18 feet on a scale of 1/16th of an inch to a foot. Just so; that gives us the shorter side of the drawing-room. Now take 27/16ths on the same rule, which will give 27 feet; that will be the longer side. Now your oblong is drawn with dimensions perfectly exact. You will have to surround this room with walls, for we can scarcely give ordinary floors a greater width; you must therefore have walls to receive the joists. A rubble wall through which flues have to pass, can hardly be less than 1[Pg 17] foot 8 inches in thickness. Your drawing-room will therefore support itself. Next in importance to the drawing-room is the dining-room. Where are we to place it? We ought, especially in the country, to be able to enter it directly from the drawing-room. Is it to be on the right, or on the left? You have not the least idea; nor I either. But chance cannot settle the question. Let us think about it a little. It would seem natural to put the kitchen near to the dining-room. But the position of the kitchen is a matter presenting some difficulties. When you are not at table you don’t like to have the smell of the viands, or hear the noise of those engaged in kitchen work. On the one hand, the kitchen ought not to be far from the dining-room; on the other hand, it ought to be far enough from the chief rooms for its existence not to be suspected. Besides, the back-yard, the outbuildings, the poultry-yard, a small vegetable garden, wash-houses, &c., ought to be near the kitchen. It is a matter of importance too that the kitchen should not have a south aspect. And we must not forget that your sister, who knows how a house ought to be managed, has taken the precaution to say in her laconic programme: ‘Kitchen not underground.’ She is right: underground kitchens are unhealthy for those who live in them, present difficulties in the way of surveillance, and diffuse their odour through the ground floor. We shall put it therefore on a level with the dining-room, but without direct communication with the latter, to avoid odours and noises. Let us examine our ground, its position and aspects. The most undesirable aspect, and that which in the present case offers the least agreeable prospect, is the north-west. We shall therefore place the drawing-room with its exterior angle towards the south-east; on the right we shall put the dining-room; and next the kitchen, which will thus face the north. Do not be in a hurry to draw the plan of these subordinate apartments, for we must[Pg 18] know first what position they are to occupy in relation to the drawing-room and the entrance-hall. We are required to provide a billiard-room. It will be well to place it on the south-east, as a pendant to the dining-room. The hall and your brother-in-law’s study must be near the entrance. If we place the dining-room and the billiard-room, whose dimensions are to be nearly equal to those of the drawing-room, in juxtaposition and continuation with the latter, the drawing-room will be lighted only on one of its shorter sides, for we must put the entrance-hall in front. The drawing-room would in that case be gloomy, and would command a view of the country only in one direction. Let us then put the dining-room and the billiard-room at right angles to the drawing-room, allowing the latter to jut out on the sides of the favourable aspect. Let us give each of these two apartments a length of 24 feet by a width of 18 feet. These are convenient dimensions. Then mark in front of the drawing-room an entrance-hall, whose area we shall determine presently.

"I forgot; maybe you don’t know what a scale is. Your plan definitely seems to overlook that. Listen: When you want to build a house or any structure, you give the architect a list of all the rooms and features you want. But that’s not enough; you specify that certain rooms need to be a certain width by a certain length, or have a specific area to accommodate a certain number of people. For instance, if it’s a dining room, you’ll mention it needs to seat 10, 15, 20, or 25 people at the table. If it’s a bedroom, you'll state that besides the bed, it must fit certain furniture pieces or cover an area of 300 square feet, 400 square feet, etc. Now you know that an area of 400 square feet is equivalent to a square with sides of 20 feet, or a rectangle about 24 feet by 16 feet 8 inches, or 30 feet by 13 feet 4 inches. But those last dimensions aren’t suitable for a room; they’re more like the proportions of a gallery. Therefore, apart from the area of the room, its width and length must relate to its purpose. A living room or bedroom can be square; however, a dining room meant to seat more than ten people has to be longer than it is wide, because a table gets longer, not wider, as you add guests. You must add “leaves” to the dining room just like you do for the table. Do you get it? Good. At this point, the architect, even if it’s just a sketch, uses a scale, meaning he splits a line on his paper into equal parts, each one representing a foot. To save time or simplify the process, he might use the 192nd, 96th, or 48th part of a foot for each of these divisions. In the first case, we call it a scale of 1/16th of an inch to a foot, or a scale of 16 feet to an inch; in the second, it’s a scale of 1/8th of an inch to a foot, or a scale of 8 feet to an inch; in the third, a scale of 1/4th of an inch to a foot, or a scale of 4 feet to an inch. So you prepare a plan that is 192, 96, or 48 times smaller than the actual structure will be. I should mention that we can make scales in any proportion ad infinitum—one, two, or three hundredths of an inch to a foot, or to 10, 100, or 1,000 feet, like we do for maps. Similarly, we can provide details on a scale of 6 inches to a foot, or half the actual size; 2 inches to a foot, or a sixth of the actual size, etc. Once the architect chooses his scale, he can assign exact relative dimensions to each part of the plan. If he’s using a scale of one-eighth of an inch to a foot and wants to show a door that’s 4 feet wide, he draws it as 4/8ths. Do you understand? I’m not entirely sure you do, but a few hours of practice will get you up to speed. To clearly show you the usefulness of a scale, I’ll use your plan. Your living room is a rectangle. Let’s say it’s 20 feet by 27 feet; that’s pretty close to the relative proportions of the sides. A ninth of the longer side measured with a compass is 3 feet. I measure your façade and find that your ground floor is 30 feet high. Now imagine how (I won’t say your living room, but) your entrance hall, which is only 13 feet wide, would look with a height of 30 feet from floor to ceiling. It would be a well. Therefore, your elevation isn’t on the same scale as your plan. For your sister’s living room, take 18/16ths on this graduated ruler, which will give 18 feet on a scale of 1/16th of an inch to a foot. That gives us the shorter side of the living room. Now take 27/16ths on the same ruler, which will give 27 feet; that will be the longer side. Now your rectangle is drawn with perfectly accurate dimensions. You’ll need to surround this room with walls since we can hardly give ordinary floors a greater width; therefore, you must have walls to support the joists. A rubble wall with flues passing through it can hardly be less than 1 foot 8 inches thick. So, your living room will support itself. Next in importance to the living room is the dining room. Where should we put it? Especially in the countryside, it would be good for it to be accessible directly from the living room. Should it be on the right or left? You have no idea; nor do I. But we can’t leave that up to chance. Let’s think about it a little. It seems natural to place the kitchen near the dining room. But the kitchen’s location has its challenges. When you aren’t at the table, you don’t want to smell the food or hear the sounds of cooking. On one hand, the kitchen shouldn’t be far from the dining room; on the other hand, it should be far enough from the main rooms so its presence isn’t obvious. Besides, the backyard, outbuildings, poultry yard, a small vegetable garden, wash areas, etc., should be close to the kitchen. It’s also important that the kitchen doesn’t face south. And we also shouldn’t forget that your sister, who knows how a house should be managed, has taken the precaution to state in her concise plan: ‘Kitchen not underground.’ She’s right: underground kitchens aren’t healthy for those who use them, create monitoring challenges, and spread their odors through the ground floor. So we’ll place it on the same level as the dining room, but without direct access to it to avoid odors and noise. Let’s assess our land, its position, and what it looks like. The most undesirable orientation, and the one that in this case offers the least pleasant view, is the northwest. So we’ll position the living room with its outside corner facing the southeast; to the right we’ll place the dining room, followed by the kitchen, which will then face north. Don’t rush to draw the plans for these additional rooms, as we need to figure out first how they will relate to the living room and the entrance hall. We need to include a billiard room. It would be good to position it to the southeast, complementing the dining room. The hall and your brother-in-law’s study should be near the entrance. If we position the dining room and the billiard room, which should be roughly the same dimensions as the living room, next to each other, the living room will only get light from one of its shorter sides since we have to put the entrance hall in front. In that case, the living room would be dark and would only offer a view of the countryside in one direction. Instead, let’s place the dining room and billiard room at right angles to the living room, allowing the latter to extend out towards the favorable view. Let’s assign each of these two rooms dimensions of 24 feet by 18 feet. Those are practical sizes. Then mark in front of the living room an entrance hall, the size of which we’ll determine shortly."

“We will try next to give to the walls of those apartments the position required by the general construction. The entrance to the dining-room and the billiard-room—which is also a place of assembly—is to be from the drawing-room. The opening from the drawing-room into the billiard-room must therefore be wide enough for those who may be in either of those apartments to assemble without inconvenience. But we ought to be able to reach the entrance-hall from the billiard-room without going through the drawing-room; and so with the dining-room. We observe that lateral prospects were required for the drawing-room, whose length is 27 feet. If we take 8 feet for the side-lights, and 1 foot 6 inches for the thickness of the wall of the billiard-room or the dining-room, there will remain 17 feet 6 inches to the entrance partition of the drawing-room; our billiard-room and dining-room being[Pg 19] 18 feet wide, these apartments will reach 8 inches beyond the entrance-partition of the drawing-room. That does not matter. Let us mark out the second wall, also 1 foot 6 inches thick. Thus we have the three chief apartments determined. In the central line of the billiard-room we will make an opening into the drawing-room of 8 feet 6 inches. On the side of the wall separating it from the dining-room we will open a door of 4 feet 6 inches into the dining-room, within 8 inches of the partition separating the drawing-room from the entrance-hall. Thus we shall enter this dining-room, not in the centre, but on one side, which is more convenient; for you know that in going to or leaving it the gentlemen offer their arms to the ladies. It is therefore desirable that in going out or coming in there should be no obstacle in their way. The door leading from the drawing-room to the dining-room will be also out of the central line of the opening from the drawing-room into the billiard-room; but that I do not mind. This door will balance with the window on this side looking outwards, and we will put the fireplace between them. We will open a central door from the entrance-hall into the drawing-room.

“We will now focus on positioning the walls of those apartments according to the overall construction requirements. The entrance to the dining room and the billiard room—which also serves as a gathering space—will be accessed from the drawing room. The opening from the drawing room into the billiard room must be wide enough to allow anyone in either room to come together comfortably. However, we should be able to access the entrance hall from the billiard room without passing through the drawing room, and the same goes for the dining room. We note that lateral views are necessary for the drawing room, which is 27 feet long. If we allocate 8 feet for the side windows and 1 foot 6 inches for the thickness of the wall of either the billiard room or the dining room, that leaves us with 17 feet 6 inches to the entrance partition of the drawing room. Since our billiard room and dining room are 18 feet wide, these rooms will extend 8 inches beyond the entrance partition of the drawing room. That’s not an issue. Let’s outline the second wall, which will also be 1 foot 6 inches thick. This way, we have established the three main rooms. In the center of the billiard room, we will create an opening into the drawing room that measures 8 feet 6 inches. On the wall that separates it from the dining room, we will install a 4 feet 6 inches door into the dining room, positioned 8 inches from the partition that separates the drawing room from the entrance hall. Therefore, we will enter the dining room not in the middle, but to one side, which is more convenient; because as you know, when entering or leaving, gentlemen offer their arms to the ladies. It’s important that there are no obstacles in their way when coming or going. The door from the drawing room to the dining room will also be off the central line of the opening from the drawing room into the billiard room; but that doesn’t concern me. This door will balance with the outward-looking window on this side, and we’ll place the fireplace between them. We will create a central door from the entrance hall into the drawing room.”

“In front, against the wall of the billiard-room, let us put your brother-in-law’s study, with a small anteroom, where people who have business with him can wait, so as not to be wandering about in the hall. On the dining-room side (of the hall) we will put the pantry. The study must be at least 12 feet 6 inches wide. We will make the entrance-hall jut out a little to form a projection.

“In front, against the wall of the billiard room, let’s place your brother-in-law’s study, along with a small waiting area where people who need to meet him can stay, so they aren’t just hanging out in the hallway. On the dining room side of the hall, we’ll put the pantry. The study needs to be at least 12 feet 6 inches wide. We’ll have the entrance hall extend a bit to create a projection.”

“The staircase is a very important point in every house. It should be proportioned to the house,—neither too spacious nor too scanty. It must not occupy space uselessly; it must give easy access to the upper stories, and be sufficiently conspicuous. If we take a part of the staircase out of the entrance-hall, which is very large—18 feet by[Pg 20] 16 feet—it will be very conspicuous, and we shall gain room. The width of a staircase in a house of this style and size should be at least 4 feet. But the hall ought to communicate directly with the dining-room, the pantry, and all the offices to the right of the plan. Let us reserve a passage of 4 feet and mark the first step. The height of the lower story between floor and floor should be, reckoning the size of the rooms, 15 feet; which will give them a clear height of 14 feet, reserving 1 foot for the thickness of the floor of the chamber story. The steps of an easy staircase should be about 6 inches high. To ascend 15 feet we require thirty steps. Each step should be 10 to 12 inches wide. The staircase should have an extension of 25 feet for steps of 10 inches in width, or 30 feet for steps of 12 inches, reckoning thirty steps. Let us take a mean—say 27 feet. We must find room for this extension of 27 feet at the least. We will therefore place a staircase projection at the angle of the entrance-hall prominent enough to bring us, in winding round a newel (which will be in the prolongation of the wall on the right of the drawing-room), to the first floor, passing out into the antechamber of this floor.... I mark out this staircase for you: we shall have to return to it. The first fifteen steps come into the length of the newel and the wall, and allow us to place below the last half flight of the stairs the water-closet for the family on the ground floor. Opening from the passage we will next put the pantry. Then the servants’ staircase in a tower; then the serving-room; then the kitchen in the wing; a bakehouse and scullery, a wash-house, and a way out from the kitchen to the kitchen garden. Forming a return, we will put a stable for three horses, a coach-house for two carriages, a harness-room, and a small flight of stairs to reach the rooms for the coachman and groom, and the hay-loft in the roof. Near the stable we will leave a way into the yard and the larder and servants’ conveniences.

The staircase is a crucial feature in every home. It should be sized appropriately—not too large or too small. It shouldn't waste space; it needs to provide easy access to the upper floors and should be prominent enough to be noticed. If we take part of the staircase out of the large entrance hall—18 feet by[Pg 20] 16 feet—it will stand out, and we’ll create more space. The width of a staircase in a house of this style and size should be at least 4 feet. The hall should directly connect to the dining room, pantry, and all the rooms to the right of the layout. Let’s reserve a 4-foot passage and mark the first step. The height between floors should be 15 feet, considering the room sizes, giving them a clear height of 14 feet after accounting for 1 foot for the thickness of the upper floor. Steps should be around 6 inches high. To climb 15 feet, we need thirty steps, with each step being 10 to 12 inches wide. The staircase should extend 25 feet for 10-inch wide steps, or 30 feet for 12-inch steps, totaling thirty steps. Let’s take an average of 27 feet for this extension. We need to accommodate this 27 feet at a minimum. So we’ll position a staircase projection at the entrance hall’s angle, designed to direct us, while winding around a newel (which will extend from the wall on the right side of the drawing room), to the first floor and into the antechamber on that level.... I’ve marked out this staircase for you: we’ll need to revisit it. The first fifteen steps fit the length of the newel and the wall, allowing us to place the family’s restroom beneath the last half flight of stairs. Next, opening from the passage, we’ll add the pantry. Then there will be a servants’ staircase in a tower, followed by the serving room, then the kitchen in the wing; a bakehouse, scullery, wash-house, and a path from the kitchen to the kitchen garden. Creating a return, we’ll provide a stable for three horses, a coach house for two carriages, a harness room, and a small staircase leading to the rooms for the coachman and groom, with a hayloft in the roof. Near the stable, we’ll leave a way into the yard, the larder, and the servants’ conveniences.

[Pg 21]

[Pg 21]

“We will separate all these offices from the main building by a plinth wall and trellis-work at the right of the round tower servants’ staircase, which will give us a courtyard for the kitchen, stable, and coach-house. In front we will reserve a space for the poultry-yard, the fowl-house, and the manure pit....

“We will separate all these offices from the main building with a raised wall and trellis to the right of the round tower's servant staircase, which will create a courtyard for the kitchen, stable, and garage. In front, we'll set aside an area for the chicken coop, the hen house, and the compost pit....

“Now that we have traced out the general plan of our ground floor, let us try to improve it in detail.

“Now that we’ve outlined the overall layout of our ground floor, let’s work on refining it in detail.

“It would be very nice to have a bay window at the end of the drawing-room looking out on the garden. Nothing prevents us from planning another at the end of the billiard-room, with a divan where the gentlemen might smoke, and a third at the end of the dining-room, which would allow the dishes to be passed in through a turn from the serving-room, and afford room for the sideboard and carving tables.

“It would be great to have a bay window at the end of the living room that looks out onto the garden. There's nothing stopping us from planning another one at the end of the billiard room, with a sofa where the guys can smoke, and a third one at the end of the dining room, which would let the dishes be passed in through a turn from the serving room, and make space for the sideboard and carving tables.”

“We shall find these projections useful on the first floor.

“We'll find these projections helpful on the first floor."

“But we ought to have a way out from the drawing-room or the billiard-room into the garden. I must confess that I am not very fond of those flights of steps, which are scorching under a hot sun and very disagreeable in wind and rain; if, then, in the angle formed by the billiard-room with the drawing-room, and along it, we were to place a conservatory inclosing a flight of steps, I think it would be a convenient arrangement. Thus we could pass from the drawing-room or the billiard-room into this conservatory, and could take coffee there in wet weather, and have a covered approach to the garden. Some flowers and shrubs placed along the glazed side would enliven the billiard-room without darkening it. But in front of the entrance-hall we will have a flight of steps in the usual style, which we shall take care to put under shelter, the position of the staircase allowing us to do so without difficulty.

“But we should have a way out from the living room or the game room into the garden. I have to admit that I'm not a big fan of those flights of stairs that are hot under the sun and really unpleasant in wind and rain. So, if in the corner formed by the game room and the living room, we were to build a conservatory enclosing a set of stairs, I think it would be a practical setup. That way, we could move from the living room or the game room into this conservatory, enjoy coffee there on rainy days, and have a covered path to the garden. Some flowers and shrubs along the glazed side would brighten up the game room without making it too dark. But in front of the entrance hall, we'll have a flight of stairs in the usual style, and we’ll make sure to put it under cover, as the design of the staircase lets us do that easily.”

“Let us draw out all this as nearly as we can; we shall have to revise it when we have studied the first floor, whose[Pg 22] arrangements may oblige us to modify some of those on the ground floor (Fig. 1).

“Let’s work through all of this as closely as we can; we’ll need to update it once we’ve looked at the first floor, since its[Pg 22] layout might require us to change some of the arrangements on the ground floor (Fig. 1).

“As the walls must rise from the bottom, you will put a piece of tracing paper over this ground-plan to avoid loss of time. You will thus have beneath your eyes and pencil the walls to which you must accommodate the superstructure, and we shall presently see whether there is reason to modify some parts of this ground-plan.

“As the walls need to be built from the ground up, you should put a piece of tracing paper over this floor plan to save time. This way, you’ll have the walls you need to work with clearly visible for your eyes and pencil, and soon we’ll determine if any parts of this floor plan need to be adjusted.”

Fig. 1.—Plan of the Ground Floor.

Fig. 1.—Ground Floor Plan.

A, entrance-hall; B, drawing-room; C, dining-room; D, billiard-room; E, study; F, conservatory inclosing flight of steps; G, butler’s pantry; H, kitchen; I, serving-room; K, L, bakehouse and wash-house; M, office-yard; N, S, poultry-yard; O, stable; P, coach-house; R, harness-room; a, servants’ staircase; b, cellar steps; c, groom’s staircase; V, W, water-closets.

A, entrance hall; B, living room; C, dining room; D, billiard room; E, study; F, sunroom enclosing flight of steps; G, butler’s pantry; H, kitchen; I, serving room; K, L, bakery and laundry; M, office yard; N, S, poultry yard; O, stable; P, garage; R, tack room; a, staff staircase; b, cellar stairs; c, groom’s staircase; V, W, restrooms.

“Just so. Let us first trace the termination of the staircase;[Pg 23] the last of the thirty steps we shall require is in a line with the wall on the right of the entrance-hall; it is the landing which will open on the antechamber above the hall. Over the drawing-room we shall place Madame N.’s room; but as this area would be too large, we shall take advantage of the space to put a second partition, which will give double doors and a capital space for closets, which ladies never find superfluous. To give light in this space we shall glaze an upper portion of the partition next to the antechamber. These double doors will insure greater privacy in the bedroom, and prevent the passage of sounds. Besides, this second antechamber will enable us to provide a direct communication with Monsieur N.’s apartment, which we shall place in the favourable aspect, that is over the billiard-room.

“Exactly. First, let's outline the end of the staircase;[Pg 23] the last of the thirty steps we need will align with the wall on the right side of the entrance hall; it leads to the landing that opens onto the antechamber above the hall. Above the drawing room, we’ll place Madame N.’s room; however, since this area would be too large, we'll take advantage of the space to add a second partition, which will allow for double doors and a great area for closets, something ladies never find excessive. To bring light into this area, we'll put glass in the upper part of the partition next to the antechamber. These double doors will ensure more privacy in the bedroom and block sound. Additionally, this second antechamber will give us direct access to Monsieur N.’s apartment, which we will position advantageously, over the billiard room.”

“As this area also is too large, we shall take out of the space thus available a lady’s dressing-room, and a bathroom; and provide an entrance to Monsieur N.’s room direct from the antechamber through a private passage, which will also open into the lady’s dressing-room, that for your brother-in-law over the study, his bedchamber and the closets for these apartments. Thus when the two doors leading to the antechamber are shut, these rooms will be completely cut off. With a corridor answering to that of the ground floor on the right we shall establish a communication between the antechamber, the servants’ staircase, the linen-room (an important matter), which we shall place over the kitchen, with a large wardrobe for your sister on the right of her bedroom, and a nursery (for we must provide for every contingency), which, as well as the wardrobe, will be over the dining-room. The recess or bay window of the ground floor will afford us the means of giving a nice dressing-room for the children’s or guests’ room on the first floor; and that of the billiard-room will furnish a very agreeable addition to Monsieur N.’s room.[Pg 24] As to the bay window in the drawing-room, we will cover with a flat, with a balustrade, which will give your sister’s room a handsome balcony, where an awning and flowers can be placed in the summer. (Fig. 2.)

“As this area is also quite large, we’ll include a lady’s dressing room and a bathroom; and we’ll create a direct entrance to Monsieur N.’s room from the antechamber through a private passage, which will also lead into the lady’s dressing room, and to the room for your brother-in-law above the study, along with his bedroom and the closets for these spaces. So, when the two doors leading to the antechamber are closed, these rooms will be completely isolated. We’ll connect the antechamber to the servants’ staircase and the linen room (which is important), placing it above the kitchen, with a large wardrobe for your sister located on the right side of her bedroom, and a nursery (since we have to prepare for every possibility), which, like the wardrobe, will be above the dining room. The recess or bay window on the ground floor will allow us to create a nice dressing room for the children’s or guests’ room on the first floor; and the bay window in the billiard room will be a pleasant addition to Monsieur N.’s room.[Pg 24] As for the bay window in the drawing room, we’ll cover it with a flat roof and a balustrade, which will give your sister’s room an attractive balcony, where an awning and flowers can be placed in the summer. (Fig. 2.)

“You see, Paul, our plan begins to assume a definite shape. Breakfast will soon be ready: go and take a walk, and in the afternoon we will resume our work, that is to say, we will proceed to the elevations.”

“You see, Paul, our plan is starting to take a clear form. Breakfast will be ready soon: go take a walk, and in the afternoon we’ll get back to our work, which means we’ll move on to the elevations.”

Fig. 2.—Plan of the First Floor.

Fig. 2.—Layout of the First Floor.

A, antechamber; B, Madame N.’s bedroom; C, dressing-room and bathroom; D, wardrobe; E, Monsieur N.’s bedroom; F, dressing-room and bathroom; G, nursery; H, dressing-room; I, linen-room; P, lumber-room; W, water-closets.

A, antechamber; B, Madame N.’s bedroom; C, dressing room and bathroom; D, wardrobe; E, Monsieur N.’s bedroom; F, dressing room and bathroom; G, nursery; H, dressing room; I, linen room; P, storage room; W, restrooms.

On going down to the garden, Paul began to examine the family mansion with an attention he had never yet bestowed upon it. He had never thought before of observing how its apartments were arranged. He began to calculate the space lost in those interminable passages; he perceived here and there dark and useless corners. The staircase started badly. On the ground floor it could not be found without knowing the arrangement of the house. The kitchen was at a vast distance from the dining-room, and to get from the one to the other you must cross a carriage road, go down two steps and mount six. For the first[Pg 25] time in his life this struck him as barbarous. Walking about waiting for the breakfast bell, Paul began to ask himself whether his father would not do well to pull down his old mansion and build one on a new plan devised by himself with his cousin’s advice. He began to reckon up the several faults in the arrangement of the house, not forgetting its too numerous break-neck passages. He considered the sombre drawing-room, flanked on two sides by the two old towers that masked the side views, his father’s little study lighted by a narrow window and entered by a pretty large room, generally unused, and which served as a fruit-room in the autumn; many other defects besides....

As Paul walked down to the garden, he started to look at the family mansion with a focus he had never given it before. He had never thought about how the rooms were set up. He began to consider the wasted space in those endless hallways; he noticed dark and useless corners scattered throughout. The staircase was poorly designed. On the ground floor, you couldn’t find it unless you already knew the layout of the house. The kitchen was far from the dining room, and to get from one to the other, you had to cross a driveway, go down two steps, and then go up six again. For the first time in his life, this seemed absurd to him. As he wandered around waiting for the breakfast bell, Paul started to wonder if his father should tear down the old mansion and build a new one based on a plan he would create with his cousin’s help. He began to list the various flaws in the house's layout, including the many dangerous staircases. He thought about the dreary drawing-room, which was flanked on two sides by the old towers that blocked the view, his father's small study illuminated by a narrow window, and accessed through a fairly large room that was usually empty and served as a fruit room in the fall; and many other issues as well....

“Well,” said his father, as soon as they were seated at table, “you have been already at work this morning?”

“Well,” said his father, as soon as they were seated at the table, “have you already been working this morning?”

Paul, full of the subject that had engaged him, gave an exact description of the plan which had been prepared; but could not finish without indulging in some critical remarks on the family mansion.

Paul, deeply immersed in the topic that had captured his attention, gave a detailed overview of the plan that had been created; however, he couldn't help but slip in some critical comments about the family house.


[Pg 26]

[Pg 26]

CHAPTER III.
THE TREE OF KNOWLEDGE.

His mother looked at him with astonishment; his father became serious, and said: “Paul, this house satisfies your mother just as it is, and me too; you three—your two sisters and yourself—were all born here; my father left it to me, and I have added to it only what has been necessary. There is not a corner in this house but is associated with some happy or mournful reminiscence; it has been consecrated by the labours of three generations of honourable occupants. All the people of the neighbourhood, who please to give it the name of the Château, know that they may look for bread here when they want it, clothes for their little ones, advice in their differences, and relief if they are ill. They do not need to be shown the staircase that leads to your mother’s room or my study, for they know it as well as we do; they know as well as we do those ‘break-neck places’ on which you are so severe, and do not get lost in the long passages. If the kitchen is a little too far from the dining-room, it is large enough to hold the harvest-men when they come to supper, and the shepherds when they come to settle their accounts. I do not think I should be justified in altering all this, for this house belongs, I may say, to the neighbourhood; and you should not forget any more than I do that, in 1793, my grandfather remained here alone with his wife and my[Pg 27] father without molestation, while all the neighbouring châteaux were abandoned and pillaged.

His mother looked at him in disbelief; his father became serious and said, “Paul, this house satisfies your mother just as it is, and me too; you three—your two sisters and you—were all born here; my father passed it down to me, and I’ve only added what was necessary. Every corner of this house is linked to some happy or sad memory; it has been built upon by three generations of honorable residents. Everyone in the neighborhood, who likes to call it the Château, knows they can come here for food when they need it, clothing for their kids, advice in their disputes, and help if they’re sick. They don’t need directions to the staircase that leads to your mother’s room or my study, because they know it as well as we do; they know those ‘dangerous spots’ you are so strict about, and they don’t get lost in the long hallways. If the kitchen is a bit far from the dining room, it’s big enough to host the harvesters when they come for dinner, and the shepherds when they come to settle their accounts. I don’t think I’d be justified in changing any of this, because this house belongs, in a way, to the neighborhood. You shouldn’t forget, any more than I do, that in 1793, my grandfather stayed here alone with his wife and my[Pg 27] father without being disturbed, while all the nearby châteaux were deserted and looted."

“When we are gone—your mother and I—you will do what you think fit with this house; but if there is one piece of advice I would impress upon you, it is—Keep it as it is, for it may outlast you and your children. Keep it, for you must have committed many faults before it can cease to be a shelter for our family.

“When your mother and I are gone, you can do whatever you think is best with this house. But if I could give you one piece of advice, it would be this—keep it as it is, because it might last longer than you and your children. Keep it, because you would have to make many mistakes before it stops being a home for our family."

“I know as well as you—perhaps better—all that it needs to adapt it to the taste of the day; and if I were to sell it to some wealthy proprietor, he would probably soon demolish it and build a house or a château more comfortable, and better suited to modern habits. What such a purchaser might do I cannot, I ought not to do.

“I know just as well as you—maybe even better—everything it needs to fit today's taste; and if I sold it to some rich owner, they would probably tear it down and build a house or a château that's more comfortable and better suited to modern lifestyles. What a buyer might do, I cannot, and shouldn't, do.”

“The good people with wooden shoes on their feet and woollen cloaks on their backs who come here to talk with me, and who would protect my old house, if need were (I have had proof of it), would cease to come into a new dwelling with which they were not familiar,—where everything would have a tendency to repel them, if not to arouse envious reflections in them. I should become unaccustomed to see them; and while it seems to me quite natural to see them at any time in this house—which only recalls the past, and where all is simple and somewhat rough, like themselves—it would probably appear to me strange to introduce them into apartments arranged and decorated in modern taste.

“The good folks in wooden shoes and woolen cloaks who come here to talk with me, and who would protect my old house if needed (I've seen it happen), would stop visiting a new place they didn’t know—where everything would likely make them feel unwelcome, if not spark some jealousy. I would get used to not seeing them; and while it feels completely natural to have them here in this house—which only brings back memories, and where everything is simple and a little rough, just like them—it would probably feel odd to invite them into rooms that are furnished and decorated in modern style.”

“It is undesirable to disturb visual associations; our simple-minded neighbours connect in thought the inhabitant with the house: change the latter, and they will no longer recognize the former.

“It’s not a good idea to disrupt visual connections; our straightforward neighbors associate the person with the house: if you change the house, they won’t recognize the person anymore.”

“Your cousin knows still better than you or I what are the defects of our old mansion, and how it might be rendered much more attractive; yet he has never suggested modifications to me, because he perceives, as I do, that by[Pg 28] making any change in such buildings acquired habits among those around us would be disturbed in a way that could only be injurious.

“Your cousin knows even better than you or I what the flaws of our old house are and how it could be made much more appealing; yet he has never suggested any changes to me because he understands, as I do, that altering such buildings would disrupt the established routines of those around us in a way that could only be harmful.[Pg 28]

“And here are you—an architect of two or three hours’ standing, and before you know whether you could improve on the house as it is—thinking of pulling it down. Be a little more modest; when you have studied some time and seen more, you will know that a dwelling ought to be, to a man and his family, a well-suited dress, and that when a residence is perfectly adapted to the manners and habits of those it shelters, it is excellent. How many proprietors have I seen who, while destroying their ancestral mansion, to replace it by a habitation conformable as they thought to the requirements of the moment, have by the same act ruptured the tie which attached their family to the humble inhabitants of the neighbourhood!”

“And here you are—an architect for just a couple of hours, and before you even know if you could make the house better—you're thinking about tearing it down. Be a bit more humble; after you’ve studied for a while and seen more, you’ll understand that a home should be like a well-fitted outfit for a person and their family, and when a house is perfectly suited to the lifestyles and habits of its residents, it’s truly great. How many owners have I seen who, while demolishing their family home to replace it with something they thought was more in line with current trends, have also broken the connection to the modest families in the neighborhood!”

The only reply Paul offered to these arguments was to go and embrace his mother and father; and no better could have been thought of.

The only response Paul gave to these arguments was to go and hug his mom and dad; and nothing better could have been imagined.

“I don’t exactly see,” said Paul to his cousin, when they were both in the park after breakfast, “why my father should wish to have a house built for my sister, since he thinks it so desirable to keep for himself and for us the old mansion in which we were born.”

“I don’t really understand,” Paul said to his cousin while they were in the park after breakfast, “why my dad wants to have a house built for my sister when he thinks it’s so important to keep the old mansion we were born in for himself and us.”

“It is not a matter of very easy explanation; but you are old enough, Paul, to understand it. In the first place, your sister Marie now bears another name than yours; and a well-known respected name has a similar standing in the neighbourhood with the old house to which, so to speak, it is attached. If you had not been born, and your parents were no longer living, Madame N——, your sister, on coming to live on this estate, might safely pull down the old house and build a new one, for it would not be more difficult to introduce the new house than the name of a new proprietor. She would have to create new ties with[Pg 29] all this little world that surrounds you, and consequently to establish between this world and her new family relations differing probably from those which now exist between your father and the people of your neighbourhood. Your father’s connection with the peasants of Berri, among whom he has always lived, is intertwined with traditions handed down through several generations without interruption. He can therefore obtain services from them, and inspire them with a confidence which would not be accorded to new-comers, or to any name but his; while these peasants on their part unsuspectingly accept favours which they know from long experience to be disinterested. The old manor-house, occupied by a stranger bearing a new name, would lose the prestige which your father so justly appreciated; there would in that case be no advantage in preserving its time-honoured aspect. M. de Gandelau, therefore, who does nothing without consideration, perceives that some day or other, by the pressure of circumstances, his house might be no longer suitable for his children, so that before its possible disappearance, he builds a new one for your sister; a house to which the neighbourhood will become gradually accustomed, and which will form a new family centre; for Madame Marie is beloved and esteemed throughout the neighbourhood. People will become accustomed to the more modern habits of the new manor-house, and no one will then think it strange that the old one should be demolished. Your father is preparing a gradual transition from a social condition, which, though on the decline even in the country districts, still exists, to that which is destined to replace it. You see, then, that though he values the past, and endeavours to preserve its advantages, he does not believe in its perpetuity, and foresees the time when it must vanish before the habits and requirements of the present. Natural as is your father’s mode of living, because it is the result of habits that have not been[Pg 30] interrupted for many generations, it would be difficult for a new-comer to conform to these habits. Besides, this estate which M. de Gandelau has rendered so productive, and which he has increased in extent, will have to be divided at his decease amongst his three children. Already he has detached a portion of it to form your sister’s dowry. He intends, then, by the residence we are going to build, to have this part now brought into harmony with the habits of the new proprietors, who are young, and whose mode of life must be different from that which still suits your father. When you are older you will appreciate all these things better. Let us go and resume our work.”

“It’s not an easy thing to explain; but you’re old enough, Paul, to understand it. First of all, your sister Marie now has a different last name than yours; and a well-known, respected name holds a certain status in the neighborhood just like the old house it’s connected to. If you hadn’t been born and your parents were no longer alive, Madame N——, your sister, could come to live on this estate and easily tear down the old house to build a new one. It wouldn’t be harder to introduce a new house than it would be to bring in a new name for the owner. She’d have to create new connections with all the people around you, and therefore establish relationships with them that would likely differ from those your father has with the local community. Your father’s bond with the peasants of Berri, where he’s always lived, is tied to traditions passed down through several generations without a break. He can get their help and inspire a trust that wouldn’t be extended to newcomers or any name but his. The peasants, for their part, unhesitatingly accept favors that they know from experience are genuine. If an outsider with a new name occupied the old manor house, it would lose the prestige your father rightly values; in that case, there would be no benefit in keeping its traditional look. So, M. de Gandelau, who never acts without thinking things through, realizes that someday, due to changing circumstances, his house might no longer suit his children. Before that might happen, he plans to build a new one for your sister; a house the neighborhood will gradually get used to, which will become a new family center since Madame Marie is loved and respected throughout the area. People will adjust to the more modern ways of the new manor house, and no one will find it strange to see the old one gone. Your father is preparing for a gradual shift from a social situation that, while declining even in rural areas, still exists, to one that’s meant to take its place. So you see, even though he values the past and tries to maintain its benefits, he doesn’t believe it can last forever and anticipates the time when it must give way to today’s customs and needs. As natural as your father’s way of living is, stemming from habits that haven’t changed for generations, it would be tough for a newcomer to adapt to those habits. Plus, this estate, which M. de Gandelau has made so productive and which he has expanded, will need to be divided among his three children when he passes away. He’s already set aside a portion of it for your sister’s dowry. His plan with the new residence we’re about to build is to ensure that this section aligns with the lifestyle of the new owners, who are young and whose way of life must differ from what still works for your father. When you’re older, you’ll understand all this better. Let’s get back to work.”

Paul was endeavouring to gain a clear view of the grave subjects his cousin had been discussing. He recalled the conversation of the preceding days between his father and mother, and his mind was evidently full of ideas, new to him, which had been thus suggested. At any rate, the old house began to assume in his eyes a venerable appearance, and he was no longer inclined to censure its inconvenient arrangements and somewhat inelegant exterior.

Paul was trying to get a clear understanding of the serious topics his cousin had been talking about. He thought back to the conversations from the past few days between his parents, and his mind was clearly filled with new ideas that had come from those discussions. In any case, the old house started to look respectable to him, and he wasn't as critical of its awkward layout and somewhat unfashionable exterior.


[Pg 31]

[Pg 31]

CHAPTER IV.
PAUL’S IDEAS RESPECTING ART, AND HOW THEY WERE MODIFIED.

“Before resuming our pencil,” said Eugène, as soon as they were seated once more in his study, “you must know how you are going to proceed. We have sketched the ground plans. We know that they can be realized, that the construction will present no special difficulties; that the partition walls of the upper stories stand vertically on those of the lower ones; that the bearings of the floors are reasonable, and that the openings are conveniently placed. That is satisfactory so far.... But now, do you realize these plans in elevation? That is, can you fancy the house as standing, with its stories, its roofing, its windows, &c.?”

“Before we get back to sketching,” Eugène said as soon as they were seated again in his study, “you need to know how we're going to move forward. We've drafted the floor plans. We know they can be built, that there won't be any major issues with the construction; that the walls on the upper floors are directly above those on the lower floors; that the floor supports are sound, and that the openings are well-placed. So far, so good... But now, can you visualize these plans in elevation? In other words, can you picture the house as it would stand, with its floors, roof, windows, etc.?”

“Well, I can’t say I do.”

“Well, I can’t say that I do.”

“You must then first picture the building to yourself as if it actually existed.... I know that this is hardly possible for you, since there are many architects who are as far off as you from being able to do so when they have drawn horizontal plans on paper, and who in drawing these plans do not see the building for which they are designed. Reflect a little; examine their outlines well, and endeavour to give them in elevation some definite form in your mind’s eye before making use of the pencil.... Take your time. I have a letter to write, and some accounts to attend to; so while I am engaged, try to give me the elevation of one of the fronts of the house,—the entrance-front, for example,[Pg 32] on the north side,—and we will discuss your design. I only give you one piece of advice,—that is, to put nothing upon paper without having previously considered whether your design is appropriate and useful.

"You should first imagine the building as if it actually existed.... I understand this is difficult for you, as there are many architects who also struggle to visualize the building when drawing floor plans on paper and who don’t see the structure they’re designing. Take a moment to think; examine their outlines closely, and try to visualize some specific shape in your mind’s eye before you start sketching.... Take your time. I need to write a letter and take care of some accounts; so while I’m busy, try to create the elevation of one of the fronts of the house—the entrance front, for instance,[Pg 32] on the north side—and we’ll go over your design. I’ll give you one piece of advice—don’t put anything on paper without first considering whether your design is suitable and practical."

“Come, try your best; and don’t forget the scale of proportions.”

“Come on, give it your all; and don’t forget the balance of proportions.”

Paul was much embarrassed, and found the work by no means easy. The ideas which had suggested themselves in abundance at his first attempt were not forthcoming now. However, at the end of a good hour and a half he presented a sketch to his cousin.

Paul felt really awkward and realized the task was far from simple. The ideas that had come to him easily during his first try were missing now. Nevertheless, after a solid hour and a half, he finally showed a draft to his cousin.

“It might be worse,” said Eugène. “You have given the ground floor 15 feet from floor to floor,—that was about what we said; but why the same height for the first floor? The rooms are smaller, and more airy; there is therefore no need to give an equal height to this story, and 13 feet 6 inches would be quite enough. And why put round arched windows on the ground floor? Arched windows are difficult to fit with casements, and there is a difficulty with shutters, jalousies, or outside blinds. Again, the windows of your principal staircase do not ramp with the stairs, and would be cut in the middle by it; which would prevent their being opened, and expose them to danger from the feet in ascending or descending. In the next place, your stair turret does not rise above the cornice, and would not enable you to enter the attics. And so with the servants’ staircase. Your roofs are double pitched; that is, with two angles of inclination. That is not quite the thing for this district. The roofs should be simply triangular, and without hips, which are difficult to keep in repair. Gables are preferable. You have marked quoins of stone at the angles. I see no harm in that; but how would you form your window reveals thus enframed by a kind of pilaster? None of your chimney-stacks rise above your roof; yet you are aware that they usually show. Your[Pg 33] attic windows are too low, and you would run your head against the top in looking out of them. The lintels of these dormer windows must be at least 6 feet 6 inches above the floor. And why make your dormer windows oval? It is a very inconvenient shape, and they are difficult to open and shut. You have drawn the entrance flight of steps in perspective, as the Chinese do ... but that is a trifle. What will you build your walls with? Masonry, rubble-work, masonry and rubble mingled, or stone and bricks?

“It might be worse,” Eugène said. “You’ve set the ground floor height at 15 feet from floor to floor—that’s what we discussed; but why make the first floor the same height? The rooms are smaller and more open, so there’s no need for this floor to be the same height. Thirteen feet 6 inches would be plenty. And why use round arched windows on the ground floor? They're tricky to fit with casements, and they create problems with shutters, jalousies, or outside blinds. Also, the windows on your main staircase don’t align with the stairs and would get cut in the middle by them, which would prevent them from opening and expose them to being kicked. Plus, your stair turret doesn’t rise above the cornice and won’t let you access the attics. The same goes for the servants’ staircase. Your roofs are double-pitched, meaning they have two angled slopes. That’s not ideal for this area. The roofs should just be triangular and without hips, which are hard to maintain. Gables are a better choice. You’ve indicated stone quoins at the corners. I don’t have an issue with that, but how will you make your window reveals framed like a kind of pilaster? None of your chimney stacks rise above the roof, yet you know they usually do. Your attic windows are too low, and you’ll bump your head trying to look out of them. The tops of these dormer windows need to be at least 6 feet 6 inches above the floor. And why make your dormer windows oval? That shape is really inconvenient, and they’re hard to open and close. You’ve drawn the entrance steps in perspective, like the Chinese do... but that’s minor. What material will you use to build your walls? Masonry, rubble work, a mix of masonry and rubble, or stone and bricks?"

Fig. 3.—Roof Plan.

Fig. 3.—Roof Plan.

“Let us study this together. When you draw a horizontal or ground plan, independently of the arrangements, you have to consider how your buildings shall be covered in. For the most important question in a building is that of the manner of roofing it, as every building intended for internal use is a shelter. That is unquestionable, is it not? Well, then, in your building, the plans of which you have now before you, what is observable in the general form of the main block? Two parallelograms intersecting—so (Fig. 3). One parallelogram, a b c d, intersected by another, e f g h. We do not now take into account the bay windows and staircases. If then we raise gables upon the walls, a c, b d, with a length of slope equal to the line a c, we shall[Pg 34] have two equilateral triangles whose bases will be a c and b d, and the angles of inclination 60°, which is the most suitable pitch for slating, inasmuch as it gives no hold to the snow or opportunity for mischief to the wind. If in like manner we erect upon the walls e f g h two gables having a similar inclination, these walls being less in length than those marked a b c d, the triangles will be smaller and their summits less elevated than the first. Consequently the roof raised upon the smaller parallelogram will penetrate that raised upon the larger, and will form by its penetration internal angles which we call valleys; I draw these valleys i k, k l, m n, m o. The inclination of the two roofs being equal, these valleys will, in plan, divide the right angle into two equal angles: you know enough of geometry to understand that.

“Let’s study this together. When you create a horizontal or ground plan, regardless of the layout, you need to think about how your buildings will be topped. The most crucial issue in any building is how it will be roofed, since every building meant for interior use serves as a shelter. That’s clear, right? Now, in the building whose plans you have in front of you, what do you notice about the overall shape of the main block? There are two intersecting parallelograms—like this (Fig. 3). One parallelogram, a b c d, is crossed by another, e f g h. We’re not considering the bay windows and staircases just yet. If we then add gables to the walls, a c and b d, with a slope length equal to the line a c, we’ll form two equilateral triangles that have bases a c and b d, with angles of inclination of 60°, which is the ideal pitch for roofing since it prevents snow buildup and minimizes wind damage. Similarly, if we build two gables on the walls e f g h with the same slope, these walls being shorter than those marked a b c d, the triangles will be smaller and their peaks lower than the first ones. As a result, the roof over the smaller parallelogram will dip into the roof over the larger one, creating internal angles we refer to as valleys; I’ll mark these valleys as i k, k l, m n, m o. Since the inclines of the two roofs are equal, these valleys will divide the right angle into two equal angles in plan view: you know enough about geometry to understand that.”

“Here, then, we see the simplest way of roofing our building; and when roofing is in question, the simplest methods are always the best. Now, in order that our two stairs may give access to the third story, it is necessary that their walls should rise above the cornice of the building and form for them alone an additional story. We will then raise these stair-walls and will give them roofs of their own. One—that of the principal stairs—shall be pyramidal; and the other—that of the small stairs—conical.

“Here, we see the easiest way to roof our building; and when it comes to roofing, the simplest methods are usually the best. Now, for our two staircases to access the third floor, we need to make sure their walls extend above the cornice of the building to create an additional story just for them. We will then raise these stair walls and give them their own roofs. One— for the main staircase—will be pyramidal; and the other— for the small staircase—will be conical.”

“There is no reason why we should not erect upon the two walls g z, s t, of the bay windows, small gables, always with the same inclination of 60°, and cover these projections with two small roofs abutting against the great gables a c, b d. As to the building appropriated on the ground floor to the kitchen and on the first floor to the linen-room, we will follow the same method, and, erecting a gable on the wall u v, we shall have upon this wing a triangular roof, which will also abut against the great gable b d. We shall then have a meeting of two slopes at the[Pg 35] bottom of the roof of the bay window s t, and of that of the linen-room wing. We shall form a lean-to (so as to do without inner gutters,) which will penetrate these two roofs and discharge the water at t. The horizontal projection, therefore, of this assemblage of roofs, will be as the drawing shows in Fig. 3. The chimney-stacks will pass through these roofs, as I indicate to you; and in order to prevent the chimneys from smoking, these stacks should rise at least to the level of the ridge, that is, a little above the topmost crest of the highest roof. With regard to the roofs of the outbuildings, as they are lower—being only one story in height—we need not trouble ourselves about them just now.

“There’s no reason we shouldn’t build small gables on the two walls g z and s t of the bay windows, always with the same 60° angle, and cover these extensions with two small roofs that connect to the large gables a c and b d. For the area on the ground floor designated for the kitchen and on the first floor for the linen room, we’ll use the same approach. By constructing a gable on wall u v, we will have a triangular roof on this wing that will also connect to the large gable b d. This will create a meeting point of two slopes at the bottom of the bay window roof s t and the linen room wing. We’ll form a lean-to (to avoid interior gutters) that will penetrate these two roofs and channel the water at t. Therefore, the horizontal projection of this collection of roofs will be as shown in the drawing in Fig. 3. The chimney stacks will extend through these roofs as I indicate, and to prevent the chimneys from smoking, these stacks should rise at least to the level of the ridge, which means just above the top crest of the highest roof. As for the roofs of the outbuildings, since they are lower—only one story high—we don’t need to worry about them right now.”

“Observe that, as these gables rise perpendicularly, we are enabled to get in the roof a third story, affording some very convenient bedrooms for guests, besides the servants’ rooms (in the attics), which we must provide, and light by means of dormer windows; while we shall be able to provide for the bedrooms in the gables handsome windows with balconies, if we wish.

“Notice that as these gables go up straight, we can fit a third story into the roof, allowing for some really convenient guest bedrooms, in addition to the servants' rooms (in the attics) that we have to include, and light them with dormer windows; plus, we’ll be able to add nice windows with balconies in the gables for the bedrooms if we want.”

“That settled, in principle, it will be as well to arrange the divisions of this story in the roof. Lay a piece of tracing-paper upon the plan of the first floor. Good: now trace all the thick walls which must of necessity be carried up under the roof, since they contain fireplaces. Draw 3 feet 3 inches within the eave walls—i.e. those which do not carry gables—a line that indicates the space rendered useless by the slope of the roof; thus you will get the space of which you are able to make use. The principal stairs reach to this floor, as well as the servants’ stairs. To the left of the thick division wall, which, from the principal staircase, goes to join the angle of the main building towards the south-east—the desirable aspect—we are going to dispose the bedrooms for guests, which will thus form a separate quarter communicating with the chief apartments[Pg 36] by the principal stairs. We can in this part get two good bedrooms, A and B, with their dressing-rooms a and b; and two smaller bedrooms C and D, all having fireplaces. We must not forget the water-closet for these rooms, at W. On the other side, in immediate communication with the servants’ stairs, we can easily get four servants’ bedrooms, E, F, G, H, a lumber-room I, and a water-closet L, for the servants. (Fig. 4.)

“Now that that's settled, let's go ahead and outline the layout of this story in the roof. Place a sheet of tracing paper over the first floor plan. Great, now trace all the thick walls that have to be built under the roof since they hold fireplaces. Draw a line 3 feet 3 inches inside the eave walls—that is, the ones that don’t support gables—to mark the area made unusable by the roof's slope; this way, you'll determine the usable space. The main staircase leads to this floor, as do the servants’ stairs. To the left of the thick dividing wall, which connects to the angle of the main building towards the southeast—the preferred direction—we will arrange guest bedrooms, creating a separate area that links with the main rooms via the main stairs. In this section, we can fit two good-sized bedrooms, A and B, complete with their dressing rooms a and b; plus two smaller bedrooms C and D, all with fireplaces. Don’t forget the water closet for these rooms, located at W. On the opposite side, directly accessible from the servants’ stairs, we can easily fit four servant bedrooms, E, F, G, H, a storage room I, and a water closet L for the staff. (Fig. 4.)”

Fig. 4.—Plan of the Second Floor.

Fig. 4.—Second Floor Plan.

“In the upper part of the coach-house and stable building and over the wash-house, we shall also be able in the roofs to arrange three or four bedrooms for the coachman, groom, &c.

“In the upper part of the carriage house and stable building and above the washroom, we can also set up three or four bedrooms in the roofs for the coachman, groom, etc.”

“And now for the elevations.

"And now for the heights."

“We will raise the ground floor 4 feet above the exterior ground level, in order to give air to our cellars, and to preserve the ground floor from the moisture of the earth. We will give the lower rooms a height of 14 feet to the ceiling. Draw at this level a horizontal string course 12 inches deep, which will be the thickness of the floor. To the rooms of the first floor, which are smaller than those of the ground floor, we will give a height of 12 feet in the clear. Now, mark the thickness of the cornice, with its tabling, 1 foot[Pg 37] 9 inches. Then will begin the roofs, whose height will be fixed by that of the gables. Taking the entrance front we project the angles of the building, the doors and the windows from the plan. Here, then, we have the outline of the façade arranged.”

"We will raise the ground floor 4 feet above the outside ground level to allow air into our cellars and to keep the ground floor dry from moisture. The lower rooms will have a ceiling height of 14 feet. Draw a horizontal string course at this level that is 12 inches deep, which will represent the thickness of the floor. The first floor rooms, which are smaller than those on the ground floor, will have a ceiling height of 12 feet. Now, indicate the thickness of the cornice, including its tabling, at 1 foot 9 inches. Then, the roofs will begin, with their height determined by the gables. Starting with the entrance front, we will outline the angles of the building, the doors, and the windows based on the plan. This gives us the layout of the façade established."

Eugène then took the board and sketched the façade. (Fig. 5).

Eugène then grabbed the board and drew the façade. (Fig. 5).

Fig. 5.—The Entrance Front

Fig. 5.—The Front Entrance

A fair copy on a small scale of all this was soon made, to be sent to Madame Marie N——, that they might know what she thought of it, and might proceed to execute the plan as soon as her reply was received.

A neat version of all this was quickly prepared on a small scale to be sent to Madame Marie N—— so that they could see what she thought about it and get started on the plan as soon as her response was received.

Paul was beginning to perceive some of the difficulties accompanying even the most modest architectural undertaking, and to ask himself how Master Branchu, who could but just manage to write and cipher, had been able to build the Mayor’s house, which was not such a bad one to look at.

Paul was starting to notice some of the challenges that come with even the simplest building project and wondered how Master Branchu, who could barely write and do math, had managed to build the Mayor’s house, which actually looked pretty good.

[Pg 38]

[Pg 38]

His cousin, to whom he referred the question, replied as follows:—

His cousin, to whom he asked the question, replied as follows:—

“Branchu has a practical knowledge of his business; he is a good country mason, who began by carrying the hod: he is the son of a mason, and does what he has seen his father do before him. Besides this, he is intelligent, laborious, and honest. By practice alone he has succeeded in building as well as is usual in the country—perhaps a little better, because he sets himself to work to reason about what he is doing. He observes; he is no simpleton, nor is he vain; he avoids faults, and copies excellences wherever he sees them. You shall see him at work, and you will sometimes be surprised at the justness of his observations, the persistency with which he defends his opinions, and the practical methods of which he is master. If you give him instructions, and he does not quite understand them, he says nothing, but comes again next day to explain to you what he supposes was intended; thus obliging you to repeat one by one all the doubtful points, and to complete what seemed to him incomplete or vague in your statements. I like Branchu because of his persistent determination to understand the orders given him; and what makes him seem troublesome to some appears to me a virtue; for if you have to do with him, you must have foreseen everything, have an answer to every objection, and know exactly what you wish in every particular. He gave up working for Count ——, your neighbour, because he had to undo next day what he had been ordered to do the day before. Ask him about it—the story is worth hearing. This good man, who has had only the most elementary experience in his business, but is thoroughly master of it so far, who knows the materials of the district well, and how to make use of them, will tell you that the architect of that interminable château is an ignoramus, and will prove it to you, after his fashion.[Pg 39] Yet it is evident that the architect in question is a much more learned man than Master Branchu.

“Branchu has a solid understanding of his trade; he is a skilled local mason who started by carrying materials. He’s the son of a mason and replicates what he saw his father do. Additionally, he's smart, hardworking, and honest. Through practice, he has become as good a builder as one usually finds in the countryside—maybe even a bit better, since he takes time to think about what he’s doing. He observes everything; he’s not naive or arrogant; he avoids mistakes and mimics excellence wherever he sees it. When you watch him work, you may be impressed by how insightful his observations are, how determined he is to defend his opinions, and the practical techniques he has mastered. If you give him instructions and he doesn't fully understand, he won’t say anything at first. Instead, he’ll come back the next day to clarify what he thinks you meant, prompting you to review every detail and explain what he found unclear in your directions. I appreciate Branchu for his relentless drive to grasp the tasks given to him; what might seem bothersome to some is, to me, a strength. Working with him means that you have to anticipate everything, be prepared for every objection, and know exactly what you want in every detail. He stopped working for Count ——, your neighbor, because he had to go back and redo what he had been told to do the previous day. Ask him about it—the story is worth hearing. This good man, who has only the most basic experience in his trade but knows it thoroughly so far, who is well-acquainted with the local materials and how to use them, will tell you that the architect of that endless château is clueless and will argue his point in his own way.[Pg 39] Yet, it’s clear that the architect in question is much more knowledgeable than Master Branchu.”

“As a general rule, in giving an order, you should have thought seven times of the objections to which it is liable, otherwise some Master Branchu may start up who, with a single word will demonstrate your thoughtlessness. An architect may, indeed, if he chooses, stop the mouth of objectors when placed under his authority; but to impose silence on people is not to prove that they are wrong, especially if a few days afterwards the director of the works gives contrary orders. Every one has his share of amour-propre, which must not be disregarded. As a subordinate takes kindly and is flattered by the attention you give to his observations when they are well founded, so, on the other hand, he is disposed to doubt your capability if you reject them without examination; especially if, a short time afterwards, facts seem to prove that he might have been right. There is only one means of establishing discipline among a body of workmen; and that is proving to all that you know more about matters than they do, and that you have duly taken account of difficulties.”

“As a general rule, when giving an order, you should think carefully about the objections it might face; otherwise, someone like Master Branchu might arise and point out your lack of consideration with a single comment. An architect can silence critics when under his authority, but silencing people doesn’t mean they’re wrong, especially if the project director later issues conflicting orders. Everyone has their own sense of pride that shouldn’t be ignored. Just as a subordinate feels appreciated and flattered when you acknowledge their valid observations, they’ll also start to question your competence if you dismiss them without thought; especially if, shortly after, events suggest that they might have been right. The only way to establish discipline among workers is by demonstrating that you know more about the situation than they do and that you’ve fully considered the challenges involved.”


[Pg 40]

[Pg 40]

CHAPTER V.
PAUL PURSUES A COURSE OF STUDY IN PRACTICAL ARCHITECTURE.

Meantime, letters and newspapers were daily bringing the most distressing intelligence. The enemy had crossed the French boundary a week ago. Building was a matter scarcely to be thought of. M. de Gandelau was visited almost incessantly by country people coming to impart to him their fears and to ask his advice. The able-bodied youths of the district were summoned to be incorporated in the mobile. The manufactories of the neighbourhood were being closed for want of hands. Groups of peasants—men and women—might be met on the roads, who, contrary to the quiet habits of this province, were speaking in excited tones; some of the women were crying. The labours of the fields were suspended; a painful shudder seemed to pass through the country; lights were seen in the cottages at a late hour of the night; voices were heard calling to each other. The cattle were brought in earlier than usual, and were driven afield later in the morning. When people met each other on the roads they would stay long talking. Sometimes, instead of returning to their own abodes, they would walk rapidly on together in the direction of the neighbouring town.

Meanwhile, letters and newspapers were bringing daily reports of the most distressing news. The enemy had crossed the French border a week ago. Building was hardly a consideration. M. de Gandelau was being visited almost constantly by local people coming to share their fears and seek his advice. The able-bodied young men of the area were called to join the mobile. The local factories were shutting down due to a lack of workers. Groups of peasants—men and women—could be seen on the roads, speaking in excited tones, which was unusual for this quiet region; some of the women were crying. Farming activities were put on hold; a painful tension seemed to ripple through the countryside; lights were visible in the cottages late into the night; voices could be heard calling out to one another. The cattle were brought in earlier than usual and were taken out to the fields later in the morning. When people encountered each other on the roads, they would often stop and talk for a long time. Sometimes, instead of heading back home, they would walk quickly together toward the nearby town.

It was the 20th of August, 1870, when, going into his father’s room early in the morning, Paul found him still more depressed than on the previous days and it was not[Pg 41] merely his aggravated gout that caused the depression. Eugène was there.—“Some are too old, others too young. If this boy was four or five years older,” said M. de Gandelau, embracing his son, “I would send him with all these young fellows who are summoned to the service; but he is too young, happily for his mother. It will be a long struggle, they say; God only knows what will become of our poor country engaged in an insensate war; but our duty is clear—to remain here among all these families, distressed as they are, and bereaved of their children; to wait, and try to calm down this distracted multitude. Do not let us surrender our self-possession, or give way to useless disquietude; let us work—that is the remedy for all evils; and misfortune will not find us more destitute of courage after days of labour than after a period of feverish inactivity. I see that Paul will not be able to return so soon to college. As to yourself, Eugène, nothing obliges you just now to stay in one place rather than another. Your business will be suspended in every quarter; remain here, where you can make yourself useful as long as the country does not require your services.

It was the 20th of August, 1870, when Paul went into his father’s room early in the morning and found him more depressed than in previous days. It wasn’t just his worsening gout that was causing this sadness. Eugène was there. “Some are too old, and others too young. If this boy were four or five years older,” said M. de Gandelau, hugging his son, “I would send him with all these young guys who are being called to serve; but he’s too young, thank goodness for his mother. They say it will be a long fight; God only knows what will happen to our poor country caught up in this senseless war. But our duty is clear—we must stay here with all these families, who are suffering and missing their children; we need to wait and try to calm this frantic crowd. We must not lose our composure or give in to pointless worry; we should work—that’s the solution to all problems; and misfortune won’t find us more lacking in courage after days of hard work than after a time of anxious inactivity. I see that Paul won’t be able to return to college anytime soon. As for you, Eugène, nothing is forcing you to stay in one place or another right now. Your work will be on hold everywhere; stay here, where you can be useful as long as the country doesn’t need your services.

“Who knows what may happen! But even if this state of things continues, we will try to build Marie’s house; it will give employment to those who have been thrown out of work. You will be able to give Paul practical lessons in the elements of construction. We shall, perhaps, run short of the one thing needful for building—money. Ah, well! that will oblige us to discover the means of doing without it. We have the raw material; we have hands, and enough to keep them for some time to come. Let us, then, not give way to despondency and useless recriminations; let us work; we shall be only the better prepared if in one last effort we have to call upon all—old men and children with the rest—to defend our native soil.”

“Who knows what could happen! But even if things stay the same, we’ll try to build Marie’s house; it will give jobs to those who have lost theirs. You’ll be able to give Paul hands-on lessons in the basics of construction. We might, however, run short of the one thing we really need for building—money. Ah, well! that will force us to find ways to make it work without it. We have the materials; we have the labor, and enough to keep them busy for a while. So, let’s not give in to despair and pointless blame; let’s work; we’ll be better prepared if, in one last effort, we need to rally everyone—old men and children along with the rest—to defend our homeland.”

Madame de Gandelau uniting her entreaties with those[Pg 42] of her husband, it was not difficult to persuade Eugène to take up his quarters at the château. In fact, three days subsequently, after having gone away to settle some affairs, he was on his way back with an ample store of paper and instruments required for the details of a building plan.

Madame de Gandelau joined her pleas with those of her husband, so it wasn't hard to convince Eugène to stay at the château. In fact, three days later, after having gone away to handle some matters, he was on his way back with a good supply of paper and tools needed for the details of a building plan.

They could not set to work till the sketch sent to Paul’s sister should be returned, approved or amended. It was decided that during the interval Eugène should give Paul the first notions of the building of a house, that the morning should be the time for instruction, and that in the afternoon our architectural tyro should reproduce the lesson in writing, and have his work corrected at the family gatherings in the evening. Thus the days would be well occupied.

They couldn’t start working until the sketch sent to Paul’s sister was returned, either approved or revised. They decided that in the meantime, Eugène would teach Paul the basics of house construction. Mornings would be reserved for lessons, and in the afternoons, Paul would write about what he learned, having his work reviewed during family gatherings in the evenings. That way, their days would be nicely filled.

Lesson One.

“If you please, Paul, we will take our lessons walking, and for a good reason.”

“If you don’t mind, Paul, let’s have our lessons while walking, and there’s a good reason for that.”

This arrangement was quite satisfactory to Paul, who was certainly not accustomed to this mode of teaching at the Lyceum. The prospect of a course of lessons delivered, re-produced in writing by the pupil, and corrected indoors, had not seemed to him at the first blush quite to harmonize with the idea which a youth of sixteen forms of hours consecrated to recreation; and although after his first attempts architecture seemed to him a very noble study, and he was proud enough to think that his plan was perhaps at this moment being inspected by his sister Marie and her husband, yet, at the moment he was directing his steps towards his cousin’s apartment, he had looked with a somewhat longing eye at the fine old trees in the park, and the brilliant green of the meadows between their dark trunks. A sigh of satisfaction escaped him as he tripped down the steps.

This setup was pretty good for Paul, who definitely wasn't used to this way of teaching at the Lyceum. The idea of taking lessons, writing them down, and having them corrected indoors didn't initially seem to fit with what a sixteen-year-old would think about when it comes to free time. Although after trying it out, he found architecture to be a really impressive field, and he felt pretty proud thinking that his plan might be getting looked at by his sister Marie and her husband right now, he still found himself glancing longingly at the beautiful old trees in the park and the bright green meadows between their dark trunks as he headed towards his cousin's place. A satisfied sigh escaped him as he bounced down the steps.

[Pg 43]

[Pg 43]

“Let us proceed leisurely towards that part of the estate where we are to build the house,” said his cousin, as soon as they were outside; “a knowledge of the ground is indispensable to the architect’s further progress. There are, as you know, several kinds of soils; some resisting, others soft and compressible in various degrees. Rocks form the firmest foundation—one on which we may build with confidence—provided they have not been excavated or disturbed. The name of virgin soil is given to that which presents itself in the condition in which geological phenomena have placed it; that of ‘made ground’ to soil which has been disturbed or deposited by man, or produced by vegetation, or brought to the spot by the sudden violence of torrents. As a general rule, we should give an exclusive preference to virgin soils; yet even some of these must be mistrusted, as I shall explain to you directly.

“Let’s take our time walking to the part of the estate where we’re going to build the house,” said his cousin as soon as they were outside. “Knowing the land is crucial for the architect to move forward. There are, as you know, different types of soil; some are tough, while others are soft and compressible to varying degrees. Rocks provide the best foundation—one we can trust— as long as they haven't been dug up or disturbed. The term virgin soil refers to soil found in the condition it was left by geological processes; ‘made ground’ refers to soil that has been altered or placed there by humans, or created by plants, or brought in by sudden floods. Generally speaking, we should prefer virgin soils exclusively; however, even some of these must be approached with caution, as I will explain to you shortly.”

“We must then endeavour to distinguish a virgin soil from ‘made’ or disturbed ground; and to do so, some acquaintance with elementary geology is indispensable. Thus, the crystalliform rocks, granites, gneiss, and crystalline schists remain in the condition in which the cooling of the globe and the upheavals of its crust have placed them. The sandstones, the calcareous rocks, the marls, the gravels, even the clays deposited by water under an enormous pressure, are stratified—that is to say, deposited in layers, like the courses of a building, and present an excellent foundation. The hill there on the right, in whose direction your sister’s wood extends, presents, as you see from this point, escarpments laid bare by the waters of the brook we are going to cross; observe that the stone, which seems denuded, presents itself in almost horizontal layers. It is an oolitic limestone, excellent for building, and on which you may confidently rely as a foundation also. In these strata, therefore, we may excavate cellars, and make use of what we have taken from the excavations to raise the[Pg 44] walls. Here we are walking on sandy clays, intermingled with millstone grit. This also forms a good and incompressible foundation. It is otherwise with pure clays; not that they are compressible, but, if they are not secured—if, for instance, they lie on a declivity—they are liable to slip in consequence of the infiltration of water between their layers, and the house built on them goes down with them. And thus you may sometimes see whole villages built on clayey declivities, descending into the valley. Great attention, therefore, must be paid to the method in which you build in clays, if you would avoid these dangers. Sometimes also, when they are greatly compressed by a heavy building, the clays sink down under the weight, and rise proportionally at a little distance, in see-saw fashion. Marine sands, pure, fine or gravelly, are well adapted to receive foundations, because the sand settles naturally, however slightly moistened it may be. To such a degree is this the case, that we can form an artificial foundation if needful by depositing good beds of sea-sand on a questionable soil, and moistening these beds thoroughly. The finer the sand is and the freer from clay the better, for its small, hard, equal grains leave only very slight intervals between them and touch on several points. If the weight compresses the layer of sand, and forces it to settle down, the settling down is regular, and consequently harmless. The building settles thus to the extent of some fractions of an inch, according to its weight; but it does not dislocate, because it settles uniformly. The alluvial deposits formed by slowly-flowing waters, such as rivers or lakes, also compose good foundations, because the layers of gravel or mud have been gradually deposited, and are closely heaped together by the liquid that transported them. It is quite otherwise with marshy soils, for the water, having no current, has allowed vegetables to grow in its bed. These vegetables on dying are annually replaced by others. Successive[Pg 45] layers of detritus are then formed under very trifling pressure, leaving between them innumerable cavities, just like a heap of rotten hay. These deposits are called peat-bogs. Nothing can be safely placed on these deposits, for they sink down under the lightest burden. Stop! here we are near the stream, at a point which exhibits this phenomenon. Stamp on this closely-turfed soil. You perceive that the ground sounds hollow, and shakes beneath the shock. Sometimes these peat-beds reach to such a depth, through the accumulation of vegetable detritus, that the bottom can scarcely be reached. If you build upon these, your construction will gradually sink, often unequally, on account of the inclination of the sub-soil, so that the building will lean to one side. It is thus that at Pisa and at Bologna, in Italy, there are towers which inclined thus while they were being built, until the turf was completely compressed under their weight. When these soils occur, the turf must be removed, the rock or gravel must be reached, or piles must be driven in very close to each other, until they can be forced no deeper. Then, on the heads of these piles is placed what is called a raft, a kind of wooden framing, between the spaces of which concrete is poured, and on which the first courses of masonry are placed. Whole cities are built thus. Venice and Amsterdam rest only upon forests of piles driven in mud, which is spongy, because it was formed under a shallow sheet of water which had not power to compress it.

“We need to differentiate between untouched soil and ‘made’ or disturbed ground; to do this, some basic knowledge of geology is essential. The crystalline rocks—granites, gneiss, and crystalline schists—remain in the state they were left by the cooling of the Earth and the shifting of its crust. Sandstones, limestone, marls, gravels, and even clays deposited by water under tremendous pressure are layered, like the levels of a building, and provide a solid foundation. The hill to the right, where your sister’s woods stretch, has exposed cliffs shaped by the water from the brook we’re about to cross; notice that the exposed rock is arranged in almost horizontal layers. This is oolitic limestone, great for construction, and can also serve as a reliable foundation. Thus, we can dig cellars in these layers and use the excavated material to build the walls. Right now, we're walking on sandy clays mixed with millstone grit. This also makes for a good and stable foundation. Pure clays, on the other hand, can be problematic; they aren’t compressible, but if they aren’t stabilized—like if they sit on a slope—they can shift due to water seeping between their layers, causing any structures built on them to sink. This can lead to entire villages on clayey slopes sliding down into the valley. Therefore, careful attention must be paid to how you build on clay to avoid these risks. Sometimes, when heavily pressured by a large building, clays can settle under the weight, causing the ground nearby to rise and fall like a seesaw. Marine sands that are clean, fine, or gravelly are great for foundations because the sand settles naturally, even when slightly moist. In fact, we can create an artificial foundation by laying down quality sea-sand on questionable soil and thoroughly moistening it. The finer and cleaner the sand, the better, because its small, hard, uniform grains leave minimal gaps and touch at various points. If weight compresses the layer of sand, it settles evenly, making it safe. The building may settle a little, just fractions of an inch based on its weight; it won’t come undone because it settles uniformly. Alluvial deposits formed by slow-moving water, like rivers or lakes, also make good foundations, as their gravel or mud layers have been deposited gradually and compacted together by the water. Marshy soils are completely different; the stagnant water allows plants to grow in the area. When these plants die, they’re replaced every year by new ones. This leads to layers of detritus forming under only slight pressure, leaving countless cavities, much like a pile of decayed hay. These deposits are known as peat-bogs. Nothing can be safely placed on these, as they sink under the slightest weight. Wait! We’re near the stream, where you can see this effect. Step on this densely grassy soil. You’ll notice the ground sounds hollow and shakes beneath your foot. Sometimes, these peat layers are so deep due to accumulated plant material that the bottom is hard to reach. If you build on these, your structure will gradually sink, often unevenly, because of the slope of the ground beneath it, causing the building to lean. This is why there are towers in Pisa and Bologna, Italy, that began to lean as they were built, until the turf was completely compressed under their weight. When dealing with such soils, the turf must be removed, the rock or gravel must be reached, or piles need to be driven in very close together until they can’t go deeper. Then, a raft—a kind of wooden framework—is laid on top of these piles, with concrete poured between the gaps, and the first layers of masonry are added. Whole cities are built this way. Venice and Amsterdam are supported only by forests of piles driven into soft mud, which is spongy because it formed under a shallow body of water that couldn’t compress it."

Fig. 6.

Fig. 6.

“But it is not enough to know the nature of the soil on which a building is to be erected; we must also examine the subjacent water-courses, and how the rain-water flows off on the surface of the ground, or beneath it. The presence of a bed of clay, however thin, between strata of limestone, grit or sand, is a most important fact to the builder; for such beds being impervious—that is, not[Pg 46] allowing the rain-water to penetrate them—give rise to currents or sheets of water, which may occasion most disastrous consequences to the foundations. Examine this greenish layer just here, along the escarpment;—it is of clay; it is very thin, and cannot retain water; but suppose it were 20 inches thick. The rains, which will easily penetrate the gravel placed above, will be arrested by this layer of clay, and pursue their course along its plane of inclination, and they will gradually form cavities like small grottoes, and a concealed current. If you build a cellar wall or a foundation descending below that accumulation of water, it will reach your wall and penetrate it, in spite of your efforts, and will fill your cellars. It will consequently be necessary at the outset to divert this accumulation of water by collecting it in a drain to keep it away from your buildings. Give me your note-book, that I may show clearly what I mean by a sketch—(Fig. 6). Let A B be the stratum of clay, C D the pervious stratum of gravel or sand. A sheet of water running from E to F will be formed after every shower. This sheet will be arrested by the foundation or cellar wall G H, and will[Pg 47] soon permeate it, since it cannot reascend nor penetrate the clay. We must, therefore, provide, at I, a transverse drain, with openings on the upper side, through which water will find its way into the channel shown in sketch K. This drain will take the water thus collected wherever you like, and leave the wall G H perfectly dry. You understand, don’t you?

"But it’s not enough to know the type of soil where a building will be built; we also need to look at the underground water pathways and how the rainwater flows on the surface or below it. The presence of a layer of clay, no matter how thin, between layers of limestone, grit, or sand is extremely important for the builder because these clay layers are impervious—that is, they don’t allow rainwater to seep through—leading to currents or sheets of water that could cause serious problems for the foundations. Look at this greenish layer here along the slope; it’s clay, very thin, and can’t hold water. But imagine it were 20 inches thick. The rain, which can easily seep through the gravel above, will be stopped by this clay layer and will flow along its slope, eventually creating cavities like little grottos and a hidden current. If you build a cellar wall or a foundation that goes below this water accumulation, water will reach your wall and seep in, despite your efforts, filling your cellars. Therefore, it’s essential at the start to redirect this water accumulation by collecting it in a drain to keep it away from your buildings. Hand me your notepad so I can clarify what I mean with a sketch—(Fig. 6). Let A B be the clay layer, and C D the permeable layer of gravel or sand. A sheet of water flowing from E to F will form after every rain. This sheet will be stopped by the foundation or cellar wall G H and will soon seep through it since it can't rise back up or penetrate the clay. We must, therefore, install a cross drain at I, with openings on the upper side so that water can flow into the channel shown in sketch K. This drain will take the collected water wherever you want and leave the wall G H completely dry. You understand, right?"

“But if you have to lay your foundations entirely in clay, you must adopt much more serious precautions: for, as I told you just now, the whole bed of clay may chance to slip.

"But if you have to build your foundations completely in clay, you need to take much more serious precautions: because, as I just mentioned, the entire layer of clay could potentially shift."

Fig. 7.

Fig. 7.

“Banks of clay are apt to slip, especially when they present such a section as I have drawn—(Fig 7). Let A be a bed of rock, B a bed of clay. Rain-water falling on the upper side from D to C, will pass at C below the bed of clay; and if the rain is persistent, it will form from C to E a soft, slippery, soapy stratum, so that the clay bed C B E will slide over it by its own weight, but especially if at G you have burdened it with a building.

“Clay banks can easily slip, especially when they have a shape like the one I've drawn—(Fig 7). Let A represent a layer of rock, and B represent a layer of clay. Rainwater falling on the upper side from D to C will flow below the clay layer at C; if the rain continues, it will create a soft, slippery, soapy layer from C to E, causing the clay layer C B E to slide over it due to its own weight, especially if there's a building placed on it at G.

“How, then, can we guard against the danger? First, by collecting the water at C into a sewer, or a dry stone drain, so that it may not pass under the clay bed,—in[Pg 48] case the latter is very thick. Secondly, if it is only a few yards thick, by getting down to the rock or gravel for the foundation wall, and placing a collecting sewer at I, as above. Then the triangular bed of clay, C I K, will not be able to slide, being kept up by the firmly-planted and loaded wall. The part of the clay lying below, not being moistened from above, will not slip. But this wall, H, and its drain, I, must be thick enough to resist the pressure of the triangle C I K.

“How can we protect ourselves from the danger? First, by redirecting the water at C into a sewer or a dry stone drain, so that it doesn't flow under the clay bed—in case that layer is very thick. Secondly, if it's only a few yards thick, by digging down to the rock or gravel for the foundation wall, and placing a collecting sewer at I, as mentioned above. This way, the triangular bed of clay, C I K, won't be able to slide, as it will be supported by the solidly established and weighted wall. The part of the clay underneath, not receiving moisture from above, won't slip. However, this wall, H, and its drain, I, need to be thick enough to withstand the pressure from the triangle C I K.

“You perceive, then, how important it is to understand the soils on which you have to build; and how essential it is for an architect to have some acquaintance with geology. Remember this well, for the architects of the preceding generation have shown a contempt for these studies, and have relied on their contractors in many instances where that knowledge was required.

"You see how important it is to understand the soils you're building on; and how essential it is for an architect to have some knowledge of geology. Keep this in mind, because the architects from the previous generation disregarded these studies and often relied on their contractors when that knowledge was necessary."

“We shall also take into consideration muddy low-lying soils, permeated by water, which cannot be dug into, because their consistency is little better than that of compact mud, and in which the deeper you dig the less resistance you meet. When these soils are not of a turfy description, contain little vegetable detritus, and always retain the same quantity of water, you can build upon them, for water is not compressible. Your building is then a kind of boat; the only question is, how to prevent the water from escaping, from receding under the weight of the structure as it does under that of a boat. When you plunge into a bath half full of water, the liquid rises along the brim proportionately to the volume of your body. But suppose that a board cut out so as exactly to fit the outline of your body, prevents the water from rising around you, you will not be able to sink into the water, and it will bear you on its surface. Well, then, the problem of building in a muddy soil consists in preventing the mud from rising around the house in proportion to[Pg 49] the pressure. I must once more give you a sketch, showing the method of securing a successful result in this particular case. (Fig. 8.)

“We will also consider muddy low-lying soils, soaked with water, that cannot be dug into because they are barely any better than solid mud, and the deeper you dig, the less resistance you find. When these soils are not grassy, contain little plant debris, and always hold the same amount of water, you can build on them, since water is not compressible. Your building then acts like a type of boat; the only question is how to stop the water from escaping or receding under the weight of the structure, just as it does under a boat. When you sink into a bath that is half full of water, the water level rises around you based on how much space your body takes up. But if there were a board perfectly shaped to fit your body, keeping the water from rising around you, you wouldn't be able to sink, and the water would support you on its surface. So, the challenge of building on muddy soil is to prevent the mud from rising around the house in proportion to the pressure. I will provide you with a sketch showing how to achieve a successful outcome in this case. (Fig. 8.)”

Fig. 8.

Fig. 8.

“Let us suppose we have been digging in ‘made ground’ A, i.e., ground in which we cannot build with security. At B we reach the virgin soil, but it is very moist—mud of old formation, permeated by water, and in which one sinks in walking. The deeper we go into it the softer we find it. A bar thrust down to the depth of two or three yards discovers no bottom, and the holes made in it are immediately filled with water. Piles driven in sink up to the head. Now, there can be no doubt that for an ordinary building it will not do to spend in foundations double what the building itself would cost. We must consider, therefore. In this case we shall dig a trench of about 1 foot 6 inches to 2 feet deep, to receive the walls forming the perimeter of the house, as drawn at E; then, in these trenches, and over the whole area of the building, we shall pour concrete, having a thickness of 2 feet to 2 feet 6 inches, between the trenches, as at F. We shall thus have formed a cover of homogeneous material, which will prevent the mud, G H, comprised within its edges, from rising. The weight of the made ground A will suffice to keep down the rest. On a plateau of this kind you will be able to build securely.

“Let’s say we’ve been digging in ‘made ground’ A, which means ground that isn’t stable enough for building. At B, we reach solid soil, but it’s very wet—mud from long ago, soaked with water, and you sink when you walk on it. The deeper we go, the softer it gets. A pole pushed down to a depth of two or three yards shows no bottom, and any holes made in it fill up with water right away. Piles driven into it sink all the way down. Clearly, for a normal building, it’s not practical to spend double the cost of the building itself just on foundations. So we need to think this through. In this situation, we’ll dig a trench about 1 foot 6 inches to 2 feet deep for the walls that form the perimeter of the house, as shown at E; then, in these trenches and over the entire area of the building, we’ll pour concrete, about 2 feet to 2 feet 6 inches thick between the trenches, like at F. This will create a solid cover that keeps the mud, G H, contained within its edges from rising. The weight of the made ground A will be enough to hold everything down. You’ll be able to build safely on a base like this.”

“You will, perhaps, ask me what ‘concrete’ is, and how it is made. You will learn this later on.”

"You might ask me what 'concrete' is and how it's made. You'll find out later."

Talking and making sketches, Paul and his cousin had[Pg 50] reached the slope of the hill on which the house was to be built.

Talking and sketching, Paul and his cousin had[Pg 50] reached the slope of the hill where the house was going to be built.

“The situation is good,” said Eugène. “We have an excellent calcareous soil, from which we shall even be able to get stone or rubble fit for building. Here, on the lower slopes, we have fairly clean sandy clay, with which we shall make brick. And there is the spring of fresh water coming from the wood, and passing out below the lowest of the limestone beds; we shall easily secure it, and lead it along the house, where it will be doubly useful, for it will give us water for the requirements of the household, and carry off in a drain all the house sewage and impurities, which we will discharge into that old excavation which I see on our left.

“The situation is great,” said Eugène. “We have a fantastic calcareous soil, from which we can even get stone or rubble suitable for building. Here, on the lower slopes, we have relatively clean sandy clay, which we can use to make bricks. And there’s a fresh water spring coming from the woods, flowing out below the lowest limestone layer; we can easily secure it and run it along the house, where it will be really useful, as it will provide water for the household and carry off the sewage and waste from the house, which we’ll discharge into that old excavation I see on our left.

“However, we must examine before we proceed, for it seems to me that these beds have already been worked at some points. We should be very likely to meet with some of those carelessly-conducted quarryings which are too common in this neighbourhood.”

“However, we should take a look before we move on, because it seems to me that these spots have already been dug into at some places. We’re likely to come across some of those poorly done quarrying operations that are all too common around here.”

“How,” asked Paul, “can good building-stone be distinguished from that of inferior quality?”

“How,” Paul asked, “can you tell good building stone from low-quality stone?”

“It is not always easy to distinguish it, and in this, as in many other branches of knowledge, experience must confirm theory. Among calcareous stones, which comprise, with certain sandstones, the materials that can be easily quarried and worked, some are hard, others soft; but the hardest are not always those which best resist the effects of time. Many limestones contain clay, and as this retains water, when frosts supervene, these clayey parts swell, and burst blocks whose substance is composed of carbonate of lime, and also of silica, in larger or smaller quantity. Limestones free from clay are those which best resist moisture, and are least liable to be damaged by frost. When, as here, we have beds laid bare by erosion, it is easy to distinguish the good from the defective ones. Thus, observe[Pg 51] that large dark-looking mass, whose smooth bare edge has been covered with lichens for centuries; it is of an excellent quality, for lichens spread over a rock very slowly; and to enable them to attach themselves to this stone and give it that grey speckled appearance, the limestone must have resisted the decomposing action of the atmosphere. Now, look at that bed of nearly pure white, and which seems so sound. Well; it has this fair appearance only because at every frost it has lost its skin; its surface has been decomposed. Touch this rock, and you will observe a white dust remaining on your hands. It is so, is it not? The quality of this block is consequently bad; in fact, you see that below it the grass is covered with small calcareous exfoliations, whereas the turf under the grey block is quite free from dust. It is then very desirable for an architect, when he intends to build, to go and see the quarries, and observe how the beds that compose them stand when exposed to the air, a thing—I may tell you—our brethren rarely do.”

“It’s not always easy to tell the difference, and like in many other areas of knowledge, experience has to back up theory. Among calcareous stones, which, along with some sandstones, can be easily quarried and worked, some are hard and others soft; however, the hardest ones aren’t always the most durable against time’s effects. Many limestones have clay in them, and since clay holds water, when frost hits, these clay-filled parts expand and cause blocks made of carbonate of lime and varying amounts of silica to crack. Limestones that are free of clay tend to resist moisture better and are less likely to be damaged by frost. When we have layers exposed by erosion, it becomes easy to tell the good ones from the bad. Take a look at that large, dark mass with a smooth, bare edge that’s been covered in lichens for centuries; it’s excellent quality because lichens grow on rock very slowly, and for them to attach themselves and create that grey speckled look, the limestone has had to withstand the degrading effects of the atmosphere. Now, look at that almost pure white layer that appears solid. Its nice appearance is just because it loses its outer layer with every frost; its surface has deteriorated. If you touch this rock, you’ll notice a white dust left on your hands. Right? This block is therefore of poor quality; in fact, you can see that below it the grass is coated with small calcareous flakes, while the turf under the grey block is completely dust-free. It is very important for an architect, when planning to build, to check out the quarries and see how the layers hold up when exposed to the air—a thing, I must say, our peers rarely do.”

Lesson Two.

Paul was greatly pleased with the method adopted by his cousin for giving him the first notions of building. In the evening he presented as his day’s work a fair transcription of all that his teacher had explained to him on the ground. He even illustrated his text by some pretty good diagrams. The corrections were quickly made after dinner. But next day the incessant rain prevented them from going out, and Eugène decided that the second lecture should be given in the house. “We shall have illustrations enough before us; the château itself will supply them. We will go through it from cellar to attic, and study its materials and methods of construction—to criticize them if they are bad, or to take note of them if they are good.” When teacher and pupil had gone down into[Pg 52] the cellars, Eugène began by saying, “Look how damp this cellar wall on the side of the courtyard is; and see how the mortar in the joints of the stones has fallen, owing to two causes:—first, in building these walls, the precaution was not taken of cementing them on the outside, so as to make the water in the ground run down to the bottom; second, the mortar employed in the building was not made with hydraulic lime. There are two principal kinds of lime: fat or rich lime and hydraulic lime. The first is obtained by burning the compact limestones usually found at the top of the beds; it is called fat because when slaked it is glutinous and sticks to the tool with which it is mixed; this lime, on being immersed in water, swells and sends forth a dense vapour, as you may have observed, and mixed with sand is slow in setting. Employed above ground, mortars made with this lime become at length very hard, but retain more or less for a time a certain plasticity. These mortars, however, as they are slow in setting, are readily softened by water, and cannot then ever harden. Hydraulic limes, on the other hand (obtained by burning the lias limestones), when mixed with sand, soon become very hard, and set all the better for being in a damp place. Hence this lime is called hydraulic, because it is employed for all masonry-work under water. In default of lias limestones, artificial hydraulic limes are made, by grinding a certain proportion of clay with a limestone suitable for making ordinary lime. Hydraulic lime is tested by slacking—that is to say, mixing it with water; when it slakes with the production of very little vapour.

Paul was really happy with the way his cousin introduced him to the basics of building. That evening, he showed off a well-done copy of everything his teacher had explained to him that day. He even included some pretty good diagrams to illustrate his points. The corrections were quickly made after dinner. But the next day, the nonstop rain kept them from going outside, so Eugène decided to hold the second lecture indoors. “We’ll have plenty of illustrations right in front of us; the château itself will provide them. We’ll go through it from the basement to the attic and examine its materials and construction methods—to critique them if they’re poor or take note of them if they’re solid.” Once they went down into[Pg 52] the cellars, Eugène began by saying, “Look how damp this cellar wall is on the courtyard side; and see how the mortar in the joints of the stones has crumbled for two reasons: first, when building these walls, they didn’t take precautions to seal them on the outside to allow water in the ground to drain away; second, the mortar used in the construction wasn’t made with hydraulic lime. There are two main types of lime: fat lime and hydraulic lime. The fat lime comes from burning the dense limestones usually found at the top layers; it’s called fat because when slaked, it becomes sticky and adheres to the mixing tool. When this lime is mixed with water, it expands and releases a lot of vapor, as you’ve probably noticed, and when combined with sand, it takes a long time to set. When used above ground, mortars made from this lime eventually harden a lot but still maintain some plasticity for a time. However, since these mortars set slowly, they soften easily with water and will never harden afterward. In contrast, hydraulic limes (made from burning lias limestones), when mixed with sand, harden quickly and actually set better in damp conditions. That’s why it’s called hydraulic, since it’s used for masonry work underwater. If lias limestones aren’t available, artificial hydraulic limes can be made by grinding a certain amount of clay with a limestone suitable for making regular lime. You can test hydraulic lime by slaking it—that is, mixing it with water; when it slakes, it produces very little vapor.

“It is with hydraulic lime that concretes, of which I spoke to you yesterday, are made. The mortar being prepared, a certain proportion of hard gravel, about the size of eggs, is mingled with it; the whole is well mixed and thrown into the excavations, where it is rammed with wooden rammers. If the lime is good and the concrete[Pg 53] well made, it forms a veritable rock, similar to the conglomerates or pudding-stone of natural formation. As, when set, water penetrates with difficulty through these concretes, they prevent that percolation of subjacent water to which cellars made in wet grounds are liable.

“It is with hydraulic lime that the concretes I mentioned yesterday are made. After preparing the mortar, a specific amount of hard gravel, about the size of eggs, is mixed in; everything is thoroughly blended and poured into the excavations, where it is compacted with wooden rammers. If the lime is good and the concrete[Pg 53] is well made, it forms a solid rock, similar to the natural conglomerates or pudding-stone. Since, once set, water has a hard time penetrating these concretes, they prevent the flow of water from below, which is an issue for cellars built in wet areas.”

“If the wall you see there had been built with mortar made with hydraulic lime, it would have been sound, and the mortar joints would have been as hard as the stone itself. You will easily understand that when the water has gradually softened and liquefied the mortar in the beds and joints at the base of a wall, the stones which compose it settle, and all the rest of the building suffers. That is why the front of the house, towards the court, presents a considerable number of cracks, that are filled in from time to time, but of course with no result in doing away with the cause of the mischief.

“If the wall you see over there had been built with mortar made from hydraulic lime, it would have been sturdy, and the mortar joints would have been as hard as the stone itself. You can easily understand that when water gradually softens and liquefies the mortar in the beds and joints at the base of a wall, the stones that make it up settle, and the rest of the building suffers. That's why the front of the house, facing the courtyard, shows a significant number of cracks, which are patched up from time to time, but obviously, that doesn't fix the root cause of the problem."

Fig. 9

Fig. 9

Fig. 10.

Fig. 10.

“You observe that the cellar wall which receives the arch of the vault is very thick, much thicker than is the wall of the ground floor. The latter is scarcely 2 feet thick, whereas this is full 3 feet. This additional thickness is given to the inside principally to receive the springing of the vault. A sketch will enable you to understand the reason of this arrangement. Let A (Fig. 9) be the thickness of the wall of a house on the ground floor—a thickness of 1 foot 8 inches if cellars are wanted beneath[Pg 54] the ground floor; the floor line being at B and the outside ground line at C, it will be well first to indicate the floor line by a projection,—a greater thickness given to this wall on the outside, say of 2 inches. At A, then, the wall will have a thickness of 1 foot 10 inches. Your cellar arch being drawn at D, we must reserve a resting-place of at least 8 inches, to receive the first arch-stones of the spring of the vault; then it is well to give on the side next the ground a greater projection, to make a good footing for the plinth; this projection being 2 inches, we shall have at F a thickness of 2 feet and at G 2 feet 8 inches at least, as it will not do for the wall which rises to bear on the oblique beds of the vault, otherwise it would not have a solid footing, and would be weakened or reduced in thickness by this arch, which would penetrate it, as we see in the drawing I. But come here into this other cellar, which belongs to the oldest part of the château, and is built with good stones. The builder did not wish to lose space within, and as he built with worked stone he sought to economise material. What, then, did he do? (Fig. 10.) He gave his[Pg 55] cellar wall only the thickness of that of the ground floor; at regular distances he put massive corbels 2 feet above the floor; upon these corbels he carried arches projecting 10 inches, and on these arches, which replace the extra thickness or counter-wall of which I spoke to you just now, he carried his vaulting arch. This perspective sketch will enable us readily to understand this method of construction. The upper wall thus leaves the vault perfectly free and rises plumb over its lower face.

“You notice that the cellar wall that supports the arch of the vault is very thick, much thicker than the wall on the ground floor. The ground floor wall is barely 2 feet thick, while this one is a full 3 feet. This extra thickness is mainly to support the arch of the vault. A sketch will help you understand why this is set up this way. Let A (Fig. 9) represent the thickness of a house wall on the ground floor—1 foot 8 inches, if there are cellars below[Pg 54] the ground floor; the floor line being at B and the outside ground line at C. First, it’s good to show the floor line with a projection—a thicker outer wall, let’s say 2 inches more. So, at A, the wall thickness will be 1 foot 10 inches. With your cellar arch drawn at D, we need to leave at least 8 inches for the first arch stones that support the vault; then it's wise to create a larger projection on the side facing the ground for a solid footing for the base; this projection being 2 inches, we will have a thickness of 2 feet at F and at least 2 feet 8 inches at G, since the wall above needs to bear on the slanted beds of the vault, or else it won't have a strong footing, and the thickness could be compromised by the arch, as illustrated in drawing I. Now, let’s move to another cellar, which is part of the oldest section of the château, constructed with solid stones. The builder didn't want to lose space inside, and since he used cut stone, he aimed to save materials. So, what did he do? (Fig. 10.) He made his cellar wall the same thickness as that of the ground floor; at regular intervals, he installed sturdy corbels 2 feet above the floor; on these corbels, he added arches that projected 10 inches, and on these arches, which replace the extra thickness or counter-wall I just mentioned, he built his vaulting arch. This perspective sketch will help us easily grasp this construction method. The upper wall thus allows the vault to be completely free and rises straight above its lower face.”

“Is it all clear to you? Well, let us go and look at that little flight of steps which perhaps you have never attentively examined. It is 4 feet 3 inches wide, which was large enough to afford a passage to the queues of wine. Observe (Fig. 11): the ramping vault is composed of as many arches, one above another, as there are steps; that is extremely well managed, solid and easily built. In fact, when the stone steps are laid, over above them is successively fixed the same wood centre which, of course, is raised at each step; and upon this centre an arch is built, which is quickly done, as the stones are worked ready. In this way the arches follow the section of the steps, and the centre being shifted—after each arch is keyed—to the next step commencing from the bottom, two men can turn five or six of these arches in one day, so that if there are twelve steps, this ramping vault may be built in two days. Look, I will show you how this construction should be denoted in perspective and geometrical section in your résumé to-day—A and B.

“Is everything clear to you? Alright, let's go check out that little flight of stairs that you might not have looked at closely. It's 4 feet 3 inches wide, which is wide enough for the queues of wine. Take a look (Fig. 11): the ramping vault is made up of as many arches as there are steps, stacked on top of each other; it's very well constructed, sturdy, and easy to build. In fact, when the stone steps are laid, the same wooden center is placed above them, which is lifted at each step; then an arch is built on this center, which is quick to do since the stones are prepared. This way, the arches follow the shape of the steps, and after each arch is completed, the center is moved to the next step starting from the bottom, allowing two men to construct five or six of these arches in one day. So, if there are twelve steps, this ramping vault can be built in just two days. Here, I’ll show you how this construction should be represented in perspective and geometrical section in your résumé today—A and B.

Fig. 11.

Fig. 11.

“Let us go up to the ground floor. Look at the efflorescence resembling cotton wool on the interior of the walls: it is the saltpetre which forms inside the stone, and, through the humidity of the ground, crystallizes on the surface. This saltpetre affects the stone injuriously, ultimately eats it away, and throws off any painting that we might endeavour to use as a counteractive on the interior[Pg 56] surface. Mastic cements are made to stop the effects of the saltpetre, but these means only delay its appearance for a short time without curing the evil, and this cement soon falls off in a crust. It is therefore necessary in building, especially in the country, to prevent the damp of the ground from rising up in the walls, and to stop it at the ground level. The interposition of a layer of pitch beneath the plinth has sometimes been tried, in order to prevent the absorption of damp by the stones—or what is called capillary attraction—but this method is very inefficient. The pitch oozes out under the pressure, as it does not harden sufficiently to bear that pressure, or it decomposes[Pg 57] and combines with the lime. The best plan is to lay a course of slates in the mortar-bed between the first lower courses of the plinth. The slate effectually hinders that effect of capillary attraction, and the damp is unable to rise in the walls.

“Let’s head down to the ground floor. Check out the fluffy, cotton-like growth on the walls inside: that’s saltpeter forming within the stone, which crystallizes on the surface due to the moisture in the ground. This saltpeter damages the stone, eventually wearing it away and peeling off any paint we might try to use as a remedy on the interior surface.[Pg 56] Mastic cements are created to combat the effects of saltpeter, but these solutions only postpone its appearance for a short while without actually fixing the problem, and the cement quickly comes off in flakes. Therefore, when building, especially in rural areas, it’s essential to stop the ground moisture from rising up the walls and to block it at the ground level. Some have attempted to put a layer of pitch under the base to prevent the stones from absorbing moisture—or what is known as capillary attraction—but this method is quite ineffective. The pitch seeps out under pressure since it doesn’t harden enough to withstand it, or it breaks down and mixes with the lime.[Pg 57] The best approach is to lay a course of slates in the mortar bed between the first lower courses of the base. The slate effectively blocks that capillary attraction, preventing the moisture from rising in the walls.”

Fig. 12.

Fig. 12.

“Now observe this front wall in the court: it forms a protuberance at the floor level of the first story. We call that a bulging of the wall. Instead of preserving its vertical plane, as it should have done, it has bulged out; and why? Because it has been thrust out by a force acting from within outwards. What is that force? It might be an arch; but there is no arching on the ground floor. It can therefore be only the floor. It is not clear at first sight how a floor, which is a horizontal plane, can thrust; for to thrust, we must suppose the floor to expand in one direction, which cannot be. But see what happens. Give me your best attention.... Formerly, to compose a floor, large beams were laid from wall to wall, and upon these beams lighter pieces of timber, called joists; then on these was laid a bed of earth, gravel, or sand, and upon that a surface of mortar to receive the tiling. This made a very heavy mass. Now, as a piece of timber, even of considerable section, bends in time under its own weight—that is to say, from being straight becomes curved—its tendency to bend will be proportionally greater when it is weighted. The more it bends, the more powerful its thrust upon the inner surface of the walls in which it has its bearing. It is this pressure upon the interior surface that tends to thrust the wall outwards. But if, as in this case, in order to relieve the bearing of the beams, struts of wood have been put underneath (Fig. 12), this effect of thrust is all the more sensible because the arm of the lever is longer. You do not quite understand, I see. A sketch will make it clear to you. Let A be the section of the wall, or, if you will, its thickness. If the beam bends[Pg 58] according to the line C D, there occurs a pressure at D, which produces a thrust at F and the rounding of the wall, as indicated by the dotted curves. Supposing even that in lieu of the strut E we have a stone corbel, the effect produced will be the same, though less forcible, unless the tail of the corbel reaches through the wall, as you see marked at I, and this tail K is weighted in such a manner that the weight neutralizes the pressure which the beam exerts at the end L. This has not been done here, where instead of the wood strut, a corbel was put. This corbel has but a middling hold in the wall, and the latter, formed of small stones not very well built, has not sufficient cohesion to resist the thrust exerted by the deflection of the beams. But why, you will ask me, has this effect been produced at the floor level of the first story and not above? Because, by the effect of the bulging we find here, the wall has inclined above towards the inside, and has thereby squeezed the second floor—its surfaces being placed, by their very inclination, perpendicularly to the curve line of the upper beams, as I indicate to you at[Pg 59] M, exaggerating the effect for the purpose of making it clearer.

“Now look at this front wall in the courtyard: it bulges at the floor level of the first story. We call that a wall bulge. Instead of staying vertical, like it should have, it has pushed out; and why? Because a force is acting from inside pushing out. What is that force? It could be an arch, but there’s no arching on the ground floor. So, it must be the floor. At first glance, it’s not obvious how a floor, which is a horizontal plane, can push; to push, we need to assume the floor expands in one direction, which isn’t possible. But see what happens. Pay close attention.... In the past, to make a floor, large beams were placed from wall to wall, and then lighter wooden pieces, called joists, were laid on top of these beams; a layer of earth, gravel, or sand was then added, topped with a layer of mortar for tiling. This created a very heavy mass. Now, a piece of timber, even a substantial one, bends over time under its own weight—that is, it goes from straight to curved—and its tendency to bend increases when it’s weighted. The more it bends, the more pressure it exerts on the inner surface of the walls it’s resting on. It’s this pressure on the inside surface that pushes the wall outward. However, if, as in this case, wooden struts have been added underneath to support the beams (Fig. 12), this thrust effect is even more noticeable because the lever arm is longer. I see you don’t quite get it. A sketch will make it clearer. Let A represent the wall section, or its thickness. If the beam bends along the line C D, pressure occurs at D, creating a thrust at F and rounding the wall, as shown by the dotted curves. Even if we have a stone corbel instead of the strut E, the same effect will occur, although it will be less powerful unless the corbel’s tail extends through the wall, as noted at I, and this tail K is weighted to counteract the pressure the beam applies at the end L. This hasn't been done here, where instead of a wooden strut, a corbel was used. This corbel doesn’t have a secure hold in the wall, and the wall, made of smaller stones that aren’t very well constructed, lacks the strength to withstand the thrust caused by the bending beams. But why, you might ask, does this effect occur at the floor level of the first story and not higher? Because, due to the bulging here, the wall has tilted inward at the top, thereby compressing the second floor. Its surfaces, because of their tilt, are perpendicular to the curved line of the upper beams, as I show you at [Pg 59] M, exaggerating the effect for clarity.”

“You see that each detail merits attention, and that the builder ought to have a good reason for everything he does.

“You see that every detail deserves attention, and that the builder should have a solid reason for everything he does.

“In work of every kind we learn to avoid faults only by analysing and searching into their causes and ascertaining their effects. To become a good builder, therefore, it is not enough to familiarize one’s self with rules of construction, which cannot provide for all contingencies; we must see and observe much, and ascertain defective points in buildings that have been tested by time; just as physicians become able to determine what a good constitution is only by studying diseases and their causes. For the most part we appreciate what is good only through observing what is bad; if, in the absence of the bad, we are able to admit that there is such a thing as the good. An old proficient in architecture, who, when I was about your age, was so kind as to aid me with his advice, used often to say to me: ‘I can tell you, my dear fellow, what you must avoid in the art of building;—as to explaining to you in what the good and the beautiful consist, you must find out that yourself. If you are a born architect, you will know well enough how to discover it; if not, all that I could show you, all the examples I could place before you, would not give you talent.’ And he was right. The sight of the finest works in architecture may pervert the minds of students, if it’s not been explained to them how the authors of these works succeeded in making them beautiful by having avoided such or such faults.

“In every type of work, we learn to avoid mistakes only by analyzing their causes and understanding their effects. To become a good builder, it's not enough to just know the rules of construction, which can't cover every situation; we need to see and observe a lot and identify flaws in buildings that have stood the test of time. Just like doctors understand what good health is only by studying diseases and their causes. Most of the time, we recognize what's good only by seeing what's bad; if we can agree that there is such a thing as good when bad is absent. An experienced architect, who was kind enough to help me with advice when I was your age, often told me: ‘I can tell you, my dear friend, what you should avoid in building; as for explaining what is good and beautiful, you'll have to figure that out yourself. If you're a natural architect, you'll know how to find it; if not, all the examples I can show you won't give you talent.’ And he was right. The sight of the best architectural works can mislead students if they haven't been taught how the creators of these works made them beautiful by avoiding certain mistakes.”

“But you have enough to write out for to-day. Make a fair copy of these sketches opposite your text, and we will examine it this evening.”

“But you have plenty to write for today. Make a neat copy of these sketches next to your text, and we will review it this evening.”


[Pg 60]

[Pg 60]

CHAPTER VI.
HOW PAUL IS LED TO RECOGNIZE CERTAIN DISTINCTIONS BETWEEN ETHICS AND ARCHITECTURE.

When, in the evening, Paul’s report of the lesson was read in the family circle, M. de Gandelau interrupted the reading at this phrase incorrectly given, “Good is only the absence of evil.”

When, in the evening, Paul’s report of the lesson was read in the family circle, Mr. de Gandelau interrupted the reading at this phrase that was misquoted, “Good is only the absence of evil.”

“Oh, oh!” said his father; “Charity is something more than the absence of evil. If you give nothing to the poor man who asks bread of you; if, being able to swim, you do not try to save a drowning man, you do not do evil, but certainly you do not do good.”

“Oh, oh!” said his father; “Charity is more than just not doing harm. If you give nothing to the poor man who asks you for bread; if you can swim but don’t try to save a drowning man, you aren’t doing evil, but you’re definitely not doing good.”

“That is not exactly what I said to Paul,” replied Eugène, smiling. “Respecting defects discovered in building, I said, ‘I believe that the good is the absence of the bad;’ that is to say, in building operations, and perhaps in many other matters belonging to the purely material order of things, to avoid what is bad is to do well, but not to do good. I must, however, admit that I did not sufficiently develop my thought.

"That's not exactly what I told Paul," Eugène replied with a smile. "When it comes to flaws found in construction, I said, 'I think that good is just the absence of bad;' meaning that in construction work, and maybe in a lot of other purely physical things, avoiding what's bad is equivalent to doing well, but it doesn't mean you're doing good. I have to admit, though, that I didn't fully explain my thoughts."

“Two things are needed to make a good builder: clear-sighted intelligence—which depends on our individual psychical nature—and the experience we acquire.

“Two things are needed to be a good builder: clear-minded intelligence—which depends on our individual psychological makeup—and the experience we gain.”

“Observation and experience thence resulting enable us to recognize what is defective and to avoid it; but if, notwithstanding the advantage thence derived, we are not endowed by nature with clear-sighted intelligence,[Pg 61] experience, though enabling us to avoid the bad, does not of itself suffice for the discovery of the good.

“Observation and the resulting experience help us identify what is flawed and steer clear of it; however, if we lack natural clear-sighted intelligence despite these benefits, experience alone, while preventing us from making poor choices, isn't enough to help us find what is good.[Pg 61]

“Moreover, though in morals the good is absolute and independent of circumstances, it is not the same with building. What is good here is bad elsewhere, on account of climate, habits, nature of materials, and the way in which they are affected by local circumstances. While, for instance, it is desirable to cover a roof with slates in a temperate and humid climate, this kind of roofing is objectionable in a warm, dry, and windy climate. Wooden buildings will be excellent in one situation and unsuitable in others. While it is desirable to admit the light by wide openings and to glaze large surfaces in northern climates, because the sun’s glare is subdued, this would be objectionable in southern countries, where the light is intense, and where it is necessary to procure shelter from the heat. A code of morals is possible, but we cannot establish absolute rules in building; experience, reasoning, and reflection must therefore always be summoned to our aid when we attempt to build. Very often young architects have asked me what treatise on building I should recommend as the best. There is none, I tell them; because a treatise cannot anticipate all contingencies,—all the special circumstances that present themselves in the experience of an architect. A treatise lays down rules; but ninety-nine times out of a hundred you have to encounter the exception and cannot rely upon the rule. A treatise on building is useful in habituating the mind to devise plans and have them put into execution according to certain methods; it gives you the means of solving the problems proposed; but it does not actually solve them, or at least only solves one in a thousand. It is then for intelligence to supply in the thousand cases presented what the rule cannot provide for.”

“Furthermore, while the concept of good is absolute and not dependent on circumstances in morals, it’s different when it comes to building. What works well in one place may not work at all in another due to climate, local habits, the types of materials available, and how they interact with specific conditions. For example, using slate for roofing is ideal in a temperate and humid climate, but it’s a poor choice in a hot, dry, and windy area. Wooden structures might be perfect in one location but completely inappropriate in another. In northern climates, having large openings for light and glazing big surfaces is beneficial because the sun is less intense. However, in southern regions, where the light is strong, you need to find ways to protect against the heat. A moral code can be established, but we can’t create absolute building rules; we must always rely on experience, logic, and careful thought when constructing. Young architects often ask me what book on building I would recommend as the best. I tell them there isn’t one because no book can cover all situations—every unique circumstance an architect faces. A treatise sets forth rules, but you’ll find exceptions in almost every case, so you can’t always depend on those rules. A treatise on building can help train your mind to come up with designs and execute them using specific methods; it provides tools to tackle problems, but it doesn’t actually solve them, or at least only addresses one out of a thousand. It’s really up to your intellect to handle the thousands of scenarios where the rules fall short.”

[Pg 62]

[Pg 62]

Lesson Three.

“Yesterday,” said Eugène to Paul, when the latter came into his room, “we visited the cellars and the ground floor; now we shall take a walk among the garrets of the château. But first I must show you what is meant by a roof truss. The simplest truss (Fig. 13) is composed of four pieces of wood: two principal rafters, a tie-beam, and a king-post. The two inclined pieces A are the blades; the horizontal piece B is the tie-beam, and the vertical piece C the king-post. The upper ends of the blades meet in the king-post, as I show you in the detail D,—namely, by the means of two tenons E, which fit into two mortises F, and a shoulder G, which make the whole pressure of the timber bear into the notch I. The lower ends of the blades are similarly connected at the two extremities of the tie-beam, as this other detail H shows us. The king-post is also connected by a tenon, in the centre of the tie-beam, but loosely, and without bearing upon this tie-beam.[Pg 63] When the tenons are let into the mortises, pegs of wood are driven into the holes marked to fasten the whole well. The more pressure there is on the top, M, the more the two blades tend to spread at the foot; but these, being fixed at the two ends of the tie-beam, tighten the latter like the string of a bow. The more this tie-beam is strained, therefore, the less it is inclined to bend, and the object of the king-post is only to suspend it by its centre, and to connect the heads of the blades. But between M and N these rafters may bend under the weight of the roof covering; two struts, O P, therefore are added, which arrest this bending by bringing the pressure to bear on the king-post, so that the latter is in its turn strained between M and P. As wood will not stretch, the point P is fixed, and the two points O likewise.

“Yesterday,” Eugène said to Paul when he walked into the room, “we checked out the cellars and the ground floor; now we’re going to explore the attic of the château. But first, I need to show you what a roof truss is. The simplest truss (Fig. 13) consists of four pieces of wood: two main rafters, a tie-beam, and a king-post. The two angled pieces A are the rafters; the horizontal piece B is the tie-beam, and the vertical piece C is the king-post. The top ends of the rafters connect at the king-post, as shown in detail D, using two tenons E that fit into two mortises F, along with a shoulder G, which directs all the timber’s pressure into the notch I. The lower ends of the rafters are similarly attached at the ends of the tie-beam, as shown in another detail H. The king-post is connected by a tenon in the middle of the tie-beam, but it's not tightly fitted and doesn’t bear weight on it.[Pg 63] When the tenons are inserted into the mortises, wooden pegs are driven into the marked holes to secure everything. The more pressure there is at the top, M, the more the two rafters want to spread at the bottom; but since they are fixed at both ends of the tie-beam, they pull the tie-beam tight like a bowstring. Therefore, the more the tie-beam is under stress, the less it wants to bend, and the king-post’s role is simply to support it at its center and connect the tops of the rafters. But between M and N, these rafters can bend under the weight of the roof; so, two struts, O P, are added to stop this bending by applying pressure on the king-post, which in turn is stressed between M and P. Since wood doesn’t stretch, point P is fixed, and so are the two points O.

Fig. 13.

Fig. 13.

“Now that you know what is the simplest roof-truss, let us go up into the roofs.”

“Now that you know what the simplest roof truss is, let's go up into the roofs.”

These roofs were old, and had been repaired and strengthened many times, and formed a complication of timbers difficult enough to understand.

These roofs were old and had been fixed and reinforced many times, creating a complicated structure of beams that was hard to comprehend.

“Formerly,” said Eugène, “that is, more than a century ago, they used to make roofs such as you see here: every rafter was framed, that is, each of the rafters composed a truss, except the tie-beam, which was introduced only at intervals. Then wood was in plenty, and they scarcely thought of economising it. At present it is less abundant, and there is a difficulty in procuring a considerable number of pieces of large dimensions. The noble forests that covered the soil of France have been foolishly wasted, and long timbers of heart of oak are rare. It has therefore been necessary to economise them. The expedient has been adopted of placing strong trusses at a distance of about 12 feet from each other. On these trusses have been placed purlins, which are the horizontal pieces you see on this side; and on these purlins longer or[Pg 64] shorter rafters have been placed to receive the lathing for the tiles, or the battens for the slates. But all timber roofing should be fixed upon sleepers, which are those horizontal pieces resting on the top of the walls, which bind and isolate the tie-beams from the masonry; for it is to be observed that timber is preserved for an indefinite time in the free dry air, but soon decays in contact with a moist body, such as stone is. Look here at this piece of wood, almost buried in the masonry; it is nearly reduced to touchwood, while the blade above, which is in the free dry air, is as free from rot as if it were new.

“Back in the day,” said Eugène, “more than a century ago, they used to build roofs like the one you see here: every rafter was framed, meaning each rafter formed a truss, except for the tie-beam, which was only added at intervals. Wood was plentiful then, and they hardly thought about conserving it. Nowadays, it’s less abundant, and it’s tough to find a good number of large pieces. The magnificent forests that once covered France have been foolishly depleted, and long timbers of quality oak are rare. So, they’ve had to be more economical. The solution has been to space strong trusses about 12 feet apart. On these trusses, they’ve placed purlins, which are the horizontal pieces you see on this side; and on these purlins, they've added longer or shorter rafters to support the lathing for the tiles, or the battens for the slates. However, all timber roofing should be set on sleepers, which are the horizontal pieces resting on top of the walls that connect and isolate the tie-beams from the masonry; because it's worth noting that timber remains preserved in the dry air for an indefinite time, but quickly decays when in contact with a moist material like stone. Look at this piece of wood, almost buried in the masonry; it’s nearly turned to touchwood, while the part above, which is in the free dry air, is as rot-free as if it were brand new.”

“Formerly upper floors were made by putting joists resting on beams and the walls. These joists and beams remained visible, as you may see still in the kitchen and the large hall on the ground floor, which serves as a store-room. The air therefore could circulate round these timbers, and they might last for centuries. But it was considered that thus exposed they were not pleasant to look at—that they were not clean, and allowed spiders to spin their webs in the interspaces. Laths were therefore nailed under these joists, and this lathwork plastered so as to form what we call a ceiling. Timbers thus inclosed and deprived of air, ‘heated’ (as carpenters call it), that is, they fermented and soon began to decay. In fact, floorings with exposed joists which had resisted the action of time for centuries decayed and broke down in a short time after being inclosed. I may add that formerly, before using timber in building, they took the precaution of leaving it exposed for some years to the action of the sun and rain. They even kept it for some time in water, to free it from the sap (for sap is the ferment which makes wood rot). When the timber, after having been barked and roughly squared, had remained in the open air for five or six years, it was used. But now-a-days we are in a hurry, and make use of timber that has not been cut more[Pg 65] than a year. It is not dry, it retains its sap, and if it is then enclosed it ferments rapidly, so that in a few years the largest beams are completely rotten. Prudent architects therefore hesitate to use wood for floors. Yet its use—even if only partially dried—would not entail serious inconvenience if it was not covered with plaster. The worst that could happen would be the occurrence of cracks and shrinkings. It would dry when in use, as it would have dried in the open air.

“Previously, upper floors were created by placing joists on beams and walls. These joists and beams were left exposed, as you can still see in the kitchen and the large ground-floor hall that serves as a storage room. This allowed air to circulate around the timbers, helping them last for centuries. However, it was thought that these exposed structures were not visually appealing, looked unclean, and let spiders spin webs in the gaps. So, laths were nailed under the joists, and this lathwork was plastered to form what we now call a ceiling. The timbers enclosed in this way were deprived of air and ‘heated’ (as carpenters say), meaning they fermented and soon started to decay. In fact, floorings with exposed joists that had withstood the test of time for centuries decayed and broke down shortly after being sealed off. I should add that in the past, before using timber in construction, precautions were taken by exposing it to sun and rain for several years. They even soaked it in water for a while to remove the sap (since sap is the ferment that causes wood to rot). After being stripped of bark and roughly shaped, the timber was left out in the open air for five or six years before use. Nowadays, however, we are in a rush and often use timber that has been cut less than a year ago. It is not dry and still contains sap, and if it's enclosed, it ferments quickly, leading to complete rot of even the largest beams within a few years. As a result, cautious architects are careful about using wood for floors. Still, using timber—even if only partially dried—wouldn't be a significant issue if it wasn’t covered with plaster. The worst that could happen would be some cracks and shrinking. It would dry out while in use, just as it would have dried in the open air.”

“There is no great disadvantage, then, in employing wood newly cut for roof-timbers, which are generally left exposed. They dry where they are. They warp, but do not perish of dry-rot.

“There is no major downside to using freshly cut wood for roof timbers, which are usually left exposed. They dry in place. They may warp, but they won’t decay from dry rot.”

“As we shall not be able to find wood absolutely dry for your sister’s house, we shall leave the floor-joists visible, and endeavour by simple and economical means to render them not unsightly.

“As we won't be able to find completely dry wood for your sister’s house, we’ll leave the floor joists exposed and try to make them look decent using simple and cost-effective methods."

“But you ought to be well acquainted with the qualities of timber. I will not tell you that nature has caused these large vegetable growths which we employ to grow for our pleasure or use. Nature is, I think, very little concerned as to whether the oak or the fir would serve any of our purposes; and if human intelligence has been able to take advantage of these materials that spring up before us, it is after having recognized and verified their properties by experience. Unfortunately, it would seem as if the results of this experience did not tend to increase; and judging from the way in which building-timber is most frequently employed, we might be led to suppose that we are less informed than were our predecessors, or that we have lost that habit of observation with which they were familiar.

“But you should really understand the qualities of wood. I won’t say that nature specifically created these large plants we use for our enjoyment or utility. Nature, I believe, isn’t particularly concerned with whether the oak or the fir would meet any of our needs; and if human intelligence has managed to use these materials that grow around us, it’s only after recognizing and confirming their properties through experience. Unfortunately, it seems that the outcomes of this experience haven’t improved; and judging by how building timber is most often used, we might think we’re less knowledgeable than our predecessors or that we’ve lost the observational habits they had.”

“Wood, being composed of fibres more or less lax or compact, possesses a considerable power of resistance to a pressure exerted along these fibres, but is easily bent or[Pg 66] crushed under a pressure exerted across these same fibres. Thus a log of wood 4 inches in diameter and a yard or so long, placed on end, will support, without being crushed or contorted, a pressure of 40,000 lbs.; whereas this weight will break or crush it if placed horizontally, as you would crush a reed under your foot. Take a thoroughly sound bit of straw, 4 inches long, and place your finger on one end of it, holding the straw vertically on a table; you will have to press pretty strongly on it to bend it, while the least pressure on the same straw placed horizontally will flatten it. The straw is a tube. A tree consists of a series of tubes, some enveloping others. The more numerous, close and fine these tubes are, the more does the trunk resist pressure, either in the direction of its length or its thickness. But this shows us that to enable the wood to retain its power of resistance we must employ it as nature gives it to us; and in fact this was done formerly. Each piece of timber was cut from a tree of larger or smaller size, as the case required, but they did not split the tree lengthwise to get several pieces of timber; for the heart being harder and more compact than the sap-wood (which is the spongy envelope beneath the bark), and the concentric layers of wood being the closer and tougher in proportion to their nearness to the bark, if you split a tree in two lengthwise one of its faces is much more resisting than the other, the equilibrium is disturbed, and flexure is easily produced under a weight. The outer layers, being the more recent, are more spongy and lax in texture than the older layers that are near the heart; consequently the process of drying makes these outer layers shrink more than the inner: hence curvature. Let A (Fig. 14) be a split piece of wood; the layers B are harder and more compact than those marked C, which contain more moisture and whose fibres are softer. In drying, therefore, this piece of wood will present a hollow bend[Pg 67] on the outer side, as I show at D. If the wood is left entire, as at E, the effects of drying will neutralize each other, and the piece will remain straight.

“Wood, made up of fibers that can be more or less tight or loose, has a strong resistance to pressure applied along these fibers, but it can easily bend or[Pg 66] crush when pressure is applied across them. For example, a log of wood that's 4 inches in diameter and about a yard long, when placed upright, can support a pressure of 40,000 lbs without being crushed or bent; however, if that weight is placed horizontally, it will break or crush the log, just like stepping on a reed. If you take a solid piece of straw that's 4 inches long and hold it vertically on a table, pressing down on one end requires a lot of force to bend it, whereas the slightest pressure on the same straw when laid flat will crush it. The straw is a tube, and a tree is made up of a series of tubes, some surrounding others. The more numerous, closely spaced, and fine these tubes are, the more the trunk can resist pressure, both lengthwise and thickness-wise. This shows that to keep the wood’s resistance, we must use it as nature has provided; this was actually done in the past. Each piece of timber was cut from a tree of appropriate size, but they didn't split the tree lengthwise to get multiple pieces; the heartwood is harder and denser than the sapwood (which is the spongy layer below the bark), and since the concentric layers of wood are closer and stronger the nearer they are to the bark, splitting a tree lengthwise results in one surface being much stronger than the other, disrupting balance and making it easy to bend under weight. The outer layers, being the most recent, are more spongy and loose in texture than the older layers near the center; therefore, as these outer layers dry, they shrink more than the inner layers, leading to curvature. Let A (Fig. 14) be a split piece of wood; the layers B are harder and denser than those labeled C, which contain more moisture and are softer. When drying, this piece of wood will curve outward, as shown at D. If the wood is left whole, as at E, the effects of drying will cancel each other out, and the piece will stay straight.”

Fig. 14.

Fig. 14.

“Look at this old roof, whose rafters are framed (Fig. 15): the wall plates, A, are cut from small trunks, the heart being in the centre. It is the same with the rafters B, the tie-beams C, the collars D, the king-posts E, the foot-pieces F, and the foot-posts G; all these pieces, therefore, have preserved their rigidity, and none of them has been bent, because they were used dry and were unsplit trunks. Observe, on the contrary, this purlin, H, placed on this truss, I, of recent date; it is bent not so much on account of the weight of the rafters it supports as because it is split and the carpenter has unadvisedly turned the heart on the inside. If he had done the contrary,—if the heart had been placed next to the rafters,—this purlin would probably not have bent, perhaps have even become more rigid—that is to say, it would be convex on the outer side. Carpenters, however, are but men, and they do not care to[Pg 68] give themselves trouble when they think they can avoid it. The man that put this purlin here found it more convenient to place it on its sawn side than to turn it the other way with the flat under the rafters.

“Look at this old roof, whose rafters are framed (Fig. 15): the wall plates, A, are made from small logs, with the heart in the center. The same goes for the rafters B, the tie-beams C, the collars D, the king-posts E, the foot-pieces F, and the foot-posts G; all these pieces have maintained their strength, and none of them has bent, because they were used dry and were whole logs. On the other hand, look at this purlin, H, set on this truss, I, which is more recent; it’s bent not so much due to the weight of the rafters it supports but because it’s split and the carpenter mistakenly placed the heart facing inward. If he had done the opposite—if the heart had been placed next to the rafters—this purlin probably wouldn’t have bent, and might have even become stronger—that is to say, it would be curved outward. However, carpenters are just human, and they often avoid extra work when they think they can. The person who installed this purlin found it easier to place it with the cut side down than to flip it over to have the flat side under the rafters.”

Fig. 15.

Fig. 15.

“Considering this quality of wood, and of oak especially (whose internal fibres are harder and closer than the outer layers), when we have to place a piece of wood horizontally on two points of support or posts, and wish to give it all the strength possible to bear a weight acting on its centre, we saw it in two lengthwise, and turning the flat faces[Pg 69] outside, bolt these two pieces together, as shown here (Fig. 16). Then as the heart-wood is outside, and the two pieces tend to become bent, forming two convex surfaces, as you see at A (Fig. 17), if they are firmly held by bolts furnished with good heads and nuts, they must remain straight; the tendency to curvature in the one neutralizing that in the other, these two opposing forces tend to make the piece more rigid, so that, if you take a piece of timber that is slightly bent naturally and then place these two pieces with their hollow downwards,—that is, after having placed one upon the other, putting the tail of one against the head of the other,—you will have given this piece of wood all the resisting power of which it is capable.

“Given the quality of wood, especially oak (which has harder, denser internal fibers compared to the outer layers), when we need to position a piece of wood horizontally on two support points or posts and want to maximize its strength to hold weight acting in the center, we cut it lengthwise into two pieces and turn the flat sides outward, then bolt these two pieces together, as shown here (Fig. 16). With the heartwood on the outside, and since the two pieces tend to bend, creating two convex surfaces, as you can see at A (Fig. 17), if they are securely fastened with bolts that have good heads and nuts, they will remain straight; the bending tendency in one piece cancels out the bending in the other, making the entire structure stiffer. So, if you take a piece of timber that is slightly bent naturally and then stack these two pieces with their hollows facing down—meaning placing one on top of the other, aligning the tail of one with the head of the other—you will have given this piece of wood all the strength it can provide.”

Fig. 16.

Fig. 16.


Fig. 17.

Fig. 17.

“It is in this way that clips and all coupled pieces should be placed. Here, for example (Fig. 18), you see a pair of clips where the sawn faces have been turned outside to replace a decayed tie-beam. We call clips those pieces of wood which, in pairs, usually clench two or more parts of a framing. These clips, A, hold fast by means of notchings, the blades B, the king-post C, and the two struts D. Iron bolts with screw-nuts tightly hold the notchings of the clips, like a pair of jaws, against the timbers which[Pg 70] have to be kept in their place. But this is enough for to-day, and you will have plenty to do to make a fair transcript of this lesson in carpentry between now and this evening.”

“It is this way that clips and all the connected pieces should be positioned. For example, here (Fig. 18), you see a pair of clips where the cut faces have been turned outward to replace a rotted tie-beam. We refer to clips as those wooden pieces that, in pairs, typically secure two or more parts of a frame. These clips, A, grip tightly using notchings, the blades B, the king-post C, and the two struts D. Iron bolts with screw-nuts firmly fasten the notchings of the clips, acting like a pair of jaws, against the beams that need to be secured in place. But that's enough for today, and you'll have plenty to do to create a clean copy of this lesson in carpentry between now and this evening.”

Fig. 18.

Fig. 18.


[Pg 71]

[Pg 71]

CHAPTER VII.
SETTING OUT THE FOUNDATIONS OF THE HOUSE, AND OPERATIONS ON THE GROUND.

Next day a letter dated Naples was received from Madame Marie N——, expressing the liveliest and most patriotic apprehensions with regard to recent events. Paul’s sister wished to induce the family to join her at Naples; her husband could not return to France just at present; the business which called him to Constantinople allowed of no delay, and would oblige him to embark very shortly. The letter terminated thus: “We have received Paul’s designs; we suppose his cousin must have given him a little help. I should be delighted, and my husband too, if there was any chance of such a plan being realized; but who can think of building in the state in which our poor country is now! Rather make up your mind to come and join us.”

The next day, a letter dated from Naples arrived from Madame Marie N——, expressing her intense and patriotic concerns about recent events. Paul’s sister wanted to persuade the family to come join her in Naples; her husband couldn’t return to France at the moment since his work in Constantinople couldn’t be delayed and would require him to leave soon. The letter ended with: “We’ve received Paul’s designs; we assume his cousin must have helped him a bit. I’d be thrilled, and my husband would be too, if there was any chance of making such a plan happen; but who can think about building in the state our poor country is in now! You might as well accept that you should come and join us.”

“Well,” said M. de Gandelau after reading the letter, “you see your plans are approved: let us set to work at once. If the Prussians should come as far as this and set our old house on fire, as their custom is, they will not burn the walls of a building only just begun, and what we have spent in its erection will not get into their pockets.”

"Well," said M. de Gandelau after reading the letter, "you see your plans have been approved: let's get started right away. If the Prussians come this far and set our old house on fire, like they usually do, they won't be able to burn down the walls of a building that's only just begun, and what we've spent on its construction won't end up in their hands."

Eugène, helped by Paul, who calculated the items—he had never undertaken such a task before—drew up the estimate, which amounted in all to 7,000l. The earthworks and masonry were expected to cost 3,400l.

Eugène, with help from Paul, who was figuring out the costs—something he'd never done before—prepared the estimate, which added up to 7,000l. The earthworks and masonry were expected to cost 3,400l.

[Pg 72]

[Pg 72]

Master Branchu was summoned: “A very good gentleman your father is,” said he to Paul, when it was settled that they should begin the following day; “he sets people to work when the best hands are being turned off everywhere, and old fellows like me, who cannot go soldiering, would have a hard time of it all the winter. I shall go and drink his health with Jean Godard the carpenter, who will be desperate glad like myself.”

Master Branchu was called in: “Your father is a really good man,” he said to Paul when it was decided they would start the next day; “he finds work for people when the best workers are being let go everywhere, and old guys like me, who can't go off to fight, would have a tough time all winter. I'm going to go and toast to his health with Jean Godard the carpenter, who will be just as happy as I am.”

The rest of the day was employed in marking the principal dimensions on the plan, so as to be able to set out the excavations.

The rest of the day was spent marking the key measurements on the plan to prepare for the excavations.

Master Branchu was already on the ground next day, equipped with lines, stakes, nails, and broches, a large carpenter’s square, and a water-level, when Paul and his cousin arrived at an early hour in the morning.

Master Branchu was already on the ground the next day, equipped with ropes, stakes, nails, and broches, a large carpenter's square, and a water level, when Paul and his cousin arrived early in the morning.

“You see,” said Eugène to Paul, “that the figures indicate on this plan the distances between the centre-lines of the walls. Consulting these dimensions, we shall set out these centre-lines on the ground with the help of lines attached to what we call broches (Fig. 19), which consist of two stakes firmly fixed in the earth, and a crosspiece. The direction of one of the centre-lines being determined according to the orientation it suits us to choose, the places of the other axes will follow according to the distance figured on the plan and the square returns.”

“You see,” Eugène said to Paul, “the numbers on this plan show the distances between the centerlines of the walls. By referring to these measurements, we’ll mark these centerlines on the ground using lines connected to what we call broches (Fig. 19), which are made of two stakes firmly planted in the ground and a crosspiece. Once we establish the direction of one of the centerlines based on the orientation we choose, the positions of the other axes will follow according to the distances indicated on the plan and the square returns.”

Eugène had soon settled the line of centre, A, for the dining and billiard-rooms, according to the desired orientation. Then on this first centre-line was set out by means of a small theodolite another at right angles, which was the centre-line of the entrance-hall. These two lines once laid down, the others were determined by means of the dimensions previously marked on the plan. The centres of the principal walls were thus traced on the ground by lines attached to the broches.

Eugène quickly established the center line, A, for the dining and billiard rooms, based on the desired orientation. Then, using a small theodolite, he marked another line at right angles, which became the center line for the entrance hall. Once these two lines were set, the other lines were determined from the dimensions marked on the plan. The centers of the main walls were then outlined on the ground with lines connected to the broches.

Fig. 19.

Fig. 19.

As cellars were to be made under the whole extent of[Pg 73] the main building, Eugène contented himself with ordering Branchu to excavate the entire ground to a distance of about a yard beyond the lines of the perimeter. Two labourers with their picks set to work therefore at once to[Pg 74] mark out the excavation. “If,” said he to the workmen, “you find stone, as may certainly be expected, at no great depth, and if it should prove to be of good quality, you will take care not to break it up; get it out for walling stone; we will make use of it and pay you for your extra trouble. If you find boulders, let them be blasted, and lay aside the best pieces for use. To-morrow or the next day we shall give you the plan and section of the cellars. Meantime lay in a good store of bricks, lime, and sand; you know that in this district it is desirable to arrange matters beforehand if we would have the materials when wanted. It is September already, and our cellars must be built at least before the first frosts.”

As cellars were to be built underneath the entire area of[Pg 73] the main building, Eugène was satisfied with instructing Branchu to dig up the entire ground about a yard beyond the perimeter lines. Two laborers with their picks immediately got to work to[Pg 74] mark out the excavation. “If,” he told the workers, “you come across stone, which is likely to happen, at a shallow depth, and if it turns out to be good quality, please don’t break it up; instead, remove it for walling stone; we’ll use it and compensate you for the extra effort. If you find boulders, have them blasted and set aside the best pieces for later. Tomorrow or the next day, we’ll provide you with the plan and layout for the cellars. In the meantime, stock up on bricks, lime, and sand; you know it’s important in this area to prepare ahead of time to ensure we have the materials when we need them. It’s already September, and we must finish building our cellars before the first frosts.”

“This being settled then,” added Eugène, addressing Paul when they were returning to the house, “I appoint you clerk of the works, and these will be your duties: You will come to the ground every morning, and take care in the first place that the orders given in your presence are strictly executed. For instance, you will have to take account of the quantity of stone extracted from the excavation, and to have it properly stacked in a heap about one yard thick, two yards broad, and of a length depending on the yield of the quarry. Having thus verified the daily increase of the heap, we shall be secure against any abstraction from it. You will keep a note-book in your pocket, in which you will mark its daily augmentation, and you will take care to have every leaf countersigned by Branchu. Your business just now will be only overlooking; but it will become more complicated as the works advance. If materials are brought you will take account of the quantity,—in numbers if it is bricks, or by solid content if it is sand or lime. For this purpose I shall have brought to the ground one of those road-labourer’s boxes, which are a yard square and half a yard deep. Each measure when filled contains therefore half a cubic yard.

“Now that this is settled,” Eugène said to Paul as they walked back to the house, “I’m appointing you as the site supervisor, and here’s what you’ll need to do: You’ll come to the site every morning and make sure that any orders given in your presence are followed exactly. For example, you’ll need to keep track of the amount of stone taken from the excavation and ensure it’s stacked properly in a pile that’s about one yard thick, two yards wide, and as long as the quarry’s yield. By verifying the daily increase of the pile, we can prevent any theft from it. You’ll carry a notebook where you’ll record its daily growth, and make sure each page is signed off by Branchu. Your job at this point will primarily be oversight, but it will get more complicated as the work progresses. When materials arrive, you’ll need to note the quantity—counting numbers for bricks, or measuring volume for sand or lime. To help with this, I’ll have one of those square road-laborer’s boxes brought to the site, which measures one yard on each side and is half a yard deep. When filled, each measure will hold half a cubic yard.”

[Pg 75]

[Pg 75]

“You will tell Branchu to get a wooden shed built to keep his tools in, and to keep the lime under cover till it is slacked. If we had a contractor, or some one with whom a bargain had been made, we should not have to trouble ourselves about the quantity or content of the materials brought to the ground; but as it is, we must employ elementary means, for Branchu has not capital with which to provide materials. We shall therefore give him the materials we buy, or which the estate supplies, on account. You perceive the necessity of preventing these materials from being abstracted or wasted. We pay him only for the labour. This plan obliges us to be more attentive and vigilant, but we are at least secured from being deceived as to the quality of the materials by a contractor, who might think it his interest, if he bought them, to supply us with some of a quality inferior to that contemplated in the estimate.

"You will tell Branchu to have a wooden shed built to store his tools and to keep the lime protected until it’s ready to use. If we had a contractor or someone we could make a deal with, we wouldn’t have to worry about the amount or type of materials brought to the site. But since we don’t, we have to stick to basic methods because Branchu doesn’t have the funds to provide materials. So, we will give him the materials we purchase or those provided by the estate, on credit. You can see the importance of preventing these materials from being taken or wasted. We only pay him for the labor. This plan requires us to be more careful and watchful, but at least we’re protected from being cheated on the quality of the materials by a contractor who might think it’s in his interest to deliver something lower quality than what was estimated."

“We shall make the same terms with the carpenter. Your father tells me he has some oak timbers that have been cut more than two years, and put in the wood-yard near the Noiret farm. Let us go and have a look at them, and mark those that can be employed. Our figured plan gives us the lengths of the flooring joists.”

“We’ll make the same deal with the carpenter. Your dad told me he has some oak beams that were cut over two years ago and are stored in the wood yard near the Noiret farm. Let’s go check them out and mark the ones we can use. Our detailed plan shows us the lengths of the flooring joists.”

Passing by the side of the rivulet that flows along the little valley, Eugène was looking attentively at its steep banks, and was striking the rock faces with the iron-shod end of his stick. “What do you observe there?” said Paul.

Passing by the stream that runs through the small valley, Eugène was closely examining its steep banks and tapping the rock faces with the iron-tipped end of his stick. “What do you see there?” Paul asked.

“I think we shall find here good materials for our cellar vaulting.... Look at this yellowish stone, porous like a sponge. It is a present to us from this little water-course. It brings down in its waters carbonate of lime, which is incessantly being deposited on the grasses and vegetable detritus on its banks and in its bed. This rivulet thus forms a light and very porous tufa, which is soft and friable as[Pg 76] long as it is thoroughly moist, but which acquires a certain degree of hardness in drying. Formerly this rivulet was larger than it is now, and it appears to me to have deposited a considerable thickness of this tufa as presented on its banks in their actual condition. Take this bit, and look at it attentively. You see that it is filled with cavities,—little cylindrical passages; they represent the twigs around which carbonate of lime was deposited. The twigs themselves decayed and disappeared long ago; the coating has remained and been hardened in the air. Observe how light this kind of stone is, being composed of cells scarcely thicker than egg-shells. Yet, try to crush it under your heel. It resists, and the pressure scarcely blunts its asperities. Well, dry it, and in a week it will be even harder. A smart blow with a hammer will be required to break it.

“I think we’ll find some great materials for our cellar vaulting here.... Look at this yellowish stone, it’s porous like a sponge. It’s a gift from this little stream. It carries carbonate of lime in its waters, which constantly settles on the grass and organic debris along its banks and in its bed. This stream forms a light and very porous tufa, which is soft and crumbly as[Pg 76] long as it’s thoroughly wet, but it gets somewhat hard when it dries. Once, this stream was bigger than it is now, and it seems to me that it has deposited a significant thickness of this tufa as seen on its banks in their current state. Take this piece and examine it closely. You can see it’s filled with cavities—little cylindrical passages; they show where twigs were that carbonate of lime built up around. The twigs themselves rotted and disappeared a long time ago; the coating has remained and hardened in the air. Notice how light this type of stone is, made up of cells barely thicker than eggshells. But try crushing it with your heel. It holds up, and the pressure barely dulls its roughness. Well, dry it out, and in a week, it will be even harder. You’ll need a solid hit with a hammer to break it.”

“This material is perhaps the best for vaults, on account of its lightness, its toughness, its cavities, and that roughness of surface which makes the mortar adhere so closely to the joints that it cannot be separated, and the whole, when sufficiently dry, seems to form only a single piece.

“This material is probably the best for vaults due to its lightness, toughness, cavities, and the rough texture of its surface, which allows the mortar to stick tightly to the joints, making it inseparable. When it’s dry enough, it looks like it forms a single piece.”

“We shall send two excavators to get out a few cubic yards of it. It is no difficult operation; and when this tufa is in a damp state in its natural bed, it can be very readily cut up into brick-shaped pieces.”

“We will send two excavators to remove a few cubic yards of it. It's not a difficult task; and when this tufa is damp in its natural bed, it can be easily cut into brick-shaped pieces.”

They soon reached the Noiret farm; and there in fact, under a shed along the wall of the barn, were piled up pieces of timber roughly squared and blackened by damp. Eugène marked a certain number of them with his knife, leaving those that were crooked, knotty, or cross-grained.

They soon arrived at the Noiret farm, and there, under a shed against the barn wall, were stacks of timber that had been roughly squared and darkened by moisture. Eugène marked several of them with his knife, setting aside the crooked, knotty, or irregular ones.

“What is a cross-grained piece of timber?” asked Paul.

“What’s a cross-grained piece of timber?” Paul asked.

“Cross-grained timbers are those whose fibres form a spiral round the heart. You can understand how[Pg 77] the fibres of the wood not being vertical, and forming spirals more or less complete, lose their resisting property; these fibres, on account of the circuit they make,—and which is not a regular one,—become disjoined, and leave deep cracks between them. These timbers, therefore, are rejected as defective, as are also those whose heart is unsound, or which have what they call soft rings; that is, diseased parts between their layers—a sort of interior ulcers which not only deprive the wood of its homogeneity of resistance but develop decay around them. It often happens that these soft rings are not observed, and that timbers which appear very sound fall rapidly to dust. And as these diseases are frequent or rare according to the soils in which the wood grew, it is essential to know whence the timbers employed in buildings came. One forest will produce oak admirable in appearance, but which rapidly decays; another furnishes timber that is always sound. Generally, timber grown on light and dry soils is good; the produce of damp, clayey ground is bad.

"Cross-grained timbers are those whose fibers spiral around the center. You can see how the fibers, not being vertical and forming more or less complete spirals, lose their strength; these fibers, due to the irregular path they take, become disjointed and leave deep cracks between them. Therefore, these timbers are considered defective, as are those with unsound hearts or what are called soft rings; that is, diseased sections between their layers—a kind of internal ulcers that not only take away the wood's consistent strength but also cause decay around them. It's often the case that these soft rings go unnoticed, and timbers that look very solid deteriorate quickly. Since these issues occur more frequently or rarely depending on the soil where the wood grew, it’s important to know the origin of the timbers used in construction. One forest may produce oak that looks great but decays quickly, while another offers timber that remains solid. Generally, timber from light, dry soils is good; timber from damp, clayey ground is poor."

“You will have these cross-grained and crooked timbers put on one side; they will do to make the centres for the cellars; they are fit for nothing else, unless it be for firewood. As to these fir poles, they will serve for scaffolding.”

“You can set aside these twisted and crooked beams; they’ll work for making the supports for the cellars. They’re good for nothing else, except maybe as firewood. As for these fir poles, they’ll be useful for scaffolding.”

It was late, so the cousins asked for breakfast at the farm. While they were laying the table, Paul said, “I want to know how you use the theodolite.”

It was late, so the cousins asked for breakfast at the farm. While they were setting the table, Paul said, “I want to know how you use the theodolite.”

Fig. 20.

Fig. 20.

“In the case of an operation such as we have just been performing, it is the simplest thing in the world. I asked Branchu to send my instrument to the château, that I might not be troubled with it all the morning; but there is no need to have it here to show how to use it. You know that the theodolite consists of a graduated circle, divided into 360 degrees. This circle, movable on its[Pg 78] centre, is furnished with an air-bubble level, and a telescope above, both of which turn horizontally on a pivot in the centre of the circle. The level and the centre of the telescope are perfectly parallel to the plane of the circle. This is placed upon a stand with three legs, and the circle is first fixed horizontally by means of three regulating screws, and by turning the level. The air-bubble must be always at the centre, to whatever degree of the circle the tube is directed. This being done, and the feet being placed at the point marked on the ground—verifying the position by means of a plumb-line passing through the centre of the plate—the glass is directed towards a fixed point where a ‘sight’ is placed. The glass of the telescope is crossed by two hairs at right angles, which mark its centre. The intersection of the two hairs must fall on the point on which the telescope is directed. But previously the indicator or vernier below the telescope is set to the zero of the circle. It is therefore the entire instrument that has been turned. If, then, for example, we wish to construct a right angle on the line joining the point where you are standing with the first sight, you turn the glass till its indicator stands at 90 degrees (the quarter of the circle). You send a man with another sight in the direction of the glass, and have this sight carried to right or left until its centre is exactly on the line of the vertical hair of the glass. You have this sight fixed. It is then certain that the line drawn from the point where you stand in the direction of the second sight forms a right angle with the first base line, since two diameters cutting a circle divided into 360 degrees at right angles give 90 degrees for each quarter of the circle. By the help of this instrument, having previously indicated on the plan of a building whose foundations you are laying out, the angles which certain lines, starting from any point, form with each other, you can transfer these angles to the ground. Suppose you[Pg 79] have to lay the foundations of a semi-circular portico. Having fixed the centre, and traced the semi-circle on the ground, placing the theodolite on this centre, you will be able to direct lines that will cut this circumference at regular intervals, and which would mark, for instance, the centres of the columns or pillars. Since from point A to point B you have 180 degrees (Fig. 20), you will divide these 180 degrees into as many parts as you choose on the circle of the theodolite, and the centre of the glass will give you, at a great distance, the same divisions on the semi-circular portico. In the same way as the theodolite serves the purpose of laying the foundations of a building, it enables us to take the bearings of a tract of country. For suppose the base, E F, to be a known length which you have measured: placing your instrument at E, you direct the glass on a point C,—a tree, a steeple, or a pole; you have then the number of degrees on the circle comprised by the angle C E F. You transfer this angle to your paper, then moving the instrument to the point F, you direct it thence on this same point C; you obtain similarly the angle C F E, which, transferred to the paper, gives you exactly the position of the point C, and the unknown distance from E to C and from F to C; then either of these lengths will serve you for a base in its turn, and operating from the point C and the point F,[Pg 80] and sighting a fourth point D, you know the lengths C D and F D. Thus you can operate over a whole country; this is what is called triangulation, the first operation required for getting a map of the country. But we are getting into another region of knowledge. Let us go to breakfast!”

“In a situation like the one we just went through, it’s actually pretty straightforward. I asked Branchu to send my instrument to the château so I wouldn’t have to deal with it all morning; but there’s no need to have it here to demonstrate how to use it. You know that the theodolite consists of a graduated circle divided into 360 degrees. This circle, which can rotate around its center, has an air-bubble level and a telescope mounted above it, both of which can pivot horizontally at the center of the circle. The level and the center of the telescope are perfectly aligned with the plane of the circle. This setup is placed on a stand with three legs, and the circle is first leveled horizontally using three adjusting screws and by aligning the level. The air-bubble must always be centered, regardless of which degree of the circle the tube is pointing at. Once that’s done, with the feet positioned at the point marked on the ground—confirming its location with a plumb line through the center of the plate—the telescope is aimed at a fixed point where a ‘sight’ is located. The glass of the telescope has two hairs intersecting at right angles, which indicate its center. The intersection of the two hairs must align with the point the telescope is aimed at. Before doing that, the indicator or vernier below the telescope is set to zero on the circle. This means the entire instrument has been adjusted. So, for example, if we want to create a right angle between the line connecting where you are to the first sight, you would turn the telescope until its indicator shows 90 degrees (a quarter turn of the circle). You’d send someone with another sight in the direction of the telescope and have them move it left or right until it aligns perfectly with the vertical hair of the telescope. Once that sight is fixed, it’s guaranteed that the line drawn from where you are towards the second sight forms a right angle with the first baseline, since two diameters cutting a circle at 90 degrees produce 90 degrees for each quarter. Using this instrument, if you've previously marked out on the plan of a building whose foundations you’re laying, the angles that certain lines formed with each other starting from any point, you can transfer these angles to the ground. Suppose you need to lay the foundations for a semi-circular portico. After fixing the center and tracing the semi-circle on the ground, placing the theodolite at this center will allow you to direct lines that intersect this circumference at regular intervals, marking, for example, where the columns or pillars will be placed. Since from point A to point B you have 180 degrees (Fig. 20), you’ll divide these 180 degrees into however many parts you need on the theodolite's circle, and the center of the glass will give you the same divisions at a distance on the semi-circular portico. Just like the theodolite is used for laying building foundations, it can also help us take measurements of a piece of land. For example, if base E F is a known length you’ve measured: by placing your instrument at E, you’d aim the telescope at a point C—like a tree, a steeple, or a pole; you then get the number of degrees on the circle that make up angle C E F. You’d transfer this angle to your paper, then move the instrument to point F, aiming it at the same point C; you’ll obtain the angle C F E, which you can likewise transfer to your paper, giving you the exact position of point C, and the unknown distances from E to C and from F to C; either length can then serve as a base in turn, and working from points C and F, and aiming at a fourth point D, you’ll know the lengths C D and F D. This way, you can map out an entire area; this process is known as triangulation, which is the first step needed to create a map of the land. But we’re moving into a different area of knowledge. Let’s go have breakfast!”


[Pg 81]

[Pg 81]

CHAPTER VIII.
PAUL REFLECTS.

The omelette au jambon despatched, Paul remained silent.

The omelette au jambon finished, Paul stayed quiet.

“Well, my young colleague, you seem to be looking at something outside the real world. Is it hunger that gives you that pensive look? Shall we have another omelette?”

“Well, my young colleague, you seem to be looking at something beyond reality. Is it hunger that gives you that thoughtful expression? Should we get another omelette?”

“No, thank you. My hunger is quite satisfied. What bothers me is, that I don’t half understand all you have been so kindly explaining to me. There are points which I cannot catch; and I am asking myself whether I can be really of any use to you in overlooking the building. It seems to me that I should have much to learn; the little you have taught me is all in confusion in my head, and we haven’t even begun the work yet.”

“No, thank you. I’m not hungry right now. What worries me is that I don’t fully understand everything you’ve been so kindly explaining to me. There are aspects I just can’t grasp, and I wonder if I can really be any help to you in overseeing the building. It feels like I have a lot to learn; the little you’ve taught me is all jumbled in my mind, and we haven’t even started the work yet.”

“Discouraged already! Come, come! each day’s task can be finished in the day; and a house is not built so fast but that you can add something every day to your store of practical knowledge, without confusion.

“Discouraged already? Come on! You can finish each day's tasks in that day; and a house isn't built overnight, but you can add something to your practical knowledge every day without getting overwhelmed."

“All you learn will find its place in your brain, for the head is a marvellous box; the more you fill it the more it enlarges; and everything classified in the compartment destined to receive it can always be found again. The great thing is to keep one’s bureau in good order, and only to place in it objects well studied and sorted.

“All you learn will find its place in your brain, because the mind is an amazing storage space; the more you fill it, the more it expands; and everything organized in the right section can always be retrieved. The key is to keep your mental space organized and to only include things that are well studied and categorized.”

“But each day you ought to make a complete transcript of the work done, and leave nothing for the morrow. The[Pg 82] commission I give you—that is the daily record of all that is brought to the works, and of the employment of the materials—what we call ‘keeping account’ is only a question of exactness and care. The important point is not to let your work get beforehand with you. Two hours daily will suffice to take account on the spot. You see that you will still have three or four hours left to attend to the details of the execution, and to take your pleasure.”

“But every day, you should make a complete record of the work done and not leave anything for tomorrow. The[Pg 82] task I’m giving you is to keep a daily log of everything brought to the site and how the materials are used—what we refer to as ‘keeping account’ is really just a matter of accuracy and attention to detail. The key is not to let the workload pile up. Spending two hours each day should be enough to keep track of everything on the spot. As you can see, you will still have three or four hours left to focus on the execution details and enjoy yourself.”

“Did you begin to learn architecture in this way?”

“Did you start learning architecture like this?”

“Oh! by no means. When I left college I was articled to an architect for two years, who set me to copy drawings of buildings, of which I was not told either the age, or the country, or the use; then to lay on tints. During this time, I took lessons in mathematics, geometry, and drawings from models. I was then prepared to enter the École des Beaux Arts, where not much is taught, but where they compete to obtain medals and the Grand Prix, if you can. I remained there three years, making five in all. Meantime, I was obliged to get my living, for I had no more than enough to pay for my lodging and to buy clothes. I was obliged, therefore, to get into an office—that is to say, to work for so much an hour at an architect’s, who was in large practice. There I used to trace plans and nothing else, except now and then to make some detail drawings.—Heaven knows how!—for I had never seen the smallest part of a building executed. But my employer was not exacting, and the master builders supplied by their experience what was wanting in these details. Seeing that all this would not put me in a speedy way to master my profession, and being so fortunate as to have had a few hundred pounds left me, I resolved to travel—to study architecture in actual buildings, and no longer in those shown me on paper. I set myself to observe, to compare, to see practical men at work, to examine buildings that were crumbling to pieces,[Pg 83] that I might discover in animâ vili the causes of their ruin.

“Oh! definitely not. When I graduated from college, I worked as an apprentice to an architect for two years, where I was tasked with copying drawings of buildings, without being told their age, country, or purpose; then I added colors to those drawings. During this time, I took lessons in mathematics, geometry, and drawing from models. I was then ready to enter the École des Beaux Arts, where not much is taught, but where competition is fierce for medals and the Grand Prix, if you can manage it. I stayed there for three years, totaling five years of training. In the meantime, I had to earn a living since I only had just enough to cover my rent and buy clothes. So, I had to get a job in an office—that is, work for an hourly wage at an architect’s firm that had a large practice. There, I mostly traced plans and occasionally made some detailed drawings.—Heaven knows how!—since I had never seen even the smallest part of a building constructed. But my employer was lenient, and the master builders filled in the gaps in those details with their experience. Realizing that this wouldn’t quickly lead me to master my profession, and being lucky enough to inherit a few hundred pounds, I decided to travel—to study architecture in real buildings rather than just on paper. I focused on observing, comparing, watching practical workers at their craft, and examining buildings that were falling apart, [Pg 83] so I could uncover in animâ vili the reasons for their deterioration.

“At the end of five more years I was sufficiently acquainted with my profession to be able to practise it. Total—ten years; and I had not built even a dog-kennel. One of my patrons introduced me to an agency for government works, where I saw methods employed which scarcely agreed with the observations I had been able to make during my previous architectural studies. If at any time I allowed myself to make remarks on this discrepancy, I found they were not well received. This circumstance, and the fact that a fine opportunity offered itself for making use of what I had learned, occasioned my stay there to be of no long duration.

“At the end of five more years, I had enough experience in my profession to actually practice it. Total—ten years; and I hadn't even built a dog house. One of my clients introduced me to an agency for government projects, where I saw techniques being used that didn’t match the observations I had made during my earlier architectural studies. Whenever I commented on this difference, I found my remarks were not well received. This, along with a great opportunity to apply what I had learned, meant that my time there wasn’t very long.”

“A large commercial company was on the point of erecting manufacturing works on an extensive scale. They had engaged an architect who was proposing to erect buildings in the Roman style, which was not exactly what they wanted. They did not think it quite to the purpose to build in the plains of the Loire edifices recalling the splendours of Ancient Rome. I was introduced to the directors; they explained what they wanted to me. I listened; I worked indefatigably to acquire what I was ignorant of, in order to satisfy my clients. I visited factories, made the acquaintance of large contractors, studied building materials, and at length furnished the draft of a plan which pleased them, but which would scarcely satisfy me now. The work was begun; assiduous study, and constant attendance on the ground, enabled me to supply my deficiencies in point of knowledge, so that they were satisfied with my commencement. Most of these gentlemen had town and country-houses. I became their architect, and this soon obtained me large practice and more work than I could execute; especially as I have come to the conclusion that it is necessary to be always studying,[Pg 84] reasoning, and improving; so that (looking at the matter in this light) the further you advance the more difficulties you have to encounter.”

A large commercial company was about to start building manufacturing facilities on a huge scale. They had hired an architect who suggested using Roman-style designs, which wasn't exactly what they wanted. They felt it was unnecessary to construct buildings in the Loire Valley that reminded them of the grandeur of Ancient Rome. I was introduced to the directors, and they explained their needs to me. I listened carefully and worked tirelessly to learn what I didn't know in order to meet their expectations. I visited factories, connected with major contractors, studied construction materials, and eventually produced a plan that they liked, although I wouldn’t be satisfied with it now. The construction began; diligent research and being present on site helped me fill my knowledge gaps, and they were pleased with my initial efforts. Most of these gentlemen had both city and country houses. I became their architect, quickly gaining a lot of business and more work than I could handle, especially since I’ve realized it's crucial to keep studying, reasoning, and improving. In this regard, the further you progress, the more challenges you face.

“How, then, should architecture be studied?”

“How should we learn architecture?”

“Why,—as I have shown you,—by practising it. In France, at any rate, no other method has been employed hitherto, and perhaps this is the best.”

“Why— as I have shown you— by practicing it. In France, at least, no other method has been used so far, and maybe this is the best.”

“But how do those learn to build who do not travel, as you did, but simply study in the usual way?”

“But how do those who don't travel to learn how to build, like you did, but just study in the usual way?”

“They do not learn to build. They only learn to imagine and design impossible structures, under the pretext of preserving the traditions of ‘high art;’ and when they are tired of putting these fancies on paper, they have a place as clerk of works given them, where they do what you are going to do; the only difference being that they feel a disgust for the work because they were expecting something very different.”

“They do not learn to build. They only learn to imagine and design impossible structures, pretending it’s about preserving the traditions of ‘high art;’ and when they get tired of putting these ideas on paper, they end up as project managers, doing what you’re about to do; the only difference is that they feel disgust for the job because they were expecting something completely different.”

“But, beginning as I am going to begin, shall I be able afterwards to study the—what shall I call it?”

“But, starting as I’m about to start, will I be able to study the—what should I call it?”

“The theory,—the art, in short. Certainly, you will be able to study it much more easily; for the modicum of practical knowledge you will have acquired in building a house, or in seeing it built from foundation to roof, will enable you to understand many things which, without practice, are inexplicable in the study of the art. This will give you the habit of reasoning and of satisfying yourself as to the why and wherefore of certain forms and certain arrangements dictated by the necessities of practical building,—forms and arrangements which appear simply fanciful in the eyes of those who have no idea of those necessities.

“The theory—the art, in short. You’ll definitely find it easier to study; the practical knowledge you gain from building a house or witnessing its construction from the ground up will help you grasp many concepts that would be hard to understand without hands-on experience in the field. This will instill in you the habit of reasoning and getting to the bottom of why certain shapes and layouts are used in practical building—shapes and layouts that seem just fanciful to those who aren’t aware of those practical needs.”

“How are children taught to speak? Is it by explaining to them the rules of grammar when they are only three years old? No; but by speaking to them, and inducing them to speak to express their wishes or necessities.[Pg 85] When they have learned to speak nearly as well as you and I do, the mechanism and rules of language are explained to them, and then they can write correctly. But before learning according to what laws words ought to be placed, and how they ought to be written to compose a phrase, they had become acquainted with the signification of each of them.

“How are children taught to speak? Is it by explaining the rules of grammar when they’re only three years old? No; it’s by talking to them and encouraging them to speak to express their wants or needs.[Pg 85] Once they can speak almost as well as you and I, the mechanics and rules of language are taught to them, and then they can write correctly. But before they learn the laws of how words should be arranged and how they should be written to form a sentence, they’ve already gotten familiar with the meaning of each word.”

“If we had not in France the most singular ideas respecting teaching, we should begin with the beginning, not with the end, in the study of architecture. We should impart to students the practical elementary methods of the art of building, before setting them to work to copy the Parthenon or the Thermæ of Antoninus Caracalla, which, for want of those first practical notions are to them mere phantoms; we should thus train their young minds to reason and to become aware of all their deficiencies, instead of exciting their youthful vanity by exercises purely theoretical or artistic at an age when they cannot clearly understand the forms that are given to them as models.”

“If we didn’t have such unique ideas about teaching in France, we would start from the basics, not the advanced stuff, when studying architecture. We would teach students the fundamental practical methods of building before having them work on copying the Parthenon or the Baths of Caracalla, which, due to their lack of those basic practical concepts, are just illusions to them; this way, we would train their young minds to think critically and recognize their shortcomings, instead of boosting their young egos with purely theoretical or artistic exercises at an age when they can’t fully grasp the forms presented to them as models.”

“A house such as we are going to build seems to me a very small affair. Surely such a construction can hardly supply the information necessary for erecting a great edifice.”

“A house like the one we’re about to build feels pretty insignificant to me. Surely, this kind of structure can’t provide the details needed to construct a grand building.”

“Do not imagine that, Paul; construction, apart from certain branches of scientific and practical knowledge, which you will be able to study at leisure, is nothing but a method,—a habit of reasoning,—a compliance with the rules of common sense. Of course you must possess common sense and consult it. Unfortunately, there is a school of architects which disdains this natural faculty, asserting that it fetters imagination; for we have among us idealists, as there are in literature and among painters or sculptors; though if idealism is permissible among littérateurs and artists,—for there it is harmless,—in architecture[Pg 86] it is quite another thing; it is expensive, and you and I have to pay for it. We have consequently the right to consider it at least out of place. The reasoning faculties and good sense have to be called into exercise quite as much in building a house as in constructing the Louvre, in the same way as you may show tact and intellect in a letter as well as in a large volume.

“Don’t think like that, Paul; construction, aside from some specific areas of scientific and practical knowledge that you can study when you have time, is really just a method—a way of thinking—a following of common sense rules. Naturally, you need to have common sense and use it. Unfortunately, there’s a group of architects who look down on this natural ability, claiming it restricts creativity; just like we have idealists in literature and among painters or sculptors. But while idealism can be acceptable among writers and artists—where it doesn’t cause harm—in architecture, it’s a different story; it’s costly, and you and I end up paying for it. Therefore, we have the right to see it as at least inappropriate. You need to engage your reasoning and common sense just as much in building a house as you do in constructing the Louvre, just like you can show skill and thoughtfulness in a short letter as well as in a lengthy book.”

“The ability of an architect is not determined by the quantity of cubic feet of stone he uses. The size of the building makes no difference.”

“The skill of an architect isn't measured by how much stone he uses. The size of the building doesn’t matter.”

“You maintain, then, that as much ability is required to build a moderate-sized house as to erect a vast palace?”

“You're saying that it takes just as much skill to build a regular-sized house as it does to construct a huge palace?”

“I do not say that; I say that the faculties of the mind, reasoning, accuracy, the exact appreciation of the materials at our disposal, and their proper use, are manifested as well in the construction of the simplest habitation as in the erection of the most magnificent architectural monument.”

“I’m not saying that; I’m saying that the abilities of the mind—like reasoning, precision, accurately assessing the resources we have, and using them appropriately—are shown just as much in building the simplest home as in creating the most magnificent architectural masterpiece.”

“I shall then be able to learn much in observing the building of my sister’s house?”

“I will be able to learn a lot by watching my sister’s house being built?”

“Certainly. First, because one learns much when one has the wish to learn; secondly, because in a house, as in the largest of palaces, the entire architectural staff will have to present themselves before you, from the excavator to the decorative painter. Whether the carpenter makes twenty doors or two hundred, if you can get a clear notion of how a door is made, hinged, and hung, one alone is quite enough; you have no need to see a thousand.”

“Definitely. First, because you learn a lot when you want to learn; second, because in a house, just like in the biggest palaces, every member of the construction team has to present themselves to you, from the excavator to the decorative painter. Whether the carpenter makes twenty doors or two hundred, if you can understand how a door is made, hinged, and hung, seeing just one is more than enough; you don’t need to see a thousand.”

“But here we shall not be making doors (for example) such as those of royal apartments?”

“But here we won’t be making doors, like those in royal suites?”

“No; but the principles on which they are, or ought to be made, are the same for both; and it is by departing from these principles that we fall into mere whims and follies. When you know how a wooden door is made you will see that the structure is adapted to the nature of the[Pg 87] material employed, viz., wood, and to the purpose it has to serve. This knowledge acquired, you will be able to study how clever men have made use of these elements, and how (without departing from fundamental principles) they have produced simple or splendid works; you will be able to do as they have done, if you have talent, and to seek new applications of principles. But you must, in the first place, know how a door is made, and not imitate at hazard, while destitute of this preliminary practical knowledge, the various forms that have been adopted, be they good or bad.”

“No; but the principles behind how they are, or should be, created are the same for both; and it's by straying from these principles that we end up with mere fads and foolishness. Once you understand how a wooden door is made, you'll realize that its design is suited to the characteristics of the material used—wood—and to the function it needs to fulfill. With this knowledge, you'll be able to examine how skilled individuals have utilized these elements, and how (without abandoning fundamental principles) they've created both simple and impressive works; you can replicate their success if you have talent, and explore new ways to apply these principles. However, you must first learn how a door is made, rather than randomly copying various styles that have been used, whether they’re good or bad, without this essential practical knowledge.”

Paul continued thoughtful all the rest of the day. It was evident that he was becoming aware of grave difficulties, and the building of his sister’s house was assuming in his mind disquieting proportions. Returning to the château, he began to look at the doors, the windows, and the wainscoting, as if he had never seen anything like them in his life; and the longer he looked, the more confused, complicated, and difficult to understand did it all appear to him. He had never asked himself by what contrivances these pieces of wood were combined and held together, and found hardly any satisfactory solutions of the questions he was putting to himself.

Paul spent the rest of the day deep in thought. It was clear that he was realizing some serious challenges, and the construction of his sister's house was taking on alarming proportions in his mind. As he returned to the château, he began to examine the doors, the windows, and the wainscoting as if he had never seen anything like them before; and the longer he looked, the more confused, complicated, and hard to understand it all became to him. He had never considered how these pieces of wood were joined and held together, and he found hardly any satisfactory answers to the questions he was raising.


[Pg 88]

[Pg 88]

CHAPTER IX.
PAUL, CLERK OF THE WORKS.

“Go, my dear Paul, and see how far the excavations are advanced this morning,” said Eugène, two days after the visit to the ground, “and bring me your report. Take a rule and a note-book with you, and take notes and measurements of what has been done. You will examine the ground, and tell me if they find blocks of stone near the surface of the soil, or if the loose earth is deep. In the meantime I am going to draw the plan of the cellars. But take the tracing of the plan of the ground-floor of the house, and on this plan, mark out what they have begun to excavate, and what they find. The work cannot be far advanced; but some excavations will have been already made, since I have told Branchu to set as many labourers to work as he could find, so as to comply with your father’s intentions.”

“Go on, my dear Paul, and see how far the digging has progressed this morning,” said Eugène, two days after the site visit, “and bring me your report. Take a measuring tape and a notebook with you, and make notes and measurements of what has been done. Check the ground and let me know if they’ve found stone blocks near the surface or if the loose soil is deep. In the meantime, I’m going to draw the plan of the cellars. But take the sketch of the ground floor of the house, and on this sketch, mark what they’ve started to excavate and what they’ve found. The work can’t be too advanced yet, but some digging must have been done since I told Branchu to set as many workers to the task as he could find to follow your father’s plan.”

A little embarrassed by his new duties, Paul soon reached the ground. Aided by Branchu, he took the measure of the diggings, indicated the depths as well as he could, and marked the spots where they found rock or loose earth. This took him two good hours.

A bit embarrassed by his new responsibilities, Paul quickly reached the ground. With Branchu's help, he assessed the diggings, indicated the depths as best as he could, and marked the places where they discovered rock or loose soil. This took him a solid two hours.

“Well,” said Eugène, when they were settled in the study, after breakfast, “there is the plan of the cellars (Fig. 21). Let us see how it will suit your report of the ground, and whether we shall have to make some modifications in this plan. Ah! I see the rock is nearly on the[Pg 89] surface towards the south, and the loose soil reaches pretty uniformly a depth of three yards towards the north of our buildings. We shall, therefore, make the cellars under the drawing-room, the dining-room, and the billiard-room, in the limestone rock,—cutting the latter; and we shall make a foundation for the front part, especially for the stabling and coach-house, with good masonry.

“Well,” said Eugène, once they were settled in the study after breakfast, “here's the plan for the cellars (Fig. 21). Let’s see how it aligns with your report on the ground and if we need to make any changes to this plan. Ah! I see the rock is almost at the surface in the south, and the loose soil consistently goes down about three yards towards the north of our buildings. So, we’ll put the cellars under the drawing room, dining room, and billiard room, carving into the limestone for the latter; and we’ll lay a solid foundation for the front area, particularly for the stables and coach house, using good masonry.”

Fig. 21.

Fig. 21.

“Here (Fig. 21) is the plan of the cellars. You see these axial lines: they indicate the centres of the walls of the ground-floor, and must not be departed from. The figures denoting the thickness of the walls are always marked from these centres. Thus you see these dimensions are greater where the cellar-wall will have to carry the spring of the vaulting of the cellars—as I explained to you, the other day.

“Here (Fig. 21) is the layout of the cellars. You see these straight lines? They show the centers of the ground-floor walls, and you need to stick to them. The numbers showing the thickness of the walls are always measured from these centers. So, as you can see, these dimensions are larger where the cellar wall needs to support the arch of the cellars—as I explained to you the other day.”

“We have a rivulet that will supply the services of the house, by means of a reservoir, which we will place as high as possible. We have not yet taken the levels; but judging by a glance, I should say (reckoning by the falls of the[Pg 90] rivulet and the rapidity of its course) that at 100 yards from the house the reservoir will store the water so as to enable it to reach the level of the first floor by pipes. That we shall have to ascertain. Otherwise we shall have recourse to a pump worked by horse-power or by a windmill. We will afterwards conduct this stream of water into a drain along the walls at the north of the house, as you see at A, so that this drain may collect the waste water from the house by a conduit, B, and receive the closet discharges at C, D, and E. The running water will thus take off this sewage into a tank, which we will make down below in the kitchen-garden. This water when it has settled is excellent—let me tell you—for watering the vegetables.

“We have a small stream that will provide the house with water through a reservoir, which we'll place as high as possible. We haven't measured the levels yet, but just by looking, I’d estimate (considering the drop of the stream and how fast it flows) that about 100 yards from the house, the reservoir will hold enough water to get it to the first floor via pipes. We’ll need to confirm that. Otherwise, we’ll have to use a pump powered by a horse or a windmill. After that, we’ll direct this water into a drain along the north wall of the house, as you see at A, so that this drain can collect the waste water from the house through a conduit, B, and take the toilet waste at C, D, and E. The flowing water will then carry this sewage into a tank that we’ll build in the kitchen garden. This water, once it has settled, is great—let me tell you—for watering the vegetables.”

“I have indicated on the plan at G the sections of the cellar barrel-vaults. The cellars will measure 5 feet from the floor to the spring of the vaults, and the vaults will have a rise of 5 feet. These cellars, therefore, will have a height of 10 feet under the crown, which will be very satisfactory, especially as the ground is dry. We shall then be able to make use of the cellars, not only for storing wines but vegetables, for a larder, &c. The level of our ground-floor being 5 feet above the general surface of the ground, we shall easily ventilate these cellars by air-holes, as I have marked at H. The descent to them will be by the steps on the right, situated near the wash-houses and by the servants’ stairs in the turret. The right-hand steps will serve for taking down stores, and the winding-stairs for carrying up the wines and other things to the pantry.

“I have indicated on the plan at G the sections of the cellar barrel vaults. The cellars will be 5 feet tall from the floor to the start of the vaults, and the vaults will rise 5 feet. This means the cellars will have a total height of 10 feet under the crown, which will be very satisfactory, especially since the ground is dry. We will be able to use the cellars not only for storing wines but also for vegetables, a pantry, etc. The level of our ground floor is 5 feet above the general surface of the ground, so we can easily ventilate these cellars with air holes, as I have indicated at H. The way down to them will be via the steps on the right, located near the washhouses and the servants’ stairs in the turret. The right-hand steps will be used for taking down supplies, and the winding stairs will be for carrying up the wines and other items to the pantry.”

“Have you seen whether Branchu has taken care to have the materials extracted from the excavations regularly deposited?”

“Have you checked if Branchu has made sure to have the materials from the excavations deposited regularly?”

“Yes: but hitherto he has found only thin layers of what he calls rag; but he has them stacked, and tells me they will be very good for foundation walls.”

“Yes, but so far he has only found thin layers of what he calls rag. However, he has them stacked up and says they will be great for foundation walls.”

“He is right: this rag is liable to injury from frost in[Pg 91] the open air, but it is hard, and does very well in cellars; and it makes good strong walling, because it is bedded,—that is, occurs in the natural state in thin parallel layers, 4 to 6 inches thick.”

"He’s right: this material is prone to damage from frost when left outside, but it’s durable and works great in cellars; plus, it makes strong walls because it’s layered in the natural state, about 4 to 6 inches thick."

“That is just about what he told me; but he added that it swallows up a great deal of mortar, and I did not quite understand what he meant by that.”

"That's pretty much what he told me; but he added that it consumes a lot of mortar, and I didn't really get what he meant by that."

“The fact is this;—the thinner the layers of stone are, the more beds of mortar they require between them; but if you have observed the thin stones in question you will have remarked that they are extremely rough and riddled, with cavities on their beds. There must be plenty of mortar between each course, to fill these rugosities and cavities well: and for that very reason masonry of this kind is excellent, if you are not sparing of mortar; and these rough surfaces adhere to the mortar much better than smooth surfaces could do: they become incorporated with it, and the whole soon forms one solid mass. But then you must not spare lime and sand, and that is why Branchu says this kind of walling swallows up a great deal of mortar.”

“The truth is this: the thinner the layers of stone, the more mortar beds they need between them. If you've looked at these thin stones, you’ll see they are very rough and full of cavities on their surfaces. There has to be a lot of mortar between each layer to fill these rough spots and holes properly. For this reason, this type of masonry works well, as long as you're not stingy with the mortar. These rough surfaces bond to the mortar much better than smooth ones do; they become one with it, and soon it all becomes a solid mass. But you can’t skimp on lime and sand, and that’s why Branchu says this kind of wall requires a lot of mortar.”

“Branchu also says that he has been finding stone good for making lime, above blocks of building limestone, and asks whether he is to put that aside.”

“Branchu also mentions that he has found stone suitable for making lime, above blocks of building limestone, and asks if he should disregard that.”

“Certainly if the lime-burner at the Mill cannot furnish us with lime, we will make it ourselves; this will not be difficult since we have plenty of firewood from the recent fellings.”

“Of course, if the lime-burner at the Mill can't provide us with lime, we'll make it ourselves; this won't be hard since we have plenty of firewood from the recent tree cuttings.”

“Branchu also asked me where he was to put the excavated earth.”

“Branchu also asked me where he should put the dirt he dug up.”

“You will tell him to-morrow morning, to have it deposited en cavalier to the right and left of the excavations; we shall want it to level the approaches to the house.”

“You will tell him tomorrow morning to have it deposited en cavalier on the right and left of the excavations; we will need it to level the approaches to the house.”

“What is a cavalier?”

“What is a cavalier?”

Fig. 22.

Fig. 22.

“It is an artificial mound of regular breadth and height, so that its solid content can easily be calculated. Thus,[Pg 92] when earth is removed from diggings with wheelbarrows,—and this is, as you see, the means we are employing,—we mark out the area this mound is to occupy on the ground, as at A B (Fig. 22), representing the length, and C D the breadth. That done, the point B being farthest from where the excavation is going on, the wheelbarrow men deposit their first loads at B, leaving an inclined embankment not too steep for the barrows to be wheeled up it without too much labour. Thus by degrees an embankment, A E B, is formed. Then, from the middle F half way up the incline A E, they leave a road, a b, 5 feet wide for the barrows to go up and down, and then fill up the triangle, A G F, by inclined layers. Lastly, they fill the triangle, G F E. The road, g D h i, remains to be filled up, and the shovellers do this by depositing the soil on the road itself. The mound being thus perfectly regular, its slopes are produced by the running down of the soil—that is, they form angles of about 40° with the horizon, according to the nature of the embankment. The mound being finished, and measuring, say, 10 yards long at half its length from l to m, and 4 yards wide at half its height from n to b,—multiplying 10 yards by 4 yards we get 40 superficial yards at this mean level. Multiplying this number by 2 yards, the height of the[Pg 93] mound, we get 80 cubic yards. You know therefore that this quantity of earth has been moved, and consequently, what you have to pay, if your cuttings and embankings are at so much per cubic yard, or what a cubic yard of soil removed costs you if you pay by the day.”

“It’s an artificial mound with a consistent width and height, making it easy to calculate its solid content. So, when we remove earth using wheelbarrows—which is the method we’re using—we outline the space this mound will take on the ground, like at A B (Fig. 22) for the length, and C D for the width. Once that’s done, the point B, being the farthest from the excavation site, is where the wheelbarrow workers drop their first loads at B, creating a gentle slope that isn’t too steep for the barrows to easily navigate. Gradually, an embankment, A E B, is formed. From the midpoint F, halfway up the slope A E, they leave a path, a b, 5 feet wide for the barrows to move up and down, and then fill the triangle A G F with sloping layers. Finally, they fill the triangle G F E. The path, g D h i, still needs to be filled, which the shovelers do by placing soil directly on the path. With the mound being perfectly regular, its slopes are shaped by the soil falling, forming angles of about 40° with the horizon, depending on the type of embankment. Once the mound is complete, measuring around 10 yards long halfway from l to m, and 4 yards wide halfway from n to b, multiplying 10 yards by 4 yards gives us 40 square yards at this average level. Multiplying that number by 2 yards, the height of the mound, we find 80 cubic yards. So, you know that this amount of earth has been moved, and therefore, what you need to pay if your excavations and embankments are priced per cubic yard, or what it costs you per cubic yard of soil removed if you’re paying by the day.”

“This will give us the solid content of the excavation then?”

“This will give us the solid details of the excavation then?”

“Not exactly. Earth compressed,—settled down in the natural soil,—occupies a smaller volume than that which, having been moved, leaves many interspaces between the materials of the embankment. Soil when removed is said to increase, more or less. Sea-sand does not increase, while pebbly earth, mixed with vegetable detritus, increases greatly. In your memoranda, therefore, you must take account of the looseness caused by excavating, to get the solid content of the soil removed; and take the solid content of the mounds when we make use of them, to know the mass of earth we shall have to transport elsewhere.”

“Not exactly. When earth is compressed and settles into the natural soil, it takes up less space than when it’s been moved, leaving gaps between the materials of the embankment. Soil that’s been removed is said to increase, to some extent. Sea sand doesn’t increase, while pebbly soil mixed with plant debris increases significantly. So, in your notes, make sure to consider the looseness caused by excavation to determine the solid content of the soil that’s been removed; and note the solid content of the mounds when we use them to know how much earth we’ll need to transport elsewhere.”

“You will now draw this plan of the cellars to a scale of a quarter of an inch to a foot, so that you may figure the dimensions very legibly where required; then I shall indicate to you on this plan the points where bedded stone must be placed.”

“You will now create this plan of the cellars at a scale of a quarter of an inch to a foot, so you can clearly see the dimensions where needed; then I'll point out on this plan where the bedded stone should be placed.”

“What are bedded stones?”

“What are embedded stones?”

“Dressed stone laid as a foundation is thus designated, and which is only dressed on its beds,—that is to say, which presents no visible faces. Dressed stone has always two beds, which are its horizontal surfaces, one or more faces, which are its exposed surfaces, and its joints, which are its separating surfaces. Thus, let us suppose a corner stone, bearing a pilaster, and having the form indicated here (Fig. 23), the surface a b c d e f, g h i j k l are the upper and lower beds. The surfaces a l b g, b g c h, c d h i, d e i j are the exposed faces, and the surfaces c f j k, a f k l are the joints, as the adjacent stones touch these surfaces. You[Pg 94] will easily see that when stones are placed below the surface, as a foundation, it is not necessary to dress the faces which would be visible only to the moles. This cutting therefore is saved; the stone is left in the rough on its vertical faces, and only those on which it rests are cut. For these bedded stones solid blocks are chosen, which sustain pressure, but which may be very coarse in grain, and even sensible to frost (i.e., liable to be cracked by frost), and which could not be employed in the open air without danger; under ground these stones are preserved from the action of frost. But care must be taken with regard to these stones even more than for those above ground, to place them according to their quarry-bed, and their natural stratified position; otherwise they might be broken or crushed beneath the weight of the masonry above.

“Dressed stone laid as a foundation is thus designated, and it is only dressed on its beds—that is to say, it presents no visible faces. Dressed stone has two beds, which are its horizontal surfaces, one or more faces, which are its exposed surfaces, and its joints, which are its separating surfaces. So, let’s imagine a corner stone with a pilaster, shaped like this (Fig. 23), the surfaces a b c d e f and g h i j k l are the upper and lower beds. The surfaces a l b g, b g c h, c d h i, d e i j are the exposed faces, and the surfaces c f j k, a f k l are the joints, since the adjacent stones touch these surfaces. You[Pg 94] will see that when stones are placed below the surface as a foundation, it’s unnecessary to dress the faces that would only be visible to moles. This cutting is therefore avoided; the stone is left rough on its vertical faces, and only the surfaces that support it are cut. For these bedded stones, solid blocks are chosen that can bear pressure but may be quite coarse in texture, even prone to frost damage (i.e., likely to crack from frost), which couldn’t be used outdoors safely; underground, these stones are protected from frost. However, care must be taken with these stones even more than with those above ground, to place them according to their quarry-bed and natural layered position; otherwise, they could be broken or crushed under the weight of the masonry above.”

Fig. 23.

Fig. 23.

“When our plan is drawn, we shall indicate by a particular colour the parts where we wish bedded stones to be placed. These will be the angles and the junctions of the walls which sustain the heaviest pressure relatively to the rest. Between these bedded stones the masonry will be carried up simply in rubble-work.

“When we finalize our plan, we’ll mark the sections where we want bedded stones to go using a specific color. These will be the corners and intersections of the walls that bear the most weight compared to the others. The masonry between these bedded stones will be constructed just in rubble-work."

“The ground being good, we shall content ourselves with[Pg 95] foundations only half a yard below the area of the cellars. But as soon as we have reached this level, the dressed stones will necessarily have faces visible in the cellars; these stones will therefore not merely be bedded, but faced and jointed. We will not take the best and finest grained, but those that resist pressure best, and which in this district are the coarsest in appearance. We shall put dressed stones in our cellars at the angles, the jambs of the doors and air-holes, and in the newels of the stairs.

“The ground is solid, so we’ll settle for foundations just half a yard below the cellar floor. Once we reach this level, the cut stones will be visible in the cellars; therefore, these stones won't just be laid down but will also be finished and joined. We won’t use the best and finest grain, but rather those that can withstand pressure best, which are the roughest in this area. We will place cut stones in the cellars at the corners, the door frames, air vents, and the newels of the stairs.”

“But you have enough work for to-day and to-morrow morning.... Ah! I was forgetting! If Branchu meets springs, or drippings, that trouble him, inform me, because we must immediately make drains to collect the water. That will determine us as to the level to be given to the bed of our sewer.”

“But you have enough work for today and tomorrow morning.... Ah! I almost forgot! If Branchu encounters any springs or drippings that bother him, let me know, because we need to quickly make drains to collect the water. That will help us decide the level for our sewer bed.”

“What do you mean by the bed?”

“What do you mean by the bed?”

Fig. 24.

Fig. 24.

“It is the part of a channel sluice or a sewer on which the water flows; it is the bottom, which ought to be formed so solidly that the force of the current cannot disturb it. The beds of sewers, therefore, should be made of good flat stones, or, which is still better, of hydraulic cement, when it can be procured, because the water finds its way between the joints of the stones; while, if the cement is properly used, it forms along the whole channel one homogeneous mass perfectly water-tight. Besides we take care to give to the bed of a drain a section slightly concave, joining its walls without angles; for water takes advantage of angles to effect its work of destruction. Angles, moreover, are not easily cleared out when subterranean channels have to be cleansed. The best form to give to a sewer is the one given here in section (Fig. 24).

“It is the part of a channel sluice or a sewer where the water flows; it is the bottom, which should be constructed so solidly that the force of the current cannot disturb it. The beds of sewers should therefore be made of good flat stones, or, even better, of hydraulic cement when it is available, because water can get through the joints of the stones. When cement is used properly, it creates a uniform, watertight mass along the entire channel. Additionally, we make sure to shape the bottom of a drain with a slight concave section, connecting its walls without sharp angles; this is because water exploits angles to cause erosion. Angles are also hard to clean out when underground channels need maintenance. The best shape for a sewer is illustrated in the section (Fig. 24).


[Pg 96]

[Pg 96]

CHAPTER X.
PAUL BEGINS TO UNDERSTAND.

In spite of the news of the war, which was daily assuming a more threatening character, M. de Gandelau insisted on the works not being interrupted; and the inhabitants of the château found in the execution of the plans prepared by Eugène and Paul a beneficial distraction from the sad forebodings which oppressed them.

Despite the news of the war, which was becoming more alarming every day, M. de Gandelau insisted that the work continue without interruption; and the people living in the château found that following the plans developed by Eugène and Paul provided a helpful distraction from the gloomy feelings weighing them down.

In the evening, after reading the paper, which recorded, alas! only a succession of disasters, everyone remained silent, with eyes fixed on the hearth; but soon, with a determined effort, M. de Gandelau started the inquiry how the house was getting on. It was for Paul, as Clerk of the Works, to give an account of the operations of the day, and he began to perform his task with a fair amount of exactness and clearness. He showed his memorandum books, which, thanks to Eugène’s corrections, were not very badly drawn up, and which, by the help of a daily summary of accounts, indicated the expenses that had been incurred.

In the evening, after reading the newspaper, which reported, unfortunately, just a series of disasters, everyone sat in silence, staring at the fire. But soon, with a determined effort, M. de Gandelau started to ask how things were going with the house. It was up to Paul, as Clerk of the Works, to report on the day’s activities, and he began his task with a good level of precision and clarity. He presented his notebooks, which, thanks to Eugène’s corrections, were fairly well organized, and which, with the help of a daily summary of accounts, outlined the expenses that had occurred.

Fig. 25.

Fig. 25.

The excavations had hitherto furnished enough materials to obviate the necessity of sending for any from the neighbouring quarries. About the 15th of September the cellar walls were already beginning to make their plan visible, and it was time to think of the exterior plinths in elevation, and of the cellar vaultings, for whose construction wooden centres were required. The carpenter was therefore commissioned to send for timber-sawyers, to convert some[Pg 97] trunks of poplars, which having been cut some time before, were put by for the purpose. The best part of the wood was sawn into thin boards for battens, to be employed when required; and the slabs—that is, the part near the bark—were cut up for centring for the cellars. As the plans gave only two barrel-vaults whose arches were different, the curves were soon struck out, and the carpenter prepared the centres, which were fixed up as soon as the cellar walls reached the level of the spring of the vaults These centres were formed in the manner shown in Fig. 25—that is, consisted each of a tie-piece, A, a king-post, B, two blades, C, and clips, D, which held fast the curves formed of slabs of poplar nailed together, as shown at E, and fixed at G and H on to the king-post by means of a notch, F, and to the tie-piece by an iron staple. On these centres, supported by props K, and set five feet apart,[Pg 98] they laid a covering composed of planks, L, 3 inches thick, to receive the vaults, which were made of blocks of tufa extracted from the banks of the rivulet, 8 inches in thickness, with a good layer of mortar over all. The openings for the air-holes had to be contrived in the haunches of the vault, a piece of work which gave Paul considerable trouble—or rather, he had some difficulty in understanding it and sketching it in his note-book; for, as to Branchu, he did not seem to find any particular difficulty in it.

The excavation so far had provided enough materials to eliminate the need to source anything from nearby quarries. By around September 15th, the cellar walls were beginning to show their layout, and it was time to consider the height of the exterior base and the cellar ceilings, which required wooden supports for their construction. The carpenter was thus tasked with calling in lumberjacks to process some poplar logs that had been cut earlier and stored for this purpose. The best parts of the wood were cut into thin boards for battens, to be used later, while the slabs—those near the bark—were cut up for the cellar supports. Since the plans only included two barrel-vaults with different arches, the curves were quickly laid out, and the carpenter prepared the supports, which were set up as soon as the cellar walls reached the level needed for the vaults. These supports were designed as shown in Fig. 25—consisting of a tie-piece, A, a king-post, B, two blades, C, and clips, D, that held the curves made from slabs of poplar nailed together, as shown at E, and fixed at G and H to the king-post with a notch, F, and to the tie-piece with an iron staple. On these supports, held by props K, and spaced five feet apart,[Pg 98] they placed a covering of planks, L, 3 inches thick, to support the vaults, which were made of blocks of tufa from the riverbank, 8 inches thick, with a layer of mortar on top. The openings for the air-holes had to be created in the sides of the vault, which gave Paul quite a bit of trouble—or rather, he found it challenging to understand and sketch it in his notebook; as for Branchu, he didn't seem to have any trouble with it at all.

Eugène had given the sketch for the air-holes at the same time as the section of the plinth, 5 feet in height above the ground level.

Eugène had provided the sketch for the air-holes along with the section of the base, which was 5 feet high above the ground level.

Fig. 26.

Fig. 26.

This drawing presented, in section at A, and in plan at B, the figure 26. Eugène had to explain this sketch to his clerk-of-works, who did not understand it at the first glance. “As the light comes from the sky, at the mean angle of 45°, the cellars must be lighted accordingly,” said Eugène. “The plinth consists of a course, D, half sunk in the ground, two clear courses, E F, and a course bearing the set-off. We give the cellar wall bearing the spring of the vaults, 3 feet. The wall above the floor-level being 2 feet, this wall gives one foot on each side of the fixed centre-line, but as the plinth has 4 inches of projection outside, there will be 16 inches from the centre to the exterior face of this plinth. Within, the wall descends plumb as far as the skew-back which carries the vaults. A width of 8 inches is needed to receive the latter. Thus, from the centre-line below the spring of the vaults there will be 20 inches in the interior, and 16 inches on the exterior: total, 3 feet. The lower course rising above the surface 6 inches, and the height of the plinth being 5 feet, there remains above these 6 inches, 4 feet 6 inches, which divided by three gives for each course 18 inches. I take the opening of the air-hole in the second course; out[Pg 99] of the third, I take a chamfer of 4 inches, to admit the light, as the exterior, M, and the section indicate. I cut the first course to a slope of 45°, as shown at I, leaving a flat, a, of 12 inches, as you see in the plan. Then, behind this sill, I place a lintel, with a chamfer in the same way, as drawn at O, and take care to leave at b, two rebates of 2 inches, for casements or gratings, at discretion. At the back of these rebates, I splay the air-hole, which has only 2 feet 8 inches of exterior opening, to 3 feet 4 inches. I draw in section an inclined line, m n, 8 inches above the[Pg 100] lintel O, which 8 inches will be the rise of the arched opening that will penetrate into the barrel-vault, and whose curve in horizontal projection will give the outline X. Thus this arch, X, will receive the thrust of the courses of the barrel-vault, and will throw it on the two cheeks, P. Branchu will only have to mark the curve X on the covering of the centres to form his arched opening.”

This drawing shown in section at A and in plan at B, figure 26, needed explanation from Eugène to his clerk of works, who didn’t get it right away. “With the light coming from the sky at an average angle of 45°, the cellars must be lit accordingly,” said Eugène. “The plinth is made up of a course, D, partially buried in the ground, two clear courses, E F, and a course that carries the set-off. We’ll have the cellar wall supporting the vaults at 3 feet high. The wall above floor level is 2 feet, so this wall extends 1 foot on each side of the fixed center line. Since the plinth projects 4 inches outside, there will be 16 inches from the center to the outer face of the plinth. Inside, the wall goes straight down to the skew-back that supports the vaults. An 8-inch width is needed for this. Therefore, from the center line below the vaults’ spring, there will be 20 inches on the inside, and 16 inches on the outside, totaling 3 feet. The lower course rises 6 inches above the surface, and with the plinth height being 5 feet, that leaves us with 4 feet 6 inches above those 6 inches. Dividing that by three gives us 18 inches for each course. I’m placing the air-hole opening in the second course; from the third, I’ll take a 4-inch chamfer to let in the light, as indicated in the exterior, M, and the section. I’ll cut the first course at a 45° slope, as shown at I, leaving a flat area, a, of 12 inches, as seen in the plan. Then, behind this sill, I’ll place a lintel with a similar chamfer, as drawn at O, and I’ll make sure to leave two 2-inch rebates at b for casements or grilles, as needed. At the back of these rebates, I’ll flare the air-hole, which has only a 2 feet 8 inches exterior opening, to 3 feet 4 inches. I’ll draw in the section an inclined line, m n, which will be 8 inches above the lintel O; this 8 inches will be the rise of the arched opening that extends into the barrel vault, whose horizontal curve will outline X. So, this arch, X, will support the thrust of the barrel vault courses and direct it onto the two cheeks, P. Branchu only needs to mark the curve X on the covering of the centers to create his arched opening.”

Fig. 27.

Fig. 27.

It was not quite certain that Paul perfectly caught this explanation, though repeated several times; and he did not understand it completely till he saw Branchu construct the air-holes and the centres were removed (Fig. 27).

It wasn't completely clear that Paul fully understood this explanation, even after hearing it several times; he didn't really get it until he saw Branchu create the air holes and remove the centers (Fig. 27).

Fig. 28.

Fig. 28.

“I spare you the difficulties,” said Eugène, seeing that[Pg 101] Paul was puzzled to comprehend the construction of the cellars, “for the structure of the vaults and their penetrations is a matter that requires long study. We have made only simple barrel-vaults, and you will observe that the cellar doors are all in the end walls, or tympanums, and not in the side walls bearing the springing of the vaults. With the difficulties, I also avoid useless expense. The courses which form the plinth will be of hard stone, but you will observe that, except at the angles and for the air-holes, they are only a facing,—they are not parpings, that is, do not form the whole thickness of the wall. We have excellent rubble-stone, which, with the good mortar we employ, offers greater resistance to pressure than is required to carry two stories and a roof. Letting these rough stones tooth out on the inside we tie them better into the haunches of the barrel-vaults (Fig. 28), and thus economise dressed stone. You will also see in elevation, above the plinth, how we can spare dressed stone if we wish, while preserving a perfectly[Pg 102] sound construction. We find moreover, on the surrounding uplands, layers of thin limestone, which split in regular beds from 6 to 8 inches in thickness, and which make capital range-work. We call that range, or coursed work, in which the stone is laid with visible faces, beds, and joints somewhat roughly dressed. This range-work facing, which presents in its way an attractive appearance, and whose rusticity contrasts with the smooth finish of the dressed stone, is backed with ordinary rubble walling. Thus, in districts where stone occurs naturally of this shape in the quarries, we get an economical building material. But it is puerile to amuse one’s self with making thin coursed-work where soft freestone abounds, and where it must be cut into little bits to obtain this appearance. You will see that it is contrary to common sense to cut great blocks of stone into little bits, and that when the quarries supply those only, it is reasonable to employ them according to their natural dimensions, and to adapt the construction to the nature and height of the stones. Here we have large blocks, when we require them, but they are not common. In short, we ought to proceed, as far as possible, according to the nature of the materials which the soil furnishes us in abundance.”

“I’ll spare you the details,” said Eugène, noticing that[Pg 101] Paul was having trouble understanding how the cellars were built, “because the design of the vaults and their openings is something that takes a lot of study. We’ve only made simple barrel-vaults, and you’ll see that all the cellar doors are in the end walls, or tympanums, not in the side walls that support the vaults. By avoiding the complexities, I also eliminate unnecessary costs. The layers forming the base will be made of hard stone, but you’ll observe that, except at the corners and for the air-holes, they are just a facing—they don’t go all the way through the wall. We have excellent rubble-stone, which, along with the good mortar we use, can withstand more pressure than is needed to support two stories and a roof. Allowing these rough stones to show on the inside helps secure them better into the haunches of the barrel-vaults (Fig. 28), which saves on dressed stone. You’ll also see in the elevation above the base how we can minimize the use of dressed stone if we choose, while still maintaining a solid structure. Furthermore, we find thin layers of limestone in the surrounding hills that split into regular beds of 6 to 8 inches thick, perfect for range work. We refer to that as range or coursed work, where the stone is laid with visible faces, beds, and joints that are somewhat roughly dressed. This range-work facing looks appealing in its own way, and its rustic look contrasts nicely with the smooth finish of dressed stone, backed by ordinary rubble walling. So, in areas where stone naturally occurs in this shape at the quarries, we have an economical building material. However, it’s silly to make thin coursed work where soft freestone is abundant and has to be cut into small pieces to achieve that look. It doesn’t make sense to chop large blocks of stone into small pieces, and when quarries only provide large stones, it’s wise to use them in their natural size and adjust the construction to fit the character and height of the stones. Here, we have large blocks available when we need them, but they aren’t common. In short, we should proceed, as much as possible, based on the materials that the soil provides abundantly.”

The drain was made, the vaults were turned; the steps down to the cellars were laid; the plinth had risen more than a yard above the ground. It was time to think about studying the details of the elevations. That overlooking the garden was only roughly sketched out. Paul was hoping that it would present a more regular appearance than that of the entrance side. He made a remark to that effect, for Paul had seen in the environs of Paris, many country-houses that seemed to him charming, with their four pepper-boxes at the angles, their porch in the very centre of the façade, and their zinc cresting on the roof. He had too high an opinion of his cousin’s ability[Pg 103] to allow himself to criticise the façade of his sister’s house, as designed for the entrance side; but in his heart he would have preferred something more conformable to the laws of symmetry. Those windows of all forms and dimensions shocked his taste a little. When the façade on the garden side (Fig. 29) was sketched—a frontage which, this time, presented a symmetrical aspect—Paul declared himself satisfied with it; and in the evening, the family being assembled, he asked why the entrance front did not present the symmetrical arrangements which delighted him on the garden side.

The drain was installed, the vaults were completed; the steps down to the cellars were put in place; the base had risen over a yard above the ground. It was time to start studying the details of the elevations. The one overlooking the garden was only roughly sketched out. Paul hoped it would look more uniform than the entrance side. He commented on this because he had seen many charming country houses around Paris, with their four corner towers, a porch right in the center of the façade, and zinc accents on the roof. He thought highly of his cousin’s skills, so he refrained from criticizing the façade of his sister’s house as it was designed for the entrance side; but deep down, he would have preferred something more aligned with the principles of symmetry. The various shaped windows bothered his taste a bit. When the façade on the garden side (Fig. 29) was sketched—a front that this time had a symmetrical look—Paul expressed his satisfaction with it; and in the evening, when the family gathered, he asked why the entrance front didn’t have the symmetrical features that he found so pleasing on the garden side.

Fig. 29.

Fig. 29.

“Because,” said Eugène, “on the garden side our plan gives us rooms which are the counterparts of each other, of equal dimensions and corresponding purposes; while on the entrance side we have very diverse services in juxtaposition. The question you raise, Paul, is a very[Pg 104] large one. Two methods may be followed. On the one hand, you may plan a symmetrical architectural casing, in which you try, as best you can, to accommodate the services required by a habitation. Or, on the other hand, you may arrange these services, in plan, according to their importance, their respective place, and the relations that are to be established between them, and erect the casing so as to suit these services, without troubling yourself to obtain a symmetrical appearance. When it is proposed to erect an edifice whose exterior aspect is destined to exhibit a grand unity of design, it is desirable to endeavour to satisfy the rules of symmetry, and to take care that the building shall not present the appearance of having been built piecemeal. In a private habitation it is imperative first to satisfy the requirements of its inhabitants, and not to incur needless expense. The habitations of the Ancients were not symmetrical, any more than those of the Middle Ages. Symmetry strictly applied to domestic architecture is a modern conceit—an affectation—a false interpretation of the rules observed during the best periods of art. The houses of Pompeii are not symmetrical: the country-house—the villa—of which Pliny has left us a complete description, did not present a symmetrical ensemble. The castles, manors, and houses built during the Middle Ages are anything but symmetrical. Lastly, in England, in Holland, in Sweden, in Hanover, and in a large part of Germany, you may see numbers of dwellings wonderfully appropriate to the needs of their inhabitants, which are constructed without regard to symmetry, but which are nevertheless very convenient and elegant in appearance, from the simple fact that they clearly indicate their purpose.

“Because,” said Eugène, “on the garden side, our plan gives us rooms that are identical to each other, with equal sizes and similar functions; while on the entrance side, we have very different services placed next to each other. The question you brought up, Paul, is a big one. There are two approaches you can take. One option is to design a symmetrical architectural shell, where you try your best to fit in all the services needed for a home. The other option is to arrange these services in a way that reflects their importance, their specific places, and how they relate to each other, and then build the shell to match these services, without worrying about achieving a symmetrical look. If you're planning to build a structure whose exterior is supposed to show a grand unity of design, it’s best to follow the rules of symmetry and make sure the building doesn’t look like it's been thrown together in pieces. In a private home, it’s crucial to first meet the needs of its residents and avoid unnecessary costs. The homes of the Ancients weren’t symmetrical, nor were those of the Middle Ages. Strict symmetry in domestic architecture is a modern idea—a pretentious notion—a misinterpretation of the principles observed during the peak periods of art. The houses of Pompeii aren’t symmetrical: the country house—the villa—that Pliny described in detail didn’t have a symmetrical ensemble. The castles, manors, and homes built in the Middle Ages are far from symmetrical. Finally, in England, Holland, Sweden, Hanover, and many parts of Germany, you can find many homes that are perfectly suited to the needs of their residents, built without regard to symmetry, yet are very comfortable and elegant in appearance, simply because they clearly show their purpose.”

“I know that there are many persons quite disposed to put themselves to inconvenience every day, in order to have the vain pleasure of exhibiting regular and[Pg 105] monumental façades outside; but I think your sister is not one of those persons, and therefore I have not hesitated to proceed according to what I conceive to be the law of common sense in making the designs for her habitation. I can fancy her asking me, with her quiet, and slightly ironical smile—

“I know that there are a lot of people who are willing to go out of their way every day just to show off neat and impressive exteriors; but I don’t think your sister is one of those people, so I haven’t hesitated to move forward based on what I believe is common sense in creating designs for her home. I can imagine her asking me, with her calm and slightly sarcastic smile—

“‘Why, my dear cousin, did you make me so large a window in this small room? We shall have to stop up half of it.’... Or, ‘Why did you not give me a window on this side, where the view is so pretty?’

“‘Why, my dear cousin, did you make such a large window in this small room? We’ll have to cover half of it.’... Or, ‘Why didn’t you give me a window on this side, where the view is so nice?’”

“If I replied that it was to satisfy the laws of symmetry, she would perhaps have laughed outright, and, in petto, might probably have thought that her respected cousin was after all a fool, with his ‘laws of symmetry.’”

“If I said it was to meet the laws of symmetry, she would probably have laughed out loud and secretly thought that her respected cousin was, after all, a fool with his ‘laws of symmetry.’”

“Alas!” said M. de Gandelau, “there are too many people in our country with whom considerations of vanity take precedence of everything else, and that is one of the causes of our misfortunes. Appearance is the great object. Every retired bourgeois who has a country-house built, wishes to have his turrets regularly disposed at the corners of a building, symmetrical, indeed, but in which he is very indifferently lodged—satisfied if this inconvenient erection is called the château, internal comfort being sacrificed to the gratification of exhibiting outside bad stucco carvings, zinc ornaments on the roof, and a quantity of nonsensical decorations which have to be renewed every spring. Build us then, cousin, a good house, well sheltered from the sun and rain, thoroughly dry within, and in which nothing is sacrificed to that debased luxury which is a thousand times more offensive in our country districts than it is in the city.”

“Alas!” said M. de Gandelau, “there are too many people in our country who prioritize vanity over everything else, and that's one of the reasons for our misfortunes. Appearance is the main focus. Every retired bourgeois who builds a country house wants the turrets to be evenly placed at the corners of the building—symmetrical, but with very little thought for comfort—happy if this inconvenient structure is called the château, while internal comfort is sacrificed for the sake of showing off poor stucco carvings, zinc ornaments on the roof, and a bunch of pointless decorations that need to be replaced every spring. So, build us a good house, cousin, well-shaded from the sun and rain, completely dry inside, and in which nothing is sacrificed to that cheap luxury that is way more offensive in our rural areas than it is in the city.”


[Pg 106]

[Pg 106]

CHAPTER XI.
THE BUILDING IN ELEVATION.

“It is decided that we are to build our exterior walls with dressed stone and range-work,” said Eugène, while they were levelling-up to the ground-floor.

“It’s been decided that we’re going to build our exterior walls with dressed stone and range-work,” said Eugène, while they were leveling up to the ground floor.

Fig. 30.

Fig. 30.

“We have a good part of the materials on the ground. As regards stones of large size, we shall get them from the quarries of Le Blanc, which are only a mile or two distant. Our quoins, our door and window-openings, our string-courses, cornices, dormer-windows, and gable-copings, will be made of dressed stone. Let us begin with the quoins. This is how you will give the details to Branchu; it is a very simple matter. In this part of the country they sell stone by the scantling; that is to say, the quarries supply it according to a measure stipulated beforehand, and the price per cubic foot is less in proportion to the uniformity of the order, and the ease with which it is executed. Now our walls on the ground-floor are 2 feet thick: let A be one of the corners (Fig. 30); for these you will require stones all of the same scantling—2 ft 10 in. long by 2 feet wide, and a mean height of 18 inches, which is the average thickness of the beds in the quarries of this district. And these quoin stones will be placed as I have marked here, one a b c d, the other a e f g, the result of which will be that each stone will form alternately on one side and the other a bond of 10 inches. The range-work having its courses about 6 inches thick, we shall have three courses of the range-work[Pg 107] in the height of each course of dressed stone, and the building as it rises will present the appearance indicated by the perspective sketch B. Between the plinth mould and the string-course of the first floor we have 14 feet; nine courses of stone, plus the mortar beds, therefore, will constitute its height. Let us see how we are to arrange our window-casings. We must consider how to place the jalousies, which cannot be dispensed with in the country, but which when folded back on the face of the walls produce a disagreeable effect, very soon begin to get out of repair, and are troublesome to shut or open, imposing on the inmates of the dwelling a gymnastic exercise from which they would gladly be excused. Interior reveals will be required sufficiently deep for the casements, not to be flush with the walls, and to leave a space between them and the curtains. Our widest windows are 4 feet wide in the clear; our walls, on the ground-floor, are 2 feet thick; we can therefore find a place for the jalousies in the[Pg 108] casing, only on condition of dividing each of these leaves into two or three folds. Only those made of sheet iron will allow us to manage this, because three sheets folded back on themselves are only 2 inches thick, including the room left for the play of the hinges. This, then, is the method given (in Fig. 31) of arranging the jambs of the windows: the outside being at A, we will leave a thickness, B, to mask the leaves of the jalousies folded up in the jamb of 4 inches. We will allow a space of 10¾ inches for these leaves at C. Then will come the window-frame, 2¼ inches thick; total, 17 inches. We shall then have left 7 inches of reveal inside at D.

“We have most of the materials ready on-site. For the larger stones, we'll source them from the quarries at Le Blanc, which are just a mile or so away. Our quoins, door and window openings, string courses, cornices, dormer windows, and gable copings will be made of dressed stone. Let’s start with the quoins. Here’s how you'll convey the details to Branchu; it’s quite simple. In this area, stone is sold by the scantling, meaning the quarries provide it based on a pre-agreed measurement, and the cost per cubic foot decreases with the consistency of the order and the ease of execution. Our ground floor walls are 2 feet thick: let A be one of the corners (Fig. 30); for these, you’ll need stones of the same scantling—2 ft 10 in. long by 2 feet wide, with an average height of 18 inches, which is the normal thickness of the beds in the local quarries. The quoin stones will be placed as I've indicated here, one a b c d, the other a e f g, resulting in each stone alternately forming a 10-inch bond on each side. With the range work having courses about 6 inches thick, we will have three courses of the range work in the height of each course of dressed stone, and as the building rises, it will look as shown in the perspective sketch B. Between the plinth mould and the string course of the first floor, we have 14 feet; therefore, adjusting for nine courses of stone plus the mortar beds will create the height. Next, let’s figure out how to arrange our window casings. We need to think about the jalousies, which are essential in this area, but when folded back against the walls, they can look unsightly, quickly fall into disrepair, and become a hassle to open or close, forcing the residents into a workout they would rather avoid. The interior reveals will need to be deep enough so the casements don’t flush with the walls and leave a gap for the curtains. Our largest windows are 4 feet wide in the clear; our walls are 2 feet thick; therefore, we can accommodate the jalousies in the casing only if we divide each of these leaves into two or three folds. Only those made of sheet metal will allow for this since three sheets folded on themselves are only 2 inches thick, including the space needed for the hinges to operate. So, this is the proposed method (in Fig. 31) for arranging the window jambs: the exterior being at A, we’ll leave a thickness of B to conceal the folded jalousies in the jamb, which will be 4 inches. We’ll allocate 10¾ inches for these leaves at C. Then, we’ll place the window frame, which is 2¼ inches thick; totaling 17 inches. This means we’ll have 7 inches of reveal left inside at D.

[Pg 109]

[Pg 109]

Fig. 31.

Fig. 31.

“You see at E how we shall build these window-openings: a sill, F, of a single block of stone; then a course, G, 16 to 18 inches high, bonding into the range-work; a stone on end, H, only the thickness of the casing; a third course, I, like that marked G; and lastly, the lintel. We will make this only the thickness of the casing, that is, 14¾ inches; we shall have left 9¼ inches, exactly space enough to turn an arch of bricks, K (these being 9 inches long, and with the joint 9¼ inches). This arch will bear our joists, if there are any that have to rest in the outer walls, and it will hinder a fracture of the lintels. Besides this we will pass a tie-bar, L, under the latter. I find the tie-bar more effective at this level than at the level of the flooring. A tie-bar is an iron sinew placed in the thickness of the walls to bind and keep in place the whole construction. It is not always placed in houses built in country districts, but it is unwise to omit it—indeed, a very poor economy to do so; for a building not tied is liable to be easily cracked. But we shall speak of this again at the proper time. Make a fair copy of these sketches and show them to me; and we will give these details to Branchu.

“You see at E how we’re going to build these window openings: a sill, F, made from a single block of stone; then a course, G, 16 to 18 inches high, bonding into the range-work; a stone on end, H, that’s only as thick as the casing; a third course, I, like G; and finally, the lintel. We will make this exactly as thick as the casing, which is 14¾ inches; this leaves us 9¼ inches, just enough space to create a brick arch, K (bricks are 9 inches long, and with the joint, it measures 9¼ inches). This arch will support our joists if any need to rest in the outer walls, and it will help prevent the lintels from cracking. Additionally, we will place a tie-bar, L, under the lintel. I find the tie-bar is more effective at this level than at the flooring level. A tie-bar is a steel reinforcement placed within the walls to secure and stabilize the entire structure. It's not always used in houses in rural areas, but it's unwise to leave it out—it's really a false economy to do so; without it, a building is more likely to crack. But we’ll talk about this again when the time comes. Make a clean copy of these sketches and show them to me, and we’ll give these details to Branchu.”

Fig. 32.

Fig. 32.

“We must also decide how we shall construct the floors. In Paris, at the present day, they construct all the floors with joists of double T iron, and for bearings of 16 to 20 feet they take iron 4½ to 6 inches in vertical section. They pug these iron joists—placed about 28 inches apart, and connected at intervals of about a yard, by iron tie-bars ⅝ in. square—with plaster concrete. This is no bad method, certainly; but here we have neither the iron joists, which are so easily procured at the great centres, nor the plaster-of-Paris, which is perhaps too lavishly used in the capital, but which is nevertheless an excellent material when it is properly employed, especially for the interior. We must construct the floors with wood. But I have already told you that timbers which have not been soaked for some time, and which[Pg 110] have been cut scarcely two years, decay very rapidly when enclosed, chiefly in their bearings, that is their extremities built in the walls. To prevent our floors giving us anxiety respecting their durability, we must leave the timbers visible, and not build them in the walls. We will, therefore, adopt the system of bearers attached to the walls to receive the bearings of the joists; and as we have small oak trunks, we will content ourselves with squaring them on two faces, and place them diagonally, as I show you here (Fig. 32). For bearings of 16 to 20 feet, which are the largest we have, timbers 7 inches square will be sufficient. If we think them insufficient we will put an [Pg 113]intermediate beam; that remains to be seen. These joists, diagonally placed, present moreover their maximum of resistance to deflection. We will place them at 20 inches from centre to centre. Their bearings will be in the notches made in the bearers, as marked at A, and the soffits—which are the spaces between the joists—will be made with bricks placed flat-ways, overlaid with mortar and plastered beneath. We may decorate these ceilings with line painting, which renders them light and agreeable to the sight, as at H. Joists thus placed do not present internal angles difficult to keep clean, and among which spiders spin their webs. A dust with a soft brush readily cleans these soffits.

“We also need to decide how we’re going to build the floors. Today in Paris, all the floors are built with double T iron joists, and for spans of 16 to 20 feet, they use iron that’s 4½ to 6 inches in vertical section. They cover these iron joists—spaced about 28 inches apart and connected at intervals of about a yard with iron tie bars that are ⅝ inches square—with plaster concrete. This is definitely a good method; however, here, we don’t have the easily available iron joists from major centers, nor do we have plaster of Paris, which is perhaps a bit overused in the capital but is still an excellent material when used correctly, especially for interiors. We need to construct the floors with wood. But as I’ve mentioned before, timbers that haven’t been soaked for some time and have been cut for less than two years decay really quickly when enclosed, especially at their ends embedded in the walls. To avoid worrying about the durability of our floors, we should leave the timbers exposed and not embed them in the walls. Therefore, we will use a system of bearers attached to the walls to support the joists; and since we have small oak trunks, we’ll just square them on two sides and place them diagonally, as I show you here (Fig. 32). For spans of 16 to 20 feet, which are the largest we have, 7-inch square timbers will be enough. If we think that’s not sufficient, we’ll add an intermediate beam; that remains to be seen. These diagonally placed joists also provide maximum resistance to bending. We will place them 20 inches apart from center to center. Their supports will be in the notches made in the bearers, marked at A, and the soffits—the spaces between the joists—will be made with bricks laid flat, overlaid with mortar and plastered underneath. We can decorate these ceilings with line painting, which makes them look light and pleasant, as shown at H. Joists placed this way don’t create tricky internal angles that are hard to clean and where spiders like to spin their webs. A soft brush can easily clean these soffits.”

Fig. 33.

Fig. 33.

Fig. 34.

Fig. 34.

“As to the bearers B, (placed against the wall, as section C shows), they will be supported by corbels, D, a yard apart at most, and by cramps, I, to prevent these timbers from giving out. This arrangement will take the place of those cornices run in plaster, which are of no use, and which we could not get executed properly in this neighbourhood, where we have no good workmen in plaster. When partitions above have to be supported, we will put a special joist, the section of which I have sketched for you at E, composed of two pieces, a and b, with an iron plate between them—the whole fastened together by iron pins at intervals. Joists like this are perfectly rigid.

“As for the bearers B (positioned against the wall, as section C indicates), they will be supported by corbels, D, spaced a maximum of one yard apart, and by cramps, I, to keep these timbers from failing. This setup will replace the plaster cornices, which are ineffective and we can't get installed properly in this area due to the lack of skilled plaster workers. When we need to support partitions above, we will use a special joist, the design of which I’ve sketched for you at E, made of two pieces, a and b, with an iron plate in between them—all secured together by iron pins at regular intervals. Joists like this are completely rigid.”

“As the joists rest on bearers, we have no need to trouble ourselves about the windows, but we shall require trimmers at the chimney-breasts and under the hearths, and—to receive these trimmers—trimmer-joists. You will easily see that it would be dangerous to lay pieces of wood under fireplaces. Accordingly, we place on the two sides of the jambs of these fireplaces, at a distance of 12 inches from the hearth-stones, stronger joists, which receive at 32 or 36 inches from the wall—to clear the width of the fireplace—a piece called a trimmer, into which the joists are tenoned.

“As the joists sit on the bearers, we don’t need to worry about the windows, but we will need trimmers at the chimney breasts and under the hearths, and— to support these trimmers—trimmer joists. It’s pretty clear that it would be risky to put wood pieces under fireplaces. So, we place stronger joists on both sides of the jambs of these fireplaces, 12 inches away from the hearth stones, which support a piece called a trimmer at 32 or 36 inches from the wall—this is to accommodate the width of the fireplace—into which the joists are fitted.”

[Pg 114]

[Pg 114]

“For the trimmer-joists we will take the type previously indicated at E; we shall strengthen (Fig. 33) this beam in its bearing with a block, D, resting on a strong stone corbel. We will bind the two pieces, E and D, by an iron strap, F, and frame the trimmer by a tenon, H, in the mortise G. This trimmer will receive, like the bearers, the ends of the joists at I. The space, G K, will be the under side of the hearth of the fireplace above; it will be 32 inches wide, and will be bedded with brick, laid on tie-pieces of iron, L. These trimmer-joists, E, will have to be let into the wall about 4 inches, to render them firm and bind the structure; but in the neighbourhood of the flues we have no reason to fear the effect of damp on the wood. To sum up, this is the appearance of these joists and trimmers underneath the fireplaces (Fig. 34).”

“For the trimmer joists, we'll use the type mentioned earlier at E; we'll reinforce (Fig. 33) this beam at its support with a block, D, sitting on a sturdy stone bracket. We’ll connect the two pieces, E and D, with an iron strap, F, and frame the trimmer with a tenon, H, in the mortise G. This trimmer will also hold, like the bearers, the ends of the joists at I. The space, G K, will be the underside of the hearth above; it will be 32 inches wide, and will be set with bricks, laid on iron tie pieces, L. These trimmer joists, E, will need to be embedded in the wall about 4 inches to secure them and stabilize the structure; but near the flues, we shouldn’t worry about damp affecting the wood. In summary, this is what these joists and trimmers look like beneath the fireplaces (Fig. 34).”

All this, it must be confessed, appeared rather strange to Paul, accustomed as he was to the invariable smooth white ceiling, and who had never suspected that such level surfaces could hide such a framework.

All of this seemed quite odd to Paul, who was used to the consistently smooth white ceiling and had never imagined that such flat surfaces could conceal such a structure.


[Pg 115]

[Pg 115]

CHAPTER XII.
OBSERVATIONS ADDRESSED TO EUGÈNE BY PAUL, AND THE REPLIES MADE TO THEM.

Paul, with his head bent over the paper covered with sketches, and his hands between his knees, could not help thinking, for his part, that his cousin was covering a good deal of paper in making ceilings, whereas they had always seemed to him the simplest thing in the world, and the least susceptible of complication. In his own mind, in fact, Paul made scarcely any distinction between a sheet of paper stretched on a board, and a ceiling. So when Eugène had repeated the phrase, “Is it quite clear to you?” Paul hesitated a little, and said, “I think so,” adding, after a pause—

Paul, with his head down over the paper filled with sketches and his hands resting between his knees, couldn’t help but think that his cousin was using a lot of paper to create ceilings, while he had always considered them to be the simplest thing in the world—no complications at all. In fact, Paul barely saw any difference between a sheet of paper stretched on a board and a ceiling. So when Eugène asked, “Is it all clear to you?” Paul paused for a moment and replied, “I think so,” adding, after a brief pause—

“But, cousin, why not make floors and ceilings as they do everywhere else?”

"But, cousin, why not build floors and ceilings like they do everywhere else?"

“It seems to you a complicated affair, my dear fellow,” replied Eugène, “and you would like to simplify the matter.”

“It seems complicated to you, my friend,” replied Eugène, “and you want to make it simpler.”

“It is not exactly that,” rejoined Paul; “but how do they manage it generally; do they employ all these contrivances? I have not seen what you call bearers, and trimmer-joists, and trimmers and corbels, in any of the ceilings I am acquainted with. It is possible, then, to dispense with them, is it not?”

“It’s not really like that,” Paul replied. “But how do they usually handle it? Do they use all these tools? I haven’t seen what you call bearers, trimmer-joists, trimmers, and corbels in any of the ceilings I know. So, it’s possible to do without them, right?”

“None of these appliances are dispensed with in ceilings of carpentry work, but they are concealed by a coat of plaster; and, as I was telling you just now, this covering[Pg 116] of plaster is one of the causes of the decay of wooden floorings. In all these floorings there are trimmer-joists and trimmers next the flues and hearths; sometimes there are also bearers. All this is bound together by iron work, to form a rigid framing between two plane surfaces with as little space as possible between them. In Paris, where the houses are very dry, this method is still allowable; but in the country it is difficult to obviate the damp, and inclosed ceilings of this kind run the risk of soon falling into decay. The timbers must be exposed to the air, (I say once more) if we would preserve them. This framework of wooden floorings exists in all that are constructed with these materials, only you do not see it. Now it is desirable in architecture to make use of the necessities of the construction as a means of decoration, and frankly to acknowledge those necessities. There is nothing discreditable in allowing them to be seen; and it is a mark of good taste, good sense and knowledge, to exhibit them by making them contribute to the decoration of the work. In fact, to people of good taste and good sense, this is the only kind of decoration that is satisfactory, because it alone is suggested by the requirements.

“None of these fixtures are removed in wooden ceilings; instead, they’re hidden beneath a layer of plaster. And, as I mentioned earlier, this plaster cover is one of the reasons wooden floors deteriorate. All these floors have support beams and trimmers next to the chimneys and fireplaces; sometimes there are also main supports. All of this is held together with metalwork, creating a solid frame between two flat surfaces with minimal space in between. In Paris, where homes are very dry, this method is still acceptable; but in the countryside, it’s tough to avoid moisture, and enclosed ceilings like this risk decaying quickly. The wood needs to be exposed to the air, (I emphasize again) if we want to keep it in good condition. This structure of wooden floors exists in all those built with these materials; you just can’t see it. Now, in architecture, it's beneficial to use the necessities of construction as a means of decoration and to acknowledge those necessities openly. There’s nothing embarrassing about showing them; in fact, it’s a sign of good taste, common sense, and knowledge to make them part of the building’s decor. For those with good taste and sense, this is the only kind of decoration that feels right, because it is driven by actual needs.”

“We have accustomed ourselves in France to decide everything, but especially questions of Art, by what is called sentiment. This is a convenient state of things for many persons, who presume to talk about Art without having ever had a pair of compasses, a pencil, a modelling tool, or a paint-brush in their hands; and professional men have gradually lost the habit of reasoning, finding it easier to take refuge in the conclusions of those amateurs who fill pages while really saying nothing to the purpose, and in so doing flatter the taste of the public while perverting it. Little by little, architects themselves, who of all artists should make good use of reasoning in their conceptions,[Pg 117] have acquired the habit of concerning themselves only with appearances, and no longer trying to make these harmonize with the necessities of the structure. At last these necessities have come to be looked at by them as annoyances; they have concealed them so completely, that the skeleton of an edifice—if I may so call it—is no longer in harmony with the dress it puts on. We see on the one hand a structure,—often left to the mercy of contractors, who manage it as best they can, but naturally in subservience to their own interests,—on the other hand a form which indifferently suits that structure. With your permission, then, we will not follow this example, but will produce a building, unassuming it may be, yet one in which not a detail shall be found that is not the result either of a necessity of the structure or of the requirements of its occupants. It will not cost us more on that account; and when the work is completed, we shall rest satisfied that there has been nothing disguised nor factitious, nor useless, in what we have produced, and that the architectural organism we have built will always allow us to see its organs, and how these organs perform their functions.”

“We in France are used to deciding everything, especially art-related issues, based on what we call sentiment. This is convenient for many people who feel they can discuss art even though they've never held a pair of compasses, a pencil, a modeling tool, or a paintbrush. Over time, professionals have lost the habit of reasoning, finding it easier to rely on the opinions of amateur critics who fill pages with words but say very little of substance, flattering public tastes while actually distorting them. Gradually, even architects, who should rely on reasoning in their designs, have started to focus solely on appearances, neglecting to ensure they align with the structural necessities. These necessities have become seen as bothersome challenges; they've hidden them so well that the framework of a building—if I can put it that way—no longer matches its exterior. On one side, we see a structure, often left to contractors who manage it as best they can, but primarily in their own interest; on the other side, we have a form that merely fits that structure. So, with your permission, we won't follow this trend. Instead, we'll create a building that, while humble, will incorporate no detail that isn't a direct result of structural needs or the requirements of its occupants. It won't cost us more to do this; and when we finish, we'll be satisfied knowing there's nothing deceptive or unnecessary about what we've created, and that the architectural organism we've built will always allow us to see its components and how they function.”

“How is it, then,” rejoined Paul, “that so many architects do not show (as you propose to do here) those necessities of the construction, but disguise them? Why do they act in that way? Who obliges them to do so?”

“How is it, then,” Paul replied, “that so many architects don’t show (like you plan to do here) the essential elements of the construction, but rather hide them? Why do they behave this way? Who forces them to do that?”

“It would take a long time to explain that to you.”

“It would take a while to explain that to you.”

M. de Gandelau entered at these last words of the conversation.

M. de Gandelau joined in just as the conversation ended.

“We have worse and worse news,” said he. “The German armies are spreading everywhere; we must expect to see the enemy here. Poor France!... But what were you saying?”

“We have worse and worse news,” he said. “The German armies are spreading everywhere; we have to expect the enemy here. Poor France!... But what were you saying?”

“Nothing,” replied Eugène, “that can have any interest in presence of our disasters.... I was trying to make[Pg 118] Paul understand that in architecture we should not disguise any of the means of construction, and that it is even in the interest of this art to avail itself of them as a basis for decoration; that, in a word, we should be sincere, that we should reason and trust only to ourselves——”

“Nothing,” replied Eugène, “can be interesting in light of our disasters.... I was trying to make[Pg 118] Paul understand that in architecture, we shouldn't hide any of the building methods, and that it's actually beneficial for this art to use them as a foundation for decoration; that, in short, we should be honest, we should think critically, and rely only on ourselves——”

“Certainly!” rejoined M. de Gandelau, “you lay your finger on our plague-spot as a nation—— To reason, to trust only to ourselves, to get a clear idea of everything and of every fact by study and labour, to leave nothing to chance, to disguise nothing from one’s self or from others; not to take phrases for facts——not to fancy ourselves protected by tradition or routine—— Yes, this is what we should have done—— It is too late, and who can tell whether, after the misfortunes which I anticipate, our country will recover enough elasticity, patience, and wisdom to leave sentiment and keep to reason and serious work! Try to teach Paul to reason, to habituate himself to method, to acquire a love for mental labour; and whether he becomes an architect, an engineer, a soldier, a manufacturer, or an agriculturist like myself, you will have rendered him the most valuable service. Above all, may he never become a mere half-savant, half-artist, or a half-practitioner in any department—writing or talking about everything, but incapable of doing anything himself. Work! The more sinister the character of the news we receive,—the more heavily they weigh upon our hearts,—the more energetically should we give ourselves to useful and practical labour. Lamentations are to no purpose. Work!”

“Absolutely!” replied M. de Gandelau, “you've pinpointed the issue we're facing as a nation. We need to think critically, rely solely on ourselves, and gain a thorough understanding of everything through study and hard work. We shouldn't leave anything to chance or hide anything from ourselves or others; we shouldn’t confuse words with facts or think we’re safeguarded by tradition or routine. Yes, that’s what we should have done. But now it’s too late, and who knows if, after the troubles I fear are coming, our country will find the resilience, patience, and wisdom to prioritize reason and serious work over mere sentiment. Teach Paul to think critically, to get used to structure, to love mental work; whether he becomes an architect, engineer, soldier, manufacturer, or farmer like me, you will have done him the greatest service. Above all, I hope he never becomes just a half-knowledgeable, half-artist, or a half-practitioner in any field—writing or talking about everything but unable to actually do anything himself. Work! The more dire the news we receive—the heavier it weighs on our hearts—the more determined we should be to engage in useful, practical labor. Complaining is pointless. Work!”

“Let us go and look at the building,” said Eugène, who saw that Paul continued in a meditative mood, and was scarcely inclined to set to work again.

“Let’s go check out the building,” said Eugène, noticing that Paul was still deep in thought and wasn’t really in the mood to get back to work.

[Pg 120]

[Pg 120]

Fig. 35.VIEW OF THE BUILDING OPERATIONS

Fig. 35.CONSTRUCTION SITE VIEW


[Pg 121]

[Pg 121]

CHAPTER XIII.
THE VISIT TO THE BUILDING.

The building was beginning to assume a definite shape; the plan was becoming visible above the ground. About twenty masons and stonecutters, four carpenters and their helpers, enlivened this quarter of the neighbourhood. Carts filled with bricks, sand and lime, were coming in. Two timber-sawyers were cutting up trunks of trees into planks; a small movable forge had been lighted under the shelter of a clump of trees, and was used for repairing tools, with the prospect of being called into requisition for forging iron straps, cramps, bands, and lintel bars. A beautiful autumnal sun was shedding a warm but subdued light on the busy scene. This spectacle succeeded in effacing from Paul’s mind the gloomy impression left by his father’s words. Under this aspect work did not seem to him invested with that harsh and rugged form which had at first somewhat scared our holiday pupil. Paul proceeded therefore to follow his cousin over the ground as an attentive clerk of works (Fig. 35), listening with great care to his observations.

The building was starting to take on a clear shape; the design was becoming visible above the ground. About twenty masons and stonecutters, along with four carpenters and their helpers, were bustling around this part of the neighborhood. Carts filled with bricks, sand, and lime were rolling in. Two lumberjacks were cutting tree trunks into planks; a small portable forge had been set up under a cluster of trees to repair tools, with the potential to be used for forging iron straps, cramps, bands, and lintel bars. A beautiful autumn sun was casting a warm but soft light on the lively scene. This sight managed to wipe away the gloomy feeling Paul had from his father's words. In this light, work didn't seem as harsh and intimidating as it had at first for our holiday student. So, Paul decided to follow his cousin around the site like a keen construction assistant (Fig. 35), listening carefully to his insights.

“Here is a stone, Master Branchu,” said Eugène, “which must not be put in; it has a flaw, and as it would be a lintel, it must be rejected.”

“Here’s a stone, Master Branchu,” said Eugène, “that shouldn’t be used; it has a flaw, and since it’s meant to be a lintel, it needs to be discarded.”

“But, sir, the flaw doesn’t go far.”

"But, sir, the flaw isn't very deep."

“Far or not, I disallow it,—do you understand? Paul, you will take care that it be not laid.... Observe this little chink that is barely visible; strike the stone with this[Pg 122] hammer on both sides. Just so; the ring of the stone is dull on this side; well, that proves to you that it is not sound, and with the help of the frost this piece on the right side will separate from its neighbour.... Here are some bricks that you will not let them use: see how cracked they are; these white spots too ... they are particles of limestone which the fire has converted into lime. When the damp acts upon them these particles of lime swell and burst the brick. You must take care before allowing bricks to be used to have them well moistened. Those which contain portions of lime will fall to pieces and so will not be used.”

"Whether it’s far or close, I won’t allow it—do you get that? Paul, you need to make sure it doesn't get laid... Look at this tiny crack that's barely noticeable; hit the stone with this [Pg 122] hammer on both sides. Just like that; the sound of the stone is dull on this side; that shows you it's not solid, and with the frost, this piece on the right side will come apart from its neighbor... Here are some bricks that you shouldn't let them use: see how cracked they are; these white spots too... they’re bits of limestone that the fire has turned into lime. When moisture hits them, those lime particles expand and break the brick. You need to ensure that before allowing bricks to be used, they are properly moistened. Those containing lime will crumble and shouldn’t be used."

“But, my good sir,” said Branchu, “it isn’t my fault; the bricks are not my business.”

“But, my good sir,” said Branchu, “it's not my fault; the bricks aren't my responsibility.”

“No; but it is your business to send back those that are defective to the brickmaker, and not to pay him for them, since you have undertaken to get them supplied; that will teach him to clear his ground thoroughly of bits of limestone. There is some sand with clay in it, see how it sticks to one’s fingers! Master Branchu, I must have none but good coarse sand; you know well where that is to be got. This has been taken from the edge of the pit; it is good for nothing but to be put in the haunches of the cellar vaults for filling up; do not allow it to be used in the mortar—you understand, Paul! Mortar requires well granulated clean sand, the grains of which do not adhere to each other; and observe,—before using it have a few bucketfuls of water thrown on the heap. Take care, too, that the mortar is not mixed on the ground, but on a wood platform. You have done so hitherto, that is quite right; but take care that it is never made in any other way; if you are in a hurry for it, and one platform is not enough, have two. Be very careful too, Paul, to see that the stones are all well bedded in mortar.”

“No; but it's your responsibility to return any defective bricks to the brickmaker and not pay him for them, since you've agreed to ensure their quality; that will teach him to thoroughly clean his area of any bits of limestone. There’s some sand mixed with clay, look how it sticks to your fingers! Master Branchu, I need only good coarse sand; you know exactly where to find it. This stuff has been taken from the pit's edge; it's only good for filling gaps in the cellar vaults, so don’t let it be used in the mortar—you understand, Paul! Mortar needs clean, well-graded sand with grains that don't stick together; and remember—before using it, pour a few buckets of water onto the pile. Also, make sure the mortar is mixed on a wood platform, not on the ground. You’ve been doing that correctly so far, but make sure it’s never done any other way; if you need it quickly and one platform isn’t enough, then use two. And please, Paul, ensure that all the stones are properly bedded in the mortar.”

“Oh! you needn’t trouble yourself, sir, I never do otherwise.”

“Oh! You don’t need to worry about it, sir, I never do anything different.”

[Pg 123]

[Pg 123]

“Yes, I know very well, that for basements and hard stone this is pretty sure to be attended to; but higher up your workmen are very apt to lay the stones on wedges and run the beds with liquid mortar, which is easier. Be very careful about this, Paul. All the stones ought to be laid over their place, on thick wedges, leaving a void of two and a half to three inches; the mortar ought to be spread below over the whole surface, and be about three-quarters of an inch thick; then take away the four wedges, and the stone settling down on the mortar, it must be struck with a great wooden beetle till the joint is only three-eighths of an inch everywhere, and the surplus mortar is pressed out all round——”

“Yes, I understand very well that this is usually taken care of for basements and hard stone; however, higher up, your workers tend to lay the stones on wedges and use liquid mortar, which is easier. Be very careful about this, Paul. All the stones should be placed over their designated spots on thick wedges, leaving a gap of two and a half to three inches. The mortar should be spread evenly across the entire surface, and it should be about three-quarters of an inch thick; then remove the four wedges, and as the stone settles down onto the mortar, it must be struck with a large wooden mallet until the joint is only three-eighths of an inch everywhere, and the excess mortar is squeezed out all around—”

“Here are some hollow beds, Master Branchu; you must have them re-dressed.”

“Here are some empty beds, Master Branchu; you need to have them made up again.”

“What is a hollow bed?” said Paul to his cousin, in a whisper.

“What’s a hollow bed?” Paul asked his cousin softly.

Fig. 36.

Fig. 36.

“It is a concave bed surface of a stone,” replied Eugène, and added, taking his note-book:

“It’s a curved stone surface,” replied Eugène, and then, taking out his notebook:

“Here (Fig. 36), you can understand that if the bed of a stone presents the section A B, the middle C being more hollow than the edges, the stone in question rests on the latter only; consequently if the pressure is considerable the corners D E split off; we then say that the stone is flushed. It is better that the surfaces should be made as sketched at G, and should not rest upon their edges.

“Here (Fig. 36), you can see that if the base of a stone shows the section A B, with the middle C being more recessed than the edges, the stone itself only makes contact with the edges. Therefore, if the pressure is significant, the corners D E will break off; we then say that the stone is flushed. It’s better for the surfaces to be shaped as illustrated at G, and not to rest on their edges.”

“Till now, Master Branchu, you have been raising your building by means of runs or inclined planes, but we are getting high; we shall soon want scaffolding.

“Until now, Master Branchu, you have been constructing your building using ramps or sloped surfaces, but we are reaching greater heights; we will soon need scaffolding."

“As we are building with range-work, using dressed stone above the plinth only at the angles, and for the door and[Pg 124] window casings, you will leave scaffolding holes between these wall stones. Then you will only want scaffolding-poles and put-logs. For raising the material the carpenter is going to make you a hoist, and you will employ the crab which I shall have sent from Chateauroux, where I have no use for it just now.”

“As we're constructing with range-work, using shaped stone above the base only at the corners, and for the door and[Pg 124] window frames, you'll have to leave scaffolding gaps between these wall stones. Then, you’ll just need scaffold poles and put-logs. To lift the materials, the carpenter will make you a hoist, and you'll use the crab that I’ll have sent from Chateauroux, where I don’t need it at the moment.”

“If it’s the same to you, sir, I prefer our machine.”

“If it’s all the same to you, sir, I’d rather stick with our machine.”

“What!... your wheel concern, in which you put a couple of men like squirrels?”

“What!... your wheel concern, where you have a couple of guys running around like squirrels?”

“Yes.”

"Yep."

“Well, as you like; nevertheless I mean to send for the crab; you shall try it.”

“Well, if that's what you want; still, I'm going to order the crab; you have to give it a try.”

“In fact,” said Eugène aside to Paul, “his machine, which dates, I believe, from the Tower of Babel, raises the loads, when they are not too heavy, much more easily than our winches; and as we have no very heavy stones to raise, we will not oppose his wishes on this point.” And turning to the master mason:

“In fact,” said Eugène quietly to Paul, “his machine, which I think dates back to the Tower of Babel, lifts the loads, when they aren’t too heavy, way more easily than our winches; and since we don’t have any really heavy stones to lift, we won’t argue with him about this.” And turning to the master mason:

“It is a settled matter, Master Branchu, that we do not allow any after-dressing, except for some very delicate mouldings or chamfers if occasion requires; you will set your stones completely dressed with only here and there a little thickness to be worked off.”

“It’s a done deal, Master Branchu, that we don’t allow any finishing touches after dressing, except for some really fine moldings or edges if it’s necessary; you’ll get your stones fully dressed with just a bit of thickness here and there to be smoothed off.”

“Certainly, Mr. Architect, certainly; I would rather build like that.”

“Of course, Mr. Architect, definitely; I would prefer to build like that.”

“So much the better, I am glad of it.” And addressing Paul: “I know nothing more injurious than the custom that prevails in some great cities of after-dressing buildings. Rough blocks are laid; then when all is built, up they go and cut, pare, sink, scrape, mould, and carve these shapeless masses, most frequently regardless of the jointing; without considering that they thus take away, especially from soft stone, that hard crust which it forms on its surface when newly cut on leaving the quarry, and which resists the inclemency of the weather; a crust which is never formed[Pg 125] again when the materials have once produced it and have thrown off what is called their quarry-damp. Happily, in many of our provinces the excellent custom has been retained of cutting each stone on the ground, once for all, in that form which it is permanently to keep; and when once laid, the stone-cutter’s tool does not touch it again. Independently of the advantage I have just pointed out to you, this method requires more care and attention on the part of the dressers, and it is not possible then to put the beds and joints anywhere at random. Each stone, on this plan, has its proper destination, and consequently the form suitable to its place. Lastly, when a building is once raised, it is finished: there is no occasion to do anything more to it. I must add, that this method requires on the part of the architect, a complete and finished study of each part of the work at every stage in his arrangement of the parts of the structure.”

“That's even better, I'm glad to hear that.” And turning to Paul: “I can't think of anything more damaging than the trend in some major cities of finishing buildings after they’re constructed. They lay rough blocks; then once everything is built, they cut, shape, smooth, scrape, mold, and carve these shapeless masses, often without caring about the joints; not realizing that they remove, especially from softer stone, the hard crust that forms on the surface when it’s freshly cut from the quarry, which protects it from harsh weather. This crust never forms again once the materials have gone through what’s called their quarry-damp. Luckily, in many of our regions, we've kept the great tradition of cutting each stone on the ground, once and for all, into the shape it will permanently have; and once placed, the stone-cutter’s tool doesn’t touch it again. Aside from the benefit I just mentioned, this method requires more care and attention from the workers, and it’s impossible to just throw the beds and joints in haphazardly. Each stone, with this approach, has its specific purpose, and thus the shape is right for its location. Finally, once a building is completed, it’s done: there’s no need to do anything more. I should also add that this method demands from the architect a thorough and detailed study of every aspect of the work at each stage of organizing the structure’s components.”


[Pg 126]

[Pg 126]

CHAPTER XIV.
PAUL FEELS THE NECESSITY OF IMPROVING HIMSELF IN THE ART OF DRAWING.

One thing astonished Paul,—the facility with which his cousin could express with a few strokes of his pencil what he wished to explain. His perspective sketches, above all, seemed to him marvellous; and our young architect began, on his part, to try to indicate on paper the forms he wished to master; but, to his great disappointment, he succeeded only in producing a mere medley of lines which was incomprehensible, even to himself, a quarter of an hour afterwards. Yet in drawing out his memoranda, to which his cousin attached importance, he could not but feel that the means employed by his chief would be very useful to him if he could acquire them.

One thing amazed Paul—the ease with which his cousin could communicate with just a few pencil strokes what he wanted to explain. His perspective sketches, in particular, struck him as incredible; and our young architect began to try to outline on paper the shapes he wanted to master. However, to his great disappointment, he ended up producing a confusing jumble of lines that he couldn't even understand a quarter of an hour later. Still, while making his notes, which his cousin valued, he couldn't help but feel that the techniques used by his mentor would be really helpful if he could learn them.

One day, therefore, after having spent several hours at the works in endeavouring to get a clear idea, by sketching them, of the form of some worked stones, but without succeeding in obtaining a result even tolerably satisfactory, Paul went to his cousin’s study, and said to him—

One day, after spending several hours at the site trying to get a clear idea by sketching the shapes of some worked stones, but not managing to achieve even a somewhat satisfying result, Paul went to his cousin’s study and said to him—

“What I have learned of linear drawing is evidently not enough to enable me to render on paper the forms which you are able to explain so readily by a sketch; I beg you therefore, cousin, to teach me how to set about representing clearly what I have before me, or what I wish to explain.”

“What I’ve learned about drawing in a straight line clearly isn’t enough for me to accurately depict the shapes you can easily illustrate with a quick sketch; I’m asking you, cousin, to teach me how to clearly represent what I see or what I want to explain.”

“I like to see you so anxious to learn, Paul; indeed, this[Pg 127] is half the battle, though only the half, and in fact the easier one. I shall not be able to teach you in eight days, nor even in six months, the art of drawing with facility either the objects you see, or those which you conceive in your brain; but I will give you the method you must follow; and with labour,—much labour and time,—you will arrive, if not at perfection, at least at clearness and precision. Drawing implies not mere seeing, but considering an object. All who are not blind, see; but how many are there who know how to see, or who in seeing reflect? Very few, certainly; because we are not habituated to this exercise from childhood. All the higher orders of animals see as we do, since their eyes are very similar to ours; they have even the memory associated with vision, as they recognize the objects or the beings which they like or dread or of which they make their prey. But I do not think that animals acquire a notion of bodies or surfaces otherwise than by an instinctive faculty without the intervention of what we call reasoning. Many of our fellow-men do not see in any other way; but it is their fault, since they could reason. But that is not the question now. The following is the method I propose to you:

“I love seeing how eager you are to learn, Paul; in fact, that’s half the battle, though only half, and actually the easier part. I won’t be able to teach you how to draw the things you see or imagine in your mind with ease in just eight days, or even in six months. However, I will provide you with the method you need to follow, and with a lot of hard work and time, you’ll achieve not perfection, but at least clarity and precision. Drawing involves not just looking at an object, but really considering it. Everyone who isn’t blind can see, but how many know how to truly see or reflect while looking? Very few, for sure, because we aren’t trained in this from childhood. All higher animals see like we do since their eyes are quite similar to ours; they even have memory tied to vision, recognizing things or beings they like, fear, or want to hunt. But I don’t believe animals understand bodies or surfaces in any way other than through an instinctive ability, without using what we call reasoning. Many people don’t see any differently, but that’s their fault, as they could reason. But that’s not the discussion right now. Here’s the method I suggest you follow:

Fig. 37.

Fig. 37.

“You know what triangles and squares are; you have studied elementary geometry, and you seem to me to be tolerably familiar with it, since you could evidently understand the plans, the sections, and even the projections of bodies on a vertical or horizontal plane; or else my sketches would not have been intelligible to you. I should wish you therefore to take some cards, and drawing to a scale on each of them the various faces of a stone you see worked, you will cut out these surfaces with scissors, and with the help of strips of paper and paste you will join them, so as to represent one or two of these pieces of stone. The little model will thus become familiar to you; you will know how the surfaces are joined, and what are[Pg 128] the angles they form. In the evening, by lamp-light, you will place these little models before you in every possible position, and copy them as they present themselves to your eyes, taking care to indicate by a dotted line the junction lines of the surfaces which you do not see. Stay,—here on my table is a rhombohedron of wood, which, as you know and see, presents six similar and equal faces whose sides are equal, each of these faces consisting of two equilateral triangles united at their base. See (Fig. 37), I take this body between my fingers by its two vertices; if I show it to you in such a position that one of its faces is parallel to the plane of vision, the two others will present themselves obliquely (as at A); you see three faces therefore, but there are three others behind that are hidden from you. How would these present themselves if this body were transparent? Just as indicated by the dotted lines. If I make the rhombohedron revolve between my fingers, so that two faces are perpendicular to the plane of vision, (as at B), two faces only will continue visible, two others will be hidden from me, and two follow the two lines a b, c d. Now, I present the rhombohedron so that none of its faces are[Pg 129] parallel or perpendicular to the plane of vision,—thus (vide C.) Well, I shall still see three faces, but foreshortened—thrown out of shape by perspective; and the three others will be indicated by the dotted lines. In the evenings, therefore, make as many little models as you can, representing the stones you have seen at the works, and copy these little models in every position. Throw them at random on the table, several together, and copy what you see; mark what is hidden from you by a dotted or finer line. When you have practised this for a week, many difficulties will have been already conquered. And then for further advance.”

“You know what triangles and squares are; you have studied basic geometry and seem to be fairly familiar with it since you can clearly understand the plans, the sections, and even the projections of shapes on a vertical or horizontal plane; otherwise, my sketches wouldn't have made sense to you. I would like you to take some cards and draw to scale the various faces of a stone you see being worked on. You will then cut out these shapes with scissors, and using strips of paper and glue, you will assemble them to represent one or two of these pieces of stone. This little model will help you get to know how the surfaces connect and what angles they form. In the evening, by lamp light, you will set these little models before you in every possible position and sketch them as they appear, making sure to mark the seams of the surfaces that aren't visible with a dotted line. Wait—here on my table is a wooden rhombohedron, which, as you can see, has six identical and equal faces, all with equal sides, each face made up of two equilateral triangles joined at their base. Look (Fig. 37), I hold this shape between my fingers by its two vertices; if I show it to you so that one of its faces is parallel to your line of sight, the other two will appear at an angle (like at A); you see three faces, but there are three others that are hidden from view. How would these appear if the shape were transparent? Just as indicated by the dotted lines. If I rotate the rhombohedron between my fingers, so that two faces are at right angles to your line of sight (as at B), only two faces will remain visible while two others will be hidden from me, and two continue along the lines a b, c d. Now, I will present the rhombohedron so that none of its faces are parallel or perpendicular to your line of sight—like this (vide C). In this case, I will still see three faces, but they will be foreshortened— distorted by perspective; and the three others will be shown by dotted lines. So, in the evenings, create as many little models as you can representing the stones you've seen at the works, and draw these little models in every position. Scatter them randomly on the table, several at once, and sketch what you see; mark what you can't see with a dotted or finer line. After practicing this for a week, many challenges will already be overcome. Then you can move forward.”

Fig. 38.

Fig. 38.

This method pleased Paul very much, and, without losing time, with the help of some of his memoranda, he began to construct a little model of one of the stones whose faces he had measured. It was the springer of an arch with a return face. He succeeded in making a tolerably good model in card-board, which he proudly displayed on the family table after dinner, and which he copied first on its under-bed, then as placed in various positions. He would have continued his work all night, so much was he fascinated with it, and so many interesting discoveries did it enable him to make, if at eleven o’clock Madame de Gandelau had[Pg 130] not warned him that it was time to go to bed. Paul had some trouble in getting to sleep, and his dreams presented to him nothing but card-board models of a very complicated description, which he endeavoured unsuccessfully to put together. So he got up rather late, and on entering his cousin’s room, did not fail to attribute his tardy appearance to the bad night he had passed.

This method made Paul very happy, and without wasting time, he used some of his notes to start creating a small model of one of the stones he had measured. It was the springer of an arch with a return face. He managed to make a pretty good model out of cardboard, which he proudly showed off on the family table after dinner, and he copied it first on its underside, then in various positions. He would have kept working all night, so captivated was he by it and so many interesting discoveries did it allow him to make, if Madame de Gandelau hadn’t reminded him at eleven o’clock that it was time for bed. Paul had some trouble falling asleep, and his dreams were filled with complex cardboard models that he unsuccessfully tried to piece together. He woke up a bit late, and when he entered his cousin’s room, he didn’t hesitate to explain his late arrival by mentioning the rough night he had.

“Well,” said Eugène, “you have got the descriptive geometry fever; so much the better; it cannot be learned well unless you have a passion for it. We will work at it together when the frost suspends our building operations and the bad weather shuts us up here. An architect must be able to use descriptive geometry, as we spell correctly,—without having to think about it. Perspective must be absolutely familiar to him. Neither can be learned too soon; and it is only in early youth that these things can be acquired so thoroughly as to give us no trouble at any time to recall them, even if we should live a hundred years. You are a good swimmer; and if you fall into the water you have no need to remind yourself what movements you must make to keep at the surface or direct your course: well, it is in this way you ought to know geometry and perspective; only you must give a little more time to practising this essential branch of our art [Pg 132]than is required for learning to swim like a frog.”

“Well,” said Eugène, “you’ve caught the descriptive geometry bug; that’s great! You can’t truly master it without a real passion for it. We’ll dive into it together once the cold weather halts our construction work and keeps us indoors. An architect needs to be skilled in descriptive geometry, just like spelling correctly—without even having to think about it. Perspective has to be second nature to him. You can’t start learning them too early; it’s only in your youth that you can grasp these concepts deeply enough to recall them effortlessly, even a hundred years later. You’re a strong swimmer, and if you accidentally fall into the water, you instinctively know what movements to make to stay afloat or swim in the right direction. That’s how you should understand geometry and perspective; just be prepared to dedicate a bit more time to practicing this crucial part of our craft than it takes to learn to swim like a frog.” [Pg 132]

[Pg 131]

[Pg 131]

Fig. 39.Plans and Section of the Principal Stairs.

Fig. 39.Plans and Section of the Main Stairs.


[Pg 133]

[Pg 133]

CHAPTER XV.
CONSIDERATION OF THE STAIRCASES.

It was time to give the details required for the execution of the staircases. Eugène had told Paul to prepare these details; but Paul, as may be imagined, had not been very successful in accomplishing his task, and had only furnished an imbroglio perfectly unintelligible to others as well as to himself, notwithstanding the summary hints given by the architect in chief.

It was time to provide the necessary details for the construction of the staircases. Eugène had asked Paul to prepare these details, but as one might expect, Paul had not been very successful in completing his task and had only produced a confusing mess that was completely incomprehensible to others as well as to himself, despite the brief hints provided by the lead architect.

“Come,” said Eugène, “we must apply ourselves to this work together. Branchu and the carpenter are asking for details.

“Come on,” said Eugène, “we need to work on this together. Branchu and the carpenter are asking for details.”

“Let us take first the principal stairs, and mark their walls (Fig. 39). For the height of the ground floor we have 15 feet, including the thickness of the flooring; and the steps ought not to be more than 6 inches high, each of them: we must therefore reckon thirty steps from the level of the ground floor to the level of the first floor. In breadth or in tread—the term used by builders—a step ought to be from 10 inches to a foot, to give an easy ascent. Thirty steps therefore require an extension of from 25 to 30 feet. I think I told you this before, when we drew the plan of the ground floor. If we take the middle of the space reserved for the steps, on our plan, we find exactly 30 feet; marking therefore the steps on this middle line, and giving them 11 inches tread, we can get two landing-places in the angles at A, A′. We will make these steps wind so as to avoid sharp angles near the newel. The first step will be at B, the last[Pg 134] at C. At D, under the stairs, we will make the partition, which will allow us to form the water-closet at . Since at the landing-place, A, we have ascended eighteen steps (each 6 inches in height), we shall have 8 feet 6 inches under the ceiling, which is more than sufficient. We will light it by a window, E. The two windows, F, will light the staircase and follow the level of the steps, as the elevation shows. For nothing is more ridiculous than to cut across windows by the steps of a staircase; and although this is done constantly, it is one of the absurdities which a builder ought to avoid. From the servants’ passage, G, the water-closet will be entered by the door H.

“Let’s start with the main stairs and note the walls (Fig. 39). The height of the ground floor is 15 feet, including the thickness of the flooring, and the steps shouldn’t be more than 6 inches high each. We need to account for thirty steps from the ground floor to the first floor. For the width or the tread—the term builders use—a step should be between 10 inches to a foot for an easy climb. So, thirty steps will need an extension of about 25 to 30 feet. I believe I mentioned this before when we mapped out the ground floor plan. If we look at the center of the space allocated for the steps in our plan, we find it measures exactly 30 feet. By placing the steps along this center line and giving them an 11-inch tread, we can include two landings in the corners at A and A'. We’ll make the steps wind to avoid sharp angles near the newel. The first step will be at B, and the last at C. At D, under the stairs, we’ll put up a partition, allowing us to create the water-closet at A'. Since we’ve ascended eighteen steps at the landing A (each 6 inches high), we’ll have 8 feet 6 inches of clearance under the ceiling, which is more than enough. We’ll illuminate it with a window at E. The two windows at F will light the staircase and align with the levels of the steps, as shown in the elevation. It’s quite ridiculous to have windows interrupted by staircase steps; even though this happens often, it’s one of those mistakes a builder should avoid. From the servants’ passage at G, the water-closet will be accessed through the door at H.

“Let us now draw the elevation, or rather the vertical projection of these stairs. This is how we proceed: we draw the walls in elevation, then divide the height to be ascended into as many parts as there are to be steps, as I do at I. Projecting these divisions horizontally on the elevation, and the ends of the stairs vertically with the walls and the newel, indicated on the plan, we get, by the meeting of these two projections, the section of the stairs along the walls and against the newel.

“Let’s now create the elevation, or rather the vertical projection of these stairs. Here’s how we do it: we draw the walls in elevation, then divide the height to be climbed into as many parts as there are steps, just like I do at I. By projecting these divisions horizontally on the elevation, and the ends of the stairs vertically with the walls and the newel shown on the plan, we find the section of the stairs along the walls and against the newel where these two projections meet.”

“There we have it; the last step is then at K, on the level of the floor of the first story. To reach the second story, we have 13 feet 3 inches to ascend from one floor to the next. Giving 6⅛ inches to each step, we get twenty-six steps, minus a fraction which is not worth counting. We shall therefore preserve in plan the drawing of the first revolution, starting from the step, L, which gives thirteen steps to the point M. From this point we will draw the thirteen remaining steps to complete the number twenty-six, as I have marked on the supplementary plan at N. Then for the elevation we will proceed as above. We shall thus get the general section from V to X for the two stories. The drawing being completed, the next question is of what material the steps are[Pg 135] to be made. Contained between walls and a newel, which is a wall itself, we can, if we think well, make them each of a single block of stone. However, that is scarcely practicable in this neighbourhood, because we should have difficulty in procuring hard, compact, fine stone, suitable for this object. We will therefore content ourselves with making the first step only of stone, and the others of wood, covering them with good oak board; and to avoid inserting them in the walls, we will provide a projecting-string in stone, forming a bracketing along the walls and the newel, to receive their ends, as shown here (Fig. 40). We will lath these steps on the underside where they are to be left in the rough, and plane them only on the face, or riser, A. That they may be firm in their place, we will fasten them with stays, B, which will be covered by the boards forming the tread, and will be fixed into the holes, C.

“There we have it; the last step is at K, at the level of the first floor. To get to the second floor, we have to go up 13 feet 3 inches from one floor to the next. Giving 6⅛ inches for each step, we end up with twenty-six steps, minus a fraction that's negligible. So, we will keep the drawing of the first revolution starting from step L, which gives thirteen steps to point M. From there, we will draw the thirteen remaining steps to complete the total of twenty-six, as indicated on the supplementary plan at N. Then, we will proceed with the elevation as described above. This will give us the general section from V to X for the two floors. Once the drawing is complete, the next question is what material to use for the steps. Enclosed between the walls and a newel, which functions as a wall itself, we could, if we decide, make each step from a single block of stone. However, that’s not very practical in this area because sourcing hard, compact, fine stone that’s suitable for this purpose would be challenging. Therefore, we will settle for making the first step of stone and the rest out of wood, covering them with quality oak boards. To avoid embedding them in the walls, we will install a projecting string in stone that acts as a bracket along the walls and the newel to support their ends, as shown here (Fig. 40). We will lath the undersides of these steps where they will be left unfinished and only plane them on the face, or riser, A. To ensure they are secure, we will attach them with stays, B, which will be hidden under the boards that form the tread and will be fastened into the holes, C.

Fig. 40.

Fig. 40.

[Pg 136]

[Pg 136]

“As regards the servants’ winding staircase, we will make it of hard stone, each step carrying a portion of the newel, as sketched here (Fig. 41).

“As for the servants’ spiral staircase, we’ll make it of solid stone, with each step supporting part of the newel, as shown here (Fig. 41).”

Fig. 41.

Fig. 41.

“Now try to put these instructions in a regular form, that you may be able to give the details readily to the mason and carpenter.”

“Now try to put these instructions in a standard format so you can easily share the details with the mason and carpenter.”

With considerable labour Paul succeeded in making a tolerably complete drawing from the indications furnished by his cousin: but the latter was obliged often to help him; for his clerk was not an expert in elementary descriptive geometry, and these projections presented difficulties at every turn. Paul got into confusion with his lines, took one point for another, and would many a time have abandoned compasses, square, and drawing-pen in despair, if Eugène had not been at hand to set him right again.

With a lot of effort, Paul managed to create a fairly complete drawing based on the hints provided by his cousin. However, he often needed help; his assistant wasn't skilled in basic descriptive geometry, and these projections were challenging at every turn. Paul got mixed up with his lines, mistaking one point for another, and many times he would have given up his compass, ruler, and drawing pen in frustration if Eugène hadn't been there to help him out.


[Pg 137]

[Pg 137]

CHAPTER XVI.
THE CRITIC.

It was the end of November, and the weather had hitherto allowed our builders to make use of every day. The autumn sun was favourable to the enterprise, and at several points the house was reaching the height of the window-heads of the ground floor. Nevertheless it required all M. de Gandelau’s determination to prevent the works from being suspended. By degrees the ground was deserted by the able-bodied workmen, who were being called away to the army. Those who remained had their attention distracted, and were not making the best use of their time. It was becoming difficult to get the hauling done, all the horses and carts being pressed into the service of the country. The province was furrowed in every direction by the tracks of regiments making for the Loire. Many hours were spent in talk; and every one was anxiously expecting news of the war, which assumed an increasingly gloomy aspect. However, Orleans had been re-occupied by the French troops, and all hope did not seem lost. Paris was resisting. In the meantime an addition was made to the circle at M. de Gandelau’s château in the person of a friend of the family, who, having had his property occupied and injured by the Germans, had been obliged to abandon it for fear of worse, and came to pay a visit to M. de Gandelau on his way to the west of France, where he had relations. He was a man of about fifty or[Pg 138] sixty years of age, tall, and of frigid aspect, though a perpetual smile seemed stereotyped on his face. He might have been taken for a diplomatist of the old stamp.

It was the end of November, and the weather had so far allowed our builders to make the most of every day. The autumn sun was favorable for the project, and in several spots, the house was reaching the height of the window heads on the ground floor. However, it took all of M. de Gandelau's determination to keep the work from stopping. Gradually, the skilled laborers were leaving for the army. Those who stayed were distracted and not using their time effectively. It was becoming challenging to get the hauling done, as all the horses and carts were being drafted into service for the country. The province was crisscrossed by the trails of regiments heading for the Loire. Many hours were spent talking; everyone was anxiously awaiting news of the war, which was looking increasingly grim. However, Orleans had been retaken by the French troops, and not all hope seemed lost. Paris was holding out. Meanwhile, a friend of the family joined M. de Gandelau’s château, having had his property occupied and damaged by the Germans and needing to leave to avoid worse. He came to visit M. de Gandelau on his way to western France, where he had relatives. He was a man of about fifty or sixty, tall, with a cool demeanor, though a constant smile seemed fixed on his face. He could have been mistaken for an old-style diplomat.

The new-comer had read and travelled much, knew a little of everything, was a member of several learned societies, and his opinion carried a certain weight with it in his département. He had been a candidate for the legislature; had embarked in manufacturing speculations, in which he had lost a good deal of money; then in agricultural enterprises, but as they threatened to ingulf the remainder of his fortune, he ultimately rested content with the theoretical side of things, and with publishing pamphlets on questions of all kinds, printed at his own expense, and lavishly circulated. Every one of these brochures professed to give a simple solution of all the difficulties in question, whether in the domain of politics, science, manufactures, commerce, and even art. Building had been one of his hobbies; but as architects appeared to him unpractical, extravagant, and imbued with prejudices, he had taken the sole direction of his building operations, making his own bargains, treating directly with the contractors, giving the plans, and superintending the work. This whim had been a very costly one, and one fine morning his building fell to pieces. As he had no more faith in engineers than in architects, he had determined to lay out roads on his estate, and have them made according to a system of his own. His attempts in this line had not been more successful than those in building. The roads persisted in being impracticable. But M. Durosay (that was the gentleman’s name) was one of those persons whom experience—even though acquired at their own expense—teaches but little. In other respects he was a worthy man; he was extremely polite and obliging—generous even—especially towards those who had the art of flattering his whims, and who, through interest or conviction, gave[Pg 139] him credit for being an infallible judge in matters of all kinds.

The newcomer had read a lot and traveled extensively, knew a bit about everything, was a member of several academic societies, and his opinion held some weight in his département. He had run for office, invested in manufacturing ventures, which cost him a significant amount of money, and then in agricultural projects, but as they threatened to swallow the rest of his fortune, he eventually decided to stick to the theoretical side of things and published pamphlets on various topics at his own expense, distributing them widely. Each of these brochures claimed to provide a straightforward solution to all sorts of challenges, whether in politics, science, manufacturing, commerce, or even art. Building had been one of his passions; however, since he found architects to be impractical, extravagant, and full of biases, he took complete control of his building projects, making his own deals, negotiating directly with contractors, providing the plans, and overseeing the work. This hobby turned out to be very costly, and one fine morning, his building collapsed. As he had no more faith in engineers than in architects, he decided to lay out roads on his property and get them built according to his own system. His attempts in this area were no more successful than his building endeavors; the roads remained unmanageable. But M. Durosay (that was the gentleman’s name) was one of those people who learns very little from experience, even if it costs them personally. In other respects, he was a decent man; he was extremely polite and helpful—generous even—especially toward those who knew how to flatter his whims and who, whether out of self-interest or genuine belief, credited him with being an infallible judge in all matters.

If any one had come to consult him on any subject at the moment he was about to step into a railway carriage, he would have let the train go rather than not give a formal judgment, with reasons in full. It must be observed, however, that he judged everything by an à priori system, and would listen with only partial attention to the particular reasons that tended to modify its application to the case in question. On the other hand, he would allow his positions to be discussed, and did not manifest the least impatience if his opinion was not shared by others. He was fond of repeating this aphorism: “Light emanates from the shock of conflicting ideas;”—but with the understanding that he always played the part of the producer, never that of the recipient.

If anyone had come to ask for his opinion on any topic right before he was about to get on a train, he would have missed the train rather than skip giving a formal judgment with all the reasons laid out. However, it's important to note that he judged everything using an à priori system and would only half-listen to the specific reasons that might alter its application to the situation at hand. On the flip side, he welcomed discussions about his views and showed no impatience if others disagreed with him. He liked to repeat this saying: “Light comes from the clash of conflicting ideas;”—but he always considered himself the one generating the ideas, never just receiving them.

A short time after his arrival, and when the gloomy subjects of conversation which were the order of the day had been exhausted, they began to talk about Paul’s house (as it was the custom at the château to call it). M. Durosay asked to see the designs. “Building and I are old acquaintances; I know something about it,” said he.

A little while after he arrived, and once the dark topics of conversation that were the norm had run their course, they started discussing Paul’s house (as it was usually referred to at the château). M. Durosay requested to see the plans. “Building and I go way back; I know a thing or two about it,” he said.

Eugène could not repress a smile; but the speaker took no notice of it, his mishaps as a builder having left no painful recollections in his mind.

Eugène couldn't help but smile; however, the speaker didn't notice it, as his experiences as a builder had left him with no painful memories.

“Capital!” said M. Durosay, when they had explained the plans to him, and he had examined them. “I have seen houses in Belgium something like this. There are very good ideas here; it will be a very pleasant habitation if our friends the Prussians let you finish it.... Will you allow me to make one or two remarks about it?”

“Capital!” said M. Durosay, after they explained the plans to him and he had looked them over. “I’ve seen houses in Belgium that are somewhat like this. There are some great ideas here; it will be a very nice home if our friends the Prussians let you finish it.... Can I make one or two suggestions about it?”

“Certainly.”

"Of course."

“Not that I presume for a moment to suggest any change in these plans, which appear to me admirable.... But I have had the opportunity of a wide field of observation[Pg 140] and comparison.... Well, then, to tell you frankly my first impression, this seems to me to have rather the character of a town-house, what we call a hôtel, than a country-house.... You will excuse my saying so, will you not?... I do not understand a country-house thus shut in: I should like to see a portico round it, or at least a wide veranda;—windows opening out—a more decided reflex of exterior life.”

“Not that I think for a second that I should suggest any changes to these plans, which I find admirable…. But I’ve had the chance to observe a lot and compare different things[Pg 140]. So, to be honest with you, my first impression is that this feels more like a town house, what we call a hôtel, rather than a country house…. I hope you don’t mind me saying this, do you?... I don’t understand a country house being so enclosed: I would prefer to see a portico around it, or at least a large veranda;—windows that open out—a clearer reflection of outdoor life.”

“But, my dear friend,” said M. de Gandelau, “I expect that my children will come and spend a good part of the year here; it is no object with them to have one of those habitations in which people reside only for the two or three summer months, and where they entertain the idlers of the city; they want a good house, which will perfectly exclude wind and wet, where they can live comfortably at every season of the year.”

“But, my dear friend,” said M. de Gandelau, “I expect my kids will come and spend a good part of the year here; they’re not interested in one of those places where people only stay for two or three summer months and entertain the city's idle folks; they want a nice house that keeps out the wind and rain, where they can live comfortably all year round.”

“Certainly—a very proper consideration; but what do you think of those North Italian villas, where the climate is pretty severe in winter and spring, but which are not the less charming with their porticos, terraces, wide open entrance-halls, and their balconies looking out over the country? All these habitations have a dignified aspect; they ennoble life, we may say, and enlarge those narrow ideas to which our age is only too prone.... And then, does it not seem to you that there is a too manifest want of symmetry, at least in one of the façades? Doesn’t this make the house look a little like those edifices which have been built piecemeal, with a view to satisfy successive requirements—in short, is there not a want of that unity which ought to be found in every work of art?”

“Definitely—a very valid point; but what do you think about those North Italian villas? The winters and springs can be quite harsh, yet they’re still charming with their porticos, terraces, spacious entrance halls, and balconies overlooking the countryside. All these homes have a dignified presence; they elevate life, we might say, and broaden those narrow ideas that our era is all too susceptible to... And then, doesn’t it seem to you that there’s a noticeable lack of symmetry, at least on one of the facades? Doesn’t this make the house appear a bit like those buildings that were constructed in stages to meet changing needs—in short, is there not a lack of that unity that should be present in every work of art?”

“But it is not a work of art that I wish to leave my daughter; it is a good house—convenient and substantial.”

“But it’s not a piece of art that I want to leave my daughter; it’s a nice house—practical and strong.”

“Very good. But you will allow that if we can secure both kinds of excellence, so much the better. For a person of such extreme refinement and so charming in every[Pg 141] respect as your daughter, it is but proper that a habitation should be provided reflecting in its exterior the charms and graces of its occupant. It would be a pleasure to you, in visiting Madame Marie, to see in the distance her little family grouped around her under a portico of delicate architecture, or under a loggia.... But this seems to me more like the house of some grave Flemish alderman. In these gables there is a kind of severity which——”

“Very good. But you have to agree that if we can achieve both kinds of excellence, that's even better. For someone as refined and charming in every way as your daughter, it's only right that her home reflects her beauty and grace. It would bring you joy, when visiting Madame Marie, to see her little family gathered around her under a portico with elegant design, or beneath a loggia.... But this looks more like the house of some serious Flemish alderman. These gables have a certain starkness which——”

“Come, come, my dear friend, gables are not severe; they are gables—that’s all.”

“Come on, my dear friend, gables aren’t harsh; they’re just gables—that’s all.”

“But indeed these gables with their high roofs have a severe aspect, which by no means agrees with the idea one forms of a house built for pleasure.”

“But really, these gables with their steep roofs have a harsh look that definitely doesn't match the image you have of a house meant for enjoyment.”

“But it is not a house built for pleasure; it is a house built for people who are going to live in it, not for summer loungers—especially as we never have such people in our neighbourhood.”

“But it’s not a house made for enjoyment; it’s a house designed for people who are going to actually live in it, not for summer vacationers—especially since we never have those kinds of people in our neighborhood.”

“Still, however, I should have liked to give a warmth to these fronts (which have a somewhat frigid aspect) by light and airy projections, and a covered gallery, with a terrace over it.”

"Still, I would have liked to add some warmth to these facades (which look a bit cold) by incorporating light and airy projections and a covered gallery with a terrace above it."

“Warmth? warmth? Why instead of that, you would give us the rheumatism with your galleries. They may do very well at Nice or Mentone, but they are not to be thought of in our part of the country. We want the sun upon the walls of our habitations, while your porticos are like mushroom-houses.”

“Warmth? Warmth? Why would you give us rheumatism with your galleries? They might work fine in Nice or Mentone, but they’re not suitable for our area. We want sunlight on the walls of our homes, while your porticos are like mushroom houses.”

“I see, my dear friend,” resumed M. Durosay, after a pause, “that you keep to your taste for what you call the practical side of things. Yet see what a good opportunity you have of giving your daughter one of those dwellings which, while satisfying the material requirements of life, would possess that perfume of art which is too rarely found in our country districts. A little exterior elegance is a powerful charm which leaves an indelible trace in the[Pg 142] mind. It is thus that the Italians preserve the poetry of the brilliant eras of their civilization. They are willing, at need, to sacrifice something of what we call ‘comfort’—the material conveniences of life—to keep up among them the noble traditions of high art.”

“I see, my dear friend,” M. Durosay continued after a moment, “that you stick to your preference for what you call the practical side of things. But look at this great opportunity you have to give your daughter one of those homes that, while meeting the material needs of life, would also have that touch of art that's so rarely found in our rural areas. A bit of exterior elegance is a powerful attraction that leaves a lasting impression in the mind. This is how the Italians maintain the beauty of their glorious historical periods. They’re even willing to sacrifice some of what we consider ‘comfort’—the material conveniences of life—to uphold the noble traditions of high art among themselves.”

“I do not know what the traditions of high art are, or whether those traditions preserve us from rain, wind, and sun; but I must confess that your Italian villas in the environs of Verona and Venice appear very dull and gloomy with their colonnades and closed shutters. I have never had the wish to visit them, for I imagine one would be very uncomfortable in them. If they build them so with a view to offer tourists models of architecture, all well and good; but I make no pretensions to amuse or interest tourists, and my daughter shares my ideas in the matter.”

“I don't know what the traditions of fine art are, or if they protect us from rain, wind, and sun; but I have to admit that your Italian villas around Verona and Venice seem really dull and gloomy with their colonnades and closed shutters. I've never wanted to visit them because I think they would be very uncomfortable. If they build them to provide tourists with examples of architecture, that's fine; but I don’t pretend to entertain or interest tourists, and my daughter feels the same way.”

“Perhaps ... but just now your daughter is travelling in Italy; she is going to sojourn on the shores of the Bosporus; who knows whether on her return here she would not be charmed to meet a kind of souvenir of the impressions she will not fail to have experienced there, and whether the surprise you have in store for her would not be still more delightful if you tried in some measure to revive those impressions? What do you think of it, Mr. Architect?”

“Maybe ... but right now your daughter is traveling in Italy; she's going to spend some time on the shores of the Bosporus. Who knows if when she comes back she wouldn’t be thrilled to encounter a sort of souvenir of the experiences she’s sure to have there? And wouldn't the surprise you have planned for her be even more enjoyable if you tried to evoke some of those experiences? What do you think, Mr. Architect?”

“As for myself,” said Eugène, “I am listening, and cannot but be delighted to hear you discourse so ably on our art.”

“As for me,” said Eugène, “I’m listening, and I can’t help but be thrilled to hear you talk so skillfully about our art.”

“I may take it for granted, then, that you share my opinion, and that you would be inclined to give this habitation, which you have so skilfully arranged, some of those external charms in which perhaps it is now deficient.”

“I can assume, then, that you agree with me and that you would be willing to give this place, which you have arranged so well, some of those external touches that it might be lacking right now.”

“I cannot say that I should. M. de Gandelau, with his usual courtesy, has left us quite at liberty, and has simply stated the limit of expense to which he is prepared to go. As regards other considerations, our programme having been agreed upon, we have not been restricted to an excessive[Pg 143] severity of style, nor forbidden the adoption of what you consider the exterior charms of a dwelling-house.”

“I can’t say that I should. Mr. de Gandelau, as usual, has left us completely free and has just mentioned the budget he’s willing to work with. As for other matters, since we have agreed on our plan, we aren’t limited by a rigid style and aren’t restricted from including what you think are the appealing features of a home.”

“Well; although my friend with his practical mind does not appear sensible to these charms, do not you, as an artist, think it desirable to add something to these fronts, which are perhaps a little severe in aspect, and which certainly with the help of your talent you could render less cold? You know Italy; you have visited Pompeii: do you not find in the architecture of those countries abundant suggestions from which inspiration may be drawn—charming models, in fact?”

“Well, even though my practical-minded friend doesn’t seem to appreciate these charms, don’t you, as an artist, think it would be nice to add something to these facades, which might be a bit too stark, and which you could definitely make feel warmer with your talent? You’ve been to Italy; you’ve seen Pompeii: don’t you think the architecture from those places offers plenty of inspiration—actually beautiful models, really?”

“Yes; I have visited Italy and France, but I must confess that I have never been struck by the architectural works of those countries, except so far as they preserved the imprint of the manners and customs of those whose genius produced them. You mention Pompeii. That which has vividly affected me in the remains of this little provincial town of Italy is precisely this characteristic. Its small dwellings exactly suited the habits of antiquity, the time when they were erected, and the climate of the district. But from the study of these habitations I infer that since we do not live on the shores of the Gulf of Naples, and have customs very different from those which suited the Pompeians, our dwellings ought not in any way to suggest the peculiarities of theirs; that while, for example, it may have been very agreeable to them to sup in an open triclinium, sheltered from the wind by a velum, we cannot arrange dining-rooms after this model in the Département de l’Indre; and that though it might have been a luxury to them to sleep in a room whose area was only five or six square yards and the door of which, left open, introduced you to a court surrounded by a portico, this would be very inconvenient here, as we should run great risk of catching cold if we left the door open, or of being suffocated if we shut it.”

“Yes; I’ve traveled to Italy and France, but I have to admit that I’ve never been really impressed by the architecture in those countries, except for how they reflect the lifestyles and customs of the people who created them. You bring up Pompeii. What really stands out to me about the remains of this small provincial town in Italy is exactly this feature. Its modest homes were perfectly suited to the habits of ancient times, the period they were built in, and the local climate. From studying these homes, I conclude that since we don’t live by the Gulf of Naples and our customs are very different from those of the Pompeians, our houses shouldn’t in any way mimic theirs; for example, while it may have been quite pleasant for them to dine in an open triclinium, sheltered from the wind by a velum, we can’t set up dining rooms like that in the Département de l’Indre; and though it might have been a luxury for them to sleep in a room that was only five or six square yards and where leaving the door open led to a courtyard surrounded by a portico, that would be very impractical here, as we’d risk getting cold if we left the door open, or being suffocated if we closed it.”

[Pg 144]

[Pg 144]

“But as you have mentioned ancient dwellings, allow me to remark that those of Pompeii, even the most luxurious, do not exhibit externally any of those magnificent features which you seem to admire. The ancients reserved for the interior such luxury as they affected, and it does not appear that they troubled themselves to display anything of it to the passers-by. I have not a very clear idea of what their villas,—their country-houses,—may have been; but everything leads me to believe, as far as we can judge from the remains preserved to us, that in them nothing was sacrificed to that distinctively modern vanity which aims to make an external display of architectural forms to strike the vulgar.

“But since you’ve brought up ancient homes, let me point out that those in Pompeii, even the most lavish ones, don’t show any of the stunning features you seem to admire on the outside. The ancients kept their luxury for the interior, and it seems they didn’t bother to showcase any of it to people passing by. I don’t have a clear picture of what their villas—their country houses—may have looked like; but everything suggests, based on the remains we have, that nothing was sacrificed to that distinctly modern desire to make an external display of architectural styles to impress the masses.”

“I believe that those country palaces of Northern Italy with which you have been so deeply smitten, are rather products of vanity than abodes adapted to the habits of those who have erected them; in fact, they have scarcely been inhabited, and the dilapidated condition in which you see them does not date from yesterday. Erected to satisfy vanity and the desire to make a show, they lasted as habitations only as long as works due to vanity are accustomed to last—that is, for a few years of the life of an individual; after which they were abandoned.”

“I think that those country estates in Northern Italy you’re so captivated by are more about vanity than truly fitting for the people who built them. In reality, they’ve hardly been lived in, and the rundown state you see isn’t something new. Built to satisfy vanity and the need to show off, they only served as homes for as long as such vanity projects usually last—just a few years of a person's life; after that, they were left to decay.”

“You call vanity,” replied M. Durosay, “what I think to be love of art—the desire to exhibit a work of art.”

“You call it vanity,” replied M. Durosay, “but I see it as a love for art—the wish to showcase a piece of art.”

“Probably we shall never agree upon that point,” answered Eugène. “I think that art—in architecture at least—consists in being truthful and simple. You see in it only a form that charms or repels you: I look for something else; or rather I consider first whether this form is really the expression of a requirement—whether a reason can be given for its existence; and it charms me only so far as this condition is fulfilled, according to my judgment.”

“Probably we’ll never see eye to eye on that,” Eugène replied. “I believe that art—in architecture, at least—should be honest and straightforward. You see only a form that either attracts or repels you; I look for something more. I first consider whether this form truly meets a need—whether there’s a reason for it to exist—and it appeals to me only to the extent that this requirement is met, in my opinion.”

“You consider a barn, therefore, a work of art?”

"You think of a barn as a piece of art, then?"

“Certainly; if it is constructed so as to afford a suitable[Pg 145] shelter for what it is intended to hold, it is, in my view, more admirable than an inconvenient palace, though decorated with colonnades and pediments.”

“Absolutely; if it's built to provide proper shelter for what it's meant to contain, I think it's better than an inconvenient palace, even one adorned with columns and pediments.”

“You ought to go to America.”

"You should visit America."

“Perhaps it would be wise to do so, if I knew that its people tried to build simply in accordance with the tastes and requirements of the inmates. But in America, as everywhere else now-a-days, they make pretensions to style, and copy what they believe to be the beautiful par excellence; that is, they follow, without discrimination, traditions whose origin and principle they do not care to investigate.”

“Maybe it would be smart to do that, if I knew that its people really tried to build according to the tastes and needs of the residents. But in America, like everywhere else these days, they act like they have style and imitate what they think is the ultimate in beauty; that is, they follow, without any critical thought, traditions whose origins and principles they don’t bother to explore.”

“Come,” said M. de Gandelau, who found the discussion rather tedious, “we have travelled a good way from Paul’s house; but to satisfy you, when you come and see my daughter in her new dwelling, we will have a pasteboard portico put up in front of one of the façades, and under the shade some Berri maidens dressed up as Venetians, and some gentlemen in scarlet robes playing on the guitar and the bassoon. It is getting late, and time to go to bed.”

“Come on,” said M. de Gandelau, who thought the discussion was pretty boring, “we've traveled quite a distance from Paul's house; but to make you happy, when you come to see my daughter in her new place, we'll set up a cardboard portico in front of one of the facades, and under its shade, there will be some Berri maidens dressed as Venetians, and some guys in red robes playing the guitar and the bassoon. It's getting late, and it's time to go to bed.”


[Pg 146]

[Pg 146]

CHAPTER XVII.
PAUL INQUIRES WHAT ARCHITECTURE IS.

Eugène expected Paul to return to the discussion of the previous evening, and in fact, when they were going early in the morning to visit the works, Paul did not fail to throw out hints about it. But he did not know how to give his curiosity a definite shape. His cousin would not help him, but wished to give him full leisure to bring his ideas to a focus.

Eugène expected Paul to revisit the conversation from the night before, and sure enough, as they headed out early in the morning to check on the work, Paul dropped hints about it. However, he struggled to express his curiosity clearly. His cousin didn’t assist him but wanted to give him the freedom to clarify his thoughts on his own.

“Is M. Durosay a judge of architecture?” said Paul, at last.

“Is M. Durosay an architecture judge?” Paul finally asked.

“Well, he talks about it like a person who has some acquaintance with the art.”

"Well, he talks about it like someone who has some knowledge of the art."

“But yet you did not seem disposed to accede to what he asked.”

“But still, you didn’t seem willing to agree to what he asked.”

“What did he ask?”

“What did he want?”

“Why——you know very well what I mean——. He would have liked Marie’s house to be——more——.”

“Why—you know exactly what I’m talking about—. He would have preferred Marie’s house to be—more—.”

“More what?”

"More of what?"

“More——less severe; that it should have a portico and a loggia. What is a loggia?”

“More——less severe; that it should have a porch and a gallery. What is a gallery?”

“It is a wide covered balcony, most frequently closed on the two sides, but opening in front—whether on the ground floor or the upper stories—to the high road or the country.”

“It’s a spacious covered balcony, usually enclosed on both sides but open in front—whether on the ground floor or the upper levels—to the main road or the countryside.”

“And why should not a loggia be added to Marie’s house?”

“And why shouldn't a loggia be added to Marie's house?”

“We might make one, or several.”

“We might make one or more.”

[Pg 147]

[Pg 147]

“Well, then?”

"What's up?"

“Why then it must be placed in front of one of the apartments—the drawing-room, for example, on the ground floor, in the middle of the garden front, or if on the first floor, in front of the best bedroom.”

“Why then should it be positioned in front of one of the apartments—the living room, for instance, on the ground floor, facing the garden, or if on the first floor, in front of the best bedroom?”

“And would not that have a good effect?”

"And wouldn't that have a positive effect?"

“Perhaps it might: but the apartment next to it, opening upon this loggia, would be dark and gloomy, as the windows would be shaded by its ceiling.”

“Maybe it would: but the apartment next to it, opening onto this loggia, would be dark and dreary, since the windows would be blocked by its ceiling.”

“Ah! yes, that is true; but in fact we have loggias at the end of the drawing-room, the billiard-room, and the dining-room.”

“Ah! yes, that’s true; but actually we have loggias at the end of the living room, the billiard room, and the dining room.”

“Yes; only they are closed, instead of being open towards the outside, and these apartments gain in area through them. These loggias are therefore recesses—what they formerly called ‘bays.’ We have thus all the advantages of a loggia without the inconveniences which in our climate it would entail.”

“Yes; they’re just closed off instead of being open to the outside, and these spaces end up being larger because of it. These loggias are actually recesses—what they used to call ‘bays.’ So, we get all the benefits of a loggia without the downsides it would bring in our climate.”

“Why did you not say so to M. Durosay?”

“Why didn't you tell M. Durosay that?”

“He could see it well enough; there was no need to mention it to him.”

“He could see it clearly; there was no need to bring it up.”

“He would have liked a portico, too.”

“He would have liked a porch, too.”

“For what purpose?”

"What's the purpose?"

“I do not know——. He said it would be pretty—that my sister and her children would form a group under it, and that this would have a pretty effect at a distance.”

“I don’t know——. He said it would look nice—that my sister and her kids would create a group under it, and that this would look good from a distance.”

“And would it be very agreeable to your sister to produce ‘a very pretty effect’ at a distance?”

“And would it be very pleasing to your sister to create 'a really nice effect' from afar?”

“Oh, I don’t think she would care about it.”

“Oh, I don’t think she would mind.”

“But who are we building the house for?”

“But who are we building the house for?”

“Why, for my sister.”

“For my sister.”

“Not for strolling idlers, therefore. But the portico in question would have the same inconveniences as the loggias; it would make the apartments opening under the arcades or colonnades dark and gloomy. Since then, in[Pg 148] our country we spend more of our time in rooms than under porticos, we should have to pay rather dearly for the pleasure of forming groups for the gratification of passing strangers.”

“Not for casual wanderers, then. But the portico would have the same drawbacks as the loggias; it would make the apartments behind the arches or columns dark and dreary. Since we spend more of our time in rooms than under porticos, we would have to pay quite a bit for the enjoyment of gathering in groups to please random passersby.”

“Doubtless we should. Besides, in front of the billiard-room we have a conservatory, with steps down to the garden, which may serve for a portico without darkening the room, as it will be glazed.”

“Of course we should. Also, in front of the billiard room, we have a conservatory with steps leading down to the garden, which could function as a porch without blocking the light in the room, since it will be made of glass.”

“Certainly.”

"Of course."

“Perhaps M. Durosay did not observe this.”

“Maybe Mr. Durosay didn't notice this.”

“Oh! I daresay he did; but it has nothing imposing about it. He would have liked a real covered portico, in the style of the Italian porticos.”

“Oh! I bet he did; but it doesn’t have anything impressive about it. He would have preferred a proper covered porch, like the Italian ones.”

“He seems to be very fond of Italian architecture.”

“He really seems to love Italian architecture.”

“Which?”

"Which one?"

“Why, that he was talking about.”

“Why, that’s what he was talking about.”

“But there are many kinds of architecture in Italy, belonging to different ages and latitudes, and varying with the habits of the peoples who inhabit the peninsula.”

“But there are many types of architecture in Italy, from different eras and regions, and they vary with the lifestyles of the people who live on the peninsula.”

“You did not call his attention to that.”

"You didn't point that out to him."

“He must have known it.”

“He must’ve known it.”

“I see that you don’t think M. Durosay earnest in his opinions.”

"I see that you don't believe M. Durosay is serious about his opinions."

“M. Durosay is an excellent man; his opinions are sincere, and therefore I regard them as serious; but he and I look at things from a different point of view. He judges questions of art as a man of the world, on a ground of sentiment, while I think we artists ought to decide them by reasoning. Sentiment does not reason; it is like faith; so it is impossible for us to understand one another, since we speak a different language.”

“M. Durosay is a great guy; his opinions are genuine, so I take them seriously. However, he and I see things differently. He evaluates artistic issues from a worldly perspective, based on sentiment, while I believe we artists should approach them with logic. Sentiment doesn't reason; it's like faith. So, it's impossible for us to truly understand each other since we speak a different language.”

Paul’s views on the subject were as yet far from clear. Hitherto he had thought that architecture could be learned as we learn grammar and spelling; and here was his cousin telling him that it found expression in several[Pg 149] languages, one of which might be known, while the other remained quite unintelligible. He could not understand what reasoning could have to do with a matter entirely relating to form and appearance; yet he did not even know how to put questions to his cousin on the subject with a view to gaining light upon it. He was going along, therefore, with his head bent, striking down with his stick the withered thistles that encumbered the side of the path—Eugène, on his side, not seeming desirous of breaking the silence. They arrived thus at the works; they were almost deserted.

Paul's thoughts on the topic were still pretty unclear. Until now, he believed that architecture could be taught like grammar and spelling, but here was his cousin saying it was expressed in several languages, one of which he might understand while the others were completely foreign to him. He couldn’t grasp how reasoning could relate to something that was all about form and appearance; yet he didn’t even know how to ask his cousin questions to clarify it. So, he walked along with his head down, using his stick to knock away the dry thistles that cluttered the path—Eugène, on his side, didn’t seem interested in breaking the silence. They arrived at the construction site, which was nearly empty.[Pg 149]

“It froze last night,” said Branchu; “and it’s going to be a hard frost.”

“It froze last night,” said Branchu; “and it’s going to be a tough frost.”

“Well, you must cover the stone-work with litter or straw, and we shall have to stop. Put some scaffold planks on the walls, the straw over them, and slabs with stones at intervals. Take care that the planks project beyond the faces of the walls. If you have not straw enough, put soil on the slabs, or turf clods. As to the cellar vaults, spread a good layer of mould over them, and contrive some openings in the haunches, so that the rain or melted snow may run off. Come, set to work! Let all this be arranged for and finished to-morrow evening; then we will stop till the end of the cold weather.”

"Well, you need to cover the stonework with debris or straw, and we’ll have to pause. Put some scaffold planks on the walls, lay the straw over them, and place slabs with stones at intervals. Make sure the planks stick out beyond the walls. If you don’t have enough straw, use soil on the slabs or chunks of turf. For the cellar vaults, layer a good amount of dirt over them and create some openings in the arches so that rain or melted snow can drain away. Come on, let’s get to work! Make sure all of this is set up and finished by tomorrow evening; then we’ll take a break until the cold weather is over."

“So much the better,” said Master Branchu, “for all the young fellows are gone, and none but poor creatures are left at the works.”

“So much the better,” said Master Branchu, “because all the young guys are gone, and only a few unfortunate souls are left at the job.”

“This suspension of the building,” said Eugène, when they were returning to the château, “will permit us to work out the details of construction without having to hurry over them.”

“This pause in the construction,” said Eugène, as they were heading back to the château, “will allow us to sort out the construction details without rushing through them.”

“Yes,” replied Paul; “but I should much like to know how you set about it when you have to draw one of the details.”

“Yes,” replied Paul; “but I would really like to know how you go about it when you have to draw one of the details.”

[Pg 150]

[Pg 150]

“You must have learnt that in the two months we have been doing this sort of work.”

“You must have learned that in the two months we have been doing this kind of work.”

“Not quite; I perceive that you say what you intend, and that what you intend shows itself drawn on paper; now, I have tried to do the same, but though I knew well what I intended, I could bring nothing to paper; or if I did draw anything, it made me forget what I had in my mind. Yet, surely, for everything one wants to do in architecture, there must be a method, a process, a—what should I call it?—a recipe.”

“Not exactly; I see that you express what you mean, and that what you mean is clearly shown on paper. I've attempted to do the same, but even though I understood what I wanted to convey, I couldn’t get anything onto paper; or if I did draw something, it made me forget what I was trying to express. Still, there must be a method, a process—for everything one wants to achieve in architecture—a recipe, if you will.”

“Ah! now I see what you mean. But you must perceive, my young cousin, that people often fancy they understand and intend, while they really do not always know what they intend, and do not clearly understand the question in hand. All this morning, for instance, you have been revolving in your mind this question which you have only just put to me; and I have wished to give you leisure to present it in a definite form—to do which your brain has been obliged to work. Now, thanks to the effort you have made, you will comprehend the answer I am able to give you better. You remember those two lines of Boileau’s—

“Ah! now I see what you mean. But you have to realize, my young cousin, that people often think they understand and intend things, while they actually don’t always know what they mean and don’t fully grasp the question at hand. For example, all this morning, you’ve been mulling over this question, which you’ve just now asked me; and I wanted to give you the time to express it clearly—so your mind has had to work hard. Now, thanks to the effort you’ve put in, you’ll understand the answer I can give you better. Do you remember those two lines from Boileau—

“Ce que l’on conçoit bien s’énonce clairement,
Et les mots pour le dire arrivent aisément,”

and which are applicable to all the arts. The great thing is to habituate one’s self to clear conceptions. Unfortunately we learn to form phrases before we learn to reason, and try to express an idea before it is completely elaborated in the brain. Then we fancy we can supply what is incomplete in this idea by a happy combination of words. In architecture we think of forms that have seemed attractive, before knowing whether they will be exactly appropriate to what reason and the rigorous observance of the necessities of construction, or the requirements of the case,[Pg 151] demand. In a speech, the vulgar are readily seduced by a brilliant phrase, and perceive only too late the intellectual void which this seductive form conceals. Similarly, in architecture, the vulgar are seduced by a picturesque aspect and an attractive form, and have to pay the penalty of their error in the defects of the building. M. Durosay, in his admiration for certain forms that had charmed him as a tourist, has not thought of asking himself whether these externals were in harmony with the requirements to be satisfied, and what the structure itself demanded; the turn of the phrase has arrested his attention, and he has not inquired whether there was a clearly developed idea behind it. We might, therefore, have argued together in this way for days, without hope of convincing one another—he being entirely occupied with the form or fashion of the phrase, and not troubling himself as to whether this form has a signification—whether this phrase expresses a clear idea. All depends on this, my dear Paul, and, in my judgment, our country, which is so near the verge of absolute ruin, will not recover itself until it learns to reflect before it speaks. We build immense edifices, costing fabulous sums, yet we have no clear idea as to what they shall contain. Or rather, we think only of making the casing, and leave it an open question whether we shall use it for such or such a purpose. And I would have you observe that this unfortunate habit prevails not with regard to public buildings only. How many respectable men there are who, like M. Durosay, in proposing to build a house for themselves, first determine to erect a chalet, or an Italian villa, or an English cottage, according to the fancy of the moment, and make it quite a secondary question whether life will be comfortable in the case they are going to put up! Consequently you will see Italian villas in the north of France and Swiss chalets at Nice. Learn to reason, to observe before you proceed to act, and you will be a good barrister,[Pg 152] a good physician, a good soldier, a good architect. If nature has endowed you with genius, so much the better; it will supply a noble complement to your faculties; but if you have not gained the habit of reasoning, genius will be of no use to you, or rather, it cannot develop itself. Now, to learn to reason, you must labour much and labour long, and not allow yourself to be led astray by appearances, however attractive. Unfortunately, our education and instruction in France lead us to content ourselves with mere appearances, and to rely on traditions which are regarded as articles of faith, and which consequently may not be discussed. You will find M. Durosay’s portico confronting you everywhere. The army, the government, literature, politics, and the arts have their portico, which you must adopt, whatever has to be done or wherever an entrance has to be provided; unless you have sufficient energy, power for work, independence of character, practical knowledge, persistent determination, and the authority which that alone can secure, to say:—I will adopt your portico only as far as I think it advantageous to make use of it. But to return to your question as to whether any definite prescriptions or rules of procedure can be given in architecture, I reply that there are practical rules of procedure suitable to construction; but as the materials and the means of execution vary continually, any such rules ought to be modified by these variations. In architecture there is a method to be followed in all cases that present themselves, but there are no definite prescriptions or rules of procedure. This method is none other than the application of your reasoning faculty to all particular cases; for what is desirable in one set of circumstances is not so in another. It is therefore on the observation of these circumstances—of facts, customs, climate, and hygienic conditions—that your reason must rely before forming the conception of your work. And when this operation is[Pg 153] complete, and all is properly arranged in your mind, then you will be able to put on paper without hesitation the result of this intellectual labour.”

and which apply to all forms of art. The key is to train ourselves to have clear ideas. Unfortunately, we often learn to string together phrases before we know how to think logically, trying to express a concept before it is fully formed in our minds. Then we mistakenly believe we can fill in the gaps with clever wording. In architecture, we dream of appealing shapes before we know if they truly fit the rational demands of construction and the specific needs at hand,[Pg 151]. In speeches, the general public easily gets drawn in by a catchy phrase, only to realize too late the empty ideas behind it. Likewise, in architecture, many are captivated by a beautiful appearance and an attractive design, only to suffer the consequences of their misjudgment in the flaws of the building. M. Durosay, in his admiration for certain styles he encountered while traveling, hasn’t stopped to consider whether these exteriors align with the needs that must be met, or what the structure itself requires; he is captivated by the phrase’s style and doesn’t question whether there’s a clear idea beneath it. Therefore, we could have debated this for days without reaching an agreement—him focused solely on the form of the phrase without considering if it has any real meaning or if it conveys a clear idea. It all comes down to this, my dear Paul; in my view, our country, which is on the brink of disaster, won’t recover until it learns to think carefully before it speaks. We construct massive buildings that cost incredible amounts, yet we have no solid idea of what they are meant to hold. Or rather, we focus only on the outer shell without deciding how it will actually be used. And you should note that this unfortunate habit doesn’t just apply to public buildings. How many respectable people, like M. Durosay, when planning to build a home for themselves, first decide to create a chalet, or an Italian villa, or an English cottage based on the trend of the moment, without considering whether the living space will be comfortable? As a result, you’ll find Italian villas in northern France and Swiss chalets in Nice. Learn to think and observe before you act, and you will become a good lawyer,[Pg 152], a good doctor, a good soldier, a good architect. If you are naturally gifted, that’s great; it will enhance your abilities; but if you haven’t developed your reasoning skills, your talent won’t be of much use, or it simply can’t grow. To learn to think critically, you must work hard and for a long time, and not allow yourself to be misled by appearances, no matter how appealing they may be. Sadly, our education system in France encourages us to settle for superficial appearances and to depend on traditions considered unchangeable truths, which we can’t question. You will encounter M. Durosay’s portico everywhere. Whether in the military, government, literature, politics, or the arts, a conventional structure must be adopted for whatever needs to be done or wherever an entrance is necessary, unless you have enough drive, work ethic, independence, practical knowledge, unwavering resolve, and the authority to say:—I will follow your portico only as far as I believe it is beneficial. But back to your question about whether there are specific guidelines or procedures in architecture; I respond that there are practical guidelines suitable for construction. However, since materials and methods constantly change, those guidelines must be adjusted accordingly. In architecture, there is a method to follow for all situations that arise, but there are no strict rules or procedures. This method is simply applying your reasoning skills to each specific case; what is desirable in one situation may not be so in another. Therefore, your reasoning should be based on the observation of circumstances—facts, traditions, climate, and health considerations—before you form a conceptual design for your work. Once this process is[Pg 153] complete, and everything is clearly organized in your mind, you will then be able to put your ideas on paper without hesitation.

“I think I apprehend your meaning; but how must I begin?”

“I think I understand what you mean; but how should I start?”

“By acquiring the habit of observing everything, and reflecting on everything you see, hear, or read. When you have a ditch before you that you want to cross, do you not ask yourself whether your legs will carry you to the other side? do you not know, as the result of previous observation, whether you can jump the ditch or not, and do you not decide accordingly? You do not ask yourself before jumping whether Achilles or Roland was alleged by the poets to have leaped much wider spaces. It is yourself, your own strength, that you consult—not that of heroes—on pain of tumbling into the water. Exactly in the same way, if you have to build a house for a person you know, you first remind yourself that a house is made for people to live in; then you represent to yourself the habits of the owner, you calculate the number of apartments he requires, and what relations they will have to each other. You know whether he lives alone, or entertains much company; whether he will live in the house at such or such a season; whether he affects luxury or lives quietly; whether he has many servants, or employs only one, &c.: and when you have thoroughly considered all these essential conditions, you will try to put on paper the result of these observations. But if the first thing you think of is putting this person and his family in a house like those of Pompeii, or in a feudal château, it is a thousand to one that you will build him an uncomfortable habitation—that you will be obliged to sacrifice the convenience of its arrangements in order to assign them a place in a building that belongs to a period and a civilization differing from our own civilization and times.”

“By getting into the habit of observing everything and reflecting on what you see, hear, or read. When you come across a ditch you want to jump, don’t you ask yourself if your legs can take you to the other side? From your previous experiences, you know whether you can clear the ditch or not, and you make your decision based on that. You don’t wonder before jumping whether Achilles or Roland was said to leap much farther. You consult your own strength, not that of heroes, or else you risk falling into the water. Similarly, if you need to design a house for someone you know, you first remind yourself that a house is meant for people to live in; then you think about the owner’s habits, count the number of rooms he needs, and consider how they relate to each other. You know whether he lives alone or hosts a lot of guests, whether he will use the house during certain seasons, whether he prefers luxury or a simpler lifestyle, and whether he has many servants or just one, etc.: and after thoroughly thinking through all these important factors, you try to put the results of your observations on paper. But if your first thought is to put this person and his family in a house like those in Pompeii or a feudal château, there’s a good chance you’ll create an uncomfortable home—that you’ll have to sacrifice the practicality of its layout to fit it into a style that belongs to a different time and civilization than ours.”

[Pg 154]

[Pg 154]

“I can quite understand that, but still we can learn how to make a door, a window, or a staircase.”

“I totally get that, but we can still learn how to make a door, a window, or a staircase.”

“That is to say, it is possible to explain how people in former times set to work to make a door, a staircase, or a floor; but it is not proposed, nor ought it to be proposed, in teaching you the methods employed by our predecessors, to oblige you to do exactly what they did, since you perhaps possess materials which they did not, and your customs differ from theirs. The instructions given you run thus,—at least they ought to run thus: ‘These are the results of the experience acquired during past ages; make these your starting-point; do as your predecessors have done; use your reasoning faculty in applying the knowledge that has been acquired, but in obedience to the requirements of the present. You ought not to be ignorant of what has been done before you,—it is an accumulation for the common good, a possession secured to mankind. You ought to be acquainted with its existence and value; but, as a partner in its advantages, add your store of intelligence; make a step in advance, do not retrograde.’ But observe: there is only one means of preventing retrogression in architecture, and that is making art the faithful expression of the requirements of the time in which we live,—making the building a casing suited to that which it is destined to contain.”

"Basically, it's possible to explain how people in the past built a door, a staircase, or a floor; however, it's not necessary, nor should it be expected, that when teaching you the methods used by our predecessors, you must replicate exactly what they did. You probably have materials they didn't have, and your customs are different. The instructions you receive should go like this—at least, they should: 'These are the results of the experience gained over the years; use these as your starting point; do what your predecessors did; apply the knowledge acquired with your own reasoning, but adapt it to the needs of the present. You should know what has been done before you—it's a collective benefit, a legacy for humanity. You should recognize its existence and value; however, as someone benefiting from it, bring in your own insights; make progress, don't go backward.' But keep in mind: there's only one way to avoid going backward in architecture, and that's by ensuring art genuinely reflects the needs of our time—making the building fit for what it is meant to hold."

“And is not this always done?”

"Isn't this always done?"

“Not exactly. We are something like persons who have inherited from their ancestors a costly stock of furniture,—a venerable and venerated heirloom—who keep and make use of this furniture, though it is inconvenient to them, and no longer suits the habits of the times; who have even gone so far as to appoint a guardian for this old lumber, who is enjoined not to allow it to be modified. If therefore you, the master of the house, want to change the covering of this furniture, or send some of the articles[Pg 155] themselves, which are more inconvenient than useful, to the lumber-room, the guardian you pay and lodge assumes a dignified air, and declares that the function with which you have invested him, and which he makes a point of strictly discharging, forbids him to allow these modifications or suppressions; that his honour is concerned in not allowing these relics to suffer injury or change, since he is commissioned to preserve them. For the sake of peace, you continue to make use of this intolerable furniture, and you retain its guardian.”

“Not exactly. We are like people who have inherited a valuable collection of furniture from their ancestors—a respected and cherished heirloom—who keep and use this furniture even though it’s inconvenient and no longer fits with modern lifestyles; who have even gone so far as to hire someone to look after this old junk, who is instructed not to let it be changed. So if you, the owner of the house, want to change the upholstery on this furniture or send some of the pieces, which are more of a hassle than they're worth, to storage, the guardian you pay and house acts all high and mighty and says that the role you’ve given him, which he dutifully upholds, prevents him from allowing these changes or removals; that his honor depends on not letting these relics suffer any damage or alterations, since he’s tasked with preserving them. To keep the peace, you continue to use this unbearable furniture and keep its guardian.”

“I do not quite understand you.”

"I don't get you."

“By and by you will. But observe, I have given you fair warning. If you go into some old mansion crammed with antiquated furniture, take care not to criticise it; for though the host and hostess may content themselves with smiling, the guardian of those curiosities will take good care that you never set foot in that house again.”

“Eventually, you will. But notice, I’ve given you fair warning. If you enter some old mansion filled with outdated furniture, be careful not to criticize it; because while the hosts might just smile it off, the keeper of those curiosities will make sure you never step foot in that house again.”


[Pg 156]

[Pg 156]

CHAPTER XVIII.
THEORETICAL STUDIES.

The cold and the state of the times prevented the works from being continued. The winter might be a long one. Eugène and Paul prepared themselves, therefore, to employ this compulsory leisure to advantage. It was decided between them that they should not merely draw out the details necessary for finishing the works, but that Eugène should take advantage of these winter days to enlighten Paul on many points respecting which, as clerk-of-works, he was deficient.

The cold weather and the current conditions made it impossible to continue the work. Winter could be a long season. So, Eugène and Paul decided to make the most of this unexpected free time. They agreed that they wouldn’t just focus on the details needed to finish the project, but Eugène would also use these winter days to teach Paul about various aspects where he was lacking knowledge as the clerk of works.

Paul took an increasing interest in this employment. Hitherto the execution had immediately followed the labours of the study, and example and practice came to ratify theory; but he was quite aware that all his attention and desire to follow the lead of his chief were not sufficient, and that at each step he found himself confronted by a difficulty. The further the work advanced, the more utterly incapable did he feel himself. He set to work, therefore, with a hearty desire to learn; indeed, so much the more eagerly as all that surrounded him assumed a more and more gloomy and desolate aspect. Paul had never spent a winter in the country, although he used to come home to the Christmas festivities; the few days spent at his father’s château had passed away so quickly, that he had not time to consider how things looked out of doors. Besides, the house was full of guests at that time;[Pg 157] the presence of his elder sister gave it animation; everything had a holiday aspect. But the scene was quite changed at the beginning of December, 1870; the neighbouring villages were deserted, or occupied only for a few hours by troops ill-clad, dying of hunger, generally going to fight without enthusiasm, and leaving the exhausted and the sick in the cottages. Then would come long lines of carriages that looked like so many funeral processions.

Paul became increasingly interested in this job. Until now, his work had always followed the studies, and examples and practice had supported the theory; however, he realized that despite his focus and willingness to follow his boss's lead, it wasn't enough, and he faced challenges at every turn. As the project progressed, he felt more and more inadequate. So, he threw himself into learning with genuine enthusiasm, especially as everything around him became more gloomy and bleak. Paul had never spent a winter in the countryside, even though he usually returned home for Christmas celebrations; the few days he had spent at his father's château flew by so fast that he hadn’t really noticed how things looked outside. Plus, the house was filled with guests back then; his older sister's presence brought energy, and everything felt festive. But the scene was completely different at the beginning of December 1870; the nearby villages were deserted or only occupied for brief periods by poorly dressed troops suffering from hunger, mostly heading off to fight without any excitement and leaving the weak and sick behind in their cottages. Then came long lines of carriages that resembled funeral processions.[Pg 157]

The snow was beginning to cover the fields and to muffle distant sounds. Seldom did any of the peasants come to the château. The postman still paid his regular visits, but the letters and newspapers he brought tended only to depress the spirits of the inmates. Sometimes they gave shelter to members of the Garde Mobile, or to soldiers of the line; but all were dumb: the officers themselves would ask to be allowed to rest in their rooms under pretext of fatigue, rather than go down to the drawing-room. M. de Gandelau, up early in the morning, in spite of his gout, seemed to be omnipresent; he was to be found everywhere, among the farms and at the neighbouring town, facilitating the transport of munitions of war, organizing hospitals, supplying provisions and lightening the difficulties imposed by routine. “Set Paul to work, my friend,” he said to Eugène every evening; “that is all the demand I make on your friendship. I feel it is a considerable one, but grant it, I entreat you.”

The snow was starting to cover the fields and mute distant sounds. Rarely did any of the peasants visit the château. The postman still made his regular rounds, but the letters and newspapers he delivered only seemed to dampen the spirits of the residents. Occasionally, they provided shelter for members of the Garde Mobile or regular soldiers; however, everyone was quiet: the officers themselves would request permission to rest in their rooms, pretending to be tired, rather than join the others in the drawing-room. M. de Gandelau, who got up early in the morning despite his gout, appeared to be everywhere; he could be found among the farms and in the nearby town, helping with the transport of war supplies, organizing hospitals, providing provisions, and easing the burdens of daily life. “Put Paul to work, my friend,” he said to Eugène every evening; “that’s all I ask of our friendship. I know it’s a big request, but please consider it.”

In fact, the greater part of the day was passed in studying some question relating to building; then the architect and his clerk-of-works would go and take a walk before the evening, during which Eugène did not fail to start some interesting topic. The country and natural phenomena were the habitual subjects of these conversations; and thus Paul was learning to observe and reflect, and it became every day clearer to him how much knowledge must be acquired to accomplish a task of even limited[Pg 158] scope. His cousin did not fail to reiterate the sentiment: “The more you know the more you will feel your want of knowledge; and the highest acquisition in science is the conviction that we know nothing.”

Most of the day was spent studying something related to construction; then the architect and his site manager would take a walk before evening, during which Eugène always managed to bring up some interesting topic. The countryside and natural phenomena were the usual subjects of their discussions, and through this, Paul was learning to observe and think, gradually realizing how much knowledge is necessary to accomplish even a small task. His cousin often repeated the idea: “The more you know, the more aware you become of what you don’t know; and the greatest achievement in science is the awareness that we know nothing.”[Pg 158]

“What good is it to learn, then?” rejoined Paul, one day.

“What’s the point of learning, then?” Paul replied one day.

“That we may become modest; that we may occupy life with something better than those things to which vanity prompts us; that we may make ourselves of some little use to our fellows, without exacting gratitude from them.”

"That we may be humble; that we may fill our lives with something better than the things that vanity urges us towards; that we may be of some small help to others, without demanding gratitude from them."

Eugène made Paul draw a good deal, and always from nature, or from drawings executed while he was present, for he had not brought with him any specimens of architectural design. Besides this, Paul made a fair copy of memoranda relating to the parts of the house already erected. Thus he gained a complete acquaintance with the structure of every part of the stone-work.

Eugène had Paul draw a lot, always from real life or from sketches made while he was there, since he hadn't brought any architectural design samples with him. On top of that, Paul made a clear copy of notes related to the parts of the house that were already built. This way, he got to know the construction of every part of the stonework inside and out.

Paul was therefore acquiring the power of drawing architectural details neatly, and his cousin never failed to answer his questions. Paul had soon laid aside all timidity—or, if we choose to deem it so, amour propre—and no longer fearing to reveal his ignorance, asked a good many questions. Eugène generally waited for such inquiries before he gave a lesson on any subject. He wished the mind of his pupil to be already prepared by the craving for knowledge, before teaching him. It may be observed that these lessons treated of a great variety of subjects; but Eugène took care to connect them together by an exposition of those several principles which were continually suggested by them.

Paul was getting really good at drawing architectural details, and his cousin always answered his questions. Paul quickly overcame any shyness—or, if you prefer, his amour propre—and without worrying about showing his lack of knowledge, he asked a lot of questions. Eugène usually waited for him to ask questions before starting a lesson on any topic. He wanted Paul to be eager to learn before teaching him. It's worth noting that these lessons covered a wide range of subjects, but Eugène made sure to tie them together by discussing the underlying principles they presented.

One day Paul wished to know what an “order” is, and what is understood by this word in architecture.

One day, Paul wanted to know what an “order” is and what this term means in architecture.

“That is a comprehensive question, Paul; and I scarcely know whether I shall be able to answer it so as to enlighten[Pg 159] you on the subject. The word has two significations in architecture: ‘order’ may be understood to mean subordination, or correlation between the parts. But I think that is not what you are thinking of; you probably intend to ask me the meaning of what are commonly called ‘orders of architecture.’ The idea of an ‘order’ in your mind implies a row of columns or vertical supports bearing an entablature. That is it, is it not?”

“That’s a big question, Paul, and I’m not sure I can answer it in a way that really helps you understand the topic. The term has two meanings in architecture: ‘order’ can refer to the way parts are arranged or related to each other. But I don’t think that’s what you’re actually asking; you probably want to know what people usually mean by ‘orders of architecture.’ When you think of an ‘order,’ you’re probably imagining a row of columns or vertical supports holding up a horizontal structure. Is that right?”

“Yes, that is what I mean.”

"Yes, that's exactly what I mean."

“Well, then, in remote ages, architects conceived the idea—which was a very natural one—of erecting vertical supports, and placing cross-pieces of wood or stone connecting their summits; and on this open colonnade they raised a roof. This formed a shelter open below, but covered in—what we call a halle. But, as in many cases it was also necessary to close in these covered spaces, they built walls behind these vertical props, leaving between them and the isolated supports a space called a ‘portico.’ It was thus, for instance, that certain Greek temples were designed. By degrees the genius of architects, study, and the observation of the exterior effect, led them to give to these vertical props, and to that which they support—that is, the entablature—relative proportions, of delicate and harmonious type, whence laws were deduced; for I would have you remark that the example always precedes the rule, and that rules are only the results of experience. In this way the Greeks invented three orders: the Ionic, the Doric, and the Corinthian—each of which possesses its system of harmonious proportions and its special type of ornamentation. Among the Greeks these systems were not so rigorously distinct as to prevent their frequently trenching on each other’s precincts.

“Well, in ancient times, architects came up with the idea—which was quite natural—of building vertical supports and placing crosspieces of wood or stone to connect their tops; they then put a roof over this open colonnade. This created a shelter that was open below but covered above—what we call a halle. However, since it was often necessary to enclose these covered spaces, they constructed walls behind these vertical supports, leaving a gap between them and the isolated supports called a ‘portico.’ This is how, for example, some Greek temples were designed. Over time, architects’ creativity, study, and observation of the external appearance led them to give these vertical supports and the structures they support—known as the entablature—balanced proportions of a delicate and harmonious nature, from which principles were derived; for it's important to note that examples always come before rules, and rules are merely the outcomes of experience. In this way, the Greeks developed three architectural styles: the Ionic, the Doric, and the Corinthian—each with its own system of harmonious proportions and unique ornamental style. Among the Greeks, these styles were not so strictly defined that they didn’t occasionally overlap.”

“But the Romans, who were devotees of order, and who undertook to impose it in everything and everywhere, in adopting these arrangements from the Greeks, insisted on[Pg 160] reducing these three systems to an almost absolute formula. That simplified matters, and the Romans were fond of inclosing whatever appertained to art in an administrative frame. A step further in the wrong direction was taken as the result of the study of classical antiquity in the sixteenth century; authorities on the subject presumed finally to settle the relations between the different members of each of these orders; and with a view to leave some degree of latitude to architects, they even added two orders to the three original ones, viz., the Tuscan and the Composite. These stereotyped orders have been applied on every occasion, and in every fashion, just as hangings are attached to a wall to decorate it. Architects have frequently bestowed more thought on placing an order on a façade, than on the disposition of the building erected behind this front. Certainly nothing of the kind more contrary to reason has been produced than the Colonnade of the Louvre, for its ordonnance has no relation to what it contains; and this immense portico, situated on the first story, absolutely serves no other purpose than to obscure the openings for light placed along it, while you never see any one walking in it. But in those days it was obligatory to be magnificent, at whatever cost. We have not entirely renounced this solemn fooling; and even now you may see ‘orders’ placed, without its being possible to say why, in front of buildings that could very well dispense with this adventitious decoration, which is merely designed to prove to the public that there are such things as ‘orders,’ and architects capable of presenting them in those proportions which their formula requires.

But the Romans, who were all about order, and who aimed to impose it everywhere in every aspect of life, took these systems from the Greeks and insisted on simplifying them into almost a formula. This made things easier, and the Romans liked to frame everything related to art within an administrative structure. A further mistake was made during the sixteenth century when scholars studying classical antiquity assumed they could establish fixed relationships between the different elements of each of these styles; to allow some flexibility for architects, they even created two new styles, the Tuscan and the Composite, in addition to the original three. These rigid styles have been used for everything, like decorative hangings on a wall. Architects often spent more time figuring out how to apply a style to a façade than on the actual layout of the building behind it. The Colonnade of the Louvre is a prime example of this disconnect; its design has nothing to do with what it houses, and this massive portico on the first floor serves only to block the light openings along it, while nobody is ever seen walking in it. But back then, being grand at any cost was mandatory. We haven’t fully moved on from this grandiose nonsense; even today, you can see ‘styles’ placed in front of buildings that really wouldn’t need them, merely to show the public that such styles exist and that there are architects skilled enough to display them in the proportions required by their formulas.

“But you will study these branches of architecture a little later on. I think it a bad method of teaching art to allow flowers to be introduced into discourse before the power of expressing thought clearly has been acquired; and it is thus that writers and speakers are formed who[Pg 161] take balderdash for eloquence; and architects, who before they think of doing justice to the exigencies of construction, and studying the requirements of the case, amuse themselves with reproducing forms into whose origin, justification, and real meaning they have never inquired. But just now, let us keep to our proper business. It is a house, not a temple or a basilica, that we are building. We have to consider all its parts; and this is work enough for us.

“But you will study these aspects of architecture a little later. I believe it’s a poor way to teach art to bring in fancy details before you’ve learned to express ideas clearly. This leads to writers and speakers who mistake nonsense for eloquence, and architects who, before they focus on meeting the demands of construction and understanding what’s needed, waste time mimicking styles without ever exploring their origins, justifications, or true meanings. But for now, let’s stick to our main task. We are building a house, not a temple or a basilica. We need to think about all its components, and that’s already plenty of work for us.”

“We have leisure to consider the details of our building thoroughly, since the frost obliges us to suspend the works. Construction, my dear fellow, is an art requiring foresight. The good builder is he who leaves nothing to chance, who does not put off the solution of any problem, and who knows how to give each function its place and value with respect to the whole, and that at the right moment. We have drawn plans for the several stories; we have given the details necessary for constructing the lower parts of the house; now we must draw the working elevations. The first thing is to make an exact section of the front walls giving the height of the floors, the levels of the tie-bars, and the base of the roof.”

“We have time to thoroughly consider the details of our building since the frost forces us to pause the work. Construction, my friend, is an art that requires planning. A good builder is someone who leaves nothing to chance, who doesn’t postpone solving any issues, and who knows how to properly allocate each function's place and value in relation to the whole at the right moment. We’ve created plans for the different floors; we’ve provided the details needed to build the lower parts of the house; now we need to draw the working elevations. The first task is to make an accurate section of the front walls, showing the height of the floors, the levels of the tie-bars, and the base of the roof.”

Eugène, who, as we may suppose, had previously realized to himself, if not drawn, all the parts of the building, had soon sketched out this section for Paul, who did not cease to wonder at the promptitude with which his master succeeded in drawing on paper any detail required. He could not help remarking it again.

Eugène, who, as we can assume, had likely already visualized, if not outlined, all the aspects of the building, quickly sketched this section for Paul, who couldn't help but marvel at how swiftly his mentor could put any necessary detail onto paper. He found himself noticing it again.

“How do you manage to indicate the arrangement of all these parts of the building without hesitating a moment?” said he.

“How do you manage to show the arrangement of all these parts of the building without pausing for a second?” he asked.

“Because I have thought about them, and have represented to myself all these parts while drawing or setting you to draw their combinations. If they are not on the paper they are in my head; and when I have to render them intelligible to those who are commissioned to execute[Pg 162] them, I have only to write, so to speak, what I know by heart already. And thus it is always desirable to proceed. Look at this section, and these few details (Fig. 42); let us examine the drawing together; you will soon observe that you have already seen all that the sheet of paper contains, and that with a little attention you would be able to arrange these different parts in their due order. You see the thickness of the wall on the ground floor figured, and with its central line dotted; the height of the window sill, A, and its support; the arrangement of the window casing and its lintel; the height of the floor and its thickness. The string-course, B, had to be determined; it should have the thickness of this floor; it indicates it externally. Then, reducing the outside walls to 1 foot 8 inches on the first floor, we put a set-off course at C; window sills like those of the ground floor. The height of the first story from floor to floor has already been settled. The under member, D, of the cornice indicates the thickness of the second floor; lastly comes the cornice table of hard stone which receives the eaves-gutter. As regards the first floor windows, they are formed like those of the ground floor, excepting that the inside reveal is less deep by 4 inches, since the wall is 4 inches less in thickness. Their lintels are similar, as well as the casing which has to take the sheet-iron jalousies, and the tie-bars come underneath these lintels. As we have gables, the cornices cannot return, and must stop against a projection, E, which, rising above the roof, receives the coping, F, which will have a projecting fillet to cover the junction of the slating with the gable. At G, then, I draw the angle of the building with this projection, E, and the coping we have spoken of. As I foresee that the joists will have too long a bearing in some places, I suppose the intermediate beams, H, to carry them and the corbels, I, for the support of these joists.

“Because I've thought about them and visualized all these parts while drawing or directing you to draw their combinations. If they're not on paper, they're in my head; and when I need to explain them to those tasked with bringing them to life[Pg 162], I just have to write down what I already know by heart. It’s always best to approach it this way. Look at this section and these few details (Fig. 42); let’s review the drawing together; you’ll soon notice that you’ve already seen everything on this sheet and, with a bit of focus, you could organize these different parts in their proper order. You can see the thickness of the wall on the ground floor illustrated, with its centerline dotted; the height of the window sill, A, and its support; the setup of the window casing and its lintel; the height and thickness of the floor. The string-course, B, needed to be determined; it should match the thickness of this floor to show that on the outside. Then, by reducing the outside walls to 1 foot 8 inches on the first floor, we add a set-off course at C; window sills like those on the ground floor. The height between floors for the first story has already been decided. The under member, D, of the cornice indicates the thickness of the second floor; finally, we have the cornice table made of hard stone that supports the eaves-gutter. As for the first floor windows, they're designed like those on the ground floor, except the inside reveal is 4 inches shallower since the wall is 4 inches thinner. Their lintels are similar, as is the casing for the sheet-iron jalousies, with the tie-bars positioned beneath these lintels. Since we have gables, the cornices can’t return and must stop at a projection, E, which rises above the roof to support the coping, F, that will have a projecting fillet to cover the junction between the slating and the gable. At G, I draw the angle of the building with this projection, E, and the coping we've discussed. As I anticipate that the joists will have too long a span in some areas, I plan for intermediate beams, H, to support them along with corbels, I, for holding these joists."

[Pg 163]

[Pg 163]

Fig. 42.Section of the Side Walls, with Details.

Fig. 42.Section of the Side Walls, with Details.

[Pg 166]

[Pg 166]

Fig. 43.An Oriel Window.

Fig. 43.An Oriel Window.

[Pg 167]

[Pg 167]

“At K I have drawn the string-course of the first floor, with the projections figured from the centre of the wall, and the set-off course above; also at L, the cornice and its table-course. You will observe that this table-course slopes towards the outer edge, beneath the gutter, so that, in the event of an overflow, the water may run off outside, and not find its way into the wall. This table-course has a throat, a, as well as the string-course, to prevent the water from running down the wall. These mouldings will have to be drawn to their full size for the stone-mason. On the course, M, behind the gutter, will stand the dormer gables, which will admit light to the second floor in the roof. As to the roofing, of which I merely indicate here the base, I will show you what it is to be. Take these sketches, then, and make from them figured drawings to a scale of half an inch to a foot, so that they may be worked from.

“At K, I’ve drawn the string-course for the first floor, with the projections marked from the center of the wall, and the set-off course above it; also at L, the cornice and its table-course. You'll notice that this table-course slopes towards the outer edge, under the gutter, so that if there’s an overflow, the water will run off outside instead of seeping into the wall. This table-course has a throat, a, just like the string-course, to stop the water from running down the wall. These moldings will need to be drawn to their full size for the stone-mason. On the course, M, behind the gutter, the dormer gables will be placed, allowing light into the second floor in the roof. Regarding the roofing, where I’m just showing you the base here, I’ll show you what it’s supposed to be. Take these sketches and create detailed drawings to a scale of half an inch to a foot, so they can be worked from.”

“In the meantime, I am going to make a perspective sketch of the projecting bays or loges of the billiard-room and dining-room, with the aid of which you may draw out these details. We shall see how you acquit yourself.

“In the meantime, I'm going to create a perspective sketch of the projecting bays or loges of the billiard room and dining room. With that, you can work on these details. We’ll see how you do.”

“The English in their country-houses are fond of employing this kind of projecting window. They call them bay or oriel windows, and often construct them on corbelling. Stay—here I have a sketch in my note-book of such a window in a house at Lincoln, dating from the sixteenth century (Fig. 43). This projecting oriel, supported by a bracket, is terminated by a small terrace forming a balcony on the first story. Observe, by the by, how well-devised this construction is. This part of England possesses stone, but that material is less common than brick. The builder has used the dearer material only for the oriel window, which he could scarcely erect in brick, and for the jambs and lintels of the windows. The rest of the structure is built of brick.

“The English in their country houses like to use this type of projecting window. They call them bay or oriel windows, and often build them on corbelling. Wait—here I have a sketch in my notebook of such a window in a house in Lincoln, dating from the sixteenth century (Fig. 43). This projecting oriel, supported by a bracket, ends with a small terrace that forms a balcony on the first floor. By the way, notice how well-designed this construction is. This part of England has stone, but that material is less common than brick. The builder used the more expensive material only for the oriel window, which he could hardly make in brick, and for the jams and lintels of the windows. The rest of the structure is built of brick."

[Pg 168]

[Pg 168]

“But,” continued Eugène, “your bay windows project too far to allow of their resting on corbelling.”

“But,” continued Eugène, “your bay windows stick out too far to rest on corbelling.”

“What do you mean by corbelling?”

“What do you mean by corbelling?”

“It is a projecting piece of construction, not rising from the bottom, but supported by corbels; whence the name corbelling. The weight of the masonry resting on the tail, i.e. the part of the corbels fixed in the walls, allows us to place on their projecting part a construction, which, being less heavy than that resting on their tail, is thus sustained without fear of overbalancing. We must also calculate the length of the arm of the lever—that is to say, the relation of the projection of the corbels to the weight that secures their tail and that which rests on their head. Of course, the further the corbels project the more does the weight placed on their outward extremity tell on that which keeps the balance. So that a very trifling weight placed at the extremity of a greatly projecting corbel might overbalance a heavy mass placed at the tail. Corbels have, therefore, been frequently replaced by squinches—that is to say, a system of masonry which brings the weight at the extremity to bear on the walls. The architect who designed the oriel window I have just shown you did not trouble himself to make such an arrangement. He constructed what is called a bracket—that is, an inverted pyramid, by means of three courses of corbelling; or, if you choose, projecting one beyond the other, so as to obtain a portion of a polygon. On this supporting surface he has erected his window framing, which is scarcely 9½ inches thick. The bracket being built into the wall, supports the window framing, without being over-balanced, on account of the weight of the wall. Closed balconies of this kind were frequently employed during the Middle Ages, because they gave space in the upper stories without encroaching on the street, and afforded side views. And though civic regulations no longer allow us to build these projections in our [Pg 171]cities, nothing would hinder us from erecting them when we build in the country. Still, there ought to be a good reason for adopting them. And in our case these corbel constructions serve no purpose, and it will cost us less to raise our bay window direct from the ground.”

“It’s a projecting piece of construction, not rising from the bottom, but supported by corbels; hence the name corbelling. The weight of the masonry resting on the tail, i.e. the part of the corbels fixed in the walls, allows us to place on their projecting part a structure that is lighter than what rests on their tail, so it is supported without risk of overbalancing. We also need to calculate the length of the arm of the lever—that is, the relationship between the projection of the corbels and the weight that secures their tail and what rests on their head. Obviously, the farther the corbels project, the more the weight placed at their outer edge affects the balance. So a tiny weight placed at the tip of a heavily projecting corbel could easily overbalance a heavy mass at the tail. Corbels have, therefore, often been replaced by squinches—a system of masonry that shifts the weight at the end to the walls. The architect who designed the oriel window I just showed you didn’t bother to make such an arrangement. Instead, he created what is called a bracket—that is, an inverted pyramid made with three layers of corbelling; or, if you prefer, projecting one over the other, to form part of a polygon. On this supporting surface, he has built his window frame, which is barely 9½ inches thick. The bracket, being embedded in the wall, supports the window frame without being overbalanced, thanks to the weight of the wall. Closed balconies like this were often used during the Middle Ages because they provided space in the upper stories without taking up street space, and allowed for side views. Although city regulations no longer permit us to build these projections in our urban areas, nothing prevents us from adding them when constructing in the countryside. Still, there should be a good reason for choosing to do so. In our case, these corbel constructions serve no purpose, and it would be cheaper to have our bay window come straight from the ground.”

Fig. 44.Bay Window of Billiard-room.

Fig. 44.Billiard Room Bay Window.

In about an hour Eugène handed to Paul the accompanying sketch (Fig. 44), giving the arrangement of the bay window of the billiard-room, that he might study its construction. It required a good deal of attention from our clerk-of-works, and he could not master it thoroughly without frequently applying to his cousin for information and explanation.

In about an hour, Eugène gave Paul the attached sketch (Fig. 44), showing the layout of the bay window in the billiard room, so he could examine its design. It took a lot of focus from our project manager, and he couldn’t fully understand it without often asking his cousin for details and clarification.


[Pg 172]

[Pg 172]

CHAPTER XIX.
THEORETICAL STUDIES—Continued.

The weather becoming more and more severe prevented the works from being resumed. The parts that had been begun were hidden by a thick layer of mould and stubble, which in its turn was covered by a mantle of snow. The days were spent in working out details which were to be given to Branchu and the carpenter when the weather allowed them to resume their labours. During the long evenings, theoretical questions relating to building were discussed, when the family were assembled and the news of the day had been read. To Paul this was a means of gaining instruction, and to the family generally a distraction from the gloomy thoughts that weighed down the spirits of all amid the depressing circumstances of the times. Paul had seen his cousin drawing several mouldings during the day, to their full size; but as he had drawings of his own to attend to, he had not interrupted his work to put questions to his master. But in the evening Paul asked what were the methods to be employed in drawing these mouldings.

The increasingly severe weather stopped the work from resuming. The parts that had already been started were covered by a thick layer of mold and debris, which was in turn blanketed by snow. The days were spent working out details that would be given to Branchu and the carpenter when the weather permitted them to get back to work. During the long evenings, the family gathered to discuss theoretical questions about building after reading the day's news. For Paul, this was a way to learn, and for the family as a whole, it was a distraction from the heavy thoughts that weighed on everyone due to the bleak circumstances of the time. Paul had seen his cousin sketching several moldings at full size during the day, but since he had his own drawings to focus on, he didn’t interrupt to ask his master any questions. But in the evening, Paul inquired about the methods used to draw these moldings.

“You still persist in asking for recipes, Paul,” replied Eugène. “But there are no more any recipes for drawing mouldings than for any other parts of the building. There are conditions imposed by the purpose, the nature of the materials, the method of employing them, local custom, and the effect to be obtained. To the consideration of[Pg 173] these conditions join common sense, observation, and study, and you will be able to draw mouldings.

“You keep asking for recipes, Paul,” Eugène replied. “But there are no specific recipes for making mouldings any more than for other parts of the building. There are factors determined by the purpose, the type of materials, how they're used, local customs, and the desired effect. If you consider these factors along with common sense, observation, and study, you will be able to create mouldings.”

“We will, if you please, examine these conditions separately.

“We will, if you don’t mind, look at these conditions one by one.

“The purpose:—A moulding is executed, you must suppose, for some object; if you draw a cornice, it is to crown a wall, to carry a gutter or the eaves of a roof, to divert the rain-water from the wall; that cornice therefore must project sufficiently to fulfil that object.—The nature of the materials:—It is evident that if you have, on the one hand, hard and tenacious stones, supplied in large masses, or, on the other hand, small and friable ones, you will not be able to give the same profile to these different kinds of materials.—The method of employing these stones must likewise influence the form to be given to this profile. If we have to hoist stones by the aid of very simple and primitive means, which do not allow us to raise considerable weights to great elevations, we must avoid profiles requiring large blocks; but if we have the means of doing so, we can adopt them.—Local custom:—It will be necessary for you to take account of the customs of the district in which you are building, because these customs are most frequently the result of a judicious observation of the conditions imposed by the climate, the requirements of the neighbourhood, the method of working, and the nature of the material itself. I mean by custom, not certain imported methods which are a mere affair of fashion, but those which have been suggested, as I have just said, by long and judicious observation.—A skilful architect can give a robust or a delicate aspect to a building by the drawing of a moulding. He should always subordinate the drawing to the scale of the construction and to that of the materials. It is ridiculous to aim at large mouldings if we have only thinly bedded stones, or those of yielding quality, in the same way as it is absurd to[Pg 174] give delicate profiles to coarse stones and those difficult to cut.

“The purpose:—A molding is created for a specific reason; if you design a cornice, it's meant to top a wall, support a gutter or the eaves of a roof, and redirect rainwater away from the wall. Therefore, that cornice must extend far enough to serve its purpose.—The nature of the materials:—It's clear that if you have, on one hand, hard and durable stones available in large quantities, or, on the other hand, small and fragile ones, you won't be able to create the same profile with these different types of materials.—The method of using these stones will also affect the shape of the profile. If we need to lift stones using very simple and basic techniques that don't allow us to raise heavy weights to great heights, we should avoid designs that require larger blocks; but if we have the means to handle them, we can incorporate those designs.—Local custom:—You need to consider the customs of the area where you are building because these practices usually arise from careful observation of the conditions dictated by the climate, the needs of the community, the construction methods, and the type of material itself. By custom, I refer not to certain imported methods that are just a matter of trend, but to those developed through extensive and wise observation.—A skilled architect can give a sturdy or delicate look to a building through the design of a molding. He should always align the design with the scale of the construction and the materials used. It doesn't make sense to aim for large moldings if we only have thinly layered stones or those that are soft. Similarly, it's absurd to create delicate profiles for rough stones that are hard to carve.”

“You see, then, that in this, as in all that concerns the art of building, reasoning constitutes the first part of the recipe.

“You see, then, that in this, as in everything related to the art of building, reasoning forms the first part of the recipe.

“The Athenians, who erected their public buildings of white marble, could allow themselves refinements in the drawing of their profiles which cannot be applied to the coarse limestone of our country. And when the Greeks built edifices with stone of a porous or coarse-grained texture, they took care to cover its dressed surfaces with a very fine stucco, which enabled them to conceal the coarseness of the material. But though they were able to adopt this plan in a mild climate where it never freezes, it would be impracticable in a region like ours, where for two months in the winter the thermometer shows a mean of 7° (Fahr.) below freezing point, and occasionally, as just now, falls as low as 27 below freezing. This stucco would have to be renewed every spring.

“The Athenians, who built their public buildings out of white marble, were able to refine their profiles in ways that simply can’t be done with the rough limestone we have in our region. When the Greeks constructed buildings from stone that had a porous or coarse texture, they made sure to cover the finished surfaces with a very fine plaster, which helped them hide the roughness of the material. However, while this technique worked in a mild climate where it never freezes, it wouldn’t work in a place like ours, where the average winter temperature is 7° (F) below freezing for two months, and can occasionally drop to 27 below freezing, like it is now. This plaster would need to be replaced every spring.”

“Our mediæval architects, who did not follow what is called the classical tradition professed now at our École des Beaux Arts, and who did not go to Rome or Athens to study the art of building suitable to France, had tried to discover that style of profile which suits our materials and climate—which seems reasonable enough; and they not only discovered, but skilfully applied that style. I am going to give you proof of this.

“Our medieval architects, who didn’t stick to what’s now called the classical tradition taught at our École des Beaux Arts, and who didn’t travel to Rome or Athens to learn about building styles suited for France, tried to find a design that fits our materials and climate—which makes a lot of sense; and they not only found it but also skillfully applied that style. I’m going to show you proof of this."

“First, then, as they did not lay stones in the rough, as I have told you, but ready worked—so that they did not need retouching when once in place—they were obliged to draw each profile within the height of a single course. If these courses were deep, their profiles might be large; if they were shallow, they must be small.

“First, as they didn't use rough stones, as I mentioned, but pre-shaped ones—so they didn't need to be adjusted once they were in place—they had to draw each profile within the height of a single layer. If these layers were deep, their profiles could be large; if they were shallow, they had to be small.”

Fig. 45.

Fig. 45.

“Let us take a string-course for example. A string-course is a course of stone which indicates a floor—an intermediate resting-place in the height of a wall. And[Pg 175] it is not without reason that a projecting course is placed at the level of a floor: first, because it is well to give more strength to the wall at this level where timbers are lodged; secondly, because it is necessary to level up the building at the same height, to make it even in order to raise a fresh story. But this course should not arrest the rain-water, and thus occasion the wet to penetrate into the walls; on the contrary, the profile should be so drawn as to throw off the wet, so that the timbers may not decay. Observe, then (A, Fig. 45), how architects who thought more of satisfying the requirements of construction than of borrowing forms from edifices that were not affected by the conditions imposed by our climate and style of building, usually designed the profile of a string-course. They drew the line a b at an angle of 60°. From the point c they let fall a perpendicular, c b, on this line a b. The angle a b c was therefore a right angle. Taking from b to d a greater or less length according to the hardness of the stone, they hollowed out the moulding e, which we call a water-drip, or throat; so that the rain-water falling on the inclined surface a b did not stay there, but following the direction b d necessarily fell to the ground at d, since it would not ascend into the hollow. The surface of the wall, c f, was therefore protected. If a cornice was to be made (as at B), they laid a first course g to support the projection of the table h; then they laid, as a second course, this table h, taking care to provide a drip at i. If this table had to receive a metal or stone gutter, they took care to cut a slope from j to k, leaving the bed horizontal where the joints occur, as shown in perspective at C. The gutter rested then on the blocks left at l, and if it allowed the rain-water to escape by the joints, these drippings finding the slope k j, followed it, reached the throat i, and fell to the ground without penetrating into the interior of the wall. According as the stone employed was hard or soft,[Pg 176] the mouldings were more or less deep or shallow. I suppose here the profile to be cut in a stone of moderate hardness, whereas, if the stone is very hard, you can give the profile a sharper outline as at D. You will then obtain a more striking effect, darker shades and more brilliant lights.[Pg 177] But in drawing exterior profiles, you must always consider the direction of the solar rays.

“Let’s take a string-course as an example. A string-course is a row of stone that marks the level of a floor—an intermediate resting place in the height of a wall. And[Pg 175] it makes sense to have a projecting course at the floor level: first, because it adds strength to the wall where the timbers are placed; second, because it’s necessary to keep the building level at that height to prepare for adding another story. However, this course shouldn’t stop rainwater from flowing away, as that could cause moisture to seep into the walls; instead, its design should direct water away, preventing the timbers from rotting. Now, observe (A, Fig. 45) how architects, who focused more on meeting construction needs than on mimicking forms from buildings that didn’t have to deal with our climate and style of construction, typically designed the profile of a string-course. They drew line a b at a 60° angle. From point c, they dropped a vertical line, c b, to this line a b. Therefore, angle a b c was a right angle. They measured a length from b to d, depending on the hardness of the stone, and carved out the moulding e, known as a water-drip or throat; this way, rainwater hitting the inclined surface a b wouldn’t linger but would travel along b d and drop to the ground at d, as it wouldn’t flow back into the hollow. The wall surface, c f, was therefore protected. If a cornice was to be added (like at B), they first laid course g to support the projection of table h; then they laid table h as a second course, ensuring there was a drip at i. If this table needed to hold a metal or stone gutter, they sloped it from j to k, keeping the area where the joints occur horizontal, as shown in perspective at C. The gutter then rested on the blocks left at l, and if it allowed rainwater to flow through the joints, these drips would follow the slope k j, reach the throat i, and drop to the ground without seeping into the wall. Depending on whether the stone used was hard or soft,[Pg 176] the mouldings could be deeper or shallower. I’m assuming here that the profile is cut in stone of moderate hardness; however, if the stone is very hard, you can give the profile a sharper outline like at D. This will create a more striking effect with darker shades and brighter lights.[Pg 177] But when drawing exterior profiles, you always need to consider the direction of the sunlight."

“If, for example, you trace a profile such as this at E, it is evident that as the sun’s rays follow the direction O P, all your mouldings will remain in the shade, and will produce no effect. But as soon as the sun gets lower and its rays have a more inclined direction, R S, all the mouldings will receive lines of light of nearly equal strength, and the profile will give a series of uniform lights and shadows which will not indicate the projection. But if you draw this profile according to figure F, the solar rays following the same direction o’ p’, will meet the projections n m, which will be luminous, and when the direction is lowered you will always get differences of relation between the lights and shadows. I give you only general views here; it is for you to observe and profit by your own observations when you have the opportunity of studying actual buildings.

“If you trace a profile like this at E, it’s clear that when the sun’s rays come from the direction O P, all your moldings will stay in the shade and won’t create any effect. But as soon as the sun sets lower and its rays come at a more inclined angle, R S, all the moldings will receive lines of light of nearly equal strength, and the profile will show a series of uniform lights and shadows that won’t indicate the projection. However, if you draw this profile according to figure F, the solar rays following the same direction o’ p’, will hit the projections n m, which will be illuminated, and when the angle lowers, you will always see differences in the relationship between the lights and shadows. I’m just providing general views here; it’s up to you to observe and make the most of your own observations when you get the chance to study real buildings.”

“It is also very important to make the drawing of your profiles conform to the nature of the materials employed. You cannot give to a material that is moulded, cast or run,—like plaster or cements and mortars—the profiles that are suitable to stone. Materials thus laid on are adapted only to a fine and slightly projecting moulding. In the same way, if you design profiles for works in wood, you must consider the ligneous and tenacious quality of this material, and avoid surfaces of too great extent: you must not leave out of sight the fact that wood allows of delicate workmanship; that it is employed only in pieces that are relatively thin; and that to be properly worked, it requires the use of edged tools, such as chisels and planes, which follow the grain and are with difficulty worked across the grain. In all this, economy is in unison with common sense and the good effect produced; for if you choose to introduce a profile that does not suit the material used, you will[Pg 178] give occasion to the employment of unusually difficult and consequently expensive processes, and your work appears painful, affected, and laborious. Some architects think to create astonishment by thus adopting processes which do not harmonize with the materials they use; who, if they are constructing with brick, strive to give to their building the appearance of a construction in stone; who affect to imitate marble in wood, or wood in plaster; who seem in fact to make it their object to give to each of the materials employed forms that are not appropriate to their nature. Observe these undesirable methods, with a view of always avoiding them, if you would be an architect. The perverted taste of most of those persons who employ builders is often an obstacle to the use of sensible methods; but unfortunately, among us, classical studies have led artists into this false course, and in the end the public have become enamoured of the undesirable results to which it conducts; so that it is often difficult to induce employers to listen to reason, and to proceed according to the dictates of a just appreciation of the proper use of materials. But be this as it may, this is one of the questions in regard to which an architect who respects his art ought never to yield.”

"It’s also really important to make sure the design of your profiles matches the properties of the materials you’re using. You can't give molded, cast, or flowable materials—like plaster or cement—the same profiles as stone. These materials are better suited for fine, slightly raised moldings. Similarly, when designing profiles for wooden structures, you need to keep in mind the resilient and flexible nature of wood, and avoid overly large surfaces. Remember that wood allows for delicate craftsmanship; it’s typically used in thinner pieces, and to work it properly, you need to use sharp tools like chisels and planes, which follow the grain and are challenging to work against it. In all of this, practicality goes hand in hand with common sense and a good aesthetic; if you choose a profile that doesn’t match the material, you’ll end up needing difficult and, therefore, costly techniques, making your work seem awkward and forced. Some architects think they can impress by using processes that clash with the materials; for instance, if they're working with brick, they might try to make their building look like it’s made of stone, or they mimic marble in wood, or wood in plaster, effectively trying to give each material inappropriate forms. Pay attention to these undesirable methods so you can always avoid them if you want to be a good architect. Unfortunately, the misguided taste of most clients can hinder sensible methods; and among us, classical studies have often led artists down this wrong path, causing the public to fall in love with the unattractive outcomes it produces. This makes it tough to convince clients to listen to reason and to appreciate the proper use of materials. Regardless, this is one issue that an architect who respects their craft should never compromise on."

“It is, in fact,” said M. de Gandelau, “a strange mania possessing some people who have building done for them, to presume to impose the most ridiculous fancies on their architects; but it is not of modern date, since Philibert de l’Orme used to complain of it even in his time.”

“It really is,” said M. de Gandelau, “a weird obsession that some people have when they get buildings made for them, thinking they can impose the most ridiculous ideas on their architects; but this isn’t a recent thing, since Philibert de l’Orme used to complain about it even back in his day.”

“Philibert de l’Orme,” remarked Paul, “was, I believe, the architect of the Tuileries.”

“Philibert de l’Orme,” Paul said, “was, I think, the architect of the Tuileries.”

“Yes, in part at least,” replied Eugène; “but you have his book, if I mistake not, in your library.”

“Yes, at least in part,” replied Eugène; “but you have his book, if I'm not mistaken, in your library.”

“Certainly; and I will go and find it for you.” M. de Gandelau soon returned to the drawing-room carrying the venerable folio.

“Sure; I'll go find it for you.” M. de Gandelau soon came back to the living room holding the old folio.

[Pg 179]

[Pg 179]

“Here,” said he to his son, “I give it to you, and you will do well to study these pages. Look at the title of the Preface. ‘Noteworthy considerations for those who lightly undertake to build without the advice and counsel of learned architects; and concerning the faults they commit and the inconveniences that arise from them!’ This will make a commencement of your library as an architect if you are going to choose that vocation; and you could not have before you a book better adapted to inspire correct sentiments and respect for that profession. I cannot give any opinion of its technical merits, which I cannot appreciate; but through reading a few of these pages I have at least spared myself the expensive ambition, by which some owners of property are possessed, of being my own architect.”

“Here,” he said to his son, “I’m giving this to you, and you should definitely study these pages. Check out the title of the Preface: ‘Important considerations for those who casually take on building without the advice and guidance of knowledgeable architects; and about the mistakes they make and the problems that come from them!’ This will kick off your library as an architect if you decide to go that route; and you couldn’t find a book better suited to inspire the right mindset and respect for that field. I can’t comment on its technical merits, which I don’t fully understand; but after reading a few pages, I’ve at least avoided the costly ambition that some property owners have of being their own architect.”

“The sincerity of Philibert de l’Orme was not profitable to him,” rejoined Eugène.

“The sincerity of Philibert de l’Orme didn't do him any good,” replied Eugène.

“Perhaps not; but he has left us a book which makes us esteem him as a man, independently of his merits as an architect, three hundred years after its publication, since it dates from 1576; this distinction was acquired at the cost of some annoyance during his life, for we do not feel gratitude to people for telling us the truth when they are no longer here to reap the reward of their sincerity from public opinion.”

“Maybe not; but he left us a book that makes us respect him as a person, regardless of his achievements as an architect, three hundred years after it was published, since it’s from 1576. This distinction came at the cost of some frustration during his life, because we don’t usually feel thankful to people for telling us the truth when they aren’t around to benefit from the appreciation of their honesty by society.”

“Hem! ... then we must not be surprised if few people dare to proclaim these truths, and if architects—since they are on the tapis—prefer to this posthumous glory that quiet and comfort which complaisance towards their clients during their life procures for them, though this may occasion regret to the latter when the evil cannot be remedied, or may involve them in useless expense.”

“Uh... then we shouldn’t be shocked if only a few people dare to speak these truths, and if architects—since they're in the spotlight—would rather have this posthumous fame than the peace and comfort that being compliant with their clients during their lifetime brings them, even if it leads to regret for the clients when the damage can't be fixed, or might cause them unnecessary expenses.”

“Come, come,” said M. de Gandelau, “you are not one of the complying architects to whom you refer, and yet you have still a very fair practice. I do not know whether you[Pg 180] will be talked of three centuries hence, but I know that you are esteemed now.”

“Come on,” said M. de Gandelau, “you’re not one of those architects who just go along with everything you mentioned, and yet you still have a good practice. I don’t know if people will be talking about you three centuries from now, but I do know that you’re respected today.”

“The sentiment you have just uttered is therefore not absolutely true.”

“The feeling you just expressed is not completely true.”

“No, certainly; discretion tells for much in this matter, and there is a way of uttering truths. You must, however, allow that you have lost more than one engagement through having been too outspoken at the commencement.”

“No, of course; being discreet is really important in this situation, and there’s a right way to express the truth. However, you have to admit that you’ve missed out on more than one opportunity by being too blunt at the start.”

“Doubtless; I have even good reason to suppose that if I had not been aided by certain favourable circumstances which brought me into connection with clients accustomed to deal with affairs of a high and liberal order—with men of minds too elevated and serious to occupy themselves with the details of our profession—I should not have found much to do. From a general point of view you are right; most persons about to build fear to apply to architects who are skilful in their profession, but who are of an independent character. What they look for (and in this, women often exercise an injurious influence) are complaisant mediocrities, who will lend themselves to all their fancies, of which they will have the satisfaction of repenting soon afterwards.”

“Certainly; I have good reason to believe that if I hadn’t been helped by certain favorable circumstances that connected me with clients familiar with high-quality and generous projects—people with minds too advanced and serious to focus on the nitty-gritty of our field—I wouldn’t have found much work. From a general perspective, you’re correct; most people looking to build hesitate to approach architects who are skilled in their craft but have an independent nature. What they seek (and this is where women often have a negative impact) are agreeable mediocrities, who will go along with all their whims, only for them to regret it soon after.”

“You attack us unjustly,” replied Madame de Gandelau; “women do not presume to be connoisseurs in architecture, and they ask for nothing but a good arrangement of the interior of a house; which is natural enough, since they have the direction of domestic affairs, and they, more than any others, suffer from the inconvenient or faulty arrangements of their dwellings.”

“You unfairly criticize us,” replied Madame de Gandelau; “women don’t claim to be experts in architecture, and they only ask for a well-arranged interior in a house; which makes sense, since they are in charge of home affairs, and they, more than anyone else, are affected by the awkward or flawed layouts of their homes.”

“I grant it; but while, on the one hand, the mistress asks for arrangements often of a complicated kind, and requiring a peculiar disposition of apartments to suit her convenience, and the master on the other hand wishes for an exterior presenting a peculiar style or aspect with which[Pg 181] he is smitten, it is difficult, if not impossible, to reconcile these two requirements, which are often contradictory; so that the unfortunate architect, desiring to please everybody, and to grant mutually exclusive wishes, can achieve no good result, and when the work is finished each party blames him. How many times have I been called in to remedy blunders,—bad work resulting from the architect’s having been thus worried, and from his fatal complaisance. And these people would tell me that they were desolés not to have selected me to direct the undertaking. It was a little too late, yet the example did not benefit others.”

“I get that; but while, on one hand, the lady often requests arrangements that are complicated and require a specific layout of rooms to fit her needs, and on the other hand, the gentleman desires an exterior that showcases a particular style or appearance that he is enamored with, it's tough, if not impossible, to reconcile these two needs, which often conflict with each other. As a result, the poor architect, trying to satisfy everyone and fulfill mutually exclusive desires, ends up with no good outcome, and when the project is done, each side blames him. How many times have I been called in to fix mistakes—poor work that came from the architect being pressured and his unfortunate eagerness to please. And these people would tell me they were desolés for not choosing me to oversee the project. It was a bit too late for that, yet the example didn't help anyone else.”

“What can be done?” rejoined Madame de Gandelau. “If things are as you say, you are offering Paul a profession whose duties involve impossibilities; and unless he obtains employment from the government....”

“What can be done?” replied Madame de Gandelau. “If things are as you say, you’re offering Paul a job that has impossible duties; and unless he gets a government position...”

“Oh! that is too uncertain a chance, and a career that depends on the government scarcely deserves the name. A man ought to be able to get on without reckoning on this very precarious support. Besides, the elect are very few.”

“Oh! that is too uncertain a chance, and a career that relies on the government hardly deserves the name. A person should be able to succeed without counting on this very shaky support. Plus, the chosen ones are very few.”

“Well then?”

"What's up?"

“Why then we must teach; we must endeavour to make knowledge, reason, and the habit of reflection, penetrate everywhere, and especially into the minds of the rising generation. When the influential classes,—those who employ builders, and who, it may be inferred, are favoured by fortune,—know a little more than they do now, they will perceive that they have everything to learn in all branches of practical knowledge, and that the best they can do is to have recourse to professional men in the treatment of strictly professional matters, and to leave them free scope. In the case of an operation, nobody has the presumption to advise the surgeon how it should be performed. Why then should everybody make bold to give his opinion to[Pg 182] an architect respecting the method in which his work is to be accomplished?”

“Why then we must teach; we must strive to spread knowledge, reasoning, and the habit of reflection everywhere, especially among the younger generation. When the influential classes—those who hire builders and are likely favored by fortune—know a bit more than they do now, they will realize they have a lot to learn in all areas of practical knowledge. The best thing they can do is turn to professionals for strictly professional matters and allow them the freedom to work. In the case of a surgery, no one assumes they can advise the surgeon on how it should be done. So why does everyone feel they can give their opinion to an architect about how their work should be carried out?”

“The cases are not exactly alike.”

“The cases aren’t exactly the same.”

“Nearly; but as the former is a matter of life and death, not a word is breathed in the presence of the surgeon; while, since the latter involves only the pocket,—sometimes the health indeed, but only eventually,—each has a suggestion to make to the architect.”

“Almost; but since the first is a matter of life and death, no one says a word in front of the surgeon; whereas the second only concerns finances—sometimes health too, but only in the long run—everyone feels free to offer suggestions to the architect.”

“We have wandered rather far from mouldings,” said M. de Gandelau, rising.

“We have strayed quite a bit from the subject,” said M. de Gandelau, getting up.


[Pg 183]

[Pg 183]

CHAPTER XX.
STUDIES INTERRUPTED.

A few days after this conversation a considerable number of troops traversed the country. The Germans were manœuvring on both sides of the Loire, and were threatening Tours. A general officer was quartered at M. de Gandelau’s who was acquainted with Eugène. The latter was impatient at the inactivity to which he had been condemned since the war had begun to take so fatal a turn.

A few days after this conversation, a large number of troops moved through the country. The Germans were maneuvering on both sides of the Loire and were threatening Tours. A general officer was staying at M. de Gandelau’s who was familiar with Eugène. Eugène was frustrated with the inactivity he had been stuck in since the war started to take such a deadly turn.

In the evening he had a long conversation with this officer, and next morning announced to M. de Gandelau that he was intending to set out with the corps which was traversing the country; observing that officers of the Engineers were wanting, and that he could at need fulfil their functions; that his friend, the general, very much approved his determination; and that in circumstances of such gravity he thought it his duty not to hesitate to go, as he might possibly be of some service. M. de Gandelau did not attempt to keep him; he understood too well the sentiments by which his guest was influenced.

In the evening, he had a long conversation with the officer, and the next morning, he told M. de Gandelau that he planned to set out with the group that was traveling through the area. He mentioned that there was a need for Engineers and that he could step in if necessary. He added that his friend, the general, fully supported his decision, and in such serious circumstances, he felt it was his duty to go, as he might be able to help. M. de Gandelau did not try to stop him; he understood too well the feelings motivating his guest.

“What shall we do with Paul?” said he to Eugène.

“What should we do with Paul?” he asked Eugène.

“I believe you have Vitruvius in the original in your library?”

“I think you have the original Vitruvius in your library?”

“Yes.”

“Yep.”

“Well, if you will let me have it for an hour before I go, I shall be able to explain to Paul how he should[Pg 184] set to work with this treatise: that will prevent him from forgetting his Latin, and further him in the studies we have commenced.”

“Well, if you let me have it for an hour before I leave, I can explain to Paul how he should get started with this paper: that will help him remember his Latin and support him in the studies we've started.”

“An excellent idea.”

“Great idea.”

“You will require Paul to give you, twice a week, the translation of a chapter, with explanatory drawings: that will keep his hand in and occupy his mind. I do not suppose his translation will supersede even Perrault’s; but that does not matter, he will not be losing his time absolutely. As soon as I can return you shall see me again.”

“You should have Paul give you the translation of a chapter, along with some explanatory drawings, twice a week: that will keep him engaged and occupied. I doubt his translation will surpass even Perrault's; but that's not important, he won't be wasting his time completely. As soon as I can come back, you'll see me again.”

Paul was disconsolate at his cousin’s departure, and at not being able to accompany him; he would have greatly liked to follow up his studies in the art of building by a course of military engineering in the field, but this would have embarrassed his cousin, and Madame de Gandelau would scarcely have survived her anxiety. Paul was furnished with the edition of Vitruvius, and the work to which he was to devote himself was explained to him.

Paul was heartbroken about his cousin leaving and the fact that he couldn’t go with him. He really wanted to continue his studies in architecture by taking a course in military engineering in the field, but that would have made things awkward for his cousin, and Madame de Gandelau probably wouldn’t have handled the stress well. Paul had a copy of Vitruvius, and he was given an explanation of the work he was supposed to focus on.

Two hours after, Eugène, provided with a small portmanteau, was on his way with his friend, the general; whose corps was en route for Chateauroux. Promises to write as often as possible had been given on both sides.

Two hours later, Eugène, with a small suitcase, was on his way with his friend, the general, whose unit was on the way to Chateauroux. They had both promised to write as often as they could.

We can easily imagine the gloomy aspect which M. de Gandelau’s house assumed after this hasty departure. At the very beginning of the war he had equipped and despatched all his able-bodied dependants. There remained only two or three old men-servants, and some female domestics whose husbands or children were for the most part in the army. Monsieur and Madame de Gandelau ceased to use the drawing-room, in which beds had been placed for the wounded in case any should come. The family used to assemble in Madame de Gandelau’s room, and took their meals in a small apartment that usually served for a pantry.

We can easily picture how gloomy M. de Gandelau’s house looked after this sudden departure. At the very start of the war, he had sent all his capable dependents off to serve. Only two or three old male servants and some female staff remained, whose husbands or children were mostly in the army. Monsieur and Madame de Gandelau stopped using the drawing-room, which had been set up with beds for any wounded soldiers who might arrive. The family gathered in Madame de Gandelau’s room and had their meals in a small space that normally functioned as a pantry.

[Pg 185]

[Pg 185]

Paul, when his cousin was gone, went to pay a visit to the works. They were deserted; snow covered the heap of walling stones, the cut stones, and the scattered timbers. The walls, which had reached a certain height, protected by straw and surmounted by a crest of snow—their surfaces showing brown in contrast with the white veil that mantled them—and some pieces of wood black with damp, gave to these incipient constructions the aspect of the débris of a conflagration.

Paul, after his cousin left, went to check on the construction site. It was empty; snow blanketed the piles of stones, the cut stones, and the scattered pieces of wood. The walls, which had been built up to a certain point, were protected by straw and topped with a layer of snow—their surfaces showing brown against the white covering—and some damp, dark wood made these early structures look like the remnants of a fire.

Although at Paul’s age young people are not very accessible to sombre thoughts, the poor boy could not restrain his tears in presence of this scene of desolation. He recalled in thought this spot so animated a month before with its bands of active workmen. All were gone, and the soul of this habitation, which he had begun to associate with all the joys of family life, had just quitted him.

Although young people at Paul’s age don’t usually dwell on serious thoughts, the poor boy couldn’t hold back his tears in front of this scene of ruin. He remembered how lively this place had been just a month before with groups of busy workers. Now, they were all gone, and the spirit of this home, which he had started to connect with all the joys of family life, had just left him.

In spite of the cold he seated himself on a stone, his head in his hands, overwhelmed with gloomy thoughts. This was the first deep grief, the first severe disappointment, he had experienced: it seemed to him that all was over, and that there was no more hope nor happiness possible for him in this world.

Despite the cold, he sat down on a stone, his head in his hands, consumed by dark thoughts. This was the first real sadness, the first major letdown, he had faced: it felt to him like everything was finished, and that there was no more hope or happiness left for him in this world.

A hand laid upon his shoulder made him start; he raised his head—his father was behind him. Paul threw himself into his arms at once, sobbing.

A hand on his shoulder startled him; he looked up—his dad was behind him. Paul threw himself into his arms immediately, crying.

“Come, Paul, my boy, calm yourself,” said M. de Gandelau to him. “We are living in a time of trials; who knows what are reserved for us? For us, indeed, they have scarcely begun. Think how much suffering there is in France now! What are our anxieties and griefs compared with the anguish suffered by others! Reserve your tears; perhaps you will have only too frequent occasion for them. We need not be in a hurry to despond. I observed you going in this direction, and followed you,[Pg 186] anticipating your melancholy feelings. But, after all, what is there to grieve over? Nothing, or only a trifle. Set to work again courageously, alone, since our friend has been obliged to quit us to fulfil a sacred duty. He will return; you have learned to love and esteem him more: prove to him that you are worthy of the affection he has exhibited to you by showing him some thoroughly good work when he comes back.

“Come on, Paul, relax,” said M. de Gandelau to him. “We’re going through a tough time; who knows what’s ahead of us? For us, it’s barely started. Just think about all the suffering in France right now! What are our worries and pains compared to what others are going through? Save your tears; you might have plenty of reasons to cry later. There’s no need to rush into despair. I saw you heading this way, so I followed, anticipating your gloomy mood. But really, what is there to be upset about? Nothing, or just a little. Get back to work with renewed courage, alone, since our friend has had to leave us to fulfill an important duty. He will return; you’ve come to love and respect him even more: show him that you deserve the affection he has shown you by presenting him with some genuinely good work when he comes back.

“Certainly he would be touched by your grief, of which his absence is to a great extent the cause; be assured that he would be still more touched to see that you had scrupulously followed his last instructions, and that his presence is not the only inducement to make you like work.”

“Of course, he would be affected by your sadness, which is largely due to his absence; rest assured that he would be even more moved to see that you have carefully followed his last instructions and that his presence isn't the only reason for you to enjoy the work.”

Father and son regained the house. The counsels of M. de Gandelau, and the pains he took to give Paul a glimpse of brighter days, had by degrees restored to him, if not gaiety, at least tranquillity of mind and the desire to do his best. M. de Gandelau most dreaded for his son a feeling of despondency—that vague and sterile sadness on which youth sometimes loves to feed, and which enervates the most gifted minds.

Father and son got the house back. M. de Gandelau’s advice and the effort he made to show Paul a glimpse of better days gradually restored to him, if not happiness, at least peace of mind and the motivation to do his best. M. de Gandelau feared for his son a sense of despair—that vague and unproductive sadness that youth sometimes clings to, which weakens even the most talented minds.

He therefore entered Paul’s room, and taking up Vitruvius, which had been left on the table, began to look through it. M. de Gandelau was a good scholar, though he never made a parade of his acquirements. They were a possession he reserved for himself. Familiar with the classics, he could read the text of Vitruvius, if not explain it architecturally in all its parts. “Stay,” said he to Paul, “here is a chapter which must be interesting, and which may teach you many things; it is Chapter VIII.: De generibus structuræ et earum qualitatibus, modis ac locis. How would you translate this title?”

He walked into Paul’s room, picked up Vitruvius, which was left on the table, and started flipping through it. M. de Gandelau was knowledgeable, but he never flaunted his expertise. It was something he kept to himself. Well-versed in the classics, he could read Vitruvius's text, even if he couldn't explain it architecturally in detail. “Wait,” he said to Paul, “here’s a chapter that should be interesting and could teach you a lot; it’s Chapter VIII: De generibus structuræ et earum qualitatibus, modis ac locis. How would you translate this title?”

Of the kinds of constructions, and their qualities, according to customs and localities,” replied Paul.

Of the kinds of constructions, and their qualities, according to customs and localities,” Paul replied.

[Pg 187]

[Pg 187]

“Yes, that is the translation. But on looking through this chapter, I see that masonry only is considered; the author, in making use of the word structura, seems to me to have wished only to treat of constructions of brick or stone. It would be better, doubtless, to render the passage thus: Of the different kinds of masonry, and the properties of this structure according to local usages and circumstances.

“Yes, that is the translation. But looking through this chapter, I see that only masonry is considered; the author, by using the word structura, seems to have intended to address constructions of brick or stone only. It would be better, of course, to render the passage like this: Of the different kinds of masonry, and the properties of this structure according to local usages and circumstances.

“Well, set to work to translate this eighth chapter. I see that the author has described the kinds of masonry whose use he recommends on such or such occasions. You will therefore have to illustrate your translation by sketches. Come! take courage, and imagine your cousin at hand ready to rectify your mistakes.”

"Alright, let’s get started on translating this eighth chapter. I notice that the author has detailed the types of masonry he suggests for different situations. So, you’ll need to include sketches to support your translation. Come on! Be brave, and picture your cousin nearby, ready to help fix any errors.”

Paul therefore set himself to work, endeavouring to embody in sketches each of Vitruvius’s descriptions. This gave him no little trouble, of course; many words were new to him, and the dictionary helped him only very imperfectly when it was necessary to know their exact sense. Nevertheless, by degrees the work acquired a charm for him. To further his comprehension of the author he tried to recall to mind buildings he had seen; he remembered some instructions given by Eugène; and put on paper, to the best of his ability, opposite the translation, sketches tolerably drawn, if they were not the true expression of the descriptions in the original.

Paul set to work, trying to capture in sketches each of Vitruvius’s descriptions. This was no small task for him; many of the words were unfamiliar, and the dictionary was only somewhat helpful when he needed to understand their exact meaning. However, over time, he began to enjoy the work. To better understand the text, he tried to recall buildings he had seen; he remembered some advice from Eugène; and he put down, as best as he could, sketches alongside the translations, which were reasonably drawn, even if they didn’t perfectly reflect the original descriptions.

Thus, during the end of the month of December and the commencement of January, he succeeded in translating a dozen chapters which his father selected for him, giving illustrations of the text. This gave him a great desire to become acquainted with the buildings existing in his author’s times, and he examined attentively a set of engravings by Piranesi descriptive of ancient Rome, and which his father possessed. M. de Gandelau had advised Paul to write down the questions which his reading suggested to him, so as to submit them to Eugène on his return.[Pg 188] Thus the days passed rapidly away: and although sadness and anxiety darkened every hour, yet, as M. de Gandelau was incessantly occupied in relieving the misery around him and organizing the struggle against the invaders, while Paul was working with energy and seeing his results accumulating, and Madame de Gandelau had organized a workroom in which the women of the village were engaged in providing linen for our unfortunate and destitute soldiers, when the evening arrived, the members of the family could still assemble with that feeling of secret joy which duty accomplished procures. Towards the close of January the inmates of the château learned from the newspapers that an armistice had been signed. Though this news announced the end of the struggle, it presaged the commencement of the severest humiliations. It produced, therefore, a sad, rather than consolatory impression.

So, at the end of December and the beginning of January, he managed to translate a dozen chapters selected by his father, providing illustrations for the text. This sparked a strong desire in him to learn about the buildings that existed during his author's time, and he carefully examined a collection of engravings by Piranesi depicting ancient Rome, which his father owned. M. de Gandelau had suggested that Paul write down the questions that came to mind while he read, so he could discuss them with Eugène when he returned.[Pg 188] Days flew by quickly: although sadness and anxiety loomed over every hour, M. de Gandelau was constantly busy helping those in need and organizing the fight against the invaders. Paul was diligently working and seeing his efforts pay off, and Madame de Gandelau had set up a workspace where the village women were making linen for our unfortunate and destitute soldiers. When evening came, the family members could still gather with a sense of quiet joy that came from fulfilling their duties. Towards the end of January, the residents of the château learned from the newspapers that an armistice had been signed. While this news signaled the end of the fighting, it also marked the beginning of severe humiliations. As a result, it left a sad rather than comforting impression.

A few days afterwards Eugène returned to the château. It need not be said that he was welcomed with open arms, and that Paul especially manifested his joy. They talked of resuming the works. The last letters of Madame Marie announced that she would be home again towards the end of the following winter. These letters, filled as they were with expressions of the anxiety—the anguish—felt by the writer in her absence from France, said nothing of the future house. If then it could be finished, the surprise would be complete. While Eugène was enjoying the rest he so much needed, he looked through and revised Paul’s translation, and corrected his sketches. A fair copy was made of the whole; and the first days of March drew on, when it was decided to recommence the works.

A few days later, Eugène returned to the château. It goes without saying that he was welcomed warmly, and Paul especially showed his excitement. They discussed starting the construction work again. The last letters from Madame Marie mentioned that she would be back by the end of the next winter. These letters, filled with expressions of the anxiety and distress the writer felt during her time away from France, didn’t say anything about the future house. If it could be finished by then, it would be a complete surprise. While Eugène was enjoying the much-needed rest, he reviewed and revised Paul’s translation and corrected his sketches. A final copy of everything was created, and as the first days of March approached, they decided to begin the construction work again.


[Pg 189]

[Pg 189]

CHAPTER XXI.
BUILDING RECOMMENCED—THE TIMBER WORK.

Towards the middle of March, the weather being fine, the works were resumed, and instructions for executing the floors and roofs had to be given to the carpenter, that no time might be lost. Paul was beginning to understand his cousin’s sketches more readily, and to be able to make himself useful. Besides, he had acquired the excellent habit of asking for explanations when he had reason to suppose on a first view that he could not faithfully interpret a rough sketch; and Eugène was not sparing of explanation and commentaries. His patience was inexhaustible. Nevertheless, every time Paul was embarrassed and was unable to solve a difficult question, before putting him in the way to do so, Eugène used to let him try for a reasonable time.

Towards the middle of March, with the weather being nice, work resumed, and the carpenter needed clear instructions for building the floors and roofs so that no time would be wasted. Paul was starting to grasp his cousin’s sketches more easily and could contribute effectively. Additionally, he had developed the great habit of asking for explanations when he felt he couldn’t accurately interpret a rough sketch at first glance, and Eugène was always generous with his explanations and comments. His patience was endless. However, each time Paul felt stuck and couldn’t figure out a challenging problem, Eugène would let him try for a reasonable amount of time before guiding him toward a solution.

“Reflect,” he would say to him, “and you will be sure to find some solution. If it is not the right one, I will help you; but you must get some result for yourself. It is impossible to have a clear understanding of a solution given by a person who understands the matter, until we have thoroughly considered it, and made some efforts to solve the given problem ourselves. This is a necessary preliminary exercise, and one which puts the mind in a right state for comprehending. Draw a general section of the main building through the billiard-room and your brother-in-law’s study: I mean a transverse section which[Pg 190] will indicate the walls, the floors, the fireplaces, and roofs. You have nearly all the necessary elements. Endeavour to arrange the whole in proper order, that you may make all the parts of the building clear to yourself. I do not wish to see this section till you have finished it. Not till then shall I correct it; and that correction will be of advantage to you.”

“Think about it,” he would tell him, “and you’re sure to find some solution. If it’s not the right one, I’ll help you, but you need to come up with some result on your own. You can’t truly understand a solution provided by someone who knows the topic until you’ve really thought it through and made some effort to solve the problem yourself. This is a necessary exercise that prepares your mind to understand. Draw a general section of the main building through the billiard room and your brother-in-law’s study: I mean a cross-section that will show the walls, the floors, the fireplaces, and roofs. You have almost all the necessary elements. Try to organize everything properly so you can clearly understand all the parts of the building. I don’t want to see this section until you’ve finished it. Only then will I correct it, and that correction will be helpful to you.”

Making use, therefore, of the details already drawn, Paul drew the transverse section, not without difficulty; but the roof-timbers were singularly conceived,—their composition appeared to him difficult and complicated. He did not know how to close the wide opening between the billiard-room and the drawing-room. The dormer-windows of the roof embarrassed him considerably. Besides, he had much difficulty in realizing the junction of all these parts. In spite of all his efforts he could not succeed in representing clearly their relative positions. He was not satisfied, and frankly told his cousin so.

Using the details he had already gathered, Paul sketched the cross-section, though it was quite challenging. The roof beams were uniquely designed—he found their structure difficult and intricate. He didn’t know how to fill in the large gap between the billiard room and the drawing room. The dormer windows on the roof confused him significantly. Additionally, he struggled to visualize how all these components connected. Despite his efforts, he couldn’t clearly show their relative positions. He was unhappy with the results and openly told his cousin.

“I am very glad,” replied the latter, “that you are not satisfied. It would be a bad sign if you were, for it would prove that you had not made any great effort. Your walls are fairly in their right place according to the section we have taken. But the timbers, the dormer-windows!—this could not hold together, and is wanting in simplicity. Why so many pieces of wood?... Have you assured yourself of their utility? We have walls; let us make use of them. Why not make use of the wall which separates the billiard-room from the study to bear the roofing timbers in part?—especially as this wall receives chimney flues, which must surely be carried up through the roof. You did not remember the chimneys; that is thoughtlessness, for you see them marked in the plans of the ground floor and of the first and second floors.”

“I’m really glad,” the other replied, “that you’re not satisfied. That would be a bad sign if you were, because it would mean you didn’t put in much effort. Your walls are mostly in the right place according to the section we’ve taken. But the timbers and the dormer windows!—this won’t hold together and lacks simplicity. Why so many pieces of wood?... Have you considered their usefulness? We have walls; let’s make use of them. Why not use the wall that separates the billiard room from the study to support some of the roofing timbers?—especially since this wall needs to accommodate chimney flues, which definitely need to go through the roof. You didn’t account for the chimneys; that’s careless, as you can see them marked in the plans for the ground floor and the first and second floors.”

“I certainly thought of them,” replied Paul; “but I did not know how to carry them up through the roof.”

“I definitely thought about them,” Paul replied, “but I had no idea how to get them up through the roof.”

[Pg 191]

[Pg 191]

“And so you did not draw them; that is certainly a way of avoiding the difficulty; but yet you know they must go up through the roof. That I cannot approve of; putting aside a question is not solving it. Come, let us revise all this together.”

“And so you didn’t draw them; that’s definitely one way to avoid the issue; but you know they have to go up through the roof. I can’t agree with that; ignoring a problem doesn’t solve it. Come on, let’s go over all of this together.”

Fig. 46.Transverse Section of the House.

Fig. 46.House Cross Section.

The section was soon corrected (Fig. 46), and Eugène did not fail to furnish it in detail, according to the uses of[Pg 192] the apartments through which the section was drawn; which pleased Paul greatly, as he could thus realize the billiard-room completed, with its opening into the drawing-room, his brother-in-law’s study, with its doors; then above, his bedroom, dressing-room, and the two attic rooms. This drawing appeared to him charming; he could fancy himself already entering the apartments and enjoying his sister’s surprise on examining these interiors. He was wanting to show all these pretty things to Madame de Gandelau directly, but Eugène persuaded him to have a little patience.

The section was soon updated (Fig. 46), and Eugène made sure to provide all the details, based on the layout of[Pg 192] the rooms represented in the section. This thrilled Paul because he could now visualize the finished billiard room, with its connection to the drawing-room, his brother-in-law’s study with its doors, and above that, his bedroom, dressing room, and the two attic rooms. He found this drawing beautiful; he could already imagine walking into the rooms and seeing his sister's surprise as she looked around these spaces. He was eager to show off all these lovely details to Madame de Gandelau right away, but Eugène convinced him to wait a bit.

“All this,” he said, “is a mere trifle indeed—nothing but fancy; we shall have to furnish the details of the woodwork and internal arrangements, and when we come to study them we shall find much to revise. Leave off looking at these interiors for a few minutes, and let us examine the timber-work of the roof. Let us draw it in plan.” (Fig. 47).

“All this,” he said, “is really just a minor detail—nothing but imagination; we’ll need to work out the specifics of the woodwork and the interior setup, and when we take a closer look, we’ll find a lot to change. Let’s stop focusing on these interiors for a moment and check out the timber framing of the roof. Let’s sketch it out in a plan.” (Fig. 47).

Fig. 47.

Fig. 47.

“The walls A B are the gables which are to support the purlins. We have at C D two cross-walls, which also form[Pg 193] gables, and will also receive the purlins. But the spaces E C are too wide for purlins from E to C. They measure 22 feet between; now the purlins must not have a bearing of more than 13 feet if we would avoid their bending. Intermediate principals are therefore necessary at G H, against the sides of the middle dormers I. The purlins from A to G will not then exceed 13 feet in length, and we shall be able to strengthen them by means of struts from the end gables. From K to L there will be valley-rafters at the penetration of the roofs. Let us first consider the principals G H (Fig. 48).

“The walls A B are the gables that will support the purlins. We have two cross-walls at C D, which also act as gables and will receive the purlins. However, the spaces E C are too wide for purlins between E and C. They measure 22 feet apart, and the purlins should not span more than 13 feet to avoid bending. Therefore, intermediate principals are necessary at G H, next to the sides of the middle dormers I. The purlins from A to G will not exceed 13 feet in length, and we can reinforce them with struts from the end gables. From K to L, there will be valley-rafters where the roofs meet. Let’s first look at the principals G H (Fig. 48).

Fig. 48.

Fig. 48.

“The height between the floors of the story in the roof should be 10 feet. We will put two main supports A, fixed into foot-pieces connected by a tie-rod, which will pass under the floor; upon these supports a tie-beam B; then to secure the tie-beam to these supports, clip-braces C. On the ends of this tie-beam will rest the purlins D. The blades E will fasten into this tie-beam and into the king-post F. Beneath the second purlins H, it will be necessary to put clips G, forming a collar-beam. The ridge-pole I will be carried by the king-post, with diagonal struts. The other ends of the purlins will rest in the gables. Thus we shall be enabled to fix the rafters which will receive the battens and the slates. These timbers (tie-beams, collar-beams, and blades) may pass through the longitudinal wall K, containing the chimney flues, and in turn the roof-timbers will stay the wall, while the wall supports and stiffens the roof. As to the middle of the building, having the two walls C D, it will suffice to rest the ridge-pole L across, and relieve its bearing with two struts M, tenoned into the ends of a beam N, which will prevent their spreading. At the level of the latter we will place the beams a b (see Fig. 47), which will receive the ridge-poles O of the cross-roofs. These beams will also be relieved by struts R. On the ridge-poles O will come the[Pg 194] meeting of the valley-rafters S (shown in elevation at S). Thus the raftering will be everywhere well supported; and, relatively to the surface of the building, we shall use but a small quantity of timber, since we take every possible advantage of the support afforded us by the interior walls. The gables will enable us to avoid the necessity of hip-roofs, which are difficult to contrive and require a good deal of timber. There remains the roof of the staircase. In order that you may understand how to construct it, I [Pg 197]am going to draw it for you in perspective. This roof is supported by walls which rise above the cornice of the building, but it penetrates the main roof at X (see Fig. 47). If you examine the drawing (Fig. 39), you will observe that the walls of the staircase leave an angle without any vertical support over the entrance-hall. It will be necessary then to provide a bearing for the hip of the roof which comes over that space. To effect this, we will place on the two wall ends a small principal which shall receive the foot of the hip-rafter V, denoted in Fig. 47. This arrangement is apparent in the perspective drawing (Fig. 49), which gives the square tower of the principal stairs with its roof-framing. We will raise the oblong newel A of this stairs up to the level of the cornice. Upon the walls we will lay the wall-plates B; then from the three angles to the newel, the foot-pieces C. On the ends, halved together, of these foot-pieces we will erect the two king-posts P, and the three hip-rafters E. The feet of the two king-posts will be connected by the clips F. As to the back hip-rafter G, it will fix into the front of the king-post of the little principal, as I show you at ; and in order to hinder the principal from being thrust out by this hip-rafter, clips H will connect the head of the king-post of the little principal with the king-post D of the roof. On the angles of the hip-rafters at I, it will be necessary to fix some blocks to carry the ends K of the purlins, which will support the bearing of the rafters.

The height between the floors in the roof space should be 10 feet. We will install two main supports A, anchored into foot-pieces connected by a tie-rod that goes under the floor. On these supports, we’ll place a tie-beam B; to secure the tie-beam to these supports, we’ll add clip-braces C. The ends of this tie-beam will support the purlins D. The blades E will attach to this tie-beam and into the king-post F. We will need to add clips G beneath the second purlins H, forming a collar-beam. The ridge-pole I will be supported by the king-post, with diagonal struts. The other ends of the purlins will rest against the gables. This will allow us to fix the rafters that will hold the battens and slates. These timbers (tie-beams, collar-beams, and blades) may extend through the longitudinal wall K, which contains the chimney flues, and in turn, the roof-timbers will help stabilize the wall, while the wall supports and reinforces the roof. For the center of the building, with the two walls C D, it will be enough to place the ridge-pole L across and relieve its load with two struts M, tenoned into the ends of a beam N, which will prevent them from spreading. At this level, we will install the beams a b (see Fig. 47), which will support the ridge-poles O of the cross-roofs. These beams will also be supported by struts R. The ridge-poles O will support the meeting of the valley-rafters S (shown in elevation at S). Thus the raftering will be well supported everywhere; and in relation to the building’s surface, we will use only a small amount of timber, as we are maximizing the support provided by the interior walls. The gables will allow us to avoid the need for hip-roofs, which are complicated to design and require a lot of timber. Now, regarding the staircase roof. To help you understand how to build it, I’m going to draw it for you in perspective. This roof is supported by walls that extend above the building's cornice but penetrates the main roof at X (see Fig. 47). If you look at the drawing (Fig. 39), you’ll notice that the staircase walls leave an angle without any vertical support above the entrance hall. Therefore, we need to provide a support for the hip of the roof that covers that area. To do this, we will place a small principal on both wall ends to receive the foot of the hip-rafter V, as shown in Fig. 47. This configuration is visible in the perspective drawing (Fig. 49), which illustrates the square tower of the main stairs with its roof frame. We will elevate the long newel A of this staircase to the level of the cornice. We will lay the wall-plates B on the walls, then from the three angles to the newel, the foot-pieces C. On the halved ends of these foot-pieces, we will erect two king-posts P, and three hip-rafters E. The feet of the two king-posts will be connected by clips F. As for the back hip-rafter G, it will attach to the front of the king-post of the small principal, as I depict at G’; and to stop the principal from being pushed out by this hip-rafter, clips H will connect the head of the king-post of the small principal with the king-post D of the roof. At the angles of the hip-rafters at I, we will need to secure some blocks to support the ends K of the purlins, which will hold the weight of the rafters.

Fig. 49.

Fig. 49.

“At L you see the gable which has to join the roof of the staircase; and do not forget that stone filletings M must be built into the walls against which roofs abut, forming a weather-moulding above these roofs, to hinder the rain-water from getting in between the slating and the wall. Filletings are most commonly made with mortar or cement, on the roofing itself; but as that is subject to movement, these filletings break away and have to be[Pg 198] constantly renewed. Built into the masonry above the slope of the roofing, they cover the junction of the slate or tile with the walls, and, being independent of the roof, they cannot suffer from any giving in the timbers.

“At L you can see the gable that connects to the roof of the staircase; and remember that stone filletings M must be integrated into the walls where the roofs meet, creating a weather-moulding above these roofs to prevent rainwater from seeping in between the slates and the wall. Filletings are typically made with mortar or cement on the roofing itself; however, because that area is prone to movement, these filletings can break apart and need to be[Pg 198] regularly replaced. Built into the masonry above the roof slope, they cover the spot where the slate or tile meets the walls, and since they are separate from the roof structure, they won’t be affected by any shifting in the timbers.”

“You will draw the roofs to a scale of a quarter of an inch to a foot; I will correct your drawings, and we will give them to the carpenter, in order that he may prepare his timbers as soon as possible. We will figure the scantlings of these timbers. Thus, the blades on the principal rafters should be 8 inches × 7 inches, the collar-clips 3½ inches × 7 inches, the king-posts 7 inches × 7 inches, the tie-beam the same, the main supports 8 inches × 8 inches, the rafters 3 inches × 4 inches, the purlins 8 inches × 8 inches, without sap or flaws.”

"You will draw the roofs at a scale of a quarter inch to a foot; I’ll review your drawings, and we’ll give them to the carpenter so he can prepare the materials as quickly as possible. We’ll calculate the dimensions of these materials. The dimensions for the main rafters should be 8 inches by 7 inches, the collar-clips 3.5 inches by 7 inches, the king-posts 7 inches by 7 inches, the tie-beam the same, the main supports 8 inches by 8 inches, the rafters 3 inches by 4 inches, the purlins 8 inches by 8 inches, without sap or defects."

“What do you mean by flaws?”

“What do you mean by flaws?”

“Depressions; deficiencies of material apparent at the corners when timbers are squared which are rather crooked, and which thereby leave sap visible on these corners and even a hollow place, such as I mark here at A (Fig. 50). You will be careful not to allow flaws in timbers which the carpenter may employ for the roofs and joists.

“Depressions; visible material shortages at the corners when the timbers are squared, which are somewhat crooked, causing sap to show on these corners and even leaving a hollow spot, like the one I indicate here at A (Fig. 50). Be sure not to let any defects in the timbers that the carpenter may use for the roofs and joists.”

Fig. 50.

Fig. 50.

Fig. 51.

Fig. 51.

“In considering our floors, I see that for the billiard-room, the dining-room, and the drawing-room, we shall do well to have in each of these apartments two beams to take the joists, on account of the width of bearing, and the partitions which come over these floors. You remember that we deferred this question, and that in the detail (Fig. 42), and in the section (Fig. 46), we have supposed the existence[Pg 199] of these beams. The joists in these three rooms, instead of bearing from one side wall to the other, will bear from the gable walls on to the beams. But these beams, though cut from the best oak, invariably deflect sooner or later; which, to say the least, looks very bad. We will therefore make them each in two pieces, sawn through in the manner I showed you for lintels, and between the two pieces we will interpose a thin plate of iron. That will enable us to treat the beams like the wall bearers, and fit the joists into their sides, instead of laying them on the top, and consequently avoid a too great projection below the ceiling. Thus (Fig. 51), having two pieces of timber A, 12 inches × 6 inches, we will put between them a plate of iron ⅛th of an inch thick. We will bolt the whole together at regular intervals as marked at D, and, in the notches C, we will fix the ends of the joists E. A few iron straps will be nailed across to connect these ends one to another, and we shall obtain in this manner perfectly rigid floors. The beams will be supported in their bearings by corbels, and will not go more than six inches into the wall. This then is another detail to be got ready for the carpenter. Mind and see that the ends of the beams within the wall have a coat of red lead, and are enclosed in a box of sheet zinc, No. 14, to prevent the[Pg 200] moisture of the wall from penetrating the grain of the wood. Well! that is something done: draw it all out neatly. To-morrow, when I have looked over your drawings, we will send for Jean Godard, and we will go and select the wood in your father’s timber-yard.”

“In looking at our floors, I think for the billiard room, the dining room, and the drawing room, it would be a good idea to have two beams in each room to support the joists because of the width and the partitions above these floors. You remember we put off discussing this matter, and in the detail (Fig. 42), and in the section (Fig. 46), we have assumed that these beams exist[Pg 199]. The joists in these three rooms will not span from one side wall to the other but will rest from the gable walls onto the beams. However, these beams, even though made from the best oak, tend to sag eventually; which, at the very least, looks unattractive. So, we will construct each beam in two pieces, cut in the way I showed you for lintels, and place a thin iron plate between the two pieces. This will allow us to treat the beams like the wall supports and fit the joists into their sides, rather than laying them on top, which will help avoid too much of a projection below the ceiling. Thus (Fig. 51), having two pieces of timber A, 12 inches × 6 inches, we will place a ⅛th of an inch thick iron plate between them. We will bolt the whole assembly together at regular intervals as indicated at D, and in the notches C, we will secure the ends of the joists E. A few iron straps will be nailed across to connect these ends, giving us perfectly stable floors. The beams will be supported by corbels and will extend no more than six inches into the wall. This is another detail that needs to be prepared for the carpenter. Make sure the ends of the beams within the wall are coated with red lead and enclosed in a sheet zinc box, No. 14, to keep the wall moisture from penetrating the wood's grain. Well! That’s one thing down: draw it all out neatly. Tomorrow, after I review your drawings, we will call for Jean Godard and head out to choose the wood at your father’s timber yard.”

Next day Paul presented his drawings. Many corrections were, indeed, necessary, still on the whole his cousin congratulated him on the result. Paul was taking pains, and was endeavouring to understand everything thoroughly; and though he could not always find the simplest and most natural solutions, he showed at least that he had reflected before putting anything on paper.

Next day, Paul showed his drawings. Many corrections were definitely needed, but overall his cousin congratulated him on the outcome. Paul was putting in the effort and trying to grasp everything completely; and although he couldn't always find the simplest and most natural solutions, he at least demonstrated that he had thought things through before putting anything on paper.

Jean Godard having been summoned, the drawings were presented to him. Some explanations were given him, after which Eugène asked him if he had any observations to make. Jean Godard was scratching his head, but said nothing.

Jean Godard was called in, and the drawings were shown to him. He was given some explanations, after which Eugène asked if he had any comments to make. Jean Godard was scratching his head, but said nothing.

“Is there anything in all this that you do not clearly understand, or that seems faulty?” said Eugène to him.

“Is there anything in all of this that you don’t clearly understand, or that seems wrong?” Eugène asked him.

“No, sir; but yet these are floors that are out of the common way; it will be difficult—we are not accustomed—and you see—it isn’t what we generally do in carpentry.”

“No, sir; but these are floors that are unusual; it will be difficult—we're not used to this—and you see—it’s not what we typically do in carpentry.”

“Which means that you must be paid more than for floors made in your way.”

"Which means that you should be paid more than for floors made in your way."

“Yes, to be sure—you understand—there is labour to be considered—all these timbers here must be sawn—planed, perhaps.”

“Yes, for sure—you get it—there's work to think about—all these beams here need to be cut—smoothened, maybe.”

“Consider well, Jean. The joists must be sawn on two faces only—the two faces that are seen; but all joists are sawn out. If we asked you to supply the wood, you might say that you would not find joists of this kind; but in this case you have to select from our wood. If you use small timber it will be enough to saw two faces thus (Fig. 52): you may, if you like, leave the faces A roughly squared and only cleared of sap. If you cut your joists out of large[Pg 201] timber (Fig. 53) you will only have to run the saw-cuts as I have sketched here at B. But I prefer to use small timber, because it does not crook in drying, as timber which is quartered is sure to do; and I think we shall have enough of the former to prevent us from being obliged to employ this last method. We shall have, then, to pay you only for the sawing of the two faces, as for the joists you usually employ. As for the beams, they will be also sawn on two faces only, for if we cut them from a single trunk we shall put the two sawn faces outside (Fig. 54), and the plate of iron being interposed at D we shall put below a moulded board C, to cover the joining, and the flaws, should there be any. With regard to the triangular notchings to be made at E, they are less difficult to fashion than mortises, and as the joists bear in full they have no tenons. It is the same with the bearers which, along the walls, receive the ends of the joists, and take the place of cornices.—Well, what do you say about it?”

“Think carefully, Jean. The joists need to be cut on just two sides—the visible sides; but all joists are shaped. If we asked you to provide the wood, you might say you couldn’t find joists like this; but in this case, you need to choose from our wood. If you use small timber, it will be sufficient to cut two sides like this (Fig. 52): you can leave the sides A roughly squared and just cleaned of sap. If you cut your joists from large[Pg 201] timber (Fig. 53), you will only need to make the saw cuts as I’ve outlined here at B. But I prefer to use small timber because it doesn't warp when drying, which timber that is quartered tends to do; and I believe we will have enough of the former so we won't have to resort to this last method. Therefore, we will only need to pay you for cutting the two sides, just like for the joists you normally use. As for the beams, they will also be cut on two sides only, because if we cut them from a single log, we'll place the two cut sides on the outside (Fig. 54), and with the iron plate positioned at D, we will add a moulded board C underneath to cover the joint and any imperfections, if there are any. Regarding the triangular notches at E, they're easier to make than mortises, and since the joists bear fully, they don't have tenons. The same goes for the bearers along the walls that hold the ends of the joists, which act as cornices.—So, what do you think?”

Fig. 52. Fig. 53. Fig. 54.

“Why—still it isn’t flooring such as we see everywhere.”

“Why—it's still not flooring like we see everywhere.”

“What does that matter, if it gives you no more trouble to make? We shall take account of the time you spend, as we furnish the wood; consequently you are secured against loss. Make a careful estimate, and if you like we will make a bargain. We will pay you by the cubic foot as for ordinary flooring, or take account of the time[Pg 202] employed in working and pay you for that time. Make your choice!”

“What does it matter if it doesn’t take you any longer to make? We’ll keep track of the time you spend, since we’re providing the wood; so you're covered against any losses. Estimate it carefully, and if you want, we can negotiate a deal. We can either pay you by the cubic foot like regular flooring or calculate the time you spend working and pay you for that. It’s your choice!”

Jean Godard twirled his cap about some time, looked at the drawings in every possible way, scratched his right ear again, then his left, and after a good half-hour declared that he consented to be paid for floors of this kind at the same rate as for ordinary floors according to measurement.

Jean Godard played with his cap for a while, examined the drawings from every angle, scratched his right ear, then his left, and after a good thirty minutes, he announced that he agreed to be paid for these kinds of floors at the same rate as regular floors based on measurements.

“And you are right,” said Eugène; “for if you manage your work well, if there is no bungling, you will gain more by this bargain than if we paid you according to time, because there is less work in flooring of this kind for the same quantity of material than in those you are accustomed to make, especially in this neighbourhood.”

“And you’re right,” said Eugène; “because if you manage your work well, and there are no mistakes, you’ll benefit more from this deal than if we paid you by the hour. That’s because there’s less work involved in flooring like this for the same amount of material compared to what you usually make, especially around here.”

Jean Godard, however, asked for an additional consideration for the bearers that were to be substituted for the rough fixing in the walls.

Jean Godard, however, requested an extra consideration for the supports that were to replace the rough adjustments in the walls.

“Granted,” said Eugène; “we save plaster cornices, and it is right that we should make you an allowance on that account.”

“Okay,” said Eugène; “we save on plaster cornices, and it's fair that we should give you a discount for that.”

It was therefore resolved that they should make a separate payment for the labour on the bearers, that is, for their notches and chamfers.

It was decided that they would make a separate payment for the work on the bearers, specifically for their notches and chamfers.

Next day four pit-saws were at work, cutting up the timber that had been stored. The scene of labour had resumed all its activity. In the masonry department a design for a dormer-window remained to be furnished, but which was soon supplied (Fig. 55), and besides this the direction of the chimney flues.

Next day, four pit saws were hard at work, cutting up the stored timber. The work scene was buzzing with activity again. In the masonry department, a design for a dormer window was still needed, but that was quickly provided (Fig. 55), along with the plans for the chimney flues.

Eugène on giving Paul the particulars of the dormer-windows, section A and exterior elevation B, drew his attention to their construction. Raised on a gutter-wall 20 inches thick, they were to consist of two jambs of three courses each. On the first two courses would be left a string-course C, designed to cover the slate of the roofing and to form a filleting. These two jambs would carry[Pg 203] the lintel and two stones forming corbels. Two pieces on this lintel would receive the gable knees, and would form the jambs of the higher opening designed to ventilate the attics. The gable would consist of two courses surmounted by a finial. The section indicated how the slopes of the coping would form a filleting on the small roofs of these dormer-windows behind, and a drip in front, to hinder the rain-water from running down the faces of the stone-work.

Eugène, while explaining to Paul the details of the dormer windows, section A and exterior elevation B, highlighted their construction. Built on a gutter wall that is 20 inches thick, they will consist of two jambs, each with three courses. The first two courses will feature a string course C, designed to cover the slate of the roof and to create a fillet. These two jambs will support the lintel and two stones that form corbels. Two pieces on the lintel will receive the gable knees and will create the jambs for the higher opening intended to ventilate the attics. The gable will have two courses topped with a finial. The section showed how the slopes of the coping would create a fillet on the small roofs of these dormer windows in the back and a drip in front, preventing rainwater from running down the stonework.

Fig. 55.

Fig. 55.


[Pg 204]

[Pg 204]

CHAPTER XXII.
THE CHIMNEYS.

“Why do chimneys smoke?” asked Paul of his cousin.

“Why do chimneys smoke?” Paul asked his cousin.

“You mean rather to ask me,” replied the latter, “why some chimneys smoke. Many causes contribute to make chimneys smoke, while there is only one condition which must be observed if they are not to smoke. We must therefore do our utmost to fulfil that condition, viz. a flue proportioned to the fireplace, and the supply of a quantity of air to the latter proportioned to the combustion. If the flue is too narrow for the amount of smoke given off by the combustion, this smoke does not rise easily enough, its advance in ascending is checked by friction, and the discharge being insufficient for the production, the smoke comes out into the room. We can stimulate the combustion, and consequently the ascent of the smoke by a current of external air directed towards the wood or coal. When the fire is well lighted it warms the column of air that fills the chimney, and the warmer this column is the lighter the air is, and the more it tends to rise.

"You actually want to ask me," replied the latter, "why some chimneys smoke. There are many reasons why chimneys can smoke, but there is only one condition that must be met to prevent it. So we need to do everything we can to meet that condition, which is having a flue that matches the size of the fireplace and ensuring that there is enough air supply for combustion. If the flue is too narrow for the amount of smoke produced, the smoke won’t rise easily; friction slows its upward movement, and since the discharge is insufficient for the combustion taking place, the smoke ends up in the room. We can encourage combustion—and thus help the smoke rise—by directing a current of outside air toward the wood or coal. When the fire is well lit, it heats the column of air in the chimney, and the warmer this column gets, the lighter the air becomes, making it rise more effectively."

“That is why in some ill-built chimneys a certain time is required before the smoke will take its proper course—that is to say, the column of air must be warmed. And until it is so, the smoke passes not into the flue, but into the room; then we open a window to supply the fire with air, which brightens it up so as to warm the flue and allow the smoke to take its proper course. For the same reason[Pg 205] all new chimneys smoke. Flues carried up in masonry are damp and cold, and the air they contain is heavy; it takes some time to warm and lighten it.

“That’s why, in some poorly constructed chimneys, it takes a while for the smoke to follow the right path—basically, the column of air needs to be warmed up. Until that happens, the smoke doesn’t go into the flue, but fills the room instead; then we open a window to let the fire draw in air, which makes it burn brighter and heats up the flue, allowing the smoke to flow properly. For the same reason, all new chimneys tend to smoke. Flues made of masonry are damp and cold, and the air inside them is heavy; it takes some time to warm it up and make it lighter.[Pg 205]

“Instead of opening a window to stimulate the fire (which is a rather primitive method), we supply each grate with an air draught—that is, we give it a channel which conducts the external air to the combustible as soon as the least heat is developed, that, e.g. of a piece of paper lighted. Immediately this exterior air is called in to fill the vacuum produced by the commencement of combustion, and it stimulates the fire by bringing it oxygen. The livelier the fire the more rapid is the draught; and the more rapidly the air comes in, the more brightly does the wood or coal burn. The air-channel is to a grate what a pair of bellows are to a forge fire. But the air-channel, as well as the flue, must bear a due proportion to the fireplace. If the flue is too narrow, the smoke is obstructed, and comes out into the room; if it is too wide, it is not uniformly heated, and the external currents of air—the winds—exert a pressure at its upper extremity which neutralizes the effect of the draught, and the smoke is beaten down. If the air-channel is too small for the extent of the grate, it does not bring the quantity of air necessary for combustion; the fire languishes, it heats the flue imperfectly, and the lukewarm smoke does not ascend rapidly enough. If the air-channel is too large, or brings in too considerable a volume of air, the oxygen of which is not completely taken up, then a part of the cold air enters the flue and does not stimulate the draught; or, if there are changes in the temperature, the air-channel attracts the air from the chimney instead of bringing in air from the outside. The process is reversed, and the chimney smokes dreadfully.”

“Instead of opening a window to boost the fire (which is a pretty old-fashioned method), we equip each grate with an air draught—that is, we create a channel that brings in outside air to the fuel as soon as it generates the slightest bit of heat, like from a lit piece of paper. As soon as this outside air enters to fill the vacuum created by the start of combustion, it fuels the fire by providing oxygen. The hotter the fire, the stronger the draught; and the faster the air gets in, the brighter the wood or coal burns. The air channel is to a grate what bellows are to a forge fire. However, the air channel, along with the flue, must be appropriately sized for the fireplace. If the flue is too narrow, the smoke gets stuck and fills the room; if it’s too wide, it doesn’t heat evenly, and outside air currents—the winds—create pressure at the top that counteracts the draught, causing the smoke to be pushed back down. If the air channel is too small for the size of the grate, it won’t provide enough air for combustion; the fire weakens, the flue doesn't heat properly, and the lukewarm smoke fails to rise quickly. If the air channel is too large or brings in too much air, some of the cold air enters the flue without being fully utilized, which doesn’t help the draught; or, if there are temperature changes, the air channel can end up pulling air from the chimney instead of bringing in outside air. The process reverses, and the chimney fills with smoke.”

It was in the evening, after dinner, and when the family were seated around the hearth, that Eugène was propounding this theory. “That appears to me simple[Pg 206] enough,” said Madame de Gandelau; “but then why does the chimney in my room, which I have had altered several times, smoke on certain days?”

It was evening, after dinner, and while the family was gathered around the fireplace, Eugène was presenting this theory. “That seems simple enough to me,” said Madame de Gandelau; “but why does the chimney in my room, which I've had fixed several times, smoke on certain days?”

“Because your room, Madame, is situated in the new wing of the house, the roof of which is lower than that of the older part. They could not carry the flue high enough to rise above the ridges of the roof of the old building, for that isolated chimney would not have resisted the squalls. When the wind comes on your side it finds the obstacle presented by the loftier building, and rebounds: an eddy is formed, and whirling about on itself it becomes engulfed in your chimney-flue, or at least obstructs for a time the passage of the smoke. In such a case the flues should bifurcate; as the pressure of the wind is never exerted equally in both orifices, the air rushing into one makes the smoke issue violently through the other. I know of no other plan: I have already proposed it to you; but you have thought, not without reason, that these flues, which seem to raise two despairing arms towards heaven, would be very ugly; so you have resigned yourself to be smoked out of your room when a strong gust from the west is blowing.”

“Because your room, Madame, is located in the new wing of the house, the roof of which is lower than that of the older part. They couldn't raise the flue high enough to extend above the ridges of the old building's roof, as that isolated chimney wouldn’t withstand the strong winds. When the wind hits your side, it encounters the taller building as an obstacle and bounces back: an eddy is created, and swirling around, it gets sucked into your chimney-flue or at least temporarily blocks the smoke's exit. In such a situation, the flues should split; since the wind pressure isn’t equal in both openings, the air rushing into one causes the smoke to escape forcefully through the other. I know of no other solution: I've already suggested it to you; but you thought, not without good reason, that these flues, which appear to stretch two desperate arms towards the sky, would look quite ugly; so you've accepted being smoked out of your room whenever a strong gust comes from the west.”

“Yet the chimney-doctor put a sheet-iron pipe with a revolving cowl—what he calls, I think, a gueule de loup: he told me it would work admirably, but it was worse than before.”

"Yet the chimney guy installed a sheet-metal pipe with a rotating cap—what he calls, I think, a gueule de loup: he told me it would work perfectly, but it was even worse than before."

“Certainly; when there are eddies and whirlwinds in consequence of some obstacle, as here. This cowl turns in all directions, and among its rapid gyrations sometimes presents its mouth to the gust, if only for an instant. This mouth then performs the office of a funnel, and the air, rushing into the pipe, sends the smoke in puffs into the very middle of the room.”

“Absolutely; when there are swirls and gusts because of some blockage, like here. This hood moves all around, and during its fast spins, it sometimes faces the wind, even if just for a moment. That opening then acts like a funnel, and the air, rushing into the pipe, pushes the smoke in puffs right into the middle of the room.”

“Exactly so; you think, therefore, that those two ugly flues must be adopted?”

“Exactly; you think, then, that those two ugly flues have to be used?”

“Certainly. There are cities near to mountains, all of[Pg 207] whose houses, however lofty, are in the same condition. Geneva, for example, built between the Salève and the Jura, is commanded, though at a great distance, by these mountains. The violent winds which sometimes prevail on the lake are imprisoned between these two chains, form eddies, rush backwards and forwards, and send violent gusts in every direction; so that the Genevese are obliged to put these double flues on their chimneys, which at a distance present the aspect of a forest of old-fashioned telegraphs.”

“Of course. There are cities located near mountains, all of whose buildings, no matter how tall, are in the same state. Geneva, for instance, nestled between the Salève and the Jura mountains, is dominated by these peaks, even from far away. The strong winds that sometimes blow over the lake get trapped between these two ranges, creating swirling gusts that rush back and forth and unleash powerful blasts in every direction. Because of this, the people of Geneva have to install double flues on their chimneys, which from a distance look like a forest of outdated telegraph poles.”

“I hope, then, that you will build the chimneys in the new house in such a way that they will not smoke. You know that Marie would be much vexed if they should.”

“I hope you will build the chimneys in the new house so they don’t smoke. You know Marie would be really annoyed if they did.”

We will do our best; and the local conditions are favourable to begin with; we are not commanded by other elevations, we have not any eddies of wind to fear; along the plateau on which we are building the breezes are regular. Moreover, we have only straight high roofs, and all the flues rise above the ridges. We shall build these flues with brick, and make them of ample size. Nothing obliges us to give them very oblique directions; they rise vertically, or nearly so. Lastly, we shall have a system of air-flues, arranged from the very foundations, in a cool aspect; for that must be attended to, since if the air-flues are open to the south—for example—the air they receive from without, even during the winter, is warmer than that of the room where the fire is lighted; and then the air-flue draws the smoke which comes down into the room. At least the fire cannot be lighted; the wood is only charred, and does not burn.

We will do our best; and the local conditions are good to start with; we aren’t obstructed by other elevations, and we don’t have to worry about any wind currents; the breezes along the plateau where we’re building are steady. Additionally, we only have straight high roofs, and all the flues rise above the ridges. We will construct these flues with brick and make them spacious. We are not required to give them steep angles; they rise vertically, or almost so. Finally, we will have a system of air-flues, designed from the very foundation, to ensure a cool aspect; this is important because if the air-flues open to the south, for example, the air they take in from outside, even in winter, is warmer than the air in the room with the fire; and then the air-flue pulls the smoke down into the room. At least the fire can’t be started; the wood is only charred and doesn’t ignite.

“At Paris they often have a single flue for several fireplaces (arranged one over the other), and parallel with it a ventilation-flue sending a branch to each of these fireplaces. That is a good plan, especially in houses where there are as many as five fireplaces, one over the other;[Pg 208] because the weakening of the walls by the juxtaposition of a number of flues is thus avoided. The fires exercise a reciprocal attraction, and this system prevents smoke in the rooms. These flues must have a section sufficient for all the fireplaces—that is, for five ordinary chimneys, one above another, a section of 1 foot 9 inches superficial, or 16 inches square. But here, where we have only three stories and sufficient room, I prefer having separate flues for each chimney; especially as with the system of single flues all the fires must be lighted: which is always the case in a large town. If they are not, it will happen in rapid changes of temperature that the smoke will pass into one of the higher or lower fireplaces instead of following the vertical column. This inconvenience, which by the by is only accidental, is remedied by well-arranged dampers.”

“At Paris, they often have a single flue for several fireplaces (stacked one above the other), along with a ventilation flue that branches off to each of these fireplaces. That’s a smart setup, especially in houses with as many as five fireplaces, one over the other; [Pg 208] because it prevents the walls from getting weakened by having too many flues close together. The fires create a mutual attraction, and this system keeps smoke out of the rooms. These flues need to have a cross section that accommodates all the fireplaces—that is, for five standard chimneys stacked on top of each other, a cross section of 1 foot 9 inches or 16 inches square is needed. But here, since we only have three stories and enough space, I prefer to have separate flues for each chimney; especially since with a single flue system, all the fires must be lit, which is typically necessary in a big city. If they aren’t, sudden temperature changes can cause smoke to flow into one of the higher or lower fireplaces instead of moving up the vertical column. This issue, which is mainly occasional, can be fixed with well-placed dampers.”

“But,” said Paul, “does not this cold air of the air-channel chill the apartments?”

“But,” Paul said, “doesn’t this cold air from the air vent make the rooms chilly?”

“This cold air comes into the fireplace itself, not into the apartment; it is evident that if a fire is not made, the air-flue introduces cold air, which contributes to lowering the temperature of the apartment. It may be shut off by a damper. But keep this in mind: to make a fire burn wood, or coal, or anything else, oxygen is needed. You have learned that in your studies in chemistry and physics. Air, therefore, is required; without air no fire. Formerly they did not take the trouble to provide air-flues for fireplaces, because the air came into the rooms under the doors and through the ill-closed windows, and also because the apartments being very large contained air enough to keep up a fire for some time. And our grandfathers’ chimneys, be it observed, smoked pretty considerably. We of the present day are less hardy, and like to have smaller rooms, well shut in, and we are afraid of draughts; that is all very well, but the chimney must have a draught, since without it the fuel will not burn and therefore not[Pg 209] warm you. It is evident that this column of cold air, which you call in to stimulate the combustion, takes with it, in ascending the flue, a considerable amount of heat. Many plans have therefore been devised for preventing the heated air from passing rapidly away. It is caused to turn in the flues, and obliged to remain as long as possible, or at least to leave in the walls of the numerous passages which it traverses a part of the heat it has absorbed. These passages in their turn warm a surrounding cavity or room, which is also supplied with air. This air, dilated by heat, tends to escape. Issues are made for it, which are called hot-air escapes. This is the principle of the hot-air apparatus.”

“This cold air comes into the fireplace itself, not into the apartment; it’s clear that if a fire isn’t lit, the air-flue brings in cold air, which helps to lower the apartment’s temperature. You can close it off with a damper. But remember this: to make a fire burn wood, coal, or anything else, you need oxygen. You learned this in your chemistry and physics classes. So, air is necessary; no air means no fire. In the past, they didn’t bother with air-flues for fireplaces because air came into the rooms under the doors and through poorly sealed windows, and also because the apartments were large enough to have plenty of air to sustain a fire for a while. And our grandfathers’ chimneys, it should be noted, smoked quite a bit. We today are less tough, preferring smaller, well-sealed rooms, and we dislike drafts; that’s fine, but the chimney needs a draft, or else the fuel won’t burn and won’t keep you warm. It’s clear that this column of cold air, which you bring in to help combustion, takes with it, as it rises up the flue, a significant amount of heat. Many solutions have been developed to prevent the heated air from escaping quickly. It’s caused to swirl in the flues and held in as long as possible, or at least leaves some of the heat it has absorbed in the walls of the various passages it goes through. These passages, in turn, warm a surrounding space or room that is also supplied with air. This air, heated and expanded, tends to escape. There are exits for it, known as hot-air escapes. This is the principle behind the hot-air system.”

A propos of heating apparatuses,” said Madame de Gandelau, “are you intending to construct one in the new house?”

About heating devices,” said Madame de Gandelau, “are you planning to build one in the new house?”

“Certainly; its place is marked on the plan of the cellars below the entrance hall, and its flue goes up in the interior angle of the great staircase. A heating apparatus is indispensable in a country house, especially if it is not lived in throughout the winter. It is the means of preventing a good deal of injury to the house. Heating once or twice a week during the cold and damp season is sufficient to keep the apartments fairly dry.”

“Sure; its location is noted on the plan of the cellars below the entrance hall, and its duct goes up in the corner of the grand staircase. A heating system is essential in a country house, especially if it’s not occupied all winter. It helps prevent a lot of damage to the house. Heating it once or twice a week during the cold and damp season is enough to keep the rooms relatively dry.”

“Do you not think the heat of the hot-air apparatus injurious to health?”

“Don’t you think the heat from the hot-air device is harmful to your health?”

“The warm air issuing from the heating apparatus is unwholesome, because in becoming warm it has lost a part of its oxygen, and because oxygen is as necessary to us in supporting life as it is to fuel in supporting combustion. We can avoid some of the injurious results to the animal economy arising from the deoxidized air by making it pass over basins filled with water on leaving the heat receiver; but this means is only palliative, and we thus lose part of the warmth.

“The warm air coming from the heating system is unhealthy because, as it warms up, it loses some of its oxygen, and oxygen is just as essential for us to stay alive as it is for fuel to burn. We can reduce some of the harmful effects of the oxygen-depleted air on our bodies by making it go over basins of water after it leaves the heater; however, this is only a temporary solution, and we end up losing some of the warmth.”

[Pg 210]

[Pg 210]

“I consider hot-air apparatuses desirable only for warming apartments that are not lived in, such as entrance-halls, staircases, and passages; but if hot-air escapes are provided in drawing-rooms, dining-rooms, and bedrooms, care must be taken not to allow them to be open while the apartments are occupied. Open them only to dry the rooms when you are absent; and when this is done, open the windows, and close the hot-air escapes when you shut the windows.”

“I think hot-air systems are only useful for heating spaces that aren’t used often, like entryways, staircases, and hallways; but if hot-air vents are installed in living rooms, dining rooms, and bedrooms, you need to be careful not to leave them open while people are in those rooms. Only open them to dry out the rooms when no one is there; once you’ve done that, open the windows, and close the hot-air vents when you shut the windows.”

“And the baths—how will you heat them?”

“And the baths—how will you heat them?”

“By means of a boiler arranged near the heating apparatus, with circulating pipes reaching to the bath-rooms on the first floor, which are over the heating chamber, or nearly so.”

“Using a boiler set up near the heating system, with pipes running to the bathrooms on the first floor, which are directly above or very close to the heating chamber.”

“Have you arranged for baths for the servants also?”

“Have you made arrangements for baths for the staff as well?”

“Yes, under the bakehouse and wash-house, below the ground floor.”

“Yes, underneath the bakehouse and wash house, below the ground floor.”

“You have provided for everything, I see. This conversation about the chimneys has been one of which you will do well to give a summary in your notes, Paul!”

“You’ve covered everything, I see. This talk about the chimneys is one you should definitely summarize in your notes, Paul!”

“I will do so, mother.”

“I'll do that, mom.”


[Pg 211]

[Pg 211]

CHAPTER XXIII.
THE CANTINE.

In spite of the recent disasters, life seemed to return as by enchantment, both in the towns and the rural districts. In all directions every one was setting himself to work again to make up for lost time. Although the misfortunes which had nearly cut off all the sources of wealth in France were indelibly imprinted on their memories, a patriotic instinct made its inhabitants redouble their efforts to repair the mighty ruin, without indulging in vain recriminations. Those who travelled through France during the months of February and March, 1870, might have compared the country to an ant’s nest disturbed by the foot of some incautious stroller. These wonderful insects do not in such a case waste their time in lamentations, and making processions to supplicate the Providence of the ants: they set to work immediately; and if you pass by next day, the traces of the convulsion that had almost destroyed the colony have disappeared.

Despite the recent disasters, life seemed to bounce back magically, both in the towns and the countryside. Everywhere, people were getting back to work to make up for lost time. Even though the hardships that had nearly wiped out all sources of wealth in France were deeply etched in their memories, a sense of patriotism motivated its people to intensify their efforts to rebuild without indulging in pointless blame. Those who traveled through France in February and March of 1870 might have likened the country to an ant colony disrupted by the careless foot of a passerby. These remarkable insects don’t waste time on lamenting or holding processions to plead with ant Providence; they immediately get to work, and if you pass by the next day, you wouldn't even see the signs of the upheaval that almost wiped out the colony.

But at the end of March the journals brought to the château the disastrous news from Paris. M. de Gandelau had been thinking of sending back his son to the Lyceum. Although satisfied that Paul would not be losing his time, he thought it a pity that his classical studies should be any longer interrupted. But the last news changed his intention. He decided that his son should continue to work[Pg 212] with his cousin, who had resolved to stay at the château and wait the course of events.

But at the end of March, the newspapers brought the terrible news from Paris to the château. M. de Gandelau had been considering sending his son back to the Lyceum. While he was happy that Paul wouldn’t be wasting his time, he thought it was unfortunate that his classical studies would be further interrupted. However, the latest news changed his mind. He decided that his son should keep studying with his cousin, who had chosen to stay at the château and see how things unfolded. [Pg 212]

M. de Gandelau, loved and respected by the whole neighbourhood, had no anxiety so far as he himself was concerned. Some sinister faces had presented themselves in the neighbouring villages, but there was no opening for such emissaries there, so they soon disappeared. Master Branchu and Jean Godard had come to the château to tell M. de Gandelau that the workmen entreated him not to suspend the works, and that if money was wanting, they would consent to wait for better days. For the present they would ask only for soup and bread. In fact, M. de Gandelau having made great sacrifices during the war, had not just now at his disposal means sufficient for giving regular wages such as the energetic carrying out of the works would demand. The most he could do was to supply provisions. It was, therefore, decided that they should set up a provision store near the works; that M. de Gandelau should furnish meal, fuel, fresh meat twice a week, vegetables and bacon; and that each workman should receive as many rations as his family and he required for their subsistence. Each ration was estimated at prime cost; and the balance was to be paid in money at a future day, according to a well-recognized and carefully-adjusted scale of wages. Half a dozen workmen who did not belong to the district would not accept this arrangement, and quitted the works. The others, having full confidence in M. de Gandelau’s good faith, agreed to these terms, with so much the more readiness as they had thus the pleasing prospect of the result of this fixed economy in the shape of a saving. Paul was commissioned with this new branch of administration, and combined the functions of a purveyor with those of an inspector. His cousin initiated him in the system of accounts he must keep, so that all interests might be protected.

M. de Gandelau, loved and respected by everyone in the neighborhood, had no worries for himself. Some shady characters had shown up in the nearby villages, but there was no opportunity for them there, so they quickly vanished. Master Branchu and Jean Godard had come to the château to tell M. de Gandelau that the workers pleaded with him not to stop the projects, and that if money was an issue, they were willing to wait for better times. For now, they would only ask for soup and bread. In fact, M. de Gandelau had made significant sacrifices during the war and currently didn’t have enough funds to pay regular wages that the thorough execution of the projects would require. The most he could provide was food. It was, therefore, decided to set up a food supply store near the projects; M. de Gandelau would supply flour, fuel, fresh meat twice a week, vegetables, and bacon; and each worker would receive as many rations as he and his family needed to survive. Each ration was valued at cost price, and the difference would be paid in money at a later date, according to a well-known and carefully adjusted wage scale. A few workers who didn’t belong to the area refused this arrangement and left the site. The others, having full trust in M. de Gandelau’s honesty, readily agreed to these terms, especially since they looked forward to saving through this fixed economy. Paul was put in charge of this new part of the administration, combining the roles of supplier and inspector. His cousin taught him the accounting system he needed to follow to ensure all interests were safeguarded.

[Pg 213]

[Pg 213]

Proud of this new employment, he acquitted himself well. Rising at five o’clock in the morning, he might be seen riding on his pony from the château to the mill, from the mill to the neighbouring village, and from the village to the building; he gave an account to his father every evening of what had been given out during the day, and to his cousin memoranda of the work done at the house.

Proud of his new job, he did well. Waking up at five in the morning, he could be seen riding his pony from the château to the mill, from the mill to the nearby village, and from the village to the building; every evening, he updated his father on what had been accomplished that day and shared notes about the work done at the house with his cousin.

This mode of life was giving vigour to his body; the responsibility with which he saw himself invested was maturing his mind. Towards the end of May it would have been difficult to recognise in this robust, sensible, and methodical young man, the careless schoolboy of the month of August preceding.

This way of life was boosting his physical health; the responsibility he felt was developing his mind. By the end of May, it would have been hard to recognize in this strong, sensible, and organized young man, the carefree schoolboy from the previous August.

One morning Eugène said to him, “You will have to go to Chateauroux, for we have not joiners here capable of executing our work. I will put you in communication with a good master-joiner residing there, and you will make arrangements with him; but first we must be prepared with the necessary details.”

One morning, Eugène said to him, “You need to go to Chateauroux because we don’t have any carpenters here who can do our work. I’ll connect you with a skilled carpenter who lives there, and you can make arrangements with him; but first, we need to have all the necessary details sorted out.”


[Pg 214]

[Pg 214]

CHAPTER XXIV.
THE JOINER’S WORK.

“All the particulars of the woodwork,” continued Eugène, “ought to be furnished before a house is begun to be built, for the first consideration in work of this kind is selecting the materials, and only employing wood that is thoroughly dry, and has been sawn out some years. We have had but a short notice, and have not been able to pay attention to this important part of our undertaking. Fortunately I am acquainted with a joiner at Chateauroux, who has a stock of well-seasoned wood of good quality, which he is not very willing to part with, as he keeps it for special work; but he will let us have some, as your father has rendered him some services.

“All the details of the woodwork,” continued Eugène, “should be sorted out before starting to build a house, because the most important part of this kind of work is choosing the materials and only using wood that is completely dry and has been cut for several years. We’ve had very little time and haven’t been able to focus on this crucial aspect of our project. Luckily, I know a carpenter in Chateauroux who has a supply of high-quality, well-seasoned wood that he’s usually reluctant to sell since he saves it for special projects. However, he will let us have some because your father has helped him out before.”

“But while only sound and dry wood must be employed in our joiner’s work, it is not less necessary to combine the parts according to the nature of the materials, and not infringe the conditions imposed by them. Wood is sawn according to certain dimensions dictated by custom and the size of the trees. Thus, for example, a plank is only 8 or 10 inches broad, because trees fit for joiner’s work are scarcely of larger diameter, when the sap-wood is removed; in making panels, therefore, it is advisable not to have them more than 8 or 10 inches wide, that they may not exceed the width of a plank. If two or more boards are joined to make a panel, they will[Pg 215] separate in drying, and leave a space between them; whereas, if we give each panel only the width of a plank, even if it should shrink, the shrinking occurs in the tongue, and there is no disjointing. These tongues must, however, be wide enough to bear the shrinking without leaving the rebate. You will understand that better by and by.

“But while only sound and dry wood should be used in our woodworking, it's equally important to combine the parts based on the nature of the materials and to respect the conditions they impose. Wood is cut to specific dimensions based on tradition and the size of the trees. For example, a plank is typically only 8 or 10 inches wide because suitable trees for woodworking rarely have a larger diameter once the sapwood is removed. Therefore, when making panels, it's best to keep them no wider than 8 or 10 inches to ensure they don’t exceed the width of a plank. If two or more boards are joined to create a panel, they may separate as they dry and leave a gap between them. However, if we construct each panel to only the width of a plank, even if it shrinks, the shrinkage occurs in the tongue, preventing any disjointing. These tongues need to be wide enough to accommodate the shrinkage without leaving the rebate. You’ll understand this better later.”

“In the last century many doors were made wide-framed, that is, doors the panels of which, framed in moulding, are from 16 to 20 inches wide; this was the fashion. But at that time they employed none but very dry wood, that had been felled and cut up for several years; and these panels, made of two boards, notched or simply jointed, did not shrink. You see doors thus made in your father’s drawing-room, and there is only one in which the panel has opened. In the present day such wood cannot be got for love or money; we must therefore be content to give up those wide panels. Or, if we insist upon having them, they must be made of white wood—of sycamore, because this wood dries quickly, does not split nor warp, that is, it does not curve across the grain. But sycamore is a soft wood, liable to be attacked by worms, especially in the country. Let us therefore keep to oak, and construct our doors so that the panels may be only about 8 inches wide. We have folding and single doors. The folding doors are 4 feet wide; the doors of a single leaf 32 to 40 inches. Their height varies from 7 ft. to 7 ft. 4 in.; for it is quite useless to make them higher, as we do not walk into our rooms with crosses and banners, and the human stature rarely exceeds six feet. There are many inconveniences in having doors too high; they are liable to twist, are not easily shut, and, if it is cold, every time they are opened they let a considerable volume of damp, freezing air penetrate into the rooms, chilling them proportionately.

“In the last century, many doors were made with wide frames, which means the panels were framed in molding and were 16 to 20 inches wide; that was the trend. However, they only used very dry wood that had been cut and seasoned for several years, and these panels, made of two boards that were notched or simply joined, didn’t shrink. You can see doors like this in your father’s drawing room, and only one has had a panel that opened. Nowadays, such wood is impossible to find, no matter the price; so we have to give up those wide panels. If we really want them, they’ll have to be made of white wood—of sycamore, since it dries quickly and doesn’t split or warp, meaning it won’t curve across the grain. But sycamore is soft wood and can get attacked by worms, especially in the countryside. So, let’s stick with oak and make our doors with panels about 8 inches wide. We have folding and single doors. The folding doors are 4 feet wide, while the single doors are 32 to 40 inches wide. Their height can range from 7 feet to 7 feet 4 inches; there’s no point in making them any taller since we don’t enter rooms carrying crosses and banners, and most people are under six feet tall. There are quite a few downsides to having doors that are too high; they can twist, are hard to close, and every time they’re opened in the cold, they let in a lot of damp, freezing air, making the rooms chilly.”

[Pg 216]

[Pg 216]

Fig. 56.

Fig. 56.

“Let us begin, then, by drawing a folding-door. We shall make the framing of this door of wood 1¾ inch thick. We call the outer upright pieces (Fig. 56) the hanging-stiles; the pieces, A, the meeting-stiles; the horizontal pieces between them, the rails. The stiles and the top and bottom rails shall be each 4¼ inches wide, the intermediate uprights, or munton, 2 inches. Now each leaf—deducting ½ an inch for the rebate, or overlap, in the middle—will be 2 feet wide, since the doorway must have an opening of 4 feet: deducting 4¼ in. + 2 in. + 3¾ in. for the two stiles and the munton—total, 10 inches—there remain 14 inches for the two panels, i.e., 7 inches for each panel. The middle rail must be placed so that its centre shall be 3 ft. 4 in. from the ground; for it is on this rail the lock is fixed, and this rail should not be less than 6 inches wide, so that deducting for the mouldings, say 2 in., there still remains 4 in. for the room of the lock, whose box is usually from 3 to 4 in. wide. This kind of door is called square-framed: all the joints being square, without mitres,[Pg 217] and the panels being narrow, these doors do not give, and are perfectly ridged.

“Let’s start by drawing a folding door. We’ll make the frame of this door out of wood that’s 1¾ inches thick. We call the outer vertical pieces (Fig. 56) the hanging stiles; the pieces, A, the meeting stiles; and the horizontal pieces between them, the rails. The stiles and the top and bottom rails will each be 4¼ inches wide, while the intermediate uprights, or muntins, are 2 inches. Now, each leaf—subtracting ½ inch for the rebate, or overlap, in the middle—will be 2 feet wide, since the doorway needs to have an opening of 4 feet: subtracting 4¼ in. + 2 in. + 3¾ in. for the two stiles and the muntin—totaling 10 inches—leaves 14 inches for the two panels, i.e., 7 inches for each panel. The middle rail must be positioned so that its center is 3 ft. 4 in. from the ground; this is where the lock is attached, and this rail should be no less than 6 inches wide. After accounting for the moldings, let’s say 2 in., there will still be 4 in. left for the space for the lock, whose box usually ranges from 3 to 4 in. wide. This type of door is called square-framed: all the joints are square, without miters, [Pg 217] and the panels are narrow, making these doors rigid and perfectly stable."

Fig. 57.

Fig. 57.

“Here is a detail of this framing (Fig. 57): Let A be the wall-jamb of the doorway; a door-frame, B, is fixed by means of iron stays to this jamb. To it are fastened with screws the hinges, C, on which the door-leaves swing. D is the hanging-stile; E E, the meeting-stiles; F, the intermediate munton; G, the panels, with their tongues in the grooves. The architraves, H, form a rebate around the hanging-stiles and the top rail. Moulded strips, I, are affixed along the rebate of the meeting-stiles, in order to strengthen the rebate, and to present to the hand a rounded[Pg 218] edge that does not hurt the hand or fray the dress. At K is denoted the top rail, with its tenon, L, fitting into a mortice, M, which should be cut right through the stile. At the juncture of the intermediate munton, N, the moulding, O, is cut square off to make way for the head of the munton, whose tenon, P, goes into a mortice, R. At S you see the groove into which fits the tongues, T, of the panels; which are increased in thickness at a certain distance from the tongue, as you see at V, to about ⅞ths of an inch. You will observe that the chamfers, X, of the stiles stop beneath the joints, in order to leave these all the strength of the wood. Doors of these dimensions will require three hinges to each leaf.

“Here’s a detailed look at this framing (Fig. 57): Let A represent the wall-jamb of the doorway; a door-frame, B, is secured with iron stays to this jamb. The hinges, C, which allow the door-leaves to swing, are fastened to it with screws. D is the hanging-stile; E E are the meeting-stiles; F is the intermediate munton; G are the panels, with their tongues fitting into the grooves. The architraves, H, create a rebate around the hanging-stiles and the top rail. Moulded strips, I, are attached along the rebate of the meeting-stiles to reinforce the rebate and provide a rounded edge that is gentle on the hand and won’t snag clothing. At K, you’ll find the top rail, with its tenon, L, fitting into a mortice, M, which should run straight through the stile. At the joint of the intermediate munton, N, the moulding, O, is cut square to accommodate the head of the munton, whose tenon, P, fits into a mortice, R. At S, you can see the groove where the tongues, T, of the panels fit; these are thicker at a certain distance from the tongue, as shown at V, increasing to about ⅞ inches. Notice that the chamfers, X, of the stiles end just before the joints to maintain the wood’s strength. Doors of this size will need three hinges for each leaf.”

Fig. 58.

Fig. 58.

“This explanation gives you the key to all good ordinary house joinery. The rule is a simple one: never to weaken the wood at the joints, always to make these square, and not to exceed the sizes of ordinary scantling.

“This explanation gives you the key to all good basic house carpentry. The rule is a simple one: never weaken the wood at the joints, always make them square, and don't exceed the sizes of standard lumber.”

“Our single-leaved doors will be made according to this system. We have lastly to consider the window-casements. In these we shall follow the same principle, that is, we shall avoid the defective mitre joints, and have none but square joints. Here (Fig. 58) is one of these casements, which consists of a fixed frame, A, fastened into the rebate of the stone-work, B, and of two folding casements. The wood of the casements shall be[Pg 219] 1½ in. thick, and the meeting-stiles shall lock one into the other. To lessen the difficulty of glazing, or to avoid the necessity of using plate-glass, we will divide the length by a small bar, C. You will require the details of these window-casements. I give them to you drawn in Fig. 59.

“Our single-leaf doors will be made according to this system. Finally, we need to look at the window frames. For these, we'll stick to the same approach: avoiding faulty mitre joints and using only square joints. Here (Fig. 58) is one of these frames, which consists of a fixed frame, A, that is secured into the stone work, B, along with two folding frames. The wood for the frames will be [Pg 219] 1½ inches thick, and the edges will lock into each other. To make glazing easier, or to avoid the need for plate glass, we'll divide the length with a small bar, C. You'll need the details of these window frames. I'm providing them to you as shown in Fig. 59.

Fig. 59.

Fig. 59.

“At A I have marked the rebate of the window-jamb; at B the fixed frame; at C one of the stiles which works into the frame, with the tongue to stop the passage of the air; at D and E, the right and left hand meeting-stiles, with their method of locking. On the projection, F, is affixed the crémone, or fastener. The detail, G, gives you[Pg 220] the section of the sill-rail of the frame, with its water-stop, intended to hinder the rain or snow from penetrating to the inside. But as it happens that in spite of this precaution the driving rain sometimes finds its way into the rebate, a small channel, a, must be sunk in this rebate, with two escapes, that the water may not flow through, and down the inner surface of the sill, I. In order to cover the junction of the wood sill-rail and the stone sill, we shall affix the moulding, K. At L I denote for you the framing of the bottom rail of the casement and the stile; and at M that of the glazing-bar and the same stile. At O you will observe the outside rebates to receive the glass, and the chamfers, P, with stops on the inside to leave at the joints all the strength of the wood. Besides the three hinges necessary for each leaf, we must take into account the angle-plates at top and bottom to secure the casement from straining the joints and giving down in the middle, for the glass cannot serve like door panels, which stiffen the framing. On the contrary, the glass, by its weight, tends to put these casements out of shape.

“At A I’ve marked the recess of the window frame; at B the fixed frame; at C one of the vertical components that connects to the frame, with the tongue to prevent air from getting through; at D and E, the left and right meeting stiles, showing how they lock together. On the projection, F, is attached the crémone, or fastener. The detail at G shows you[Pg 220] the cross-section of the sill-rail of the frame, which has a water-stop to prevent rain or snow from getting inside. However, since driving rain can still find its way into the recess, there needs to be a small channel, a, created in this recess, with two drains, so that water doesn’t flow through and down the inner surface of the sill, I. To cover where the wooden sill-rail and the stone sill meet, we’ll attach the molding, K. At L I indicate the framing of the bottom rail of the casement and the vertical component; and at M that of the glazing bar and the same vertical component. At O you’ll see the outside recesses for the glass, and the bevels, P, with stops on the inside to maintain the strength of the wood at the joints. In addition to the three hinges needed for each panel, we must also include the angle plates at the top and bottom to prevent the casement from straining the joints and sagging in the middle, since the glass doesn’t provide the same stiffness as door panels do. Instead, the weight of the glass tends to warp these casements.”

“You are going to set to work at these details, Paul, and I will correct your drawings. Furnished with these designs, you will then go to Chateauroux and show them to the person who undertakes the work, and he will fix his prices. You will supplement the drawings by explanations, keeping clearly in mind what I have told you, and bring back his estimate. I will also give you an introduction to an engineering friend of mine at Chateauroux who will receive you as a relation, and who will be able to give you any further information you require.”

“You're going to start working on these details, Paul, and I’ll review your drawings. With these designs, you’ll head to Chateauroux and present them to the contractor, and he’ll determine his prices. You’ll enhance the drawings with explanations, keeping in mind what I’ve told you, and bring back his estimate. I’ll also introduce you to an engineering friend of mine in Chateauroux who will welcome you like family and can provide any additional information you need.”

Madame de Gandelau at first objected to Paul’s journey; but being assured that Eugène’s friend would be at the station to receive the young architect, and that he would[Pg 221] be entertained by a family who would be glad to receive him, his mother was satisfied. Besides, his absence would be for three or four days only, and Chateauroux is but fifty miles from M. de Gandelau’s residence.

Madame de Gandelau initially opposed Paul’s trip; however, after being reassured that Eugène’s friend would be at the station to greet the young architect and that he would be hosted by a family eager to welcome him, his mother agreed. Moreover, he would only be gone for three or four days, and Chateauroux is only fifty miles from M. de Gandelau’s home.


[Pg 222]

[Pg 222]

CHAPTER XXV.
WHAT PAUL LEARNT AT CHATEAUROUX.

Paul now knew enough to feel that the commission with which he was charged was one of considerable importance. The sole responsibility of it made him a little anxious. It would have been easy enough to write to the joiner to come to the château; but Eugène had asked M. de Gandelau to send Paul to see him, in order to put his clerk of the works to the test, and to know how he would manage the business. Eugène had given him ample instructions, and taken care to have them repeated several times; and Paul had noted down the important points. He was furnished with plans to show the number of openings, the hanging of the doors, the areas of the floors, the extent of the wainscoting, the dado-moulding, the skirting, &c.

Paul now understood well enough to realize that the task he was given was quite important. The entire responsibility made him a bit anxious. It would have been simple to just write to the carpenter to come to the château; however, Eugène had asked M. de Gandelau to send Paul to see him in order to test his foreman and see how he would handle the job. Eugène had given him detailed instructions and made sure to repeat them several times; Paul had taken note of the key points. He had plans to show the number of openings, the door placements, the floor areas, the extent of the wainscoting, the dado-molding, the skirting, etc.

On arriving at Chateauroux about ten o’clock in the morning, Paul found the engineer, M. Victorien, his cousin’s friend, waiting for him at the station as had been arranged. M. Victorien was still young, though his close-cut hair was growing grey. A sun-burnt complexion, a piercing eye, and aquiline nose, gave to his physiognomy a certain martial air which attracted our young architect at a glance. A letter from Eugène had informed him of the circumstances that had occasioned Paul’s giving his attention to building during the last six months. M. Victorien had some acquaintance with M. de Gandelau, and felt a particular[Pg 223] esteem for his character. Such an introduction was more than enough to induce him to receive the traveller as a young brother. Madame Victorien, a short, buxom brunette, the very antithesis of her husband, who was tall and thin,—could find nothing good enough for her guest. At breakfast, Paul had to reply to all the questions that were addressed to him:—How had the recent troubles been borne by the family at the château? What was the new house like? How far had it advanced? How many workmen did they employ? How was the work done? Paul gave the best answers he could think of, and even ventured to draw some sketches to explain to his hosts the situation of the new house and its present stage of advancement.

Upon arriving at Chateauroux around ten in the morning, Paul found the engineer, M. Victorien, his cousin's friend, waiting for him at the station as they had arranged. M. Victorien was still young, though his close-cropped hair was starting to go gray. A sunburned complexion, a piercing gaze, and an aquiline nose gave him a certain martial look that caught the attention of the young architect immediately. A letter from Eugène had informed him of the reasons that had led Paul to focus on building over the past six months. M. Victorien had some knowledge of M. de Gandelau and held a particular respect for his character. This connection was more than enough to make him treat the traveler like a younger brother. Madame Victorien, a short, plump brunette, was the complete opposite of her husband, who was tall and thin—she could find nothing good enough for her guest. At breakfast, Paul had to answer all the questions directed at him: How had the recent troubles affected the family at the château? What was the new house like? How far along was it? How many workers were they employing? How was the work progressing? Paul replied with the best answers he could come up with and even attempted to draw some sketches to help explain to his hosts the layout of the new house and its current stage of progress.

“Well,” said M. Victorien, “I see that you have profited by the lessons you have had from your cousin, who is more ready at making an explanatory sketch than any man I know.”

"Well," said M. Victorien, "I can see that you've benefited from the lessons you've had from your cousin, who is better at making an explanatory sketch than anyone I know."

This compliment encouraged Paul, who related the steps of his architectural education up to this time.

This compliment motivated Paul, who shared the progress of his architectural education up to that point.

“We shall have the whole of to-morrow to visit your joiner, so if you like you shall accompany me to see some locks which I am making about six miles off. That will perhaps interest you.”

“We'll have all of tomorrow to visit your carpenter, so if you'd like, you can join me to check out some locks I'm working on about six miles away. That might interest you.”

Paul eagerly accepted the invitation, although Madame Victorien protested against it, asserting that her young guest must be fatigued, and ought to be allowed to rest; that he had risen very early that morning, and so on.

Paul eagerly accepted the invitation, even though Madame Victorien objected, claiming that her young guest must be tired and should be allowed to rest; that he had gotten up very early that morning, and so on.

“What,” said M. Victorien, “at his age and in excellent health, fatigued by sitting two hours in a railway carriage! Get us a good dinner by the time we return—about seven o’clock—and you shall see if our friend doesn’t do justice to it. Besides, has he not told us that he is up at five o’clock every morning and is running about all day? Come, let us set out.”

“What,” said M. Victorien, “at his age and in great health, tired from sitting for two hours on a train! Make sure we have a nice dinner ready when we get back—around seven o’clock—and you’ll see if our friend doesn’t enjoy it. Besides, hasn’t he told us that he gets up at five every morning and is on the go all day? Come on, let’s get going.”

[Pg 224]

[Pg 224]

They drove off in a small char-à-banc, and soon left the town behind them.

They drove away in a small char-à-banc, and soon left the town behind.

When they were mounting the first hill M. Victorien said: “Your cousin has not then been much fatigued by his short campaign. I saw him only for a moment when he passed through with his corps. He is an energetic man, but he does not always take enough care of himself. How clearly he explains a thing, does he not? It is a pleasure to take lessons of him. We were fellow-students formerly, and he hesitated whether he should become an architect or a civil engineer. He had qualifications for both.”

When they were climbing the first hill, M. Victorien said, “Your cousin hasn’t been too worn out by his short campaign. I only saw him for a moment when he passed through with his corps. He’s an energetic guy, but he doesn’t always take good care of himself. Isn’t it great how clearly he explains things? It’s a pleasure to learn from him. We were classmates back in the day, and he was unsure whether to become an architect or a civil engineer. He had the skills for both.”

“What is the difference, then, between an architect and an engineer?” Paul ventured to ask.

“What’s the difference between an architect and an engineer?” Paul asked tentatively.

“Upon my word, that is a question not easy to answer—I will give you an apologue:—

“Honestly, that's a question that's not easy to answer—let me share a tale with you:—

“There were once two little twins who resembled each other so much that even their mother could not distinguish them. Not only were their features, height, and gait the same, but they had also the same tastes and abilities. They had to work with their hands, for their parents were poor. Both became masons. They acquired skill in their calling, and they worked equally well. Their father, a narrow-minded man, thought that these four hands which wrought at the same work with equal perfection, would produce more and do still better by allotting separate labours to each pair. To one of the pairs, therefore, he said: ‘You shall only do underground work;’ and to the other, ‘You shall only work aboveground.’ The brothers thought this scarcely reasonable, as they had been accustomed to help each other in both sorts of work; however, as they were obedient children they complied. But whereas hitherto these workmen had agreed and had co-operated to the advantage of the work, from that time forward they did not cease to dispute with each other. The one who worked above the cellars maintained that his[Pg 225] foundations were not suitably prepared, and the one who laid the latter asserted that the conditions of their structure were not respected. The result was that they separated, and as each had now become habituated to his particular work, he remained unfit for anything else.”

There were once two little twins who looked so much alike that even their mother couldn't tell them apart. Not only did they have the same features, height, and walk, but they also shared the same likes and abilities. They had to work with their hands because their parents were poor. Both became masons. They got skilled in their trade and worked just as well as each other. Their father, who was quite narrow-minded, thought that having them work separately on the same tasks would produce better results. So, he told one of them, "You’ll only do underground work," and to the other, "You’ll only work above ground." The brothers thought this was unreasonable since they were used to helping each other with both types of work; however, being obedient children, they went along with it. But while they used to agree and cooperate for the benefit of the job, from then on, they started arguing all the time. The one working above the cellars claimed that his foundations weren't done properly, and the one working below insisted that the conditions of their structure weren't being met. Eventually, they went their separate ways, and since each had gotten used to his specific work, he became unfit for anything else.

“I think I see the gist of your apologue, but——”

“I think I understand the main point of your story, but——”

“But it does not explain to you why a difference has been made between engineers and architects. In fact, a skilful engineer may be a good architect, as an accomplished architect ought to be a good engineer. Engineers make bridges, canals, docks, and embankments; but this does not prevent them from raising lighthouses, erecting factories, warehouses, and many other buildings. Architects ought to know how to do all these things; they actually did them formerly, because then the twin brothers were not separated, or rather, they were one and the same person. But since this individuality has been separated into two, each half follows its own direction. If the engineers build a bridge, the architects say it is ugly—and are not always wrong in saying so. If the architects build a palace, the engineers think, not without reason, that in its construction the materials have been employed unskilfully, and without due economy or an exact acquaintance with their properties in point of durability and strength.”

"But it doesn’t clarify why there’s a distinction made between engineers and architects. In reality, a skilled engineer might be a good architect, just as a talented architect should be a good engineer. Engineers construct bridges, canals, docks, and embankments; however, that doesn’t stop them from building lighthouses, factories, warehouses, and many other structures. Architects should know how to do all these things; they actually used to do them in the past, when the two roles weren’t separated—essentially, they were one in the same. But now that this individuality has split into two, each side follows its own path. When engineers build a bridge, architects often criticize it as ugly—and they’re not always wrong for saying so. When architects construct a palace, engineers understandably believe that the materials have been used poorly, lacking in efficiency and a proper understanding of their properties in terms of durability and strength."

“But why do engineers build bridges which architects do not consider beautiful?”

“But why do engineers build bridges that architects don't think are beautiful?”

“Because the question of art has been separated from that of science and calculation by that narrow-minded father who thought one brain could not entertain both. The architects have been told: ‘You are to be artists; you are to look at nothing but form—trouble yourselves about nothing but form;’ while to the engineers it has been said: ‘You are to occupy yourselves only with science and its applications; form does not concern[Pg 226] you; leave that to artists who dream with their eyes open, and are incapable of reasoning!’

“Because the issue of art has been separated from that of science and calculations by a narrow-minded authority who believed one mind couldn’t handle both. The architects have been told, ‘You are to be artists; focus solely on form—don’t worry about anything but form;’ while engineers have been instructed, ‘You should only deal with science and its applications; form isn’t your concern; leave that to the artists who dream with their eyes open and can’t think logically!’”

“Ah! that seems strange to your young mind, I can see. It is simply absurd, because the art of architecture is only a result of the art of constructing—that is, of employing materials according to their qualities or properties; and because architectural forms are notoriously derived from this judicious employment of them. But, my young friend, as you grow older, you will see in our poor country not a few even more important interests sticking in the rut of routine.—St! Bob, trot on! it’s all level now!”

“Ah! I can tell that's puzzling for you. It’s really ridiculous because architecture is just a result of construction—that is, using materials based on their qualities; and architectural designs come from this smart use of them. But, my young friend, as you get older, you’ll notice that our struggling country has many more important issues stuck in a routine. —St! Bob, let’s go! It’s all smooth sailing now!”

They soon arrived at the locks. Two coffer-dams, one below, one above, barred the course of the water; a large cast-iron siphon caused the current to pass over the workmen engaged in laying the foundations of the walls (the lateral walls) forming the chamber of the lock. Paul inquired about the working of the siphon, which he soon understood, as he had made one with quills and wax, and had emptied glasses of water with it. He had never imagined that this little hydraulic apparatus could be applied on so grand a scale. He saw how they made the concrete which was run under the lateral walls of the chamber, that is, the space comprised between the two gates of the lock. A horse was attached to a great wooden lever, which caused an iron shaft to revolve in a vertical cylinder, and which, furnished with beaters, mixed the slaked lime with the sand that was introduced at the top of this cylinder. An opening at the bottom let the mortar, well mixed, run into wheelbarrows which the workmen were taking to a wooden floor, where they mixed it with double its quantity of pebbles, by means of rakes. Then other workmen transported the concrete, well mingled, to a shoot which conducted it to the bottom of the excavation, where others again spread it in layers, and rammed it down with wooden damsels. Paul inquired,[Pg 227] also, respecting the arrangement of the gates, the kerb, the stay, or sill, over which the folded gates of the lock were to abut, that is, presenting an obtuse angle towards the upper part of the stream, to resist the action of the current. He saw the carpenters’ workshop, where they put the lock-gates on templets. While superintending his works and giving his orders, M. Victorien explained to Paul how each department of labour contributed to the whole; and the latter took notes and made sketches in his memorandum-book with a view to keep in mind what he heard and saw. This attention on Paul’s part appeared to please M. Victorien. So when they were again seated in the char-à-banc to return to the town, the engineer did not fail to complete his explanations. He described to him the lock-gates of seaports, and how some were made in the present day thirty yards wide and more, part iron, part wood, or entirely iron; and promised to show him when they reached home the drawings of some of these locks. The conversation then turned on bridges, and by what means their piers could be built in the middle of a stream.

They soon got to the locks. Two coffer-dams, one above and one below, blocked the water flow; a large cast-iron siphon directed the current over the workmen who were laying the foundation walls (the side walls) of the lock chamber. Paul asked about how the siphon worked, which he quickly understood since he had made one with quills and wax and had used it to empty glasses of water. He had never imagined that such a small hydraulic device could be used on such a large scale. He watched as they created the concrete that would go under the side walls of the chamber—that is, the space between the two lock gates. A horse was hitched to a large wooden lever that turned an iron shaft in a vertical cylinder, which had beaters to mix the slaked lime with sand added at the top of the cylinder. An opening at the bottom allowed the well-mixed mortar to flow into wheelbarrows, which the workers then took to a wooden floor where they mixed it with double its weight in pebbles using rakes. Then other workers transported the well-mixed concrete to a chute that carried it to the bottom of the excavation, where more workers spread it in layers and packed it down with wooden tools. Paul also asked about the design of the gates, the kerb, the stay, or sill, over which the folded lock gates would close, creating an obtuse angle toward the upper part of the stream to withstand the current. He saw the carpentry workshop where they were fitting the lock gates onto templates. While overseeing the work and giving orders, M. Victorien explained to Paul how each department contributed to the overall project; Paul took notes and made sketches in his notebook to remember what he heard and saw. M. Victorien seemed pleased with Paul’s attentiveness. So, when they got back in the char-à-banc to return to town, the engineer continued with his explanations. He described the lock gates used in seaports and how some are currently made thirty yards wide or more, partly iron, partly wood, or entirely iron; he promised to show Paul the drawings of some of these locks when they got home. The conversation then shifted to bridges and how their piers could be constructed in the middle of a stream.

M. Victorien explained to him how, by the use of means supplied by modern engineering, piers were built in the middle of wide, deep, and rapid streams, where formerly the operation was not regarded as practicable; how they sunk double-plated iron cylinders vertically, so that their lower extremity touched the bottom; how, with the help of powerful machinery, they compressed the air in these enormous hollow columns, and how they then filled these cylinders with masonry, so that they thus obtained piers perfectly solid, stable, and capable of sustaining heavy pressures; and while the metal-work must decay with time the columns of masonry remained intact, having had time to gain a solid consistence.

M. Victorien explained to him how, using techniques from modern engineering, piers were built in the middle of wide, deep, and fast-moving streams, where it was previously considered impossible. He described how they sank double-plated iron cylinders vertically, so their lower ends touched the bottom; how, with the help of powerful machinery, they compressed the air in these massive hollow columns; and how they filled these cylinders with masonry, creating piers that were solid, stable, and able to support heavy loads. While the metal parts would deteriorate over time, the masonry columns remained intact, having had time to gain solid strength.

M. Victorien’s explanations thus opened to Paul a new horizon of study, and he began to ask himself[Pg 228] whether he should ever have time to learn all these things; for M. Victorien did not fail to repeat to him continually that an architect ought not to be ignorant of these methods of construction, because it was possible that he would have to make use of them. His attention, therefore, seemed distracted. M. Victorien perceived it, and said to him, “Let us talk of something else, for you seem to me rather tired.”

M. Victorien’s explanations opened up a new area of study for Paul, and he started to wonder if he would ever have enough time to learn everything. M. Victorien made sure to remind him constantly that an architect shouldn’t ignore these construction methods, as he might need to use them. As a result, Paul appeared distracted. M. Victorien noticed this and said, “Let’s discuss something else, because you seem a bit tired.”

“No,” replied Paul; “but I had a good deal of difficulty in getting into my head all that my cousin told me about building a house only; and I thought that when I had thoroughly understood the different things he explained to me, I should have got the substance of all I had to learn: and now I see that there are many other things relating to construction which I ought to know, and—you know——”

“No,” Paul replied. “But I had a hard time wrapping my head around everything my cousin told me about building a house. I thought that once I fully understood the different things he explained, I would have grasped everything I needed to learn. But now I realize there are many other aspects of construction I should know, and—you know—”

“And that disquiets and frightens you. Take time; do not try to understand all at once; listen attentively, that is all. By degrees it will be disentangled in your mind, and be properly classified. Do not be anxious about it—young brains consist of a number of empty drawers. Youth need only be asked to open them; each new acquisition comes of itself to take its place in that which suits it. Afterwards, all we have to do is to open the drawer containing such or such a thing, stored up almost without our being conscious of it: we find it untouched, fit to be used for its proper purpose. Only we must always keep all our drawers open in the gathering season, a season which is but short. If we leave the drawers shut during our early youth—that is, from twelve to twenty-five—it is hard work to fill them afterwards, for the locks are rusted, or they have been filled, we do not know how, with useless rubbish.”

"And that makes you anxious and scared. Take your time; don’t try to understand everything at once; just listen closely, that’s all. Gradually, it will make sense in your mind and get organized properly. Don’t worry about it—young minds are like a bunch of empty drawers. All youth needs to do is open them; each new piece of knowledge naturally finds its spot. Later on, all we have to do is open the drawer where we stored something, often without even realizing it: we’ll find it untouched and ready to serve its purpose. We just need to keep our drawers open during the learning phase, which is brief. If we leave the drawers closed during our youth—from about twelve to twenty-five—it's tough to fill them later, because the locks get rusty, or they end up being stuffed with pointless junk."

Chatting thus, the travellers returned home, where Madame Victorien had prepared them a good supper,[Pg 229] enlivened by the presence of two little fellows returned from school, and who were soon very good friends with Paul.

Chatting like this, the travelers headed home, where Madame Victorien had made them a nice dinner,[Pg 229] brightened by the company of two little boys back from school, who quickly became good friends with Paul.

The following day was devoted to seeing the contractor for the woodwork, and explaining to him the particulars Paul had brought with him, and preparing the estimates in which M. Victorien gave some assistance. Paul, however, well trained by his cousin, executed his commission creditably, and felt much flattered when, at the close of the interview, the contractor addressed him as ‘Monsieur l’Inspecteur,’ giving him all sorts of technical explanations, which Paul did not always comprehend, though he took good care not to show his ignorance, waiting for the opportunity of asking his cousin to enlighten him where necessary.

The next day was spent meeting with the contractor about the woodwork, explaining the details that Paul had brought along, and preparing the estimates, with some help from M. Victorien. However, thanks to his cousin's training, Paul handled his task well and felt quite flattered when, at the end of the meeting, the contractor called him ‘Monsieur l’Inspecteur,’ offering all sorts of technical explanations. Paul didn’t always understand them but made sure not to show his confusion, waiting for a chance to ask his cousin for clarification where needed.

On the morning of the third day they went to see some interesting buildings in the neighbourhood, and in the evening, at nine o’clock, Paul returned to the château, his travelling-bag full of information which M. Victorien had given him respecting bridges, locks, and the building materials of the district, and the way in which they were employed.

On the morning of the third day, they went to check out some interesting buildings in the area, and in the evening, at nine o’clock, Paul returned to the château, his travel bag packed with information that M. Victorien had shared with him about bridges, locks, the local building materials, and how they were used.


[Pg 230]

[Pg 230]

CHAPTER XXVI.
THE SLATING AND PLUMBING.

Although Paul could have returned to the Lyceum at Paris in June, Madame de Gandelau insisted upon her son remaining at home during the summer. She was afraid of typhus. Anxiety, moreover, was felt respecting the tranquillity of the great city which had been so cruelly tried and injured. A tutor in the neighbourhood—a man of more learning than is usually possessed by those modest substitutes for the highest class of educators—came therefore every day to read with Paul for an hour or two, that he might not forget his Latin; and the rest of his time was devoted to superintending the works, which were visibly advancing. The walls were built, the floor-joists fixed, and they were beginning to raise the timber-work of the roofs; and though there were no longer so many details to be given to the workmen, the surveillance had to be more minute, especially as Eugène would not allow anything to escape observation, and insisted upon having an account of everything. Sometimes, when Paul returned from the works, Eugène would ask him if he had seen such or such a part. If Paul hesitated, he would say to him, “Well, my dear fellow, you must go back and see that, and bring me an account of it—not to-morrow, mind, but directly.” And Paul would have to mount his pony again. So in order to avoid these goings and comings, which seemed to him at least monotonous, he had acquired the habit of not[Pg 231] returning till he had examined in detail all the points respecting which his cousin could possibly question him. It was especially to the chain-rods that he had directed Paul’s attention. He would ask him repeatedly how the claw ends were bedded; and if the explanations did not agree, Paul had to return to the works, and not leave them till he had seen with his own eyes that things had been done according to order. Besides this, Eugène visited the works three times a week with Paul, and instructions were given to the builders in his presence. The former always took care to make his clerk of works repeat these instructions to him, to be certain that they were understood.

Although Paul could have gone back to the Lyceum in Paris in June, Madame de Gandelau insisted that her son stay home for the summer. She was worried about typhus. There was also concern about the safety of the great city, which had been so badly affected. A tutor from the neighborhood—a man with more knowledge than most typical substitutes for top educators—came every day to read with Paul for an hour or two, so he wouldn't forget his Latin. The rest of his time was spent overseeing the construction, which was clearly progressing. The walls were up, the floor joists were in place, and they were starting to put up the roof framework; and even though there weren't as many details to direct for the workers anymore, the supervision needed to be more thorough, especially since Eugène wouldn’t let anything go unnoticed and demanded reports on everything. Sometimes, when Paul came back from the site, Eugène would ask him if he had checked a certain section. If Paul hesitated, he would say, “Well, my dear fellow, you need to go back and check that, and bring me a report—not tomorrow, but now.” And Paul would have to get back on his pony. To avoid these repetitive trips, which he found at least tedious, he had started the habit of not returning until he had thoroughly checked all the areas his cousin might ask about. He focused especially on the chain-rods, repeatedly asking Paul how the claw ends were set. If the answers didn’t match, Paul had to go back to the site and couldn’t leave until he had personally confirmed that everything was done correctly. Additionally, Eugène visited the site three times a week with Paul, giving instructions to the builders while he was there. He always made sure his clerk of works repeated those instructions back to him to ensure they were understood.

The gutters, the discharge of the rain-water, and the roofing now required attention.

The gutters, the drainage of the rainwater, and the roofing now needed attention.

“Country builders generally manage roofing but indifferently,” said Eugène, “and especially the plumber’s work. We shall therefore have to be specially careful about this important part of our undertaking; for a house badly roofed is in the same condition as a man incompletely or badly clothed. Both contract incurable maladies. We have no good roof-plumbers here, and must make up our minds to send for some from Paris. That will cost us a little more; but it will be a saving in the end, for we shall avoid incessant repairs and irreparable bungling. As for the slating, we will fasten it with hooks.

“Country builders usually handle roofing but not very well,” said Eugène, “and especially the plumber’s work. So, we need to be extra careful about this crucial part of our project; because a house with a poor roof is like a man who is dressed poorly or incompletely. Both end up with serious issues. We don’t have any good roof plumbers here, so we’ll need to bring some in from Paris. That will cost us a bit more upfront, but it will save us money in the long run, because we’ll avoid constant repairs and terrible mistakes. As for the slating, we’ll attach it with hooks.

“Slates are commonly fastened on deal battens, by means of nails; but to drive these nails into the laths the slate must have two holes made in it, since each is secured by two nails. With the force of the wind the slates shake about, make the holes larger, and ultimately slip off the head of the nails; then they fall. To replace a single slate several must be removed, and the last must necessarily be pierced below the overlap, that is, in the uncovered part of the slate. With hooks we avoid these disadvantages, and anyone can repair the roof. These[Pg 232] hooks are made of copper, which allows them to be opened and closed many times without breaking them. Moreover, the slate, being held down at its bottom end, cannot rattle with the wind, and nothing can displace it. In the ordinary mode of (French) slating there are—one over the other—three thicknesses of slate. The exposed part being 4½ inches—the slate is then 13½ inches long. The laths are nailed on the rafters 4½ inches apart from centre to centre (Fig. 60). Thus at A you see the position of the laths and that of each slate. The hooks lie upon the under slate, in the interval between the intermediate slates, and clip the lower end of the outer slate. At B I show you, in section half full size, the lath, C, nailed upon the rafters, and the hook, whose point is driven into the lath, with its return, E, clipping the exposed end of the slate. So much for the plain parts of the roof; and now for the returns—the hips and valleys. Where these occur, as the slates are not flexible, we must make use of lead or zinc; the first of these metals is much the best, and is less liable to crack and to oxidize. We shall cover the hips with short lengths of lead bent to the form, nailed, and worked in with the courses of slate. In the valleys we shall lay a sheet of lead, on which at either side the slates will lie.

"Slates are usually attached to wooden battens with nails, but to insert these nails into the battens, the slate needs to have two holes drilled in it, as each slate is fixed with two nails. When the wind blows, the slates can shake, enlarging the holes, and eventually slipping off the nails; then they fall. To replace one slate, several others need to be taken off, and the last one must be pierced below the overlap, meaning in the part of the slate that’s not covered. Using hooks helps avoid these issues, allowing anyone to repair the roof easily. These hooks are made of copper, which makes them durable, enabling them to be opened and closed repeatedly without breaking. Furthermore, since the slate is secured at its bottom end, it won’t rattle in the wind, and nothing can shift it. In the standard method of (French) slating, there are three layers of slate stacked on top of each other. The visible part is 4½ inches, so the slate measures 13½ inches in length. The battens are nailed to the rafters with a distance of 4½ inches between their centers (Fig. 60). At A, you can see the positioning of the battens and each slate. The hooks rest on the under slate, in the spaces between the other slates, and secure the lower end of the outer slate. At B, I illustrate with a half-sized section the batten, C, nailed to the rafters, along with the hook, which is embedded in the batten, with its return, E, clamping the visible end of the slate. That covers the basic parts of the roof; now for the returns—the hips and valleys. In these areas, since the slates are rigid, we have to use lead or zinc; lead is significantly better as it’s less prone to cracking and oxidizing. We will cover the hips with short lengths of lead molded to shape, nailed down, and integrated with the slate layers. In the valleys, we will place a sheet of lead on which the slates will rest on either side."

“But you will study the manifold details of roofing when the men are at work, for labour of this kind requires minute care. We have to struggle with a subtle foe—water. It discovers every interstice, and takes advantage of the least negligence to make its inroads; and so much the more since, driven by the wind, it acquires a power and an activity which it would not possess if it fell vertically, like properly-behaved rain. So in climates where showers are gentle and fall only in calm weather, the roofs are simple, and do not require the innumerable precautions demanded among ourselves; and that is why I adopt the plan of[Pg 233] securing the slates with hooks. Here the westerly and north-westerly winds are violent, and drive the rain and snow under an angle of 30°. Slates held only at the top do not lie close, and tilt up at their outer extremities, and the rain and snow soon get in. That is also the reason why we have given our roofs an angle of 60°; for the rain, when violently driven, generally descends perpendicularly to this inclination, and there is then no danger of its getting under the outer extremity of the slates.

"But you'll examine the various details of roofing while the workers are at it, because this kind of labor requires precise attention. We have to face a sneaky enemy—water. It finds every tiny gap and exploits even the slightest oversight to invade; and this is especially true since, driven by the wind, it gains a force and speed that it wouldn’t have if it fell straight down like well-behaved rain. In areas where showers are light and only occur in calm weather, the roofs are simple and don’t need the countless precautions we have to take. That’s why I use the method of securing the slates with hooks. Here, the westerly and north-westerly winds are strong, pushing rain and snow at a 30° angle. Slates that are only secured at the top don’t lie flat and lift at their outer edges, allowing rain and snow to get in quickly. That’s also why we’ve designed our roofs with a 60° angle; when the rain is driven hard, it usually falls perpendicular to this slope, preventing it from getting underneath the outer edge of the slates."

Fig. 60.

Fig. 60.

[Pg 234]

[Pg 234]

“The arrangement of the gutters also requires great attention. Their channel should have a sufficient inclination—say an inch in a yard—to ensure thorough clearance; but each length of lead or zinc forming the channel should have a drip—a slight step of 1½ to 2 inches—that the water may not find its way under the joints. These requirements necessitate our giving to the gutters a sufficient depth to get these falls from the culminating points to the discharges, or down-pipes, and that these pipes may not be too far from each other, so that the water may not have too long a course to make. Besides this, we should contrive on the front of the gutters, issues, or small spouts for overflows, so that if the snow or ice should encumber the orifices of the down-pipes the water may run off. It is, moreover, desirable to give the back of the gutter a greater height than the front, that the water may in no case get inside. This, then (Fig. 61), is the section we shall give to our gutters. The stone course, A, behind the gutter being 16 inches high, the board which forms the front of the gutter shall be 13 inches. You remember that upon the cornice-table we left a slope forming a hollow between each joint, to ventilate the bottom of the gutter and to ensure the escape of the water in the event of an overflow. Our gutter, then, will consist of an oak board, B, forming the bottom, of a side, C, forming the front, and of a roll or bead fastened on the top edge of the front. This front board is to be slightly inclined, that the lead lining may have less tendency to give down.

The layout of the gutters also needs careful attention. Their channel should have a noticeable slope—about an inch for every yard—to ensure full drainage; each segment of lead or zinc that makes up the channel should have a drip—a small step of 1½ to 2 inches—so that water doesn’t seep under the joints. These requirements mean we need to make the gutters deep enough to manage the slopes from the highest points to the down-pipes and ensure that these pipes aren’t spaced too far apart, so the water doesn’t have to travel too far. Additionally, we should include outlets or small spouts for overflow on the front of the gutters, so if snow or ice block the down-pipes, the water can still escape. It’s also important to make the back of the gutter taller than the front, so water never gets inside. This (Fig. 61) is the design we’ll use for our gutters. The stone course, A, behind the gutter will be 16 inches high, while the board that makes up the front of the gutter will be 13 inches. Remember that we left a slope on the cornice-table creating a dip between each joint to ventilate the bottom of the gutter and make sure water can escape in case of an overflow. Our gutter will therefore consist of an oak board, B, for the bottom, a side board, C, for the front, and a roll or bead attached to the top edge of the front. This front board will be slightly slanted, so the lead lining won’t sag as much.

“The eaves of the roof being at D, our lead lining shall be fastened at E by nailing, follow the section of the gutter, and be doubled over at its edge, G. We shall cover the front with another sheet of lead, also doubled over at its top and bottom edges, H I, with clips of zinc screwed to the board. This lead covering of the front will be held by screws, whose heads must be covered with little caps, a, [Pg 237]soldered over; then a roll, K, will cover the bead and fold under the doubled edges, G and H.

The eaves of the roof being at D, we will secure our lead lining at E by nailing it, following the profile of the gutter, and doubling it over at the edge, G. We will cover the front with another sheet of lead, which will also be doubled over at the top and bottom edges, H I, using zinc clips screwed to the board. This lead covering in the front will be secured by screws that must have their heads covered with small caps, a, soldered over; then a roll, K, will cover the bead and fold under the doubled edges, G and H.

Fig. 61.Details of the Plumber’s Work.

Fig. 61.Plumber's Work Details.

“But previously, the bottom and fronts of the gutters will be attached by means of angle-irons, L, sunk-in flush, and which are let into the wall at the bottom of the course, A. These angle-irons will come on the outside, and not on the inside of the gutter. At regular distances, in the gutter-front, we shall bore the holes for the little spouts, M, which serve as overflows.

“But before that, the bottom and fronts of the gutters will be secured with angle irons, L, set in flush, and embedded into the wall at the bottom of the course, A. These angle irons will be positioned on the outside, not on the inside of the gutter. At regular intervals in the gutter front, we will drill holes for the small spouts, M, which act as overflows."

“The down-spouts, placed in the angles of the building, will pass, at their upper orifice, through an opening contrived in the cornice, as shown by the detail, N. A funnel of lead will connect the bottom of the gutter with the orifice of the cast-iron down-pipe, and will be soldered, of course, only to the bottom of the gutter, resting loose in the part which enters the down-pipe.

“The downspouts, located at the corners of the building, will go through an opening designed in the cornice at their top, as indicated by the detail, N. A lead funnel will connect the bottom of the gutter to the opening of the cast-iron downpipe and will be soldered only to the bottom of the gutter, fitting loosely in the section that goes into the downpipe.”

“In order to obtain the necessary falls in the bottom of the gutter, we shall run in a thickness of plaster, with stops of wood for the drips at the end of each length of the lead lining, as you see at O. These sheets of lead should not exceed 10 feet each in length.

“In order to achieve the required slope in the bottom of the gutter, we will add a layer of plaster, using wooden stops for the drips at the end of each section of the lead lining, as shown at O. These lead sheets should not be longer than 10 feet each.”

“The ridges of the roofs and dormers shall also be of lead doubled and folded, as shown by the sketch, P. Two strips of lead, b, are first nailed on to cover the slate, d; then the upper half of these strips are rolled and folded into the sheet, i, which covers the ridge roll. This last piece of lead is, besides, held by screws, whose heads are covered by a bit of lead; thus there is no danger of its being displaced by the wind.

“The ridges of the roofs and dormers will also be made of lead, doubled and folded, as shown in the sketch, P. Two strips of lead, b, are first nailed down to cover the slate, d; then the upper half of these strips is rolled and folded into the sheet, i, which covers the ridge roll. This last piece of lead is also secured by screws, the heads of which are covered by a piece of lead; this way, there’s no risk of it being dislodged by the wind.”

“I describe to you here only the principal points in the roof-plumber’s work, which requires very great judgment and extreme care. You will be able to study it practically in detail when we have good plumbers at work. Some of the Parisian plumbers possess remarkable skill. They will also attend to the arrangements for the supply[Pg 238] of water in the house—the water-closets, baths, &c. But I have an important piece of advice to give you: Lead laid on oak that has not been steeped in water oxidizes very rapidly. The acetic acid which this kind of wood contains changes the sheets of lead placed on it into ceruse in a few months, especially if the wood is not sufficiently ventilated on the opposite side. I will therefore point out to you the only kinds of wood that should be employed for the gutters and ridge rolls. We will take old wood from the remains of the old mill, which when cut up will be in the condition required, for this wood has long ago discharged its sap.

I'm only covering the main points of a roof-plumber's job, which requires a lot of skill and careful attention. You'll get to learn about it in detail when we have skilled plumbers working. Some of the plumbers in Paris have outstanding talent. They will also handle the setup for water supply in the house—like toilets, baths, etc. But I have an important piece of advice: Lead placed on oak that hasn't been soaked in water oxidizes very quickly. The acetic acid in this type of wood turns the lead sheets into ceruse in just a few months, especially if the wood isn't ventilated properly on the other side. So, I'll highlight the only types of wood that should be used for gutters and ridge rolls. We'll use old wood from the remains of the old mill, which, once cut up, will be in the right condition since it has already released its sap.

“Your business, as clerk-of-works, when the plumbers begin their operations, will especially consist in having the metal that is brought in carefully weighed, and having the clippings safely put by in your presence. These men, accustomed to occupy themselves with their craft, work somewhat after the fashion of artists, and are inclined to disregard material interests; they leave their lead and tin about in every corner. You must be aware that we ought not to expose our country fellows to such strong temptations.

“Your job as the clerk of works when the plumbers start their work will mainly involve making sure that the metal they bring in is weighed carefully and that the scraps are stored safely in your presence. These guys, who are used to focusing on their craft, work a bit like artists and often overlook material concerns; they leave their lead and tin lying around everywhere. You need to understand that we shouldn't put our local workers in such tempting situations.”

“You must therefore weigh all the materials as they come in, and then the clippings. These will have to be put by in your presence in a place securely locked. The difference between the weight of metal that comes in and that of this residue is the amount with which we are chargeable, as lead work is paid by weight.

"You need to weigh all the materials as they arrive, and then the clippings. These will have to be stored in a secure, locked place in your presence. The difference between the weight of the metal that comes in and the weight of this residue is the amount we are accountable for, since payment for lead work is based on weight."

“The joiner’s contract you have brought me promises, I believe, that the flooring, doors, and window-frames shall be sent at the end of August?”

“The carpenter's contract you gave me promises, I believe, that the flooring, doors, and window frames will be delivered by the end of August?”

“Yes; and as regards the floorings, the contractor tells me that, having a good store of wood, he could begin laying them on the 1st of August.”

“Yes; and about the flooring, the contractor told me that since he has a good supply of wood, he could start laying it down on August 1st.”

“That would be too soon; we must let the whole building[Pg 239] dry a little first. He is an energetic man; if he begins on the 1st of September he will have finished by the 1st of October. We will have the painters in then, and by the 1st of December our house may be considered finished.

“That would be too soon; we need to let the entire building[Pg 239] dry a bit first. He’s a hardworking guy; if he starts on September 1st, he’ll be done by October 1st. We’ll have the painters come in after that, and by December 1st, our house should be complete.

“We must remember the marble-mason also, and send him an order for the mantelpieces. It is not too soon to think about it. Have you given the joiner the dimensions of the fireplaces?”

“We should also remember the marble worker and send him an order for the mantelpieces. It’s not too early to think about it. Have you given the carpenter the measurements of the fireplaces?”

“Yes; they were marked on the plans.”

“Yes, they were noted on the plans.”

“Well, make a copy of these plans, and we will send it to the marble-mason. For this article also we shall have to deal with a Paris house; it will be cheaper to do so, and we shall have a greater choice. It is a very troublesome thing to be obliged, as we are now-a-days, to have recourse to Paris for a hundred matters of detail with which building is concerned.

“Well, make a copy of these plans, and we’ll send it to the marble mason. For this item, we’ll also need to work with a Parisian company; it’ll be cheaper, and we’ll have more options. It’s really frustrating that we have to rely on Paris for so many details related to construction nowadays.”

“But except in certain great cities, such as Lyons, Tours, Bordeaux, Rouen, Nantes, and Marseilles, where you may find warehouses tolerably well furnished, the provinces supply nothing. It was not so formerly; this is one of the results of our excessive centralization.

“But except in some major cities, like Lyon, Tours, Bordeaux, Rouen, Nantes, and Marseille, where you can find warehouses fairly well stocked, the provinces provide nothing. It wasn't always this way; this is one of the outcomes of our extreme centralization.”

“I do my best to oppose this fatal tendency; but when time presses we must have recourse to those great centres of manufactures connected with building. If we ordered our chimney-pieces at Chateauroux, or even at Tours, we should have to wait half-a-year and pay more for them. The dealer of whom we ordered them would be sure to send to Paris for them, and we may quite as well go to the fountain-head ourselves. As regard the conservatory vestibule opening on the garden, and the shelter over the entrance, our blacksmith aided by a full detail of particulars will be able to execute them; he is an intelligent workman. Country carpenters and blacksmiths are generally competent men.”

“I do my best to fight against this harmful trend; but when time is tight, we have to turn to those major manufacturing hubs related to construction. If we ordered our fireplace mantels from Chateauroux, or even from Tours, we'd have to wait six months and pay more for them. The dealer we ordered from would definitely order them from Paris, so we might as well go directly to the source ourselves. As for the conservatory entrance that opens to the garden and the covering over the entrance, our blacksmith, with a complete set of details, will be able to make them; he’s a skilled worker. Rural carpenters and blacksmiths are usually capable tradespeople.”

“Why are they so?”

"Why are they like that?"

[Pg 240]

[Pg 240]

“Because the carpenters have kept up their organization or corporations, or at least something equivalent, and workmen have to give proof of their efficiency before they can enter the guild.

“Because the carpenters have maintained their organization or companies, or at least something similar, and workers have to demonstrate their skill before they can join the guild.

“The blacksmiths, on the other hand, have kept up their habit of working at the forge; and the forge is the soul of blacksmiths’ work. In the large towns, on the contrary, casting is all the fashion; and artisans connected with the building trades have lost their skill in the finer labour of the forge. They have become mere fitters. However there has been a reaction during the past few years, and at the Exhibition of 1867 you might have seen excellent specimens of wrought-iron. Architects also have become unaccustomed to work of this kind, and very few know how iron is wrought by the hammer, or how welding is done; so they give instructions to contractors which are incapable of being executed, or which occasion them much useless labour. Architects ought therefore to be acquainted with the methods of workmanship in every department of labour they call into requisition, and it is not at the École des Beaux-Arts they will learn that. It is now more convenient to persuade them that matter was made to obey all the fancies of the artist; that serves as an excuse for explanations, and makes teaching less complicated. The tax-payer and the owner of property who has occasion to employ an architect pay for this admirable doctrine rather dearly; while, without superior guidance, the manufactures connected with building suffer perversion in endeavouring to realize the fancies of these gentlemen.”

“The blacksmiths, on the other hand, have maintained their routine of working at the forge, which is the heart of their craft. In larger towns, however, casting has become the trend, and craftsmen in construction have lost their expertise in the finer work done at the forge. They've turned into mere fitters. Recently, though, there has been a resurgence, and at the 1867 Exhibition, you could see outstanding examples of wrought iron. Architects have also become out of touch with this kind of work, and very few know how iron is shaped with a hammer or how welding is done. As a result, they give instructions to contractors that are either impossible to execute or lead to a lot of unnecessary labor. Therefore, architects should be knowledgeable about the methods of workmanship in every area they require, and they won’t learn that at the École des Beaux-Arts. It’s now easier to convince them that materials should cater to all the artist's whims; this serves as an excuse for explanations and simplifies teaching. The taxpayer and property owner who hires an architect pay a steep price for this impressive doctrine; meanwhile, without proper guidance, the industries related to construction suffer distortions in trying to bring the visions of these gentlemen to life.”


[Pg 241]

[Pg 241]

CHAPTER XXVII.
ORDER IN FINISHING THE WORK.

The nearer the building was to completion, the more complicated did the office work become. When Paul saw that nearly all the particulars had been furnished to the contractors, he thought that he would only have to see that every part was duly constructed and put in place, according to his cousin’s instructions; but the office work, which during the first few months had taken only two or three hours a day, was becoming onerous. He had to arrange the memoranda, in order to ascertain the quantities; and that time might not be lost, he was obliged to write or give orders to the workmen, that they might come at the very moment they were wanted, and, in certain cases, work together. The joiner had sent part of the doors and window-frames, and nearly all the flooring, at the end of August. They had then to order from the blacksmith the angle-plates, door-bands and cramps; and send to Tours for ironmongery, door-handles, crémones, locks, bolts, hinges, &c.; and to secure the due execution of these orders, they had to specify the size of each article as required by the strength of the wood and the nature of the articles themselves. Eugène had gone to Tours to look out samples of the ironmongery in question. The joiner and the blacksmith had to work simultaneously, and as they were not accustomed to be hurried, it was often necessary[Pg 242] to regulate the labour of each, so that time should not be lost. The slaters had come, and were perpetually calling for the mason’s or the carpenter’s assistance. And as their daily pay was considerable, it was important not to allow them any pretext for idling.

The closer the building was to being finished, the more complicated the office work became. When Paul realized that almost all the details had been provided to the contractors, he thought he would just need to ensure that everything was properly constructed and installed according to his cousin's directions. However, the office work, which had only taken two or three hours a day in the beginning, was becoming burdensome. He had to organize the notes to determine the quantities, and to avoid wasting time, he had to write or instruct the workers to come exactly when needed and, in some cases, to work together. The carpenter had sent part of the doors and window frames, along with most of the flooring, by the end of August. They then needed to order angle-plates, door bands, and cramps from the blacksmith, and send to Tours for hardware, door handles, crémones, locks, bolts, hinges, etc.; to ensure these orders were fulfilled, they had to specify the size of each item based on the strength of the wood and the nature of the articles themselves. Eugène had gone to Tours to check samples of the necessary hardware. The carpenter and the blacksmith had to work at the same time, and since they weren't used to being rushed, it was often necessary to coordinate their work to avoid delays. The roofers had arrived and were constantly needing help from the mason or the carpenter. Since their daily pay was significant, it was crucial to not give them any excuse to slack off.

Eugène had therefore taught Paul how he should contrive every evening to get a clear idea of the labour of various kinds that was to be executed next day, and how he should allot everyone his part before quitting the works. This necessity of foreseeing everything had appeared to Paul a difficult task; but his mind had become gradually accustomed to the business, and he was acquiring the power of calculating with some ease what had to be accomplished.

Eugène had taught Paul how to figure out each evening exactly what work needed to be done the next day, and how to assign everyone their tasks before leaving the site. At first, Paul found it challenging to anticipate everything, but over time he got used to the routine and was starting to get better at estimating what needed to be done.

Eugène warned him that he must not expect help from the workmen in thus arranging things methodically; and he had in fact observed that most of them, when any piece of work was to be begun, could not set about it, because those whose duty it was to put things in readiness for them had not received notice to do so, and had not made the necessary arrangements. Then the time would be wasted in running after one another.

Eugène warned him that he shouldn’t expect help from the workers in organizing things this way; and he had actually noticed that most of them, when it was time to start a task, couldn’t get to it because those responsible for getting things ready hadn’t been informed to do so and hadn’t made the necessary preparations. So, time would end up being wasted as they ran around chasing after each other.

“The workman,” Eugène would say to Paul, “is naturally improvident, as are all those who have acquired the habit of being commanded by others, and have no responsibility of their own. He is not unaware of what will be necessary for accomplishing such or such a piece of work; yet he waits till the moment it will have to be done without troubling himself whether the conditions required for its accomplishment will be present or not. When, therefore, labourers in several departments are working together, method, order, and foresight are demanded on the part of the architect; otherwise much time is lost; the workmen hinder instead of helping one another; each does his own work without concerning himself as to whether it is at the[Pg 243] fitting time or not. The same piece of work may have to be recommenced twice or thrice.”

“The worker,” Eugène would say to Paul, “is naturally careless, like everyone who has gotten used to being directed by others and has no responsibilities of their own. He knows what needs to be done for a specific task; however, he waits until the last minute to take action without worrying about whether the necessary conditions will be in place or not. So, when laborers from different departments are working together, the architect needs to enforce method, order, and foresight; otherwise, a lot of time is wasted. The workers end up obstructing rather than assisting each other; each one focuses on their own tasks without considering if it's the right time to do them. The same task might have to be started over two or three times.”

The workmen who were to set the grates and fix the warming apparatus had come; and though every provision had been made during the building for the passage of the flues, for the ventilation and the hot pipes of the warming apparatus, these workmen were continually calling for the mason. But as Eugène had pre-arranged everything for the purpose, he had enjoined his clerk of the works not to allow these workmen to make holes in every direction for the passage of their pipes or other arrangements, as they had been accustomed to do, without respect for the building and the bearings of the floors. But the passages were not obvious, especially as they took very little trouble to look for them, so that Branchu was obliged to go and show them how they lay, and open the orifices, enlarging some and contracting others. Then the plumbers set about laying the water-pipes, and the walls had to be pierced for them, and cramp-holes made. The joiners, too, would be requiring the mason to cramp in the window and door-frames. It was necessary to mediate between these conflicting interests, for Branchu was getting confused, and was going from one set of workmen to another without getting anything finished. This period of his work therefore made Paul acquainted with many details in building to which he had scarcely paid attention a few months before.

The workers who were supposed to install the grates and set up the heating system had arrived; and even though everything had been arranged during construction for the ducts, ventilation, and the hot pipes for the heating system, these workers kept asking for the mason. But since Eugène had planned everything in advance, he instructed his site manager not to let these workers drill holes everywhere for their pipes or other setups, as they usually did, without considering the integrity of the building and the support of the floors. However, the pathways weren’t obvious, especially since they didn’t bother to look for them, so Branchu had to go show them where they were, opening the openings, making some larger and others smaller. Then the plumbers started laying the water pipes, which required making holes in the walls and creating cramp-holes. The carpenters also needed the mason to cramp in the window and door frames. It was necessary to mediate between these conflicting needs because Branchu was getting overwhelmed, moving from one group of workers to another without finishing anything. This part of his work made Paul aware of many construction details that he hadn’t really paid much attention to just a few months earlier.

At the end of September the joiners’ work was considerably advanced, and the roofing quite finished, so that soon the painting alone would remain to occupy attention. The memoranda were in due order, so that the accounts could be readily made out.

At the end of September, the carpenters’ work was mostly complete, and the roofing was entirely finished, so soon only the painting would need to be done. The notes were organized properly, so the accounts could be easily prepared.

Meantime, M. de Gandelau was thinking of sending his son back to the Lyceum at the end of the vacation; it was necessary for him to complete his studies; and though[Pg 244] this year had not been lost to Paul, he was still too young to begin to study architecture, supposing he intended to adopt that profession. The question was therefore brought forward one evening towards the end of September, en famille. Eugène remarked, and with reason, that Paul had learned all he could in works on this small scale; that if he were to remain longer in the country he would see the painters prepare the grounds and put on the successive coats of paint, but this could not be of much use to him. Besides, as Madame Marie was not to return till the spring, it was desirable to allow the building to dry before proceeding with the interior decorations and upholstery.

Meanwhile, Mr. de Gandelau was considering sending his son back to the Lyceum at the end of the vacation; it was important for him to finish his studies. Although this year hadn’t been wasted on Paul, he was still too young to start studying architecture, assuming he wanted to pursue that career. This topic came up one evening toward the end of September, in a family discussion. Eugène pointed out, rightly so, that Paul had learned all he could from working on such a small scale; if he stayed in the countryside any longer, he would just watch the painters prepare the surfaces and apply the layers of paint, which wouldn’t be very beneficial for him. Additionally, since Madame Marie wouldn’t be back until spring, it was best to let the building dry before moving on to the interior decorations and upholstery.

The idea of returning to college was not very agreeable to Paul after a year of this active life, passed as it was almost entirely in the open air; but reflection taught him that it would not be right to do otherwise. Moreover, Monsieur and Madame de Gandelau had business to attend to in Paris, and would pass a part of the winter there.

The thought of going back to college didn't sit well with Paul after a year of such an active life spent mostly outdoors; however, he realized that it wouldn't be right to do anything else. Additionally, Monsieur and Madame de Gandelau had business to take care of in Paris and would be spending part of the winter there.

It was therefore decided that Eugène should remain during the time required for getting the work finished, so that no risks should be incurred in the winter, and that Paul should set out with his parents at the beginning of October.

It was decided that Eugène would stay until the work was completed, to avoid any risks during the winter, and that Paul would leave with his parents at the beginning of October.

The painting would not be begun till after the severe frosts. Eugène undertook to have this operation superintended, and to visit the works himself during his stay at Chateauroux, where business of some importance required his presence towards the end of the winter.

The painting wouldn't start until after the harsh frosts. Eugène took it upon himself to oversee this task and planned to check on the work during his time in Chateauroux, where he needed to be for some important business toward the end of winter.

All being thus arranged, Paul, with a somewhat heavy heart, quitted his beloved house on the 2nd of October, and returned to the Lyceum. Most of his comrades, like himself, had passed nearly the whole year away from Paris, and their studies had been suspended; but very few had employed their time usefully. So when Paul related what he had done during these twelve months, many[Pg 245] laughed at him, and some did not believe him; but from that time forward he was called by no other name than Monsieur l’Architecte.

With everything set, Paul, feeling a bit down, left his beloved house on October 2nd and went back to the Lyceum. Most of his friends, like him, had spent almost the entire year away from Paris, and their studies had been put on hold; but very few had made good use of their time. So when Paul shared what he had accomplished during those twelve months, many[Pg 245] laughed at him, and some didn't believe him; but from that point on, he was known only as Monsieur l’Architecte.

During this year he had made some advance in learning to reason, in reflecting before he spoke, and in listening patiently to those who knew more than himself, so he found his old companions rather shallow and trifling. On the occasion of a holiday he made a remark to this effect to his father, with a certain mixture of vanity and regret. M. de Gandelau guessed his mood of mind, and did not let slip this occasion of correcting the reprehensible side of his thoughts.

During this year, he had made some progress in learning to think critically, pausing before he spoke, and listening patiently to those who were more knowledgeable than he was, so he found his old friends to be rather superficial and trivial. On a holiday, he mentioned this to his father, feeling a mix of pride and regret. M. de Gandelau sensed his state of mind and took the opportunity to address the negative aspects of his thoughts.

“It is possible,” said he, “that your companions have not had the good fortune you have enjoyed of finding some one to take the trouble to set them to active work, and teach them something of the practical side of life. But it would be foolish in you, and decidedly hurtful to your mind and character, to despise those who are less informed than yourself in regard to a single branch of knowledge. Who knows whether in other matters they have not acquired a superiority you do not appreciate? It should not be our object in the world (and the Lyceum is a little world not unlike the great one), to shut ourselves up in our own knowledge and thus flatter our vanity, but to discover that of others and endeavour to profit by it. It should not be our object to shine by our knowledge, or fancied knowledge, and so occasion envy on the part of the foolish, and a smile on that of people of sense, but to elicit the knowledge possessed by others. This course of conduct secures us a double advantage: we avoid making enemies, and we increase our store of knowledge.

“It’s possible,” he said, “that your friends haven't had the same luck you’ve had in finding someone to help them get active and teach them about the practical side of life. But it would be foolish and quite damaging to your own mind and character to look down on those who aren’t as informed as you are in just one area of knowledge. Who knows if they haven’t gained skills in other areas that you might not recognize? We shouldn’t aim in this world (and the Lyceum is a small world not unlike the big one) to isolate ourselves in our own knowledge to boost our egos, but rather to discover what others know and learn from it. We shouldn’t try to stand out because of our knowledge or perceived knowledge, causing envy among the ignorant and a smirk from the wise, but instead to draw out the knowledge that others possess. This approach offers us a double benefit: we avoid creating enemies and we expand our own understanding.”

“It is not at all surprising that your companions know less than you about the building of a house; but you must allow that your knowledge of the matter is but small; and perhaps on other subjects they have more correct and complete[Pg 246] ideas than you have. It would have been ridiculous to conceal from your companions the nature of your occupations during your stay in the country; but why should you make much of it? If any of them who has a particular desire for information should put questions to you about it, and if you see that he is really interested in your answers, satisfy his desire; but in the presence of people who care nothing about the matter, be reserved, or else you will get laughed at. There is a vulgar phrase which exactly expresses this fact. We say: people are fond of “trotting out” those who are vain of their knowledge, that is, they get them to talk, not to satisfy a legitimate curiosity, but to make fun of them. Bear this in mind, for it is true in the Lyceum as well as everywhere else.

“It’s not surprising that your friends know less than you about building a house; but you have to admit your knowledge on the subject is pretty limited too. And maybe they have more accurate and complete views on other topics than you do. It would be foolish to hide what you’ve been doing while you’ve been in the country from your friends; but why make a big deal out of it? If someone is genuinely curious and asks you about it, feel free to share; but around people who don’t care, keep it to yourself, or you’ll just end up being laughed at. There's a saying that sums this up perfectly: people love to “show off” those who are proud of their knowledge, meaning they get them to talk, not out of real curiosity, but just to tease them. Keep this in mind, because it’s true in the Lyceum as well as everywhere else.[Pg 246]

“If your mind is really more developed than that of your comrades, there is an easy way of making the fact apparent to all, that is, by acquiring more rapidly than they do the instruction equally offered to all. Get to the top of all your classes, and nobody will laugh at you; but all will observe that this year, which has been a sterile one to so many others, has been really a fruitful one to you.”

“If your mind is truly more advanced than your peers, there’s an easy way to show it: learn faster than they do from the same opportunities. Be at the top of all your classes, and no one will mock you; instead, everyone will see that this year, which has been unproductive for so many others, has actually been very fruitful for you.”

Paul took the hint, and when he returned to the Lyceum he left off talking about architecture, and gave his mind to the work before him. Consequently, he proved that his mind had been developed, and on New Year’s Day brought home most satisfactory testimonials of progress.

Paul got the message, and when he got back to the Lyceum, he stopped discussing architecture and focused on the task at hand. As a result, he showed that he had grown intellectually, and on New Year’s Day, he brought home some really positive evidence of his progress.

The nickname his schoolfellows had bestowed on him, however, still stuck to him.

The nickname his classmates had given him, however, still stuck with him.

“Ah, well!” he would say to himself, when they called him M. l’Architecte; “I shall make good their words, for I am resolved to become an architect in earnest.”

“Ah, well!” he would say to himself when they called him M. l’Architecte; “I’m going to prove them right because I’m determined to become a serious architect.”


[Pg 247]

[Pg 247]

CHAPTER XXVIII.
THE HOUSE-WARMING.

Matters had been proceeding according to arrangement; the painters’ work, begun at the commencement of February, in fine weather, was finished in April, and likewise all the accessories. M. de Gandelau, who had returned to his estate at the end of January, had caused the small park round the house to be planted, and had ordered the most indispensable furniture, wishing to leave his daughter to make choice herself of those articles which would express her own particular taste.

Things were going as planned; the painters started their work in early February during good weather and completed it in April, along with all the finishing touches. M. de Gandelau, who returned to his estate at the end of January, had the small park around the house planted and ordered the essential furniture, wanting to let his daughter choose the items that would reflect her own personal style.

Madame Marie had announced April as the time of her return, and subsequently May. In the correspondence between her mother and herself nothing had been said about the house since the war. Madame Marie had probably not regarded as serious what had been written to her respecting it; and the disastrous events of the years 1870 and 1871 seemed to have made all parties forget the project.

Madame Marie had mentioned that she would return in April, then pushed it to May. In the letters exchanged between her and her mother, nothing had been discussed about the house since the war. Madame Marie likely didn't take the comments about it seriously; the unfortunate events of 1870 and 1871 seemed to have caused everyone to forget about the project.

Paul had set his heart on a surprise, and had entreated Madame de Gandelau to say nothing about the house to her daughter. And we may be sure that Madame de Gandelau had readily acquiesced in his wish.

Paul was determined to plan a surprise and had asked Madame de Gandelau to keep quiet about the house to her daughter. We can be sure that Madame de Gandelau had gladly agreed to his request.

They therefore wrote to Madame Marie that the family would not assemble at the château till Whitsuntide, and that as her father had some journeys in prospect in the[Pg 248] interior, she need not hurry herself about returning to France before that date. Madame de Gandelau received, on the 8th of May, a letter informing her that her daughter and her husband would reach the station nearest to the château on the morning of the 19th, Whit Sunday.

They wrote to Madame Marie that the family wouldn’t gather at the château until Whitsuntide, and since her father had some trips planned in the[Pg 248] interior, she didn’t need to rush back to France before that date. Madame de Gandelau received a letter on May 8th saying that her daughter and her husband would arrive at the station closest to the château on the morning of the 19th, Whit Sunday.

Great was Paul’s joy when he received the news. He would be able to be at home and enjoy his sister’s surprise, for he had been sadly afraid she might come while he was at the Lyceum. That would have been a dreadful disappointment to him. So he worked harder than ever during the days between that and Whitsuntide! He had set his heart on giving pleasure to all at home by carrying off one of the highest prizes.

Paul was overjoyed when he got the news. He would be able to stay home and enjoy his sister’s surprise because he had been worried she might arrive while he was at the Lyceum. That would have been a huge disappointment for him. So he worked harder than ever in the days leading up to Whitsuntide! He was determined to bring joy to everyone at home by winning one of the top prizes.

The holidays impatiently waited for, at length arrived. M. de Gandelau, on account of the distance, and Paul’s satisfactory progress, had obtained permission for his son to return on Saturday morning. Paul therefore reached the château at noon, after more than seven months’ absence. We need not state that Eugène had been invited to this family fête. Paul would hardly take time to eat his breakfast, he was so impatient to see the house.

The holidays they had been eagerly waiting for finally arrived. M. de Gandelau, considering the distance and Paul’s good progress, had gotten permission for his son to come back on Saturday morning. So, Paul arrived at the château at noon, after being away for more than seven months. We should mention that Eugène had been invited to this family fête. Paul could barely take the time to eat his breakfast; he was so eager to see the house.

“Don’t be in such a hurry,” his mother said more than once. “The house won’t run away.”

“Don’t rush so much,” his mother said more than once. “The house isn’t going anywhere.”

During breakfast, his father put one or two questions to him respecting his studies; but Paul gave only short answers, and then returned to the subject of the house, overwhelming his cousin with inquiries.

During breakfast, his dad asked him a couple of questions about his studies; but Paul just answered briefly and then shifted the conversation to the house, bombarding his cousin with questions.

“And the woodwork, is that a success? And the painting? What colour is the drawing-room? And the plumber—has he put the cresting on the roof that he promised?”

“And how's the woodwork? Did it turn out well? What about the painting? What color is the living room? And has the plumber installed the cresting on the roof like he said he would?”

“You are going to see all that directly, and before night you will have plenty of time to examine everything in detail. A little patience! Patience is the very first virtue of an architect.”

“You're going to see all of that for yourself, and before night falls, you'll have plenty of time to look over everything in detail. Just a little patience! Patience is the very first virtue of an architect.”

The aspect of the new house was much changed since[Pg 249] Paul’s departure. The ground had been cleared and neatly gravelled. The borders exhibited their spring attire; and as some old trees had been left standing in the neighbourhood of the house, it had quite the look of a place already occupied. Paul could not help jumping for joy on seeing how charming and picturesque the building was. On turning down into the valley, he began to run, eager for a nearer view, and Eugène reached the steps only a few minutes after him. Paul had seen neither the shelter at the entrance, nor the conservatory opening into the billiard-room. The lead-work was not quite finished when he left, and the vanes and cresting were not put up. The dormer windows were not surmounted by their finials. The casements were just put in, but not glazed. These last additions are like the bordering round a drawing, or the frame inclosing a picture; to unpractised eyes the last accessory seems to put every part in its proper place, clears the whole, and gives it the unity that seemed to be wanting.

The new house looked very different since[Pg 249] Paul had left. The grounds had been cleared and neatly graveled. The flower beds were in full bloom for spring, and since some old trees were still around the house, it had the appearance of a home that's already lived in. Paul couldn't help but jump for joy when he saw how charming and picturesque the building looked. As he went down into the valley, he started running, excited to see it up close, and Eugène arrived just a few minutes after him. Paul hadn’t noticed the entrance shelter or the conservatory that connected to the billiard room. The leadwork wasn’t quite finished when he left, and the vanes and cresting hadn’t been installed. The dormer windows didn't have their finials yet. The casements were just put in, but they weren't glazed. These final touches are like the border around a drawing or the frame around a picture; to untrained eyes, these last details seem to put everything in order, clarify the whole scene, and give it the unity that it was lacking.

Paul was satisfied with the exterior aspect.

Paul was pleased with how it looked on the outside.

The interior, though simple, according to M. de Gandelau’s express instructions, was in good taste; there was nothing to be seen in the way of plaster ornament or gilding. The entrance-hall was surrounded by a low oak wainscot, forming part with the door-cases. The wood of the latter and of the wainscot had preserved its natural colour, and was simply dressed with linseed-oil and wax. Above the wainscot, the walls, painted stone-colour, set off by a few red lines, gave a neat and inviting aspect to the entrance. The drawing-room was surrounded by a wainscot five feet high, painted white; the fireplace, wide and lofty, could warm a numerous circle. The jambs of the fireplace were cased with wood, and on the lofty mantelpiece, in an oaken frame, was prettily painted a bird’s-eye view of M. de Gandelau’s estate. The ceiling, with its two beams[Pg 250] and joists, painted in light tones, set off by black and white lines, seemed to enlarge the apartment, and gave it a warm and habitable appearance, presenting on hot days lights and shades of an amber tint. The wall between the ceiling and the wainscot was hung with painted canvas. The chimney-piece stood out in bold relief on this back-ground. The entrance end of the drawing-room would have been rather sombre if the wide opening into the billiard-room had not flooded it with light, softened by the verdure of the plants within the little conservatory. But what gave the drawing-room a character which fascinated Paul at once, was the bay-window, all brilliant with light, and furnished with a chintz-covered divan. The billiard-room, also, was surrounded by a wainscoting of unpainted oak, and the same painted hangings. A portière closing over the bay-window made it serve the purpose of a little boudoir, whence there was a charming view on three sides. The plants placed in the conservatory, transmitted on the south side only a softened and tranquil light into the billiard-room. The dining-room had been decorated almost in the same style as the billiard-room, and two large oaken sideboards formed part with the wainscoting in the two recesses reserved for them.

The interior, while simple, was stylish thanks to M. de Gandelau’s specific instructions; there were no plaster decorations or gold accents visible. The entryway was surrounded by a low oak wainscot, integrated with the door frames. The wood of both the frames and the wainscot retained its natural color and was only treated with linseed oil and wax. Above the wainscot, the walls were painted a stone color, accented with a few red lines, giving the entrance a neat and inviting look. The drawing room featured a five-foot high wainscot painted white; the wide and tall fireplace could comfortably warm a large gathering. The sides of the fireplace were paneled in wood, and a bird’s-eye view of M. de Gandelau’s estate was beautifully painted on the high mantelpiece within an oak frame. The ceiling, adorned with two beams and joists painted in light shades with black and white lines, made the room feel larger while creating a warm and welcoming atmosphere, with amber tones lighting up the space on hot days. The area between the ceiling and the wainscot was covered in painted canvas, making the mantelpiece stand out prominently against this background. The entrance end of the drawing room would have felt a bit dark if not for the wide opening into the billiard room that flooded it with light, softened by the greenery of plants in the small conservatory. What instantly captivated Paul was the bay window, awash in light and lined with a chintz-covered daybed. The billiard room also had unpainted oak wainscoting and the same painted hangings. A portière over the bay window turned it into a cozy nook with charming views on three sides. The plants in the conservatory allowed only a gentle and calming light to filter into the billiard room from the south. The dining room was decorated almost identically to the billiard room, featuring two large oak sideboards that blended seamlessly with the wainscoting in the designated niches.

Paul was eager to run up stairs to see his sister’s rooms. Hung entirely with Indian chintz, with a plain brown dado, this apartment exhibited great simplicity. The ceiling, however, treated like those of the ground-floor, gave it an original and pleasing aspect.

Paul was excited to run upstairs to check out his sister’s rooms. Completely decorated with Indian chintz and a plain brown dado, this space showed a lot of simplicity. The ceiling, however, similar to those on the ground floor, gave it a unique and appealing look.

Paul wanted to see everything, and at the end of an hour, his cousin having made an appointment with some workmen to give them orders about details, left him to wander at will in the house.

Paul wanted to see everything, and after an hour, his cousin, having arranged a meeting with some workers to give them instructions about details, left him free to explore the house.

The sun was already low when they thought of returning to the château.

The sun was already setting when they considered heading back to the château.

“Well, my young cousin, are you satisfied with your[Pg 251] work? Have things been done during your absence as you intended they should be?”

“Well, my young cousin, are you satisfied with your[Pg 251] work? Did things get done while you were away the way you wanted them to?”

“I wish it was really my work,” replied Paul; “and I regret that I could not follow it to the end, for now I see all finished, it seems to me as if there was scarcely anything done when I went away.”

“I wish it were really my work,” Paul replied. “I regret that I couldn't see it through to the end, because now that it’s all finished, it feels like hardly anything was done when I left.”

“It is with buildings, my dear fellow, as with all other human productions. You know the saying: ‘Finis coronat opus.’ Finishing is everything. Finishing may not require the greatest labour and knowledge, but it does, perhaps, require the highest degree of persistency, method, and care, as I think I have already told you. You have been really useful to me during the building—I may say so without flattery, because you have thrown your energy and your whole mind into the endeavour to understand the instructions I have given, and to see that they were duly executed. But you would have had nothing to occupy you seriously while the work was being finished, since most of the recent additions came from the work-shops ready made; you have nothing to regret, therefore; you would have lost your time here, whereas you have, it seems, employed it well at the Lyceum.”

“It’s like buildings, my friend, just like any other human creations. You know the saying: ‘Finis coronat opus.’ Finishing is everything. It may not need the most effort and expertise, but it does require a high level of determination, organization, and attention to detail, as I believe I’ve already mentioned. You’ve been truly helpful to me during the construction—I can say that without flattering you, because you put your energy and focus into understanding the instructions I provided and making sure they were properly carried out. However, you wouldn’t have had much to occupy you while the work was being wrapped up, since most of the recent additions came from the workshops already completed; so you have nothing to regret. You would have wasted your time here, but it seems you’ve made good use of it at the Lyceum.”

“I never saw any hangings like this painted canvas before; they look very well; one might fancy they were tapestry.”

“I’ve never seen any hangings like this painted canvas before; they look great; you might think they were tapestry.”

“Yes, I cannot imagine why these kind of hangings, which were formerly much used, should have been abandoned; for it is clear that everybody could not have Flemish or Gobelin tapestry, any more than Cordova leather. Those things were very costly; whereas, painted canvas hangings do not cost much more than wall papers and less than upholstery hangings, chintz excepted. But it would scarcely do to hang a drawing-room or a dining-room with chintz; it does not look substantial enough, though it may be well enough for a bedroom. In the[Pg 252] principal apartments hangings should have a velvety, warm, substantial effect.”

“Yes, I can't imagine why these kinds of hangings, which were once very popular, have fallen out of use; because it’s clear that not everyone could afford Flemish or Gobelin tapestries, just like Cordova leather. Those items were really expensive; meanwhile, painted canvas hangings don’t cost much more than wallpaper and are cheaper than upholstery fabrics, except for chintz. But it wouldn't be appropriate to decorate a drawing room or dining room with chintz; it doesn’t look sturdy enough, even though it might be fine for a bedroom. In the main rooms, hangings should have a rich, warm, substantial effect.”

“And are these of painted canvas substantial?”

“And are these painted canvases substantial?”

“In appearance, certainly, and in reality also; in proof of which you may see at Rheims some dating from the fifteenth century, and which are perfectly well preserved.”

“In terms of looks, definitely, and in reality too; as evidence of this, you can see some in Rheims that date back to the fifteenth century, and they are perfectly well preserved.”

“And how are these hangings made?”

“And how are these hangings made?”

“Canvas cloths are taken, either cross-woven or twilled, of coarse texture, manufactured for the purpose, rather like the cloths of which sacks are made. These cloths are stretched on a floor with tacks; then they size them, that is to say, give them a coating of leather size, to which is added a little Spanish white. Then when this coat is dry they proceed to paint them in distemper, as for theatre decorations. On this ground anything we choose can be painted—diapers, such as we have adopted here, and which do not cost much, as we stencil them; or ornaments, landscapes, flowers, and even figures. The cost of the material is trifling, and the value of the hangings depends on the artist’s work. When dry, the cloths are rolled up, and can be sent anywhere at small expense; then on the spot they are stretched again on very thin frames, called tapestry stretchers. There is, therefore, a space between the wall and the hanging, which is necessary in the country where sized papers always spoil; and this is so much the more convenient, as if the rooms are not warmed in winter, and if damp is feared, the cloths can be taken down, rolled up, and put in a dry place, to be replaced in the spring, as we do with tapestry.”

Canvas cloths are used, either cross-woven or twilled, made of coarse texture specifically for this purpose, similar to the fabric that bags are made from. These cloths are stretched out on a floor with tacks; then they are sized, meaning they receive a coating of leather size mixed with a bit of Spanish white. Once this coating is dry, they are painted with distemper, like for theater backdrops. On this base, we can paint whatever we like—patterns, like the ones we use here, which aren't too expensive since we stencil them; or decorative elements, landscapes, flowers, and even figures. The cost of the material is minimal, and the value of the hangings relies on the artist's work. Once dry, the cloths can be rolled up and easily sent anywhere; then, on-site, they are stretched again on very thin frames called tapestry stretchers. This allows for a gap between the wall and the hanging, which is important in areas where sized papers tend to spoil; it’s especially useful if the rooms aren’t heated in winter, allowing for the cloths to be taken down, rolled up, and stored in a dry place until spring, similar to how we handle tapestry.

“I thought when I opened the drawing-room door that it was tapestry.”

“I thought when I opened the drawing-room door that it was a tapestry.”

“The coarse texture of the cloth does in fact resemble the tapestry stitch, and the painting in distemper has the flat tone of wool. On the whole, the hangings of our house scarcely cost more than the high-priced papers that[Pg 253] are made now-a-days, and they last longer, to say nothing of our being sure not to see our own patterns on everybody’s walls.”

“The rough texture of the fabric really does look like tapestry stitch, and the painting in distemper has the flat look of wool. Overall, the hangings in our home barely cost more than the expensive wallpapers that[Pg 253] are made these days, and they last longer, not to mention we won’t see our own patterns on everyone else’s walls.”

“Very true; often on going into a drawing-room I have recognized a paper which I had seen elsewhere. But tell me, cousin, you have had lightning-conductors put up, have you not?”

“That's absolutely true; many times when I've walked into a living room, I've spotted a piece of paper I've seen before. But tell me, cousin, you’ve installed lightning rods, right?”

“Certainly; it was prudent to do so. I have had two constructed: one at the top of the staircase, and the other on the centre-point of the main-ridge.”

“Definitely; it was wise to do that. I’ve had two built: one at the top of the stairs and the other at the center of the main ridge.”

“Would not one have been enough?”

“Wouldn't one have sufficed?”

“I think not; because lightning-conductors only protect the points inclosed in a cone of which they are the summit: at least, this is the recognized theory. For between ourselves, physicists are not quite agreed respecting the effects of the electric fluid, the relative efficiency of conductors, and the precautions to be used in putting them up. I rely on my own experience, which has proved to me that no building, however exposed, has been struck by lightning when the lightning-rods were numerous, made of good conductors, put in communication with each other, and with their lower extremity dipping in water, or very damp earth. You know that water is a conductor of electricity; if the lightning-rod terminates in dry earth the electricity accumulates, and produces return shocks, which are very dangerous. The same effect results if the conducting-wire is interrupted; the lightning-rod then produces the effect of a Leyden jar—it becomes charged, and is more dangerous than useful. Sockets with glass insulators have also been recommended; but I have never observed that lightning-conductors otherwise well arranged caused accidents for want of insulators. I consider this precaution superfluous, because the fluid seeks the most direct path. The rod properly arranged is that path; so it should not make rapid angular turns, but as far as possible[Pg 254] be conducted by the shortest way, and that which is nearest the vertical, into the damp soil.”

“I don’t think so; because lightning rods only protect areas inside a cone where they are the peak: at least, that's the general belief. Honestly, physicists don’t fully agree on how the electric charge works, how effective conductors are, or on the best practices for installing them. I trust my own experience, which shows that no building, no matter how exposed, has been struck by lightning when there are plenty of lightning rods that are made of good conductors, connected to each other, and with their lower ends in water or very moist soil. You know that water conducts electricity; if the lightning rod ends in dry soil, the electricity builds up and can create return shocks, which are really dangerous. The same issue happens if the conductor is broken; the lightning rod acts like a Leyden jar—it gets charged and becomes more dangerous than helpful. Some have suggested using sockets with glass insulators; however, I’ve never seen lightning rods that were set up correctly cause accidents due to lack of insulators. I think this precaution is unnecessary because the charge follows the most direct route. The correctly positioned rod is that route; so it shouldn’t make sharp angles but should be guided as directly as possible, and as close to vertical as possible, into the damp ground.”

At dinner nothing was talked about but the new house and Madame Marie’s arrival. There was a lively discussion about the way of making the surprise complete. The ceremonial, to which M. de Gandelau had given some thought, was soon arranged. The contractors and craftsmen of the neighbourhood who had worked at the house were invited, and a dinner was to be provided for them in the garden. The gentleman who had given Paul lessons, the mayor, the curé of the parish, and some neighbours and friends, among others M. Durosay, who had again made his appearance in the neighbourhood, were asked to be present at the house-warming. The workmen had not been forgotten—they were all to receive some gratuity. There was to be a ball in the new park for all the country people, with the customary refreshments; and in the morning the poor of the parish were to receive gratuities in kind.

At dinner, they talked only about the new house and Madame Marie’s arrival. There was an animated discussion on how to make the surprise perfect. The ceremony, which M. de Gandelau had thought about, was quickly organized. The local contractors and craftsmen who worked on the house were invited, and a dinner was arranged for them in the garden. The gentleman who taught Paul, the mayor, the parish priest, and some neighbors and friends, including M. Durosay, who had reappeared in the area, were all invited to the housewarming. The workers were not forgotten—they would all receive a bonus. There would be a dance in the new park for all the locals, complete with the usual refreshments; and in the morning, the parish's poor would receive food donations.

Paul was very much afraid that his sister had some inkling of the intended surprise. He said that if no mention was made of the house, which had been talked so much of before the war, in the letters written to Madame Marie, the very silence might appear to her suspicious.

Paul was really worried that his sister might have an idea about the surprise. He said that if they didn’t mention the house, which had been discussed a lot before the war, in the letters to Madame Marie, the lack of mention might seem suspicious to her.

“He is right,” said Madame de Gandelau. “If Marie asks us what has become of the project and of the programme she sent, if she asks us how we have been occupied during the past year, we shall be obliged to prevaricate considerably. We shall contradict each other, and I really am rather averse to anything of the sort. We shall not be able to keep up a mystification for two or three hours together. Besides, Lucie is sure to let out the secret.”

“He's right,” said Madame de Gandelau. “If Marie asks us what happened to the project and the program she sent, if she wants to know how we've been busy over the past year, we'll have to lie quite a bit. We'll contradict each other, and I really don't like that kind of thing. We won't be able to maintain a ruse for two or three hours. Plus, Lucie is bound to spill the beans.”

“Oh, no!” said Lucie; “I shall say nothing, you may be quite sure.”

“Oh, no!” Lucie said. “I won’t say a thing, you can be sure of that.”

“Your eyes will speak for you, my dear child. But I will manage the matter. Leave me alone for a few[Pg 255] moments with Marie. I will tell her that Paul, for the sake of some occupation during his over long holiday, has been building a small house, with his cousin’s assistance. I shall allow her to suppose it to be a mere schoolboy’s fancy. She will think it is only done for amusement—a little building model, cleverly constructed. We can then talk to her about it without embarrassment, in a jocular way. Then after dinner we will propose to her to go and see Paul’s house.”

“Your eyes will speak for you, my dear child. But I'll handle this. Just give me some time alone with Marie. I'll tell her that Paul has been building a small house with his cousin’s help to keep himself busy during his long vacation. I'll let her think it's just a schoolboy’s whim. She’ll believe it’s merely for fun—a little model he put together. Then we can discuss it with her casually and jokingly. After dinner, we’ll suggest going to see Paul’s house.”

And so matters were arranged.

And so everything was set.

Paul slept but little during this night, though he had started very early from Paris, and had been using—in fact, over-using—his legs all day.

Paul barely slept that night, even though he had left Paris very early and had been using—really, overusing—his legs all day.

The 19th of May, 1872, at 9.40, Monsieur and Madame N—— were getting out of the train at X—— Station, where Monsieur de Gandelau was awaiting them with a new chaise. Twenty minutes after they were entering the court of the château. We need not dwell upon the embraces, the transport mingled with tears, that occupied the first minutes of their return.

On May 19, 1872, at 9:40 AM, Mr. and Mrs. N—— were getting off the train at X—— Station, where Mr. de Gandelau was waiting for them with a new carriage. Twenty minutes later, they were entering the courtyard of the château. We won't spend time on the hugs and emotional moments filled with tears that marked the first moments of their return.

Madame de Gandelau had arranged their rooms with all possible care, as if they were going to make a long stay at the château.

Madame de Gandelau had prepared their rooms with great attention to detail, as if they were planning to stay at the château for a long time.

Of course the mother thought her daughter improved; Madame Marie considered Paul grown—almost a man, in fact, and Mademoiselle Lucie almost a young woman.

Of course the mother thought her daughter had improved; Madame Marie felt Paul had grown—he was almost a man, in fact, and Mademoiselle Lucie was nearly a young woman.

Thanks to Madame de Gandelau, Paul’s house was referred to during breakfast only as a matter of no importance. The adventures of travel and the war were talked of. After nearly two years’ absence subjects of conversation could not be wanting. But Paul was agitated and absent. His sister remarked it. Paul blushed up to his very eyes.

Thanks to Madame de Gandelau, Paul's house was mentioned during breakfast as if it didn't really matter. They talked about travel adventures and the war. After nearly two years away, there was no shortage of topics to discuss. But Paul was restless and distracted. His sister noticed it. Paul’s face turned bright red.

“I think Paul has some scheme in his head,” said M. N——.

“I think Paul has some plan in mind,” said M. N——.

[Pg 256]

[Pg 256]

Monsieur and Madame de Gandelau looked at each other, smiling.

Monsieur and Madame de Gandelau smiled at each other.

“What is in the wind, then,” said Madame Marie; “a conspiracy?”

“What’s going on, then?” said Madame Marie. “A conspiracy?”

“Perhaps,” replied Madame de Gandelau; “but let us allow him the pleasure of carrying it out.”

“Maybe,” replied Madame de Gandelau; “but let’s give him the joy of seeing it through.”

“Conspire, dearest mother! I will help you with all my heart,” said Madame de N——, with a smile that expressed archness as well as affection.

“Conspire, dear mother! I will help you with all my heart,” said Madame de N——, with a smile that showed both playfulness and affection.

They could say nothing for the moment of the projected excursion, for they were on the point of betraying themselves. Madame de Gandelau wished her daughter to take some rest after her journey. M. N—— asked leave to despatch some letters that required immediate attention, and silence reigned again in the château. The day was hot, and nothing was heard but the buzzing of insects on the lawns. Paul, however, could not keep quiet.

They couldn’t say anything at that moment about the planned trip because they were close to revealing their true feelings. Madame de Gandelau wanted her daughter to get some rest after her journey. Mr. N—— asked to be allowed to send off some urgent letters, and silence fell over the château. It was a hot day, and the only sound was the buzzing of insects on the lawns. However, Paul couldn’t stay quiet.

“You are not a diplomatist yet,” his cousin said to him. “Do, my dear fellow, remain still. There’s nobody but you stirring in the house. You will let out the secret if you go on in this way. Go to your room, take a book—a dull one; you will get to sleep, and the time will pass away.”

“You're not a diplomat yet,” his cousin told him. “Please, my dear friend, be quiet. You're the only one moving around in the house. You'll give away the secret if you keep this up. Go to your room, grab a book—a boring one; you'll fall asleep, and the time will fly by.”

“But what about all the people who have been invited and are waiting down at the house?”

“But what about all the people who have been invited and are waiting at the house?”

“Ah!—yes—true. Well, mount your pony, go to the house and tell all the guests to admire the wonders of the new domain and to have patience. Say that Madame Marie is a little fatigued, and that she will not be able to have the pleasure of meeting them till the afternoon. Then return.”

“Ah!—yes—true. Well, get on your pony, go to the house, and tell all the guests to admire the wonders of the new place and to be patient. Let them know that Madame Marie is a little tired and won’t be able to meet them until the afternoon. Then come back.”

Paul did not allow this to be repeated, so impossible did rest seem to him. He would have given at this moment ten years of his life to make his sister resolve to get into the carriage.

Paul wouldn't let this happen again; rest seemed impossible to him. At that moment, he would have given up ten years of his life just to make his sister decide to get into the carriage.

Fig. 62.

Fig. 62.

It is impossible to say what the pony thought of the pace [Pg 259]Paul made him go, at a temperature of 77° Fahr. in the shade. He arrived in a foam at the new house, so that most of the persons already assembled suspected that some accident had happened. When Paul, quite out of breath, told them that Madame Marie had put off her visit for an hour or two because she wanted rest, they exclaimed,

It’s hard to know what the pony thought about the speed at which Paul made him go, especially in 77° Fahrenheit shade. He arrived at the new house covered in foam, making most of the people already there suspect that something had gone wrong. When Paul, completely out of breath, told them that Madame Marie had postponed her visit for an hour or two because she wanted to rest, they exclaimed, [Pg 259]

“If it is only that, there’s no need of any great hurry; it is quite natural she should need rest after so long a journey.”

“If that’s all it is, there’s no need to rush; it’s totally normal for her to need some rest after such a long trip.”

Then everyone wanted to hear news of the travellers, and then they asked Paul to see this and that. Paul was in a fever.

Then everyone wanted to hear updates about the travelers, and they started asking Paul to check on this and that. Paul was beside himself.

“You are not going to ride back again in this state,” said the mayor; “you are in a bath of perspiration, and your pony is white with foam. Rest a little, and drink a glass of wine.”

“You're not riding back like this,” said the mayor. “You're drenched in sweat, and your pony is covered in foam. Take some time to rest and have a glass of wine.”

It would have been discourteous not to comply, for the mayor had brought a basket of petit vin de Saumur. They drank the health of the future occupants, and the prosperity of the house, so that Paul lost a good hour. At last he was able to retrace his road to the château, at the same rate as before. But on reaching the edge of the plateau he saw the chaise at a distance, going towards the house. He made a detour, so as to join the party from the rear, and reached them just as the new domain was coming in sight.

It would have been rude not to go along with it since the mayor had brought a basket of petit vin de Saumur. They toasted to the future residents and the prosperity of the house, which made Paul lose about an hour. Finally, he was able to head back to the château, moving at the same pace as before. But when he got to the edge of the plateau, he spotted the carriage in the distance heading toward the house. He took a detour to join the group from the back and caught up with them just as the new estate came into view.

“Look!” said his sister; “there’s a horseman in a great heat. Where does he come from? Is it he who is directing the whole plot?”

“Look!” said his sister. “There’s a horseman in the blazing heat. Where is he coming from? Is he the one running the whole show?”

“Certainly,” replied her mother. “Look!”

“Sure,” replied her mother. “Look!”

They were in fact just beginning to see the outlines of Paul’s house, with its slated roof glistening in the rays of the sun. There was silence, and, it must be confessed, a little emotion.

They were just starting to see the outline of Paul's house, with its slate roof shining in the sunshine. There was silence, and, it must be admitted, a bit of emotion.

“I had my suspicions about it,” said Madame Marie,[Pg 260] kissing her mother and father. “And so during your painful experiences of last year you were thinking of us so much as to have realized that project of a house which I thought was only a fancy? And Paul!”

“I had my doubts about it,” said Madame Marie,[Pg 260] kissing her mother and father. “So, during the tough times you went through last year, you thought about us enough to come up with that idea of a house that I assumed was just a dream? And Paul!”

“Paul,” replied M. de Gandelau, “has had his share in the work, and has contributed substantially to the success of the project. If he ever becomes an architect you will have been the first cause of it.”

“Paul,” answered M. de Gandelau, “has played his part in the work and has significantly contributed to the success of the project. If he ever becomes an architect, you will have been the main reason for it.”

“And you, dear friend,” said Madame de Gandelau to her son-in-law, who was kissing her hand tenderly, “you say nothing!”

“And you, my dear friend,” said Madame de Gandelau to her son-in-law, who was kissing her hand affectionately, “you’re not saying anything!”

“M. de Gandelau had written to me about it, and I was in the secret. Marie can tell you whether I have kept it or not.”

“M. de Gandelau had written to me about it, and I was in the loop. Marie can tell you if I kept it or not.”

“So we were betrayed, my poor Paul,” exclaimed his mother.

“So we were betrayed, my poor Paul,” his mother said.

“M. de Gandelau wished to know whether settling in this neighbourhood would not disconcert our plans for the future. I replied to him that, on the contrary, it would further them; and that the only cause which had hindered my building a house here after our marriage was the fear of distressing you, and making you suppose that we did not attach to your maternal hospitality the value it most justly claims. Marie wishes to reside here a great part of the year; she is known and beloved in this her native place; nothing could be more agreeable to her than to follow your example—near to you, almost under your eyes—without giving you the trouble which a permanent residence in your house would have occasioned. I had no need to consult her, for I knew that you were realizing a dream which she was secretly cherishing, without hoping for its speedy realization.”

“M. de Gandelau wanted to know if moving to this neighborhood would mess up our future plans. I told him that, on the contrary, it would actually help them; and that the only reason I hadn’t built a house here after we got married was my concern about upsetting you and making you think we didn’t appreciate your hospitality as much as it truly deserves. Marie wants to live here for a big part of the year; she’s known and loved in this place where she was born. Nothing would make her happier than to follow your example—being close to you, almost in your sight—without causing you the hassle of having us live in your home permanently. I didn’t need to ask her, because I knew you were making a dream come true that she had been secretly wishing for, without expecting it to happen anytime soon.”

“All is then for the best,” resumed Madame de Gandelau, looking at her husband, for she was thinking of what she had said to him one evening, two years before.

“All is then for the best,” continued Madame de Gandelau, glancing at her husband, as she recalled what she had told him one evening, two years earlier.

[Pg 261]

[Pg 261]

The family were received with vivats in front of the entrance steps. Previous to entering the building, they went round it; and when they came to the group of master-workmen and foremen, Paul introduced them to his sister, saying that it was owing to their zeal, and their desire to see her soon settled in the neighbourhood, that the completion of the work in less than two years, was owing. Paul’s compliment (which was neatly turned), but more particularly the courteous bearing of his sister, who asked each what he had done, inquired about their families, and expressed to them her wish to employ them often, gained her the heart of these good people, who for the most part had known her as a child.

The family was welcomed with cheers in front of the entrance steps. Before going inside the building, they walked around it; and when they reached the group of master workers and foremen, Paul introduced them to his sister, explaining that it was because of their enthusiasm and eagerness to see her settled in the neighborhood that the work was finished in less than two years. Paul’s compliment (which was well phrased), along with his sister's gracious demeanor, as she asked each person about their work, inquired about their families, and expressed her wish to hire them frequently, won the hearts of these good people, most of whom had known her as a child.

Madame Marie wanted to see everything. At each step exclamations of joy were uttered, and Paul was embraced twenty times by his “client.” Monsieur N—— had taken possession of Eugène, who, we need scarcely say, was warmly congratulated.

Madame Marie wanted to see it all. With every step, she exclaimed with joy, and Paul was hugged twenty times by his “client.” Monsieur N—— had taken charge of Eugène, who, we hardly need to mention, received heartfelt congratulations.

M. Durosay did not fail to express his admiration every moment, and was incessantly repeating, “It is a charming feudal manor-house!”

M. Durosay couldn't stop expressing his admiration every moment and kept saying, “It’s a lovely feudal manor house!”

“But, why, my dear sir,” said Madame Marie, at last quite weary of the phrase, “Why do you call it a ‘manor-house,’ and ‘feudal’? I have neither manor nor vassals, and I have no wish to possess any. Call it a house, built for me by those who love me, and which will always be open to our friends, and always accessible to those who may need our help.”

“But why, my dear sir,” said Madame Marie, clearly tired of the term, “do you call it a ‘manor house’ and ‘feudal’? I have no manor or vassals, and I don’t want any. Just call it a house, built for me by those who love me, that will always be open to our friends and accessible to anyone who may need our help.”

We may be sure that Paul’s resolution to become an architect was strengthened by what he felt on this occasion.

We can be sure that Paul’s decision to become an architect was reinforced by what he experienced on this occasion.

Let us hope that his career may be as successful as that of the house whose history is here recorded.

Let’s hope his career is as successful as the history of the house documented here.


[Pg 263]

[Pg 263]

EXPLANATION
OF SOME OF THE TECHNICAL TERMS USED IN THIS BOOK.

Barrel-vault (berceau de voûte), means a vault forming simply a portion of a cylinder.

Barrel vault (berceau de voûte) refers to a vault that is essentially part of a cylinder.

Basement (soubassement), part of a building which receives the ground floor; that is to say, what is comprised between the floor within and the ground without the building.

Lower level (soubassement), a part of a building that includes the ground floor; in other words, it is the space between the interior floor and the exterior ground of the building.

Bay-window (bretêche), a closed and covered balcony or loge, having front and lateral views, forming a projection without and a recess within. When supported on corbels it is termed an oriel.

Bay window (bretêche), a closed and covered balcony or loge, with views in the front and on the sides, projecting outward and creating a recess inside. When it's supported on brackets, it's called an oriel.

Bearer (lambourde), piece of wood fixed horizontally against a wall, and intended to receive the ends of the joists of a floor. The term is also given to the strips of oak fastened on the plaster bed of a floor, and on which are screwed the slabs of parquetry.

Bearer (lambourde), a piece of wood attached horizontally to a wall, meant to support the ends of the floor joists. The term also refers to the strips of oak secured on the plaster base of a floor, which are used to screw down the parquet slabs.

Bed (banc), the word bed, as a geological term, signifies a homogeneous layer comprised between two natural horizontal beds or fissures, supposing that the mass has not been deformed by an upheaving. Limestones and some sandstones are extracted in beds. Their thickness is very variable.

Bed (banc), the term bed in geology refers to a uniform layer situated between two natural horizontal layers or fractures, assuming the mass hasn't been altered by uplift. Limestones and certain sandstones are mined in beds. Their thickness can vary significantly.

Bed-stones (libage), stone suitable for foundations.

Bed-stones (libage), stones for foundations.

Bed of the stone (lit de la pierre), is the upper, or under surface of the layer. Bottom-bed is the term used to designate the under-surface of a stone. Calcareous stones should be laid on their bed just as they were in the quarry.

Stone bed (lit de la pierre), is the top or bottom surface of the layer. Bottom-bed refers to the underside of a stone. Calcareous stones should be placed on their bed just like they were in the quarry.

Blade, or Principal-rafter (arbalétrier), piece of timber inclined, according to the slope of a roof, which is joined at the[Pg 264] upper end into the king-post, at its lower end into the tie-beam, and which supports the purlins (see next page).

Blade, or Principal rafter (arbalétrier), a piece of wood slanted according to the roof's slope, connects at the[Pg 264] top to the king-post and at the bottom to the tie-beam, supporting the purlins (see next page).

Bond (harpe), projection formed by a dressed-stone for the purpose of a tie into brick or stone-walling.

Connection (harpe), a projection made from dressed stone that serves to connect brick or stone walls.

Broken-backed roof (bresis), a roof so called is one composed of two planes of inclination, one of which is little and the other considerably inclined. The dormer windows are generally opened in the lower and more inclined plane.

Sagging roof (bresis), refers to a roof made up of two sloping planes, where one is slightly sloped and the other is much steeper. Dormer windows are typically placed in the lower and steeper plane.

Chimney-stack (souche de cheminée), is the part of the smoke-shaft which surmounts the roofs, and is sometimes terminated with pots of earthenware or of sheet metal.

Chimney (souche de cheminée) is the part of the smoke-shaft that rises above the roofs and is sometimes topped with pots made of clay or metal sheets.

Clip (moise), comparatively thin piece of timber, serving to connect the parts of a framing by means of notches which hold them, and of bolts. Clips are usually placed in couples.

Clip (moise), a relatively thin piece of wood, used to connect parts of a frame with notches that hold them together and bolts. Clips are typically used in pairs.

Concrete (béton), a compound of lime, sand, and gravel rammed in horizontal layers, and thus forming a compact and homogeneous mass, which hardens more or less rapidly, according to the nature of the lime; and on which the heaviest superstructure may be raised without fear of cracks or settlements. In the making of concrete great care and attention is always necessary, and a thorough acquaintance with the nature of the lime made use of.

Concrete (béton) is a mixture of lime, sand, and gravel compacted in horizontal layers, creating a solid and uniform mass that hardens at different rates depending on the type of lime used. This allows for heavy structures to be built on it without worrying about cracks or settling. When making concrete, it’s important to be very careful and knowledgeable about the type of lime being used.

Corbel (corbeau), support of stone or wood projecting from the face of a wall, having its front moulded or carved, its sides vertical and carrying a beam, cornice, shaft, vault-springer, &c.

Corbel bracket (corbeau), a stone or wooden support that sticks out from a wall, with a front that is shaped or carved, vertical sides, and used to hold up a beam, cornice, shaft, vault springer, etc.

Elevation (élévation). By this word is designated in architecture the geometrical view of a façade; properly speaking the vertical projection.

Elevation (élévation). In architecture, this term refers to the geometrical view of a façade; specifically, it means the vertical projection.

Embankment (cavalier), heap of excavated earth, regularly placed and raised above the surface of the ground.

Embankment (cavalier), a pile of dug-up soil, carefully arranged and elevated above the ground level.

Filleting (solin), weathering formed above a roof-covering and following its slope against the walls which surmount it, to hinder the rain from penetrating between the covering and the wall.

Filleting (solin) is a weatherproofing technique created on top of a roof covering, following its slope against the walls above it, to prevent rain from seeping between the covering and the wall.

Foot-piece (blochet), piece of wood notched at right-angles on to the wall-plates of a roof to receive the foot of the rafters, and the foot-post, which hinders the rafter from sliding.

Footwear (blochet), a wooden piece cut at right angles to the wall plates of a roof to support the base of the rafters, and the foot-post, which prevents the rafter from sliding.

Frame (dormant), fixed frame of wood, which receives the leaves of a door or the opening casements of a window.

Frame (dormant), a stationary wooden frame that holds the door panels or the window sashes.

[Pg 265]

[Pg 265]

Gable (pignon), terminal part of a wall, which masks the timbering of a roof and follows its slopes.

Gable (pignon), the end section of a wall that covers the framing of a roof and aligns with its slopes.

Hip (arêtier), exterior angle formed by the meeting of two roof-surfaces on different planes.

Trendy (arêtier), the outer angle created where two roof surfaces intersect at different angles.

Jamb (jambage), vertical side of a window or doorway. The term is only applied to sides of masonry.

Jamb (jambage), vertical side of a window or door. The term is only used for the sides of masonry.

Joint (joint), vertical space left between two stones. It is called dry-joint, when the stones are laid close-fitting, without mortar or cement between them; and mortar-joint, when this interval is filled with mortar.

Joint (joint), vertical space left between two stones. It is called dry-joint when the stones are placed tightly together without any mortar or cement in between; and mortar-joint when this gap is filled with mortar.

Jointing (appareil), combination of worked stones.

Jointing (device), combination of shaped stones.

Joist (solive), piece of wood laid horizontally to form flooring and receive the plaster bed on which are laid the floor quarries or the slabs of parquetry. Wood joists cannot, without bending, have a bearing greater than 16 or 17 feet. Their strength and distance apart are determined by their bearing and the weight they should sustain.

Beam (solive), a piece of wood laid horizontally to create flooring and support the plaster base for the floor tiles or parquet slabs. Wooden joists cannot span more than 16 or 17 feet without bending. Their strength and spacing are determined by the load they need to support and their span.

Joist-spaces (entrevous), intervals left between the joists of a floor.

Joist-spaces (entrevous), gaps left between the joists of a floor.

Keeping account (attachement). By this is meant memoranda of the work done or materials used on a building by means of written notes or figures.

Keeping account (attachement). This refers to records of the work completed or materials used on a building through written notes or figures.

King-post (poinçon), vertical piece of wood, which in a principal receives the two blades, and suspends the middle of the tie-beam.

King post (poinçon), a vertical piece of wood that supports the two rafters in a main structure and holds up the center of the tie-beam.

Lintel (linteau), piece of timber or block of stone which, laid across horizontally on the jambs of a door or window-opening, completes the enclosure.

Lintel (linteau), a piece of wood or stone that is laid horizontally across the sides of a door or window opening, completes the frame.

Made-ground (remblai). This term signifies earth and débris that have been shifted by man to raise a piece of ground or fill up its hollows.

Man-made ground (remblai). This term refers to soil and débris that have been moved by people to elevate a piece of land or fill in its depressions.

Meeting-stile (battement), vertical stile of a door or of a casement on the fastening side.

Meeting style (battement), vertical edge of a door or window on the side where it fastens.

Mortise (mortaise), oblong hole made in a piece of framing to receive a tenon. The lengthways of a mortise should always follow the grain of the wood.

Mortise joint (mortaise) is a rectangular hole cut into a piece of wood to fit a tenon. The length of the mortise should always align with the grain of the wood.

Newel (noyau), pillar or column around which wind the steps of the stairs.

Newel post (noyau), the post or column that the staircase steps wrap around.

[Pg 266]

[Pg 266]

Notching (embrèvement), sinking made in a piece of wood to receive a mortise and tenon framing.

Notching (embrèvement), a cut made in a piece of wood to fit a mortise and tenon joint.

Pole (échasse), trunk of a tree, long and small, which, fixed up perpendicularly, is employed for scaffolding buildings as they rise.

Pole (échasse), a slender, elongated trunk of a tree, is used vertically as scaffolding for buildings as they are constructed.

Post (poteau) vertical piece of wood, which on its head receives one or more cross pieces. The term frame-post is applied to the uprights of a framed partition, and especially those which serve as door-frames.

Post (poteau) is a vertical piece of wood that has one or more horizontal pieces on top. The term frame-post refers to the vertical supports of a framed wall, particularly those that are used as door frames.

Principal (ferme), framing of carpentry intended to carry the covering of a roof.

Principal (ferme), a framework in carpentry designed to support the roof covering.

Profile (profil), section of the member of a moulding of an architectural detail.

Profile (profil), part of a member of a shape in an architectural detail.

Pugging (plâtras), filling-in of plaster work between the joists of a floor or the uprights of a lath-and-plaster partition.

Pugging (plâtras), the process of filling in plaster work between the floor joists or the vertical supports of a lath-and-plaster wall.

Purlin (panne), roofing-timber placed horizontally on the blade of a principal and which carries the rafters.

Purlin (panne), a horizontal roofing timber positioned on the main beam that supports the rafters.

Put-log (boulin), piece of wood which, resting in the wall at one end, and upon the scaffold runners at the other, serves to carry the platform upon which the men work in raising a building.

Put-log (boulin), a piece of wood that rests against the wall on one end and on the scaffold runners on the other, is used to support the platform where workers stand while constructing a building.

Rafter (chevron), piece of timber of small scantling, on which is nailed the boarding or laths which receives the slates or tiles. In good roofing rafters are placed 20 inches apart, centre and centre, at most. They rest at bottom upon wall-plates, or upon foot-pieces, in their length on the side-pieces or purlins, at their upper extremity against the ridge-piece.

Beam (chevron), a piece of timber of small size, on which the boards or laths are nailed to support the slates or tiles. In good roofing, rafters are placed no more than 20 inches apart from center to center. They rest at the bottom on wall plates or foot pieces, along their length on the side pieces or purlins, and at the top against the ridge piece.

Rebate (feuillure), longitudinal sinking made in frames, posts, and lintels, to receive doors and window-casements, &c.

Cashback (feuillure), a long groove made in frames, posts, and lintels to accommodate doors and window sashes, etc.

Ridge-pole (faîtage), horizontal piece of wood which, resting on the top of the king-posts of the principals, forms the apex of the roof and receives the rafters. The ridge-poles are supported in their bearing, from one king-post to another, by struts.

Ridge beam (faîtage), horizontal piece of wood that sits on top of the king-posts of the main supports, forming the peak of the roof and holding the rafters. The ridge-poles are supported in their position, from one king-post to another, by braces.

Riser (contre-marche), the upright face of a step.

Riser (contre-marche), the vertical part of a step.

Scale of proportion (échelle de proportion). The text sufficiently explains the use of the scale in architectural drawing, rendering it needless to enlarge on the usefulness of this practical method. By scale is also understood the relative proportions of an edifice. Certain architectural members give the scale of the[Pg 267] whole. Thus, a balustrade ought not to exceed elbow height, nor fall short of it; it then gives the scale of the building, that is to say, it indicates the actual size of the whole, by taking for point of comparison the human height.

Proportional scale (échelle de proportion). The text clearly explains how to use the scale in architectural drawing, making it unnecessary to elaborate on the practical benefits of this method. By scale, we also mean the relative proportions of a building. Certain architectural elements provide the scale for the[Pg 267] entire structure. For example, a balustrade should not be taller than elbow height, nor shorter; this then establishes the scale of the building, meaning it shows the actual size of the entire structure by using human height for reference.

Screw-bolts (boulon), round iron pin, with a square head at one end, and a screw thread at the other, on which turns an iron nut, serving to hold pieces of timber together.

Screws (boulon), a round iron pin with a square head on one end and a screw thread on the other, which an iron nut turns on, used to hold pieces of wood together.

Section (coupe), view of a building, or an architectural detail cut through.

Section (coupe), view of a building, or an architectural detail sliced through.

Sill (tableau), part of the casing of a door or window which comes outside the enclosure.

Sill (tableau), a part of the frame of a door or window that extends outside the structure.

Staircase (cage d’escalier), is the casing of masonry or timber-work in which are enclosed the steps of the stairs.

Stairs (cage d’escalier), is the structure made of brick or wood that surrounds the steps of the stairs.

Stile (montant), term in joinery applied to all upright pieces.

Style (montant), a term in woodworking that refers to all vertical pieces.

Strap (étrier), band of iron forming a stirrup, and passing beneath the tie-beam of a principal, suspends it to the king-posts by means of bolts.

Strap (étrier), a band of iron that creates a stirrup and goes beneath the tie-beam of a main beam, secures it to the king-posts with bolts.

Straight-tread (giron-droit), signifies a step of equal width all its length; winding-tread, a step narrow towards the outer string, and enlarging towards the wall of the staircase. It is said, the steps of the stairs have a narrow tread when the width is small, and have a wide tread when their width is large.

Straight tread (giron-droit) means a step that has the same width along its entire length; winding-tread refers to a step that is narrower at the outer edge and wider towards the wall of the staircase. The steps are considered to have a narrow tread when the width is small and a wide tread when the width is large.

String-board (crémaillère), piece of wood on which rests the ends of the steps of the stairs, and which is grooved to ramp with and receive the ends of the steps.

Strung board (crémaillère), a piece of wood that supports the ends of the stair steps and is notched to fit the ends of the steps.

Strut (lien), slanting piece of wood connecting the blade to the king-post of a principal, or a horizontal bearer to a post.

Show off (lien), an angled piece of wood linking the blade to the king-post of a principal, or a horizontal beam to a post.

Tenon (tenon), tongue left at the end of a piece of framing, and which fits into the end of the mortise.

Tenon (tenon), a projection left at the end of a piece of framing, designed to fit into the end of the mortise.

Tie-beam (entrait), horizontal piece of timber, which receives at its extremities the foot of the blades of a principal or truss, and which is suspended in the middle by the king-post.

Tie beam (entrait), a horizontal piece of wood that supports the ends of the main or truss blades, and is held up in the middle by the king-post.

Tread (giron), is the width of a stair-step.

Step (giron), is the width of a step on a staircase.

Tread (pas), is the level surface of a step on which the foot is placed.

Step (pas), is the flat part of a step where the foot rests.

Trimmer (chevêtre), piece of wood which, framed into two trimmer-joists, receives the ends of the joists, the space of the[Pg 268] hearth-stone from the fireplace, or across the openings of doors or windows.

Trimmer (chevêtre), a piece of wood that, framed between two trimmer joists, supports the ends of the joists, the area of the[Pg 268] hearth stone from the fireplace, or spans the openings of doors or windows.

Trimmer-joist (solive d’enchevêtrure), stronger joist to receive the trimmers in front of a hearth-stone or across a chimney-breast.

Trimmer joist (solive d’enchevêtrure), a reinforced joist designed to support the trimmers in front of a fireplace or across a chimney.

Valley (noue), interior angle, formed by the meeting of two planes of roof.

Valley (noue), the inside angle created by the intersection of two roof planes.

Wall (mur). A gutter-wall is that which carries a gutter and receives the eaves of a roof; a gable-wall that which closes in the timber-work of a roof; a partition-wall that which within a building divides the rooms—takes the bearing of the floors and the chimney-flues.

Wall (mur). A gutter-wall is one that supports a gutter and holds the eaves of a roof; a gable-wall is one that encloses the framework of a roof; a partition-wall is the one that divides rooms within a building—supports the floors and the chimney flues.

Wall-face (parement), outer or inner surfaces of a wall.

Wall surface (parement), the outer or inner surfaces of a wall.

Wall-plate (sablière), horizontal piece of wood laid on the top of a wall lengthwise, and on which rest the tie-beams of the principals and the feet of the rafters.

Wall plate (sablière), a horizontal piece of wood placed along the top of a wall, which supports the tie-beams of the trusses and the ends of the rafters.

Water-bar (jet d’eau), projecting moulding affixed to the bottom rail of window-casements and to the wood-sills, and contrived to throw off the rain from the rebate, and from the junction of the wood-sill with the stone-sill.

Water fountain (jet d’eau), a projecting mold attached to the bottom rail of window frames and to the wooden sills, designed to direct rain away from the recess and from where the wooden sill meets the stone sill.



THE END.

THE END.



LONDON: R. CLAY, SONS, AND TAYLOR, PRINTERS, BREAD STREET HILL.

LONDON: R. CLAY, SONS, AND TAYLOR, PRINTERS, BREAD STREET HILL.


Transcriber’s Notes

  • pg 10 Changed: When his cousin was come
    When his cousin arrived
  • pg 10 Changed: architectural tyro to unrol again the paper
    to: architectural novice to unfold the paper again
  • pg 39 Changed: facts seem to rove that he
    to: the evidence appears to show that he
  • pg 49 Changed: successful result in this pacrticular case
    to: positive outcome in this specific instance
  • pg 50 Changed: it is easy to distingush the good
    It's easy to tell what's good.
  • pg 78 Changed: by means of a plumb-lime
    to: using a plumb line
  • pg 183 Changed: Well, if you well let me have it for an hour
    Sure, if you let me borrow it for an hour.

Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!